manualshive.com logo in svg

Siemens SIMATIC ET 200AL, System Manual

Introducing the Siemens SIMATIC ET 200AL, a versatile automation system designed to streamline your processes. Enhance your understanding and maximize its potential with the comprehensive System Manual, available for free download from manualshive.com. Experience seamless automation with this user-friendly manual guiding you through every step.

Share
Download
background image

Routing 

 

11.4 Data record routing 

 

Communication 

386

 

Function Manual, 05/2021, A5E03735815-AJ 

Example: Data record routing with the Port Configuration Tool (PCT) 

You can use the Port Configuration Tool (PCT) to configure the IO link master of the ET200 

and assign parameters to connected IO link devices. The subnets are connected via data 

record routers. Data record routers are, for example, CPUs, CPs, IMs, IO link master. 
You can learn about the constellations of data record routers supported by the PCT in this 

FAQ (

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/87611392

). 

The figure below shows an example configuration with the data record routing with PCT. 

 

Figure 11-13  Example configuration for data record routing with PCT 

Additional information 

•

 

The differences that exist between "normal" routing and data record routing are described 

in this FAQ (

https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/7000978

). 

•

 

Whether or not the CPU, CP or CM you are using supports data record routing can be 

found in the relevant manuals. 

•

 

The allocation of connection resources with data record routing is described in the section 

Allocation of connection resources (Page 395). 

•

 

You can find additional information on configuration with STEP 7 in the STEP 7 online 

help. 

Summary of Contents for SIMATIC ET 200AL

Page 1: ...distributed I O system ET 200AL Edition SIMATIC 10 2021 This document contains a compilation of all manuals for the ET 200AL system family Use the bookmarks on the left edge of the screen to navigate support industry siemens com ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ... ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 System overview 2 Application planning 3 Mounting 4 Connecting 5 Configuring 6 Configuration control option handling 7 Commissioning 8 Maintenance 9 Technical specifications 10 Safety related shutdown of ET200AL standard modules A Dimension drawings B Accessories spare parts C ...

Page 4: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 5: ...on Update of the section Safety related shutdown of ET200AL standard modules Page 110 Additions to the fail safe I O module Basic knowledge required A basic knowledge of automation technology is required to understand the documentation Validity of the documentation This documentation is valid for the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system Conventions Please observe notes labeled as follows Note A...

Page 6: ... support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 13915 SIMATIC S7 1500 SIMATIC S7 1500F https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 13716 SIMATIC S7 1200 SIMATIC S7 1200F https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 13683 Distributed I O https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 14029 STEP 7 TIA Portal https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 14667 Note When using F CPUs in safety mode an...

Page 7: ...nt to make them more secure Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used Use of product versions that are no longer supported and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers exposure to cyber threats To stay informed about product updates subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed ...

Page 8: ...Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation TIA and Totally Integrated Power TIP You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet See also Industry Mall https mall industry siemens com ...

Page 9: ... regulations for operation 31 5 2 Additional rules and regulations for the operation of the ET 200AL with fail safe modules 35 5 2 1 Safety extra low voltage SELV PELV for fail safe modules 35 5 2 2 Requirements for sensors and actuators for fail safe modules 36 5 2 3 Crosstalk of digital input output signals 38 5 3 Operation of the ET 200AL on grounded non grounded infeed 39 5 4 Electrical config...

Page 10: ...rgy 84 8 2 PROFIBUS DP 85 8 2 1 Commissioning ET 200AL on PROFIBUS DP 85 8 2 2 Startup on PROFIBUS DP 86 8 3 Identification and maintenance data 88 8 3 1 Reading out and entering I M data 88 8 3 2 Data record structure for I M data 90 9 Maintenance 92 9 1 Replacing modules 92 9 2 Firmware update 94 9 3 Resetting interface module to factory settings PROFINET 95 9 4 Reactions to errors of the F modu...

Page 11: ... contents Distributed I O system System Manual 08 2021 A5E31861578 AJ 9 C Accessories spare parts 114 C 1 Accessories spare parts 114 C 2 Cables 119 C 3 Pin assignment and core color 126 Glossary 128 Index 138 ...

Page 12: ...als contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentation free of charge fr...

Page 13: ...dy filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system You configure your ...

Page 14: ...of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU error information ...

Page 15: ...his helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of e...

Page 16: ...SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system SIMATIC ET 200AL The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system is a scalable and highly flexible distributed I O system for connecting process signals to a higher level control system with a field bus Customer benefits of the system Figure 2 1 ET 200AL benefits ...

Page 17: ...ures degree of protection IP65 IP67 The I O modules are suitable for distributed use indoors on a machine or assembly line Setup The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system is made up of the following components Interface modules PROFINET PROFIBUS Digital and analog I O modules Communication module After an interface module you can configure 2 lines ET Connection each with 16 modules Alternatively...

Page 18: ...nfiguration example of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system with a PROFINET interface module Interface module PROFINET Fail safe digital input digital output module Digital input Digital output module Digital output module Analog input module Communication module PROFINET cable Power supply cable ET Connection cable Sealing caps Figure 2 2 Configuration example of the ET 200AL ...

Page 19: ...ive technology from Siemens Proven technologies and systems from automation technology are used for safety systems Safety Integrated includes the complete safety sequence ranging from sensor actuator and fail safe modules right through to the controller including safety related communication via standard fieldbuses Drives and controllers handle safety tasks in addition to their actual functions Fa...

Page 20: ...cial arrangement and wiring of the sensors and actuators Table 2 1 Safety classes that can be achieved with ET 200AL in safety mode Safety class in safety mode According to IEC 61508 According to ISO 13849 1 SIL2 Category 3 PL Performance Level d SIL3 Category 3 PL Performance Level e SIL3 Category 4 PL Performance Level e WARNING The safety performance of your installation depends on the design a...

Page 21: ...the DP master Exchanges data with the I O modules via ET Connection I O modules The I O modules form the interface to the process Recording and controlling the current process status via the connected sensors and actuators eCoding plug connector Electronic coding element with an overwrita ble electronic memory for module specific fail safe address data for example the F destination address Y cable...

Page 22: ... Function View Bus cable and M8 connector for ET Connection The bus cable creates the bus connection between the modules Power cable and M8 connector for power supply The power cable provides power to the mod ules Stripping tool ET Connection The stripping tool is used to strip the ET Connection bus cable ...

Page 23: ...dules per ET Connection outlet 16 Spatial extension per ET Connection line 160 m 240 m Cable length between the modules 10 m 15 m Table 3 2 Maximum mechanical configuration on ET 200SP with interface module Properties Rule max Interface modules as of firmware ver sion V3 0 0 Interface modules as of firmware ver sion V3 3 0 Number of ET 200AL I O modules in the configuration 16 Number of ET Connect...

Page 24: ...voltage non switched and 2L load voltage switched When the maximum infeed current has been reached you must open a new potential group Reference You will find more information in the section Connecting cables for ET 200AL Page 50 3 2 Configuration variants with ET Connection 3 2 1 ET 200AL with ET Connection Every ET 200AL interface module has 2 ET Connection connections From every ET Connection y...

Page 25: ...nection Distributed I O system System Manual 08 2021 A5E31861578 AJ 23 ET Connection1 and ET Connection2 The figure below shows a configuration in the IP65 IP67 environment with two ET Connection lines Figure 3 2 ET 200AL with ET Connection1 and ET Connection2 ...

Page 26: ...Fail safe and non fail safe modules may be combined at will in the ET 200AL distributed I O system The figure below shows a combination of the modules of the ET 200AL and ET 200SP distributed I O systems Figure 3 3 Hybrid configuration ET 200SP and ET 200AL with ET Connection Requirement For a hybrid configuration you need at least the following components Interface module or CPU Note Use of a F C...

Page 27: ...by fail safe I O module F DI 4 F DQ 2x24VDC 2A 4xM12 2 With IM 155 6 PN 3 HF and IM 155 6 PN 2 HF as of V4 2 Details on the hybrid configuration are available here https support industry siemens com cs de en view 100300517 Procedure Watch video sequence https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 95886672 Proceed as follows to put together a multi tier configuration 1 Mount the BaseUnit BU Se...

Page 28: ... plant Installation position You can mount the ET 200AL distributed I O system in any position Minimum clearances At ambient temperatures of 50 C or higher please ensure that the module is mounted at a distance of least 1 cm from an adjacent module or another device Mounting rules When mounting the modules you do not need to following any special rules Note Mounting of the modules Mount the ET 200...

Page 29: ...e following images shows the aluminum profile on which you can mount the modules Figure 4 1 Aluminum profile Required tools For installation you need a screwdriver or an Allen wrench Required screws The following table shows and explains the screw types required to mount the modules Table 4 1 Recommended screws Screw type Explanation Socket head cap screw M4 according to DIN EN ISO 1207 DIN EN ISO...

Page 30: ...rt industry siemens com cs ww en view 95886672 The interface modules and the 45 mm I O modules have an attachment point on top and on the bottom To mount an interface module or 45 mm I O module follow these steps 1 Drill 2 fastening holes with 4 5 mm diameter at a distance of 149 6 mm 2 Fasten the interface module or the 45 mm I O module with the screws to both fastening points tightening torque 1...

Page 31: ... at the side you must use the supplied spacers To mount a 30 mm I O module follow these steps 1 Drill 2 fastening holes with 4 5 mm diameter at a distance of 149 6 mm 2 Use the supplied spacers for side fastening of the I O module on the top and bottom on one side adjacent to the fastening surface 3 Fasten the I O module with the screws to both fastening points tightening torque 1 2 Nm The figure ...

Page 32: ...l module of the ET 200AL distributed I O system have an integrated attachment point for cable ties The attachment points are found on all four corners of the modules The figure below shows the top left attachment point for 2 5 mm wide cable ties for fastening the cables Figure 4 4 Top left attachment point for cable ties ...

Page 33: ...ive EMERGENCY STOP device EMERGENCY STOP devices according to IEC 60204 corresponds to DIN VDE 113 must remain in effect in all operating modes of the plant or system Excluding hazardous system conditions Hazardous plant states must not occur Ensure that dangerous system conditions are excluded even in the following situations In the event of a voltage dip or power outage When the plant restarts a...

Page 34: ...h respect to the line voltage you will find additional information in the section Information on insulation protection class degree of protection and rated voltage Page 108 For stationary plants or systems without an all pole line disconnector there must be a disconnector unit all pole fitted in the building installation For load current supplies the configured rated voltage range must correspond ...

Page 35: ...r characteristic type B or C Continuous operation of fail safe modules with more than 28 8 V DC can result in personal injury and equipment damage WARNING Continuous operation of fail safe modules with more than 28 8 V DC can result in personal injury and equipment damage Certain transients from certain source impedances for example according to EN 61000 4 2 61000 4 4 and 61000 4 5 as specified in...

Page 36: ...I O system is integrated you must ensure that the equipment or system is functionally grounded to discharge electromagnetic interference For supply signal and bus cables you must ensure that the cable routing and installation is correct For signal and bus cables you must ensure that a wire cable breakage or a cross wire does not lead to undefined states of the plant or system Reference Additional ...

Page 37: ... of an overvoltage protector All system components that can supply electrical energy in any form whatsoever must fulfill this condition Each additional circuit 24 V DC used in the system must have a safety extra low voltage SELV PELV Refer to the relevant data sheets or contact the manufacturer Sensors and actuators with an external power supply can also be connected to F modules Make sure that po...

Page 38: ...ules in the technical specifications of the F modules is available under Fail safe performance characteristics To achieve the required safety class suitably qualified sensors and actuators are necessary Additional sensor requirements General rule To achieve SIL3 Cat 3 PLe a single channel sensor is adequate However to achieve SIL3 Cat 3 PLe with a single channel sensor the sensor itself must be SI...

Page 39: ...d in the section Response times of the relevant F module The maximum permitted switching frequency of the sensor signals results from the minimum duration Additional requirements for actuators The fail safe output modules test the outputs at regular intervals The F module briefly switches off the activated outputs and if necessary switches on the deactivated outputs You can assign the maximum dura...

Page 40: ...capacitance of the line may result in crosstalk to other non activated output or input channels This may then lead to a response of the readback circuit in these channels A cross circuit short circuit is detected which leads to safety related tripping Remedy Separate cables for fail safe DQ modules and non fail safe DQ modules Separate cables for F DQ channel and F DI channels Coupling relay or di...

Page 41: ...200AL distributed I O devices with a SELV PELV supply voltage for 1L The supplied SELV PELV load voltage for 2L can be switched depending on the application 1L Supply voltage non switched 2L Load voltage switched Safe electrical separation SELV PELV Mains devices power supply modules with secure electrical separation SELV PELV are required for the operation of the ET 200AL distributed I O system T...

Page 42: ...ternal RC network to functional earth no external connection between 1M and FE ET 200AL in the overall configuration The figure below shows the ET 200AL distributed I O system in the complete electrical configuration using the example of an interface module Main switch Short circuit and overvoltage protection Fuses for cable protection automatic circuit breaker for 4 A When configuring the ET 200A...

Page 43: ...ares the IEC regulations Table 5 1 Components of electrical configuration Reference to illustration IEC 60364 DIN VDE 0100 IEC 60204 DIN VDE 0113 Disconnection ele ment for controller sensors and actuators Main switch Disconnector Short circuit over load protection Single pole protection of circuits Secure all incoming supply cables with a circuit breaker 24 V DC 4 A Secure with one pole with a gr...

Page 44: ...istributed I O system there is electrical isolation between Load voltage 2L and all other switching parts Communication interfaces PROFINET PROFIBUS of the interface modules and all other switching parts ET Connection and all other switching parts The following images show the potential conditions of the modules of the ET 200AL distributed I O system Figure 5 2 Potential conditions of the ET 200AL...

Page 45: ...Connecting 5 4 Electrical configuration of the ET 200AL Distributed I O system System Manual 08 2021 A5E31861578 AJ 43 Figure 5 3 Potential conditions of the ET 200AL distributed I O system Part 2 ...

Page 46: ...Connecting 5 4 Electrical configuration of the ET 200AL Distributed I O system 44 System Manual 08 2021 A5E31861578 AJ Figure 5 4 Potential conditions of the ET 200AL distributed I O system Part 3 ...

Page 47: ...ting currents can destroy the digital module WARNING Note potential groups for safety related shutdown When a digital output is connected to a digital input pay attention to the potential groups Depending on the configuration 1M and 2M can then be connected which leads to elimination of the electrical isolation between 1L and 2L The safety related shutdown is not permitted if the electrical isolat...

Page 48: ...groups or because the voltage is not sufficient for all modules due to the voltage drop Create a power balance for the selection of the infeed point of the voltage Note Turning 1L and 2L on and off In contrast to the load voltage 2L the operational switching on and off of the supply voltage 1L results in a restart of the module The figure below shows a configuration with a new voltage infeed for t...

Page 49: ...electrical connection directly to a point of your system or shielding This discharges the EMC interference directly into the earth By discharging the EMC interference the interference safety of the entire module is increased The figure below shows the symbol with which the functional earth connection is identified on the ET 200AL modules Figure 5 6 Functional earth 5 5 1 Mounting ET 200AL modules ...

Page 50: ... ground potential Ensure that there is a low impedance connection between the module and conductive underground as well as between the conductive underground and functional earth Reference You will find more information on installing the modules in the section Mounting modules Page 27 5 5 2 Mounting ET 200AL modules on non conductive substrate Requirement Conductive substrate for mounting of the m...

Page 51: ...e grounding cable 4 Screw the module and the cable lug with the M4 fastening screws using a torque of 1 2 Nm The figure below shows how to connect functional earth using the example of the IM 157 1 PN interface module Figure 5 7 Connecting the functional earth Note Earthing with non conductive mounting substrate Make sure there is a low impedance connection between the module and the functional ea...

Page 52: ...t comply with the required cable cross sections an increased incoming current could lead to overheating of the cable insulation and the contacts This could result in damage to the modules The figure below shows the voltage drop depending on the cable length for 4 current strengths using the example of a copper cable with 0 5 mm2 Figure 5 8 Voltage drop with a cable cross section of 0 5 mm2 To esti...

Page 53: ...The sockets for ET Connection and the power supply of the modules are color coded These colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables Requirement Wire the modules with the supply voltage off Required tools If you are not using pre assembled cables you need the following tools Stripping tool Screwdriver to wire the connection plugs Stripping Tool for ET Connection Required accessories when ...

Page 54: ...ion use only the offered cables Connecting M8 plugs To connect M8 plugs proceed as follows 1 Insert the connector in the appropriate round socket on the module Make sure that there is proper locking between the connector and socket 2 Tighten the connector using the knurled screw with a torque of 0 4 Nm The figure below shows the connection of the M8 plugs using the example of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC ...

Page 55: ...ector using the knurled screw with a torque of 1 Nm The figure below shows the connection of the M12 plugs using the example of the analog input module AI 4xU I RTD 4xM12 Figure 5 10 Connecting M12 plugs Pin assignment of the sockets The pin assignment of the sockets can be found in the manuals for the interface modules https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 14246 man and I O modules https...

Page 56: ...s to two circular connectors Y cable 6ES7194 6KA00 0XA0 for connecting 2 actuators or sensors for double connection of inputs also fail safe inputs or double connection of outputs with one cable Y cable 6ES7194 6KB00 0XA0 for connecting 2 sensors for double connection F DI with one cable Only suitable for use with the F DI module You can find details about connection in the respective user manual ...

Page 57: ...th only one cable You can find details about connection in the respective user manual of the product Figure 5 12 Inverted Y cable The following figure shows the wiring of the Y cables Figure 5 13 Y cable 6ES7194 6KC00 0XA0 Sealing of unused sockets To ensure IP65 or IP67 degree of protection seal off all unused sockets with sealing caps Article numbers for accessories spare parts You will find the...

Page 58: ...es X1 DP1 and X1 DP2 I O input and output interfaces X10 through X17 ET Connection interfaces interface modules X30 ET CON1 and X31 ET CON2 ET Connection interfaces I O modules X30 ET CON IN and X31 ET CON OUT Power supply interfaces X80 IN and X81 OUT Note Color coding The sockets for ET Connection and the power supply of the modules are color coded These colors correspond to the colors of the of...

Page 59: ...e identification labels come with each module as strips and can be machine printed A strip has 10 identification labels measuring 10 x 5 mm in the color RAL9016 The identification labels can be inserted into every module at the points provided The identification labels are used for channel module and slot labeling The figure below shows all points where you can use the identification labels using ...

Page 60: ...an identification label proceed as follows 1 Print the identification label using commercially available marking systems 2 Press the identification label out of its holder 3 Stick the identification labels into the cutouts provided as shown in the figure Optional marking Page 57 Mounting the identification labels is the same for all modules Removal procedure To remove an identification label proce...

Page 61: ...modules PROFIsafe compliant F PLC controller 2 6 X RIOforFA safety profile or PROFIsafe 2 4 STEP 7 online help STEP 7 TIA Portal as of V14 for mod ules DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 AQ 4XU I 4XM12 PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP as of Support Package HSP 0194 STEP 7 TIA Portal V13 SP1 or higher for modules DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 PROFINET IO PROFIBUS DP as of Support Package HSP 0155 STEP 7 TIA Porta...

Page 62: ...s of Support Package HSP 0260 STEP 7 TIA Portal as of V13 Update 3 PROFINET IO GSD file GSDML Vx y Siemens ET200AL Date in format yyyymmdd xml https support industry siemens co m cs ww en view 92346477 for example GSDML V2 31 Siemens ET200AL 20140507 xml PROFIBUS DP GSD file siem81A9 gsg https support industry siemens co m cs ww en view 92346281 Software of third party manufacturer Manufacturer do...

Page 63: ...nnection2 on slot 18 The fixed slot assignment of ET Connection1 and ET Connection2 offers you the following advantages You can expand ET Connection1 and ET Connection2 without a high workload Transparency in configuration control Simplification of diagnostics alarms and troubleshooting The figure below shows the maximum configuration with modules of the ET 200AL distributed I O system Figure 6 1 ...

Page 64: ...Connection1 with dummy modules The fixed slot assignment of ET Connection1 and ET Connetion2 offers you the following advantages You can expand ET Connection1 and ET Connection2 without a high workload for ET Connection1 you need to remove the placeholder the I O module is placeable no placeholders are needed for ET Connection2 You cannot configure more modules on ET Connection1 or ET Connection2 ...

Page 65: ... you can use the configuration control together with F modules the PROFIsafe addresses must be assigned to the F modules in the designated slots For this each F module must be plugged into the slot configured for it The actual configuration may differ from the set configuration You can find additional information about the assignment of the PROFIsafe addresses in the manual SIMATIC Safety Configur...

Page 66: ...ject for various station options for the different configuration levels of the standard machine and for selection of a station option A station option uses for example only some of the modules of the station master and these modules are not inserted in the configured order Manufacturers of standard machines select a station option for a configuration level of the standard machine They do not have ...

Page 67: ... configuration levels of a standard machine with the corresponding station options of the ET 200AL distributed I O system Benefits Easy project handling and commissioning through use of a single STEP 7 project for all station options Easy handling during maintenance versioning and upgrades Hardware savings Only the I O modules needed for the current station option of the machine are installed Pote...

Page 68: ...ating the control data record Page 69 3 Transfer control data record Section Transferring the control data record in the user program of the CPU Page 78 Library for configuration control A library for configuration control is available for download https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 29430270 on the internet The library contains data types with the structure of the control data record...

Page 69: ...tart up Note Disabled parameter Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration If an I O module is missing or an incorrect or additional I O module is plugged in and the Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration parameter is disabled the ET 200AL distributed I O system does not start up The diagnostic Slot x no module or Slot x wrong module is generat...

Page 70: ...e Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program parameter when configuring the interface module The parameter Enable reconfiguration of device via user program is located in the properties of the interface module under Module parameters Configuration control Figure 7 2 Enabling configuration control using the IM 157 1 PN as an example ...

Page 71: ...e a control data record for the configuration control in STEP 7 TIA Portal To create a control data record for the configuration control follow these steps 1 Create a PLC data type that contains the structure of the control data record for an ET 200AL interface module You can find the structure of the control data record in section Control data record for the ET 200AL distributed I O system Page 7...

Page 72: ...reated PLC data type in the data block The following figure shows a data block containing the control data records for an ET200AL interface module In this example the data block contains three control data records Figure 7 4 Data block for configuration control 4 In the Start value column of the control data records enter which module is located at which slot Figure 7 5 Assigning slots ...

Page 73: ...he topology module ET Connection 1 is always located on Slot 1 The topology module ET Connection 2 is always located on Slot 18 7 3 2 Control data record for the ET 200AL distributed I O system Slot assignment Note Topology modules ET Connetion1 and ET Connection2 Both topology modules ET Connection1 and ET Connection2 should be treated like real modules during configuration control Restriction ET...

Page 74: ...n the station op tion enter 0 5 Reserved 6 Slot 2 of the station master Slot assignment in the station option 7 Reserved 38 Slot topology module ET Connection2 18 The topology module ET Connection2 is always located on Slot 18 39 Reserved 40 Slot 19 of the station master Slot assignment in the station option 41 Reserved 4 max slot 1 x 2 Maximum slot of the station master Slot assignment in the sta...

Page 75: ...s ww en view 89254863 Equipment Manual 7 3 3 Feedback data record at the ET200AL distributed I O system Operating principle The feedback data record informs you about the accuracy of the module assignment and gives you the option of detecting assignment errors in the control data record The feedback data record is mapped via a separate data record 197 V2 0 Feedback data record The feedback data re...

Page 76: ...a record 197 station master station option Error messages In the case of an error when reading the feedback data record the RDREC instruction returns the following error messages via the STATUS block parameter Table 7 4 Error messages Error code Meaning 80B1H Invalid length the length information in data record 197 is not correct 80B5H Configuration control not configured 80B8H Parameter error The...

Page 77: ... the modules that are needed for a function With configuration control option handling you have the option to switch these functions on and off or expand their configuration The following examples show how you can form the control data record for a station option The station master consists of an interface module IM 157 1 PN and 15 I O modules in this case Station option with associated control da...

Page 78: ...n handling 7 3 Creating the control data record Distributed I O system 76 System Manual 08 2021 A5E31861578 AJ Figure 7 6 Example Hardware configuration of Station option 2 and 4 with the associated control data record in STEP 7 ...

Page 79: ...sion by a station option The following figure shows the configuration with the Station options 2 and 4 that has subsequently been extended by the Station option 3 The modules of option 3 are added to the modules already existing Figure 7 7 Example Hardware configuration of station option 2 to 4 with the associated control data record in STEP 7 ...

Page 80: ...tion on the WRREC instruction in the STEP 7 online help ID HW identifier of the interface module If you have selected the interface module in the network view or device view the HW identifier is available in the System constants tab of the Inspector window Use the value of the system constant Name_of_interface_module Head INDEX Data record number 196 decimal RECORD Control data record to be transf...

Page 81: ...d the new data record 196 is saved retentively The station will then restart with the modified configuration Error messages In case of error the WRREC instruction returns the following error messages via the STATUS block parameter Table 7 5 Error messages Error code Meaning 80B1H Invalid length the length information in data record 196 is not correct 80B2H Invalid slot The configured slot is not a...

Page 82: ...tes an error via an LED display Response to modules that are not present If modules are entered as not present in the control data record the automation system behaves as follows Modules designated as not present in the control data record do not supply diagnostics and their status is always OK The value status is OK Direct writing access to the outputs that are not present or writing access to th...

Page 83: ... to prevent people or plants from being placed in danger during operation Procedure The following table shows the chapters documents in which the required actions are described Table 8 1 Requirements for the ET 200AL distributed I O system on the PROFINET IO Step Procedure See 1 Mounting the ET 200AL interface module Section Mounting Page 26 2 Wiring the ET 200AL interface module Section Connectin...

Page 84: ...1 A5E31861578 AJ 8 1 2 Startup on PROFINET IO Principle of operation The figure below schematically shows the startup of the ET 200AL distributed I O system on the PROFINET IO IO device as a flow chart Figure 8 1 Startup of the ET 200AL distributed I O system on the PROFINET IO ...

Page 85: ...O Distributed I O system System Manual 08 2021 A5E31861578 AJ 83 The figure below schematically shows the startup of an ET 200AL I O module after an ET 200AL PROFINET interface module Figure 8 2 Startup of the ET 200AL I O module ...

Page 86: ...n ps 14247 man manuals PROFINET System Description https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 19292127 system manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 49948856 function manual Section Saving energy with PROFIenergy Application guide for implementation of shutdown concepts with PROFIenergy https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 96837137 Saving...

Page 87: ...ering persons or equipment during operation Procedure The following table shows the chapters documents in which the required actions are described Table 8 2 Requirements for the ET 200AL distributed I O system on a PROFIBUS DP Step Procedure See 1 Mounting the ET 200AL interface module Section Mounting Page 26 2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address on the ET 200AL PROFIBUS interface module IM 157 1 DP ...

Page 88: ...021 A5E31861578 AJ 8 2 2 Startup on PROFIBUS DP Principle of operation The figure below schematically shows the startup of the ET 200AL distributed I O system on the PROFIBUS DP DP slave as a flow chart Figure 8 3 Startup of the ET 200AL distributed I O system on PROFIBUS DP ...

Page 89: ...ributed I O system System Manual 08 2021 A5E31861578 AJ 87 The figure below schematically shows the startup of an ET 200AL I O module after an ET 200AL PROFIBUS interface module as flow chart Figure 8 4 Startup of an ET 200AL I O module ...

Page 90: ...M0 to I M3 The I M identification data supports you in the following activities Checking the plant configuration Locating hardware changes in a system Correcting errors in a system With the I M identification data you have the option of clearly identifying modules online In STEP 7 the identification data is displayed in the Module status IM 157 and Properties tabs see STEP 7 online help Options fo...

Page 91: ...ion I M3 Signature I M4 only for PROFINET To enter the data follow these steps 1 In the device view of the STEP 7 hardware network editor select the interface module for example 2 In the properties under General select the Identification Maintenance area and enter the data During the loading of the hardware configuration the I M data are also loaded Reference You can find additional information on...

Page 92: ...under the associated data record index The following table shows the principle behind the structure of data records Table 8 3 Basic structure of data records with I M identification data Contents Length bytes Coding hex Header information BlockType 2 I M0 0020H I M1 0021H I M2 0022H I M3 0023H I M4 0024 H BlockLength 2 I M0 0038H I M1 0038H I M2 0012H I M3 0038H I M4 0038 H BlockVersionHigh 1 01 B...

Page 93: ...des information about configured changes on the module not used IM_PROFILE_ID read 2 bytes 0000H Generic device IM_PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE read 2 bytes 0005H Interface modules IM_VERSION read 0101H provides information about the version of the identification data 0101H Version 1 1 IM_Version_Major 1 byte IM_Version_Minor 1 byte IM_SUPPORTED read 2 bytes 001EH provides information about the existing ...

Page 94: ... Always comply with the required standards and safety guidelines when configuring a system WARNING Mixing up ET Connection1 and ET Connection2 When connecting the modules always ensure that they are properly connected If you mix up the lines for ET Connection1 and ET Connection2 when connecting the modules this can lead to undefined states in your system Behavior of ET Connection During ongoing op...

Page 95: ...ll cables 7 Turn the supply voltage on WARNING Pay attention to the slot number of the module If you mix up the ET 200AL I O modules when connecting them this can cause personal injury and damage to the machine The ET 200AL distributed I O system cannot distinguish between modules of the same type during the actual target comparison We recommend that you clearly label the ET 200AL I O modules with...

Page 96: ...porarily interrupted due to the restart of I O module All downstream ET 200AL I O modules report a pull plug interrupt Options for the firmware update You have the following options to running a firmware update Online via STEP 7 as of V5 51 Online with STEP 7 TIA Portal V13 or higher Embedded web server running on a SIMATIC CPU or a SIMATIC F CPU with fail safe modules SIMATIC Automation Tool SAT ...

Page 97: ...object Contents IP address Deleted configurable when resetting Retain IP address Delete IP address Device name Deleted MAC address Is not deleted Identification data I M0 Is not deleted Maintenance data I M1 2 3 4 Are deleted optional Firmware version Is not deleted Note Failure of downstream stations is possible Resetting an interface module to factory settings can lead to failure of downstream s...

Page 98: ...e performs the Reset to factory settings while the RUN LED flashes yellow When the RUN LED is lit yellow the interface module has been reset to factory settings and is in the STOP operating mode The event Reset to factory settings is entered in the diagnostics buffer Procedure with STEP 7 V5 5 or higher Connect the PG PC to the PROFINET IO interface of the ET 200AL distributed I O system Make sure...

Page 99: ...the F I O or channel errors e g wire break or discrepancy error are detected Detected errors are written to the diagnostic buffer of the F CPU and reported to the safety program in the F CPU F modules cannot save errors as retentive data If the system is switched off and then restarted any pending errors are detected again at startup However you can save errors in your safety program WARNING If ch...

Page 100: ...e safety program by the user A detailed list of errors can be found in the device manual of the F module or in the STEP 7 online help Procedure after re integration For an F module with inputs the process data pending at the F DI is provided again to the safety program For an F module with outputs the output values provided by the safety program are transferred again to the F DQs Additional inform...

Page 101: ... The test criteria according to which the ET 200AL distributed I O system was tested Technical specifications for the modules The technical data of the individual modules can be found in the modules manuals If there are discrepancies between the statements in this document and the product manuals the statements in the product manuals take priority Reference The certificates for the markings and ap...

Page 102: ...riction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment RoHS Directive The fail safe modules of the ET 200AL distributed I O system meet the safety requirements and safety objectives of the following EU directives and comply with the harmonized EU standards EN for programmable controllers as specified in the official journals of the European Union 2014 30 EU Elect...

Page 103: ...24VDC 8xM8 6ES7141 5BF00 0BA0 DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 6ES7141 5AF00 0BA0 DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 6ES7141 5AH00 0BA0 DQ DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 6ES7142 5AF00 0BA0 DI DQ DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 6ES7143 5BF00 0BA0 DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 4xM12 6ES7143 5AF00 0BA0 DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 6ES7143 5AH00 0BA0 AI AI 4xU I RTD 4xM12 6ES7144 5KD00 0BA0 AQ AQ 4xU I 4xM12 6ES7145 5ND00 0BA0 Communication modules CM 4xIO LINK ...

Page 104: ...em fulfills the requirements and criteria of standard IEC 61131 2 programmable logic controllers Part 2 Equipment requirements and tests IEC 61010 2 201 The ET 200AL distributed I O system fulfills the requirements and criteria of standard IEC 61010 2 201 PROFINET standard The interface module IM 157 1 PN based on standard IEC 61158 Type 10 PROFIBUS standard The interface module IM 157 1 DP based ...

Page 105: ...for observing these limits for use in a mixed area are for example Installation of the ET 200AL distributed I O system in grounded control cabinets control boxes Use of filters in supply cables An additional individual acceptance test is also required Use in residential areas Note ET 200AL distributed I O system not intended for use in residential areas The ET 200AL distributed I O system is not i...

Page 106: ...s the electromagnetic compatibility of the distributed I O systems compared to pulse shaped disturbance variables Table 10 3 Pulse shaped disturbance variables Pulse shaped disturbance variable Tested with Corresponds to degree of severity Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000 4 2 Air discharge 8 kV 3 Contact discharge 4 kV 2 Burst pulses rapid transient disturb ance values according to I...

Page 107: ...ponds to degree of severity 0 15 MHz to 80 MHz 3 10 Vrms unmodulated 80 AM 1 kHz 150 Ω source impedance Emission of radio frequency interference The following table shows the interference emission of electromagnetic fields according to 55016 limit class A group 1 Table 10 6 Interference emission of electromagnetic fields Frequency Interference emission Measuring distance 30 MHz to 230 MHz 40 dB µV...

Page 108: ...le for use in weather proof fixed locations The conditions of use exceed the requirements pursuant to IEC 61131 2 Class OTH2 You can find the values for the operating conditions in the technical specifications of the manuals or on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs de en view 109742718 Tests of mechanical ambient conditions The following table shows the type and scope of the tests ...

Page 109: ...le shows the modules with functional versions which are permitted to 30 C Table 10 11 Extended temperature range to 30 C Description Article number As of functional version Interface modules ET 200AL IM 157 1 DP interface module 6ES7157 1AA00 0AB0 FS02 DI DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 6ES7141 5BF00 0BA0 FS03 DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 6ES7141 5AF00 0BA0 FS03 DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 6ES7141 5AH00 0BA0 FS03 DQ DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM1...

Page 110: ...oltage interruption 5 ms Pollution degree overvoltage category pursuant to IEC 61010 2 201 Pollution degree 3 Overvoltage category II Degree of protection IP65 and IP67 Degree of protection IP65 and IP67 according to IEC 60529 for all modules of the ET 200AL distributed I O system 1 Code number Dust proof and complete protection from contact 2 Code number Protection from water IP65 Protection from...

Page 111: ...n The product documentation contains information about the type of potential hazard and enables you to recognize risks and implement countermeasures Read the information provided by the product documentation ISO 7010 M002 Ensure the device is only installed by an electrically skilled person IEC 60417 No 6182 Note that connected mains lines must be designed according to the expected minimum and max...

Page 112: ...isconnects the 2L and 2M supply This switches all digital outputs operated with the 2L and 2M switched supply to the safe state The digital outputs connected to the 1L and 1M non switched supply are not intended for functional switching and therefore cannot be shut down safely There is no interaction between the outputs supplied by 1L and 2L You can also integrate I O modules that are operated sol...

Page 113: ...h leads to elimination of the electrical isolation between 1L and 2L The safety related shutdown is not permitted if the electrical isolation is eliminated Note Safe electrical separation Maintain safe galvanic isolation for voltages higher than SELV PELV Note Safety related shutdown for the IO Link master For an IO Link master with IO Link Port Class B safety related shutdown is available for the...

Page 114: ...fe inputs e g F DI Fail safe processing unit e g F CPU for issuing commands Output through fail safe outputs e g F DQ to control the safety function Requirements on the power supply Operation requires a SELV PELV power supply to limit overvoltages to L and M 24 V This measure prevents possible errors from the power supply side at the same time Select the power supply according to the requirements ...

Page 115: ... the modules The depth of the modules ranges from 40 mm to 46 mm Detailed information on the dimensions of the individual modules can be found in the manuals for the Interface modules https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 14246 man and I O modules https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 14247 man in the section Dimension drawing Figure B 1 Module dimension drawings front view ...

Page 116: ... 0AA0 Bus cable for ET Connection M8 pre assembled on both sides with 2 x M8 connectors angled 4 pin shielded 0 3 m 6ES7194 2LH03 0AB0 6ES7194 2MH03 0AB0 1 0 m 6ES7194 2LH10 0AB0 6ES7194 2MH10 0AB0 2 0 m 6ES7194 2LH20 0AB0 6ES7194 2MH20 0AB0 5 0 m 6ES7194 2LH50 0AB0 6ES7194 2MH50 0AB0 10 0 m 6ES7194 2LN10 0AB0 6ES7194 2MN10 0AB0 15 0 m 6ES7194 2LN15 0AB0 6ES7194 2MN15 0AB0 Bus cable for ET Connect...

Page 117: ...m 6ES7194 2LN15 1AA0 6ES7194 2MN15 1AA0 Power cable M8 pre assembled on both sides with angled M8 connector and angled M8 socket 4 pin 0 3 m 6ES7194 2LH03 1AB0 6ES7194 2MH03 1AB0 1 0 m 6ES7194 2LH10 1AB0 6ES7194 2MH10 1AB0 2 0 m 6ES7194 2LH20 1AB0 6ES7194 2MH20 1AB0 5 0 m 6ES7194 2LH50 1AB0 6ES7194 2MH50 1AB0 10 0 m 6ES7194 2LN10 1AB0 6ES7194 2MN10 1AB0 15 0 m 6ES7194 2LN15 1AB0 6ES7194 2MN15 1AB0...

Page 118: ...pack 6GK1901 0DB10 6AA8 PROFINET M12 plug connector D coded with fast connect technology 180 1 unit pack 6GK1901 0DB20 6AA0 8 units pack 6GK1901 0DB20 6AA8 PROFINET M12 plug connector D coded angled 3RK1902 2DA00 Table C 4 Non preassembled cable M12 Designation Article number Non preassembled cable for X1 DP1 and X1 DP2 PROFIBUS FC Cable FC Standard Cable 6XV1830 0EH10 FC Trailing Cable 6XV1830 3E...

Page 119: ... P1R PN LAN and X1 P2R PN LAN PROFINET M12 connecting cable trailing cable pre assembled on both ends with M12 connectors 180 pin 0 3 m 6XV1870 8AE30 0 5 m 6XV1870 8AE50 1 0 m 6XV1870 8AH10 1 5 m 6XV1870 8AH15 2 0 m 6XV1870 8AH20 3 0 m 6XV1870 8AH30 5 0 m 6XV1870 8AH50 10 0 m 6XV1870 8AN10 15 0 m 6XV1870 8AN15 PROFINET M12 connecting cable trailing cable pre assembled on both ends with M12 connect...

Page 120: ...of 200 labels on frames per frame 40 labels 6ES7194 2BA00 0AA0 Identification labels 10 x 5 mm RAL1018 yellow consisting of 200 labels on frames 40 labels per frame 6ES7194 2BB00 0AA0 Identification labels 10 x 7 mm yellow consisting of 816 labels on frames 48 labels per frame for eCoding plug connectors 6ES7194 6HA00 0AA0 Sealing cap M8 for modules IP67 3RK1901 1PN00 Sealing cap M12 for modules I...

Page 121: ...information Product type designation BUS CABLE ET CONNECTION Function To connect ET CONNECTION devices with degree of protection IP65 IP67 Degree of protection and protection class IP65 Yes IP67 Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during mounting minimum 30 C maximum 80 C Storage transport temperature Ambient temperature during transport and storage minimum 40 C maximum 80 C Cables Cable de...

Page 122: ...information Product type designation BUS CABLE ET CONNECTION PUR CABLE Function To connect ET CONNECTION devices with degree of protection IP65 IP67 Degree of protection and protection class IP65 Yes IP67 Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during mounting minimum 30 C maximum 80 C Storage transport temperature Ambient temperature during transport and storage minimum 40 C maximum 80 C Cable...

Page 123: ...s Connecting cable for ET Connection standard and PUR cable You can use the connecting cable between two cables for ET Connection Typical applications for using connecting cable for ET Connection are Combination of individual cable lengths by joining multiple pre assembled cables for ET Connection Selective installation of disconnection points of cables for ET Connection for simple changing of cab...

Page 124: ...e minimum 40 C maximum 80 C Cables Cable designation 2Y ST CY 1x4x0 5 1 0 100 GN Number of electrical wires 4 Design of shielding Overlapped aluminum lined sheet coated with shielding made of tin plated copper wires Cable length 0 2 m Outside diameter of the inner conductor 0 5 mm Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1 0 mm Outside diameter of the cable sheath 5 mm Permissible bending radius On...

Page 125: ...storage minimum 40 C maximum 80 C Cables Cable designation 2Y ST C11Y 2x2x0 5 1 0 100 GN Number of electrical wires 4 Design of shielding Overlapped aluminum lined sheet coated with shielding made of tin plated copper wires Cable length 0 2 m Outside diameter of the inner conductor 0 5 mm Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1 0 mm Outside diameter of the cable sheath 5 mm Permissible bending r...

Page 126: ...nformation Product type designation POWER CABLE M8 Function For connection of ET 200AL for 24 V DC power supply Degree of protection and protection class IP65 Yes IP67 Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during mounting minimum 30 C maximum 80 C Storage transport temperature Ambient temperature during transport and storage minimum 40 C maximum 80 C Cables Cable designation 4 Li9Y 0 50 mm Y ...

Page 127: ...f protection and protection class IP65 Yes IP67 Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during mounting minimum 30 C maximum 80 C Storage transport temperature Ambient temperature during transport and storage minimum 40 C maximum 80 C Cables Cable designation LIF9Y11YFHF 4x0 50 mm Number of electrical wires 4 Outside diameter of the inner conductor 1 mm Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1...

Page 128: ...he pin assignments of the 2 sockets for the connection of ET Connection Table C 14 Pin assignment for ET Connection interface modules Pin Assignment Assignment of the core color of the bus cable for ET Connection Front view of the sockets X30 socket ET Connection1 X31 socket ET Connection2 X30 X31 1 RXP RXP yellow 2 TXP TXP white 3 TXN TXN blue 4 RXN RXN orange Shield ing Functional earth FE Table...

Page 129: ...nector X80 connector power input 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched brown 2 Ground 2M switched white 3 Ground 1M non switched blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched black Pin assignment of the socket for loop through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment for loop through of the supply voltage Table C 17 Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the co...

Page 130: ...s achieved by assigning two passwords for the fail safe CPU and the safety program Acknowledgment time During the acknowledgment time the F I O acknowledge the sign of life specified by the F CPU The acknowledgment time is included in the calculation of the monitoring time and response time of the overall fail safe system Actuator Actuators are for example power relays or contactors for switching ...

Page 131: ...e are grouped together in a channel group Certain parameters in STEP 7 can only be assigned to channel groups rather than to individual channels Channel number Channel numbers are used to uniquely identify the inputs and outputs of a module and to assign channel specific diagnostic messages Channel specific passivation With this type of passivation only the affected channel is passivated in the ev...

Page 132: ...iscrepancy analysis is initiated when different levels are detected in two associated input signals when testing for non equivalence the same levels A check is performed to determine whether the difference for nonequivalence testing the same levels has disappeared after an assignable time period the so called discrepancy time If not this means that a discrepancy error exists The discrepancy analys...

Page 133: ...tion time defines the interval between the occurrence of any fault in any F I O and a safe response at the relevant fail safe output For digital inputs The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the occurrence of the fault and the safe reaction on the backplane bus For digital outputs The maximum fault reaction time defines the interval between the occurrence of the fault and the...

Page 134: ... modules etc e g after functional enhancements to the newest firmware version update F monitoring time PROFIsafe monitoring time F Systems fail safe systems Ground Conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point All interconnected inactive parts of a piece of equipment that cannot accept any dangerous contact voltage even in the event of a fault Ground Conductive ...

Page 135: ...xternal faults e g missing load voltage or internal faults e g processor failure Internal faults always require module replacement Monitoring time PROFIsafe monitoring time M switch Each fail safe digital output of ET 200AL F modules consists of a P switch DO Px current sourcing and an M switch DO Mx current sinking The load is connected between the P switch and M switch The two switches are alway...

Page 136: ...49 1 or EN ISO 13849 1 PROFINET PROcess FIeld NETwork open Industrial Ethernet standard which continues PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet A cross manufacturer communication automation and engineering model defined as an automation standard by PROFIBUS International e V PROFINET IO controller Device used to address connected I O devices e g distributed I O systems This means that The IO controller e...

Page 137: ...f components with the objective of maintaining component functionality in the event of hardware faults Redundancy safety enhancing Multiple availability of components with the aim of exposing hardware faults based on comparison such as 1oo2 evaluation in fail safe modules Reference potential Potential from which the voltages of the circuits involved are observed and or measured Reintegration After...

Page 138: ...for management of systematic faults and hardware failures The fail safe modules support operation in safety mode up to safety class SIL3 Safety frame In safety mode data are transferred between the F CPU and F I O in a safety frame Safety function A mechanism integrated in the F CPU and F I O that enables their use in the fail safe system SIMATIC Safety According to IEC 61508 2010 A safety functio...

Page 139: ...mode Operating mode of F I O in which standard communication is possible by means of safety frames but not safety related communication ET 200AL fail safe modules are only designed for safety mode TIA Portal Totally Integrated Automation Portal The TIA Portal is the key to the full performance capability of Totally Integrated Automation The software optimizes operating machine and process sequence...

Page 140: ...ct to functional earth 47 Power supply 46 Configuration control 64 Configuration software 59 Configuration variants ET Connection1 22 ET Connection1 and ET Connection2 23 Hybrid configuration 24 Configuring 59 Connecting Conductive substrate 48 M12 plugs 53 M8 plugs 52 Non conductive substrate 49 Connecting cables 50 D Degree of protection 108 Dimension drawing Modules 113 Drill holes 28 E eCoding...

Page 141: ...n handling See configuration control Overall configuration 40 Overvoltage category 108 P PELV 39 Pin assignment 53 56 Pollution degree 108 Power supply Connector 20 Power cable 20 PROFIenergy 84 PROFINET IO 81 Protection class 108 Protective measures 41 Pulse shaped disturbance variables 104 R Radio interference 103 Rated voltage 108 Reference potential grounded 39 non grounded 40 S Safe electrica...

Page 142: ... Distributed I O system 140 System Manual 08 2021 A5E31861578 AJ U Ungrounded infeed 39 Use in industrial environments 103 in mixed areas 103 in residential areas 103 V Vibrations 106 W Wires 31 Y Y cable 19 ...

Page 143: ......

Page 144: ...Preface ET 200AL IO Link I O modules Documentation Guide 1 System overview 2 Application planning 3 Mounting 4 Connecting 5 Configuring 6 Commissioning 7 Maintenance 8 Technical specifications 9 Safety related shutdown of ET 200AL IO Link modules A Dimension drawings B Accessories spare parts C ...

Page 145: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 146: ...ges compared to the previous version This manual contains the following changes additions compared to the previous version Supplement to section Safety related shutdown of ET 200AL IO Link modules Page 61 Conventions Observe the notes labeled as follows Note A note contains important information regarding The product described in the documentation The handling of the product The part of the docume...

Page 147: ...constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures e g firewalls and or network segmentation are in plac...

Page 148: ...s Technical Support spare parts and training offers Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages support queries and configurable documents This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en Industry Mall The Industry Mall is...

Page 149: ...lations for operation 24 5 2 Operation of the IO Link I O modules on a grounded ungrounded infeed 26 5 3 Electrical configuration of the IO Link I O modules 32 5 4 Connecting IO Link I O modules to functional ground 33 5 4 1 Mounting IO Link I O modules on a conductive surface 34 5 4 2 Mounting IO Link I O modules on a non conductive surface 35 5 5 Wiring 37 5 6 Marking of IO Link I O modules 40 5...

Page 150: ...izations 53 9 2 Electromagnetic compatibility 56 9 3 Transport and storage conditions 57 9 4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions 58 9 5 Details on insulation protection class degree of protection and rated voltage 59 9 6 Safety related symbols for IP65 IP67 modules 60 A Safety related shutdown of ET 200AL IO Link modules 61 B Dimension drawings 65 C Accessories spare parts 66 C 1 Accessorie...

Page 151: ...ent manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO Link system You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view ...

Page 152: ... data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system You c...

Page 153: ...ly scans the PROFINET and all connected components The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 67460624 SIMATIC S7 PCT The Port Configuration Tool PCT is PC based software for the parameter assignment of Siemens IO Link master modules and IO Link devices from any manu...

Page 154: ...s value can be exchanged via the standard interfaces digital analog used at the sensor actuator level Sensors and actuators with integrated intelligence are now used for increasingly complex functions and require a communication interface tailored to these requirements Definition IO Link is an innovative point to point communication interface for the sensor actuator area that is specified in IEC 6...

Page 155: ...at are ET 200AL IO Link I O modules SIMATIC ET 200AL IO Link I O modules SIMATIC ET 200AL IO Link I O modules belong to the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system You can operate the IO Link I O modules on any IO Link master with IP20 or IP67 degree of protection Customer benefits Figure 2 1 Benefits of the ET 200AL IO Link ...

Page 156: ...uration to your on site needs The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system is designed in IP65 IP67 degree of protection The I O modules are suited for distributed use indoors on a machine or assembly line You can adapt the cable routing optimally to the machine requirements The combination of a line topology such as PROFINET IO and ET connection and the star topology of IO Link make this easy to i...

Page 157: ...ntrolling the current process status via the connected sensors and actuators Identification labels The identification labels come with the module and can be machine printed Can be ordered separately M12 A connecting cable Connection of IO Link I O module to the master Connection to sensors and actuators Power connecting cable M12 L Connection of additional load voltage Sealing cap M8 and M12 Seal ...

Page 158: ...d an IO Link master is 20 m Power is supplied to the IO Link I O modules via the IO Link master You can connect one IO Link I O module per IO Link port to an IO Link master For I O modules with high power demand an M12 L power connector is available for an additional supply voltage You can find information on the maximum infeed current in the technical specifications of the modules in the respecti...

Page 159: ...r Type B You can find the technical specifications in the respective equipment manuals or on the Internet PROFINET IO The figure shows an IO Link configuration in combination with a PROFINET IO network The line topology of PROFINET IO is supplemented with a star topology of IO Link Note Configuration variants The IO Link I O modules can also be operated on an IO Link master in other networks Conne...

Page 160: ... Link I O modules IO Link I O modules System Manual 08 2021 A5E48755395 AB 17 The following figure shows a connection example on an ET 200ecoPN IO Link master with IP65 67 degree of protection Figure 3 2 Configuration with IP65 67 IO Link master ...

Page 161: ...ng position You can mount the IO Link I O modules in any mounting position Minimum clearances Maintain a minimum clearance of 2 cm from adjacent modules or other devices when mounting The minimum clearance makes it easier to install the connectors Mounting rules When mounting the modules you do not need to following any special rules Note Mounting of the modules Only mount the IO Link I O module w...

Page 162: ...ges shows the aluminum profile on which you can mount the modules Figure 4 1 Aluminum profile Required tool For installation you need a screwdriver or an Allen wrench Required screws The following table shows and explains the screw types required to mount the modules Table 4 1 Recommended screws Screw type Explanation Socket head cap screw M4 according to DIN EN ISO 1207 DIN EN ISO 1580 The screw ...

Page 163: ...ustry siemens com cs ww en view 95886672 The 30 mm I O modules have a fastening point at the top and bottom The 30 mm wide I O modules can also be side fastened When fastening them at the side you must use the supplied spacers Follow the steps below to mount a 30 mm wide I O module 1 Drill two fastening holes with 4 5 mm diameter spaced 149 6 mm apart 2 Use the supplied spacers for side fastening ...

Page 164: ...s System Manual 08 2021 A5E48755395 AB 21 The figure below shows the dimensions for fastening the 30 mm wide I O modules using the example of the IO Link I O module DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 Figure 4 2 Dimensions for mounting 30 mm wide I O modules ...

Page 165: ...es have a fastening point at the top and bottom Follow the steps below to mount a 45 mm wide I O module 1 Drill two fastening holes with 4 5 mm diameter spaced 149 6 mm apart 2 Fasten the I O module with the screws to both fastening points tightening torque 1 2 Nm The figure below shows the dimensions for fastening using the example of the IO Link I O module DI 8x24VDC M12 L 8xM12 Figure 4 3 Dimen...

Page 166: ...for cable ties All IO Link I O modules have integrated fastening points for cable ties The fastening points are found on all four corners of the modules The figure below shows the top left fastening point for 2 5 mm cable ties for fastening the cables Figure 4 4 Top left fastening point for cable ties ...

Page 167: ...n effective in all operating modes of the system Excluding hazardous system conditions Hazardous operating states must not occur in any situation but especially When the system restarts after a voltage dip or power outage When the IO Link I O modules start up after interruption of the IO Link communication If necessary force an EMERGENCY STOP An uncontrolled or undefined startup is not permitted a...

Page 168: ...htning protection e g lighting protection elements With 24 V DC supply lines and signal lines If there is a danger due to overvoltages you must take lightning protection measures for internal lightning protection e g lightning protection elements You will find additional information in the Designing interference free controllers https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 59193566 function ma...

Page 169: ...nfeed Introduction Information on the overall configuration of the IO Link I O modules on a grounded infeed TN S system is provided below Statements regarding the TN S system relate to the upstream 24 V DC power supply that is connected to the TN S system Together the IO Link I O modules and the IO Link master form a unit The following items must be noted for the configuration IO Link voltage supp...

Page 170: ...y with IEC 61010 2 201 The wiring of SELV PELV circuits must be separated from the wiring of non SELV PELV circuits Or the insulation of all conductors must be rated for the higher voltage NOTICE Operation in damp wet environments When operating in a damp wet environment different voltage limits apply for SELV PELV according to IEC 61010 2 201 Configuring IO Link I O modules with grounded referenc...

Page 171: ...all electrical configuration using the example of an IO Link I O module with port class A on an IO Link master with port class A Main switch Short circuit and overvoltage protection Fuses for cable protection In the configuration of the IO Link system with ungrounded reference potential the connection between 1M and functional ground is omitted Figure 5 1 Electrical configuration of IO Link I O mo...

Page 172: ...an IO Link I O module with port class A or B on an IO Link master with port class A Main switch Short circuit and overvoltage protection Fuses for cable protection In the configuration of the IO Link system with ungrounded reference potential the connection between 1M 2M and functional ground is omitted Figure 5 2 Electrical configuration of an IO Link I O module with port class A or B on an IO Li...

Page 173: ...e of an IO Link I O module with port class B on an IO Link master with port class B Main switch Short circuit and overvoltage protection Fuses for cable protection In the configuration of the IO Link system with ungrounded reference potential the connection between 1M 2M and functional ground is omitted Figure 5 3 Electrical configuration of an IO Link I O module with port class B on an IO Link ma...

Page 174: ...lations Table 5 1 Components of electrical configuration Reference to illustration IEC 60364 DIN VDE 0100 IEC 60204 DIN VDE 0113 Disconnection ele ment for controller sensors and actuators Part 460 Main switch Part 1 Disconnectors Short circuit over load protection Part 725 Single pole protection of circuits Part 1 Single pole protection of grounded secondary circuit Cable protection Part 430 Prot...

Page 175: ... groups Depending on the configuration 1M and 2M may then be connected resulting in elimination of the electrical isolation between 1L and 2L The possible compensating currents can destroy the digital module WARNING Note potential groups for safety related shutdown When a digital output is connected to a digital input pay attention to the potential groups Depending on the configuration 1M and 2M c...

Page 176: ...n results in a module restart 5 4 Connecting IO Link I O modules to functional ground Introduction You must connect the IO Link I O modules to functional ground What is functional ground All IO Link I O modules have a functional ground connection This connection is used to suppress interference sensitivity but not for protection purposes With the functional ground connection you establish an elect...

Page 177: ...und in the case of a conductive mounting surface proceed as follows 1 Drill two fastening holes The dimensions of the module can be found in the section Dimension drawings Page 65 2 Screw the module with the M4 fastening screws using a torque of 1 2 Nm Note Grounding in the case of a conductive mounting surface When you mount an IO Link I O module on a conductive grounded surface the lower fasteni...

Page 178: ... mounting of the module Required tool To connect to functional ground you need the following tool Screwdriver or hexagon socket size 3 Stripping tool Crimp tool Required accessories To connect to functional ground in the case of a non conductive mounting surface you need the following accessories 2 x 4 mm fixing screws Cable lug suitable for 4 mm screws Grounding cable braided copper cable with a ...

Page 179: ... lug to the grounding cable 4 Screw the module and the cable lug with the 4 mm fastening screws using a torque of 1 2 Nm The figure below shows how to connect the functional ground Figure 5 5 Connecting the functional ground Note Grounding in the case of a non conductive mounting surface Make sure there is a low impedance connection between the module and functional ground Reference You will find ...

Page 180: ...g pre assembled cables you need the following tool Stripping tool Screwdriver to wire the connection plugs Accessories required for the connection of IO Link You need the following accessories Cables Pre assembled cable M12 4 pole or 5 pole or Flexible 3 4 or 5 core copper cable core cross section 0 25 to 0 5 mm2 5 pole M12 A coded connecting socket Accessories required for the connection of addit...

Page 181: ...nnection of the M8 plugs using the example of the IO Link digital input module DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 Figure 5 6 Connecting M8 connectors Connecting M12 connectors To connect M12 connectors proceed as follows 1 Insert the plug into the respective round socket on the module Ensure the correct alignment between plug and socket groove and spring 2 Tighten the connector using the knurled screw with a torque ...

Page 182: ...inputs or outputs The use of a Y cable is recommended in particular if two channels are occupied per socket of an I O module The Y cable distributes the channels to two circular connectors The figure below shows the wiring of the Y cable Figure 5 8 Wiring of the Y cable Sealing of unused sockets To ensure IP65 or IP67 degree of protection seal off all unused sockets with sealing caps Article numbe...

Page 183: ...rkings that support you when configuring and connecting the modules Marking of the interfaces The interfaces of the modules are factory labeled The table below shows the labeling of the interfaces Table 5 2 Interface labeling interface Labeling IO Link X35 IO Link I O input and output interfaces X10 X17 Additional power supply X80 DC24V Pin assignment The pin assignments of the various interfaces ...

Page 184: ...tification labels come with each IO Link I O module as strips and can be machine printed A strip has 10 identification labels measuring 10 x 5 mm in the color RAL9016 The identification labels can be inserted into every module at the points provided The identification labels are used for channel and module labeling The figure below shows all points where you can use the identification labels using...

Page 185: ...mount an identification label proceed as follows 1 Print the identification label using commercially available marking systems 2 Press the identification label out of its holder 3 Stick the identification labels into the cutouts provided as shown in the figure Optional marking Page 41 Mounting the identification labels is the same for all modules Removal procedure To remove an identification label...

Page 186: ...Tool S7 PCT Device description IODD An electronic device description the IODD file IO Device Description is available for each device The IODD provides a wealth of information for system integration Communication properties Device parameters with value range and default value Identification process and diagnostic data Device data Text description Image of the device Manufacturer logo The structure...

Page 187: ...e IO Link configuration tools of the master manufacturers are able to read IODDs The main tasks of the IO Link configuration tool include Assignment of devices to the master ports Address assignment of the ports within the address area of the master Parameter assignment of the IO Link devices Diagnostics can also be carried out on the connected devices This means the IO Link configuration tool sup...

Page 188: ...nual 08 2021 A5E48755395 AB 45 S7 PCT with IODD of an IO Link I O module The following figure shows a section from S7 PCT with IODD of an IO Link I O module and the device information contained therein Figure 6 1 S7 PCT with IODD of a device and the device information contained therein ...

Page 189: ...8755395 AB Commissioning 7 7 1 Startup of the IO Link I O module Principle of operation The figure below shows the startup of an IO Link I O module on an IO Link Master schematically as a flow chart Figure 7 1 Startup of an ET 200AL IO Link I O module ...

Page 190: ...ted Always comply with the required standards and safety guidelines when configuring a system If you use the restore function of the master the master automatically provides the saved parameters to the new module after module replacement You have the following setting options for module replacement Backup Restore You have set the master port to Backup Restore The new module behaves like the replac...

Page 191: ...k I O module with the screws with a torque of 1 2 Nm 6 Connect all cables 7 Turn the supply voltage on WARNING Observe the device number of the modules If you mix up the IO Link I O modules when connecting them this can cause personal injury and property damage We recommend that you clearly label the IO Link I O modules with the device number The figure below shows a recommendation for the marking...

Page 192: ...the update When you perform a firmware update for an IO Link I O module the module goes to STOP state during the update Requirement To perform a FW update you need an IO Link master that supports the IO Link FW update transfer mechanism Option for the firmware update You have the option of performing a firmware update online via S7 PCT Reference You will find additional information on the procedur...

Page 193: ...ues The identification parameters of the module remain unchanged The command is not followed by a module restart or a communication interruption Result after Restore Factory Setting The Restore Factory Setting command causes three different actions The actions are dependent on the data backup setting on the IO Link master None The default parameters of the IO Link I O module are loaded The IO Link...

Page 194: ...re that an online connection to the IO Link I O module exists 1 Select an IO Link I O module in the project tree 2 Select the Parameters tab in the work area 3 Under Parameters Parameter Data System command click on the desired button Application Reset Restore Factory Setting Figure 8 2 Resetting a module Result The IO Link I O module is reset Reference You can find more information on the procedu...

Page 195: ...ules are maintenance free Note Repairs Repairs to an IO Link I O module may only be carried out by the manufacturer Cleaning When wired the IO Link I O modules comply with degree of protection IP65 IP67 and do not require any cleaning If you want to clean the modules use a dry or damp cloth Please take care to comply with degree of protection IP65 67 when cleaning with liquids ...

Page 196: ...cal specifications for the modules The technical data of the individual modules can be found in the modules manuals If there are discrepancies between the statements in this document and the product manuals the statements in the product manuals take priority See also SIOS https support industry siemens com 9 1 Standards and authorizations Currently valid markings and authorizations Note Specificat...

Page 197: ...also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages keyword Declaration of Conformity UL approval Underwriters Laboratories Inc in accordance with UL 61010 1 and UL 61010 2 201 CSA C22 2 No 61010 1 and CSA C22 2 No 61010 2 201 Process Control Equipment RCM Declaration of conformity for Australia New Zealand The ET 200AL IO Link I O modules meet the requirements of EN 61000 6 4 2007 ...

Page 198: ... 61000 6 2 Use in mixed areas Under certain circumstances you can use the ET 200AL IO Link I O modules in a mixed area A mixed area is used for residential purposes and for commercial operations that do not significantly impact the residential purpose If you want to use the ET 200AL IO Link I O modules in a mixed area you must ensure that its radio frequency interference emissions comply with the ...

Page 199: ...pect to pulse shaped disturbance variables Table 9 1 Pulse shaped disturbance variables Pulse shaped disturbance variable Tested with Conforms to degree of severity Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000 4 2 Air discharge 8 kV 3 Contact discharge 4 kV 2 Burst pulses rapid transient disturbance values according to IEC 61000 4 4 2 kV power supply cable 3 1 kV signal line 30 m 3 Sinusoidal di...

Page 200: ...s measurement ranges for low voltage according to EN 55016 Table 9 5 Interference emission from the power supply Frequency Interference emission 0 15 0 5 MHz 89 dB µV Q 76 dB µV M 0 5 30 MHz 83 dB µV Q 70 dB µV M 9 3 Transport and storage conditions Transport and storage conditions The ET 200AL IO Link I O modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131 2 regarding transport and storage conditions T...

Page 201: ...ions Vibration test accord ing to IEC 60068 2 6 Type of oscillation Frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave minute 5 Hz 9 1 Hz constant amplitude 15 mm 9 1 Hz 150 Hz constant acceleration 5 g Duration of oscillation 10 frequency sweeps per axis at each of three vertically aligned axes Shock Shock tested accord ing to IEC 60068 2 27 Type of shock Half sine Shock intensity 30g peak value ...

Page 202: ...severity class PS1 Pollution degree overvoltage category according to IEC 61131 Pollution degree 3 Overvoltage category II Degree of protection IP65 and IP67 Degree of protection IP65 and IP67 according to IEC 60529 for all ET 200AL IO Link I O modules 1 Code number Dust proof and complete protection from contact 2 Code number Protection from water IP65 Protection from water jets from any angle Th...

Page 203: ...he product documentation contains information about the type of potential hazard and enables you to recognize risks and implement countermeasures Read the information provided by the product documentation ISO 7010 M002 Ensure the device is only installed by an electrically skilled person IEC 60417 No 6182 Note that connected mains lines must be designed according to the expected minimum and maximu...

Page 204: ...he 2L and 2M supply 24 V switched of the ET 200AL IO Link modules are switched to the safe OFF state This step achieves the safety class SIL2 Category 3 PL d Principle of operation The higher level safety shutdown device e g 3SK1 disconnects the supply 2L and 2M switched The digital outputs of the ET 200AL IO Link modules operated on the 2L and 2M 24 V switched supply are switched to the safe stat...

Page 205: ... Higher level safety circuit of the outputs WARNING Note potential groups for safety related shutdown When a digital output is connected to a digital input pay attention to the potential groups Depending on the configuration 1M and 2M can be connected through this which leads to cancellation of the electrical isolation between 1L and 2L The safety related shutdown is not permitted if the electrica...

Page 206: ...lass Take the following measures if energy that is not provided by the higher level safety circuit is used to control the safety function Cover critical errors in the safety function that are not detected by the higher level safety circuit e g 3SK1 with suitable safety measures The diagnostics must be performed indirectly via the controlled process Specifications for safety relevant process data F...

Page 207: ...support industry siemens com cs us en view 39198632 In this FAQ you can find the SIMATIC standard modules that are suitable for safety related shutdown Request German Technical Inspectorate report Report no SN89858T You can request copies of the German Technical Inspectorate report at the following address SIEMENS AG Digital Industries DI FA TI COS TT P O Box 1963 D 92209 Amberg Germany ...

Page 208: ...modules The figure below shows the height and width of the modules The depth of the modules varies between 40 mm and 45 mm Detailed information on the dimensions of the individual modules can be found in the equipment manuals for the IO Link I O modules in the section Dimension drawing Figure B 1 Module dimension drawings front view ...

Page 209: ...DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 Designation Length Article number Cable is pre assembled M12 CONNECTING CABLE L CODED Power connecting cable M12 180 M12 180 for power supply of ET 200 Pre assembled cable with M12 plug and M12 socket L coded 4 pole 0 5 m 6XV1801 6DE50 1 0 m 6XV1801 6DH10 1 5 m 6XV1801 6DH15 2 0 m 6XV1801 6DH20 3 0 m 6XV1801 6DH30 5 0 m 6XV1801 6DH50 10 0 m 6XV1801 6DN10 15 0 m 6XV1801 6DN15 Ca...

Page 210: ...le pre assembled 1 5 mm2 M12 CONNECTING CABLE A CODED Sensor actuator cable 5 pole PUR halogen free black gray RAL 7021 shielded straight plug M12 coding A to straight socket M12 coding A 0 3 m SAC 5P M12MS 0 3 PUR M12FS SH 1500884 0 6 m SAC 5P M12MS 0 6 PUR M12FS SH 1500897 1 5 m SAC 5P M12MS 1 5 PUR M12FS SH 1500907 3 0 m SAC 5P M12MS 3 0 PUR M12FS SH 1500910 Cable Socket open end 1 5 mm2 M12 CO...

Page 211: ... CONNECTING CABLE L CODED Power cable 4 pole PUR halogen free black gray RAL 7021 straight socket M12 coding L to free cable end 5 0 m SAC 4P 5 0 PUR M12FSL 1425075 10 0 m SAC 4P 10 0 PUR M12FSL 1425076 Cable pre assembled 1 5 mm2 M12 CONNECTING CABLE L CODED Power cable 4 pole PUR halogen free black gray RAL 7021 straight plug M12 coding L to straight socket M12 coding L 0 3 m SAC 4P M12MSL 0 3 1...

Page 212: ...M12 plug and M12 socket A coded 5 pole 0 3 m 6XV1801 5DE30 0 5 m 6XV1801 5DE50 1 0 m 6XV1801 5DH10 1 5 m 6XV1801 5DH15 2 0 m 6XV1801 5DH20 3 0 m 6XV1801 5DH30 5 0 m 6XV1801 5DH50 10 0 m 6XV1801 5DN10 15 0 m 6XV1801 5DN15 Power connecting cable M12 90 M12 90 for power supply of ET 200 pre assembled cable with M12 plug and M12 socket A coded 5 pole 0 3 m 6XV1801 5GE30 0 5 m 6XV1801 5GE50 1 0 m 6XV18...

Page 213: ... and downtimes Distributed I O system System with input and output modules that are configured on a distributed basis far away from the CPU controlling them Firmware update Upgrading the firmware of IO Link I O modules for example after function extensions to the latest firmware version update Ground Conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point All interconnect...

Page 214: ... restore the parameters Parameter assignment Parameter assignment is the transfer of parameters from the IO Link master to the IO Link I O module PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage Extra low voltage connected to protective ground PROFINET PROcess FIeld NETwork open Industrial Ethernet standard which continues PROFIBUS and Industrial Ethernet A cross manufacturer communication automation and enginee...

Page 215: ...al Potential from which the voltages of the circuits involved are observed and or measured S7 PCT S7 Port Configuration Tool Siemens program for configuring IO Link devices SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage TIA Portal Totally Integrated Automation Portal The TIA Portal is the key to the full performance capability of Totally Integrated Automation The software optimizes operating machine and process se...

Page 216: ...n conductive surface 36 D Degree of protection 59 Device number 48 Dimension drawing Modules 65 Drill holes 20 E Electrical isolation 32 Electromagnetic compatibility 56 Electrostatic discharge 56 EMC 56 EMERGENCY STOP device 24 Emission of radio frequency interference 57 ET 200AL Area of application 13 ET 200AL IO Link modules Safety related shutdown 61 F Firmware update 49 Functional ground 33 F...

Page 217: ...ce variables 56 R Radio interference 55 Rated voltage 59 Reference potential Grounded 27 Ungrounded 27 S Safe electrical isolation 27 Screws 19 SELV 27 Shock 58 SIMATIC ET 200AL 12 Sinusoidal disturbance variables 56 Sockets 39 Spare parts 66 Standards 53 Switch 24 System conditions 24 System configuration Grounded reference potential 27 Protective measures 31 Ungrounded reference potential 27 T T...

Page 218: ......

Page 219: ...200SP ET 200AL Mixed configuration Equipment Manual 11 2020 A5E33344611 AD Preface 1 Documentation guide 2 Product overview 3 Application planning 4 Mounting 5 Connecting 6 Configuring 7 Technical specifications 8 ...

Page 220: ...onnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens products may o...

Page 221: ...11 3 2 BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC 13 3 2 1 Properties 13 3 2 2 Wiring and schematic circuit diagram 15 3 2 3 Diagnostics by means of LED display 16 4 Application planning 17 5 Mounting 21 6 Connecting 22 6 1 Connecting BaseUnit BU Send 22 7 Configuring 27 8 Technical specifications 30 8 1 Technical specifications BaseUnit BU Send 30 8 2 Technical specifications BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC 31 ...

Page 222: ...g the system Conventions CPU When the term CPU is used in the following it applies to the CPUs of the S7 1500 automation system as well as to the CPUs interface modules of the ET 200SP and ET 200AL distributed I O systems STEP 7 In this documentation STEP 7 is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software STEP 7 TIA Portal Also observe notes marked as follows Not...

Page 223: ...nauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures e g firewalls and or network segmentation are in place For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemente...

Page 224: ...ou require Basic information The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration installation wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200SP distributed I O system The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams cha...

Page 225: ...Collection on the Internet http support automation siemens com WW view en 84133942 mySupport With mySupport your personal workspace you make the best out of your Industry Online Support In mySupport you can save filters favorites and tags request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an o...

Page 226: ...support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products You will find the application examples on the Internet https support industry siemens com sc ww en sc 2054 TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool you can select configure and order devices for T...

Page 227: ...he date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU error information Reading of the CPU diagnostics buffer Reset to factory settings Firmware update of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet PRONETA SIEMENS PRONETA...

Page 228: ...ommissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems Transparency befor...

Page 229: ...pment Manual 11 2020 A5E33344611 AD 11 Product overview 3 3 1 BaseUnit BU Send 3 1 1 Product overview Article number 6ES7193 6BN00 0NE0 View Figure 3 1 BaseUnit BU Send Properties BaseUnit suitable for BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC ...

Page 230: ...Product overview 3 1 BaseUnit BU Send Mixed configuration 12 Equipment Manual 11 2020 A5E33344611 AD Schematic circuit diagram Backplane bus BA Send 1xFC expansion module ...

Page 231: ...nual 11 2020 A5E33344611 AD 13 3 2 BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC 3 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7193 6AS00 0AA0 View of the module Module type and name LED for diagnostics Connection for ET Connection Article number Functional version Figure 3 2 View of the BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC ...

Page 232: ...00AL I O module and between two ET 200AL I O modules Supported functions Function Mixed configuration ET 200SP ET 200AL I O modules on ET Connection IM CPU Isochronous mode Configuration control Shared device PROFIenergy System redundancy S2 1 1 1 With IM 155 6 PN 3 HF and IM 155 6 PN 2 HF V4 2 or higher Accessories The following components must be ordered separately Labeling strips Reference iden...

Page 233: ...gnment of the BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC Table 3 1 ET Connection pin assignment with BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC View Signal name Description PROFINET IO with BusAdapter BA1xFC 1 TD Transmit data 2 RD Receive data 3 TD_N Transmit data 4 RD_N Receive data Schematic circuit diagram Figure 3 3 Circuit diagram BA Send 1xFC Additional information You can find additional information on connecting the interface...

Page 234: ...tion between the ET Connection interface of the BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC and the ET 200AL Check whether the bus cable is interrupted The CPU interface module does not support the BA Send 1xFC Run a firmware update On There is a connection between the ET Connection interface of the BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC and the ET 200AL Flashes There is at least one diagnostics alarm of an ET Connection device Gro...

Page 235: ...tion You have the option of integrating the I O modules of the ET 200AL distributed I O system IP65 IP67 in a configuration of the ET 200SP distributed I O system IP20 The figure below shows a combination of the modules of the ET 200AL and ET 200SP distributed I O system Figure 4 1 Mixed configuration ET 200SP and ET 200AL with ET Connection ...

Page 236: ...IM 155 6 PN 3 HF IM 155 6 PN ST V3 1 or higher IM 155 6 DP HF V3 0 or higher IM 155 6 MF HF CPU CPU 1510SP 1 PN V2 0 or higher CPU 1510SP F 1 PN V2 0 or higher CPU 1512SP 1 PN V2 0 or higher CPU 1512SP F 1 PN V2 0 or higher CPU 1515SP PC CPU 1515SP PC F CPU 1515SP PC T CPU 1515SP PC2 CPU 1515SP PC2 F CPU 1515SP PC2 T CPU 1515SP PC2 TF BaseUnit BU Send with BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC ET Connection cab...

Page 237: ...y voltage for the ET 200SP distributed I O system 2 Install the BaseUnit BU Send to the immediate right of the ET 200SP CPU interface module When the BaseUnit BU Send is used next to the ET 200SP CPU a CM DP and an Ethernet CP or a maximum of two Ethernet CPs can be inserted between the CPU and BU Send 3 Then mount the additional BaseUnits I O modules for the ET 200SP distributed I O system and th...

Page 238: ...Application planning Mixed configuration 20 Equipment Manual 11 2020 A5E33344611 AD Note Insertion of theBusAdapter BA Send 1xFC during operation leads to a restart of the interface module ...

Page 239: ...3 5 mm screwdriver only for dismantling the BusAdapter Mounting BaseUnit BU Send To mount the BaseUnit BU Send follow these steps 1 Mount the BaseUnit BU Send to the right of the CPU interface module 2 Swivel the BaseUnit back until you hear the mounting rail release latch into place 3 Move the BaseUnit to the left until you hear it latch into place on the CPU interface module Figure 5 1 Mounting ...

Page 240: ...ecting 6 6 1 Connecting BaseUnit BU Send Pin assignment The BaseUnit BU Send only has one slot for an expansion module No other connections are available Schematic circuit diagram Backplane bus BA Send 1xFC expansion module Figure 6 1 Schematic circuit diagram BU Send ...

Page 241: ... and the ET 200AL I O modules We recommend using the Stripping Tool for ET Connection 6ES7194 2KA00 0AA0 with blade cassette green 6GK1901 1B This guarantees fast and safe stripping The bus cable is available in the following versions Bus cable for ET Connection M8 prefabricated on one side with 1x M8 connector 4 pole shielded Length 2 m 6ES7194 2LH20 0AC0 Length 5 m 6ES7194 2LH50 0AC0 Length 10 m...

Page 242: ...T Connection to do this The relevant settings are shown on the tool 2 Pull back the locking slide of the BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC and open the cover of the connection element 3 Lift the cable routing up as far as it will go 4 Insert the unstripped single cores of the bus cable according to the imprinted color coding into the cable routing as far as they will go and press the cable routing down as f...

Page 243: ...0 2 Nm To do this use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3 5 mm blade 7 Connect the M8 connector of the bus cable to the first ET 200AL I O module socket X30 ET Connection IN For more information about wiring the ET 200AL I O modules refer to the system manual of the ET 200AL distributed I O system Locking slide Shield contact Cable routing Bus cable for ET Connection Figure 6 4 Connection of the BusAdapet...

Page 244: ...Connecting BaseUnit BU Send Mixed configuration 26 Equipment Manual 11 2020 A5E33344611 AD BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC mounted BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC Bus cable for ET Connection Figure 6 5 BusAdapter BA Send 1xFC mounted ...

Page 245: ...erver module 16th ET 200AL I O module Slots ET Connection PROFINET IO Figure 7 1 Mixed configuration For more information about connecting ET Connection supply voltages actuators and sensors refer to the ET 200AL system manual Configuration with a CPU In a configuration with a CPU a maximum of 2 slots can be used immediately to the right of the CPU with CM DP module or Ethernet CP Combinations are...

Page 246: ...ns Function Mixed configuration ET 200SP ET 200AL I O modules on ET Connection IM CPU Isochronous mode Configuration control Shared device PROFIenergy System redundancy S2 1 1 1 With IM 155 6 PN 3 HF and IM 155 6 PN 2 HF V4 2 or higher Configuring Observe the following points when configuring BU Send BA Send 1xFC and server module must be configured There are no parameters for BU Send BA Send 1xFC...

Page 247: ...O module Figure 7 2 Mixed configuration Configuring configuration example Table 7 1 Overview Mixed configuration Module Slot ET 200SP IM 155 6 PN HF 0 BA Send 1xFC 1 DI 16x24VDC ST 2 DI 16x24VDC ST 3 DI 16x24VDC ST 4 Server module 5 ET 200AL DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 66 DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 67 AI 4xU I RTD 4xM12 68 CM 4xIO Link 4xM12 69 Note Configuration using PROFIBUS GSD file When you use the PROFI...

Page 248: ...W functional status from FS04 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation horizontal installation min 30 C horizontal installation max 60 C vertical installation min 30 C vertical installation max 50 C Altitude during operation relating to sea level Installation altitude above sea level max 2 000 m On request Installation altitudes greater than 2 000 m Dimensions Width 20 mm Height 117...

Page 249: ...PROFINET IO Cable length Cu conductors 15 m from IM firmware V3 3 between BA send and the first ET CONNECTION bus node and between all other bus nodes ET Connection Number of interfaces ET connection 1 FC FastConnect Yes Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation horizontal installation min 30 C horizontal installation max 60 C vertical installation min 30 C vertical installation max ...

Page 250: ......

Page 251: ...P 6ES7157 1AA00 0AB0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32100641 AE Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters 4 Interrupts error messages diagnostics and system alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 Dimension drawing A Cycle times B ...

Page 252: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 253: ...intain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and...

Page 254: ... 2 Explanation of the parameters 20 5 Interrupts error messages diagnostics and system alarms 22 5 1 Status and error displays 22 5 2 Interrupts 25 5 2 1 Evaluating interrupts 25 5 2 2 Trigger a diagnostics interrupt 25 5 2 3 Triggering a hardware interrupt 25 5 2 4 Triggering an insert remove module interrupt 26 5 2 5 Structure of data records 26 5 3 Alarms 34 5 3 1 Diagnostics alarms 34 5 3 2 Sl...

Page 255: ... manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentation free of char...

Page 256: ...already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system You configure ...

Page 257: ...tude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU error informa...

Page 258: ...ves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification...

Page 259: ...7 1 DP 6ES7157 1AA00 0AB0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32100641 AE 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7157 1AA00 0AB0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the IM 157 1 DP interface module ...

Page 260: ...nfiguration 244 bytes input data 244 bytes output data 32 I O modules up to 16 I O modules can be connected for each ET Connection line Accessories The following component is included with the module in the packaging Identification labels Other components The following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cab...

Page 261: ...current operating status and diagnostics status X1 DP1 1st PROFIBUS interface X1 DP2 2nd PROFIBUS interface Rotary coding switch for setting the PROFIBUS address ET CON1 ET CON2 LED displays for ET Connection X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection1 X31 Socket for ET Connection2 DP LED di...

Page 262: ...d area in the open manufacturer independent communication system SIMATIC NET Physically PROFIBUS is an electrical network based on a shielded two wire cable or an optical network based on a fiber optic cable Data transmission via PROFIBUS DP features a standardized interface EN 50170 Vol 2 for the transmission of process input and process output data between SIMATIC S7 and field devices DP slaves ...

Page 263: ...s that you can configure the planned maximum configuration of your distributed I O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner by means of the user program Reference You can find more information on configuration control In the system manual ET 200AL Distributed I O System https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 89254965 On the Internet under the following link Application co...

Page 264: ...rnal supply voltage 2L Load voltage 2L switched Rotary coding switch for PROFIBUS addresses 2M Ground 2M switched X1 DP1 1 PROFIBUS interface RUN LED operating state green X1 DP2 2 PROFIBUS interface ERROR LED diagnostics status red X80 Infeed of supply voltages MAINT LED diagnostics status yellow X81 Loop through of supply voltages DP PROFIBUS LED green X30 Infeed of the ET Connection ET CON1 ET ...

Page 265: ...1 DP2 Socket loop through 1 Supply plus P5V 2 Data cable A 3 Data reference potential M5 4 Data cable B 5 Functional earth FE Shield ing Functional earth FE The voltage may only be used for supplying the external terminating resistor It is not permitted to loop through the voltage by means of a cable to the next connector Pin assignment of the sockets for ET Connection The table below shows the pi...

Page 266: ...ed Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black Pin assignment of the socket for loop through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop through of the supply voltage Table 3 4 Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the power line cable Front view of the socket X81 Socket power output 1 Supply voltage 1L non sw...

Page 267: ...address is configured for the ET 200AL distributed I O system with a rotary coding switch on the front of the housing Requirements The following requirements apply Each address is only assigned once on the PROFIBUS DP The configured PROFIBUS DP address must match the PROFIBUS address defined in the configuration software A change of the PROFIBUS DP address is only valid after POWER ON POWER OFF on...

Page 268: ...2 Configure the desired PROFIBUS DP address with a screwdriver on the rotary coding switches Top rotary coding switch Tens digit Bottom rotary coding switch Ones digit 3 Screw the two M12 sealing caps back onto the thread to protect the rotary coding switches torque 0 5 to 0 8 Nm 4 Switch the supply voltage off and on again POWER OFF POWER ON The figure below shows the rotary coding switches for c...

Page 269: ...2 Ones digit Position 6 Connecting the terminating resistor for PROFIBUS DP Terminate a PROFIBUS DP segment on both of its ends which means on the first and last device of the segment with its characteristic impedance There are two different terminating resistors available for this purpose for sockets and for connectors The figure below shows typical use of a terminating resistor PROFIBUS infeed c...

Page 270: ...ll plug module interrupt Disable Enable Enable ET 200AL 1 Note that the Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration parameter is always activated when you use configuration control 2 The defaults apply to the default startup If no other parameters are specified by the DP master the interface moduleIM 157 1 DP starts up with these parameters 4 2 Explanation of the parameters...

Page 271: ...reset actual configuration differ no data exchange occurs between the DP master and the ET 200AL distributed I O system Note More than 16 I O modules in real configuration per ET Connection line The preset actual configuration do not match parameter is valid for 16 I O modules per ET Connection line Up to 16 I O modules are recognized per line Additional I O modules are not recognized A diagnostic...

Page 272: ... error messages diagnostics and system alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the IM 157 1 DP interface module RUN green ERROR red MAINT yellow ET CON1 green ET CON2 green DP green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 273: ... not configured Configure the interface module with the configuration software ET 200AL starts up ET 200AL is being assigned parameters On Not rele vant Not rele vant ET 200AL is currently exchanging data with the DP master Not rele vant Flashes Not rele vant Group error and group error channels Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate the error The preset configuration does not corre spond to the a...

Page 274: ...able to the DP master is disconnected On There is no connection between the PROFIBUS interface of your PROFIBUS device and a communication partner e g DP master LED ET CON1 LED ET CON2 Table 5 3 Status displays of the LEDs ET CON1 and ET CON2 LEDs Meaning Solution ET CON1 ET CON2 Off There are no I O modules available at the respective ET Connection or the modules do not have supply voltage Check ...

Page 275: ...r example wire break on a channel of an I O module the interface module triggers a diagnostics interrupt if the I O modules were configured accordingly and Enable diagnostics interrupt is set The CPU interrupts user program execution and processes the diagnostics interrupt OB OB 82 The event that triggered the interrupt is entered in the start information of the diagnostics interrupt OB 5 2 3 Trig...

Page 276: ...ure of data records Definition The interrupt section of the slave diagnostics indicates the interrupt type and the event that led to an interrupt being triggered The interrupt section comprises 62 bytes including an interrupt header Position in the diagnostics frame The interrupt section is located after the channel diagnostics Data records The diagnostics data of a module are located in the data ...

Page 277: ...igure below shows the structure of data record 1 Figure 5 3 Structure of data record 1 Reading data records You have the option to read out data records 0 and 1 via SFC 59 RD_REC or SFB 52 RDREC The data length of data record 1 is up to 240 bytes In this case data record 1 contains up to 38 channel fault entries Note the figures below in this section ...

Page 278: ...ype In the case of diagnostics interrupts diagnostics data record 1 up to 58 bytes is sent as interrupt status information starting from byte x 4 The length of the interrupt status information for hardware interrupts is 4 bytes Structure of interrupts The figure below shows the structure of the interrupt section for the ET 200AL distributed I O system Figure 5 4 Structure of the interrupt status o...

Page 279: ...s IM 157 1 DP 6ES7157 1AA00 0AB0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32100641 AE 29 Diagnostics interrupt byte x 4 to x 7 The figure below shows the structure of the diagnostics interrupt of byte x 4 to byte x 7 Figure 5 5 Structure of bytes x 4 to x 7 for diagnostics interrupt ...

Page 280: ...ure of the diagnostics interrupt starting at byte x 8 Figure 5 6 Structure starting at byte x 8 Diagnostics interrupt from the modules starting at byte x 14 The channel error entries start from byte x 14 A channel fault entry is 6 bytes long and can follow 8 times starting at byte x 14 If you read the channel faults with an SFB or SFC then 38 channel diagnostics are possible Figure 5 7 Structure s...

Page 281: ...H bit 02H 2 bit 03H 4 bit 04H byte 05H word 06H double word 07H to FFH Reserved Bit 8 0 Channel 1 Channel group Bit 9 10 00H Diagnostics 01H Maintenance demanded 02H Maintenance required 03H Reserved Bit 11 12 00H Channel error free 01H Incoming diagnostics 02H Outgoing diagnostics 03H Outgoing diagnostics but other diagnostics are also pending on this channel Bits 13 to 15 00H Reserved 01H Input ...

Page 282: ...em alarms 5 2 Interrupts IM 157 1 DP 6ES7157 1AA00 0AB0 32 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32100641 AE Example of a diagnostics interrupt The figure below shows an example of a diagnostics interrupt Figure 5 8 Example of a diagnostics interrupt part 1 ...

Page 283: ...5 9 Example of a diagnostics interrupt part 2 Hardware interrupt of digital and analog input modules bytes x 4 to x 7 The figure below shows the structure of a hardware interrupt Figure 5 10 Structure as of Byte x 4 for hardware interrupt Note Byte x 4 You will find the event type in the device manual of the module that triggered the hardware interrupt ...

Page 284: ... frame length for the ET 200AL distributed I O system with IM157 1 DP interface module DPV1 mode is 244 bytes The minimum frame length is 6 bytes Reading out the diagnostics data Table 5 4 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7 Automation system with DP master Application See SIMATIC S7 M7 Slave diagnostics in plain text in DP Slave Diagnostics tab on STEP 7 interface Hardware diagnostics in STEP 7 o...

Page 285: ...s The figure below shows the structure of the slave diagnostics Figure 5 11 Structure of the slave diagnostics Note The length of the diagnostics frame varies with the IM 157 1 DP depending on parameter assignment between 6 and 244 bytes in DPV1 mode You can identify the length of the last received diagnostics frame in STEP 7 from the RET_VAL parameter in SFC 13 ...

Page 286: ...the configuration software 3 1 External diagnostics is available Group diagnostics display Evaluate the ID specific diagnostics the module status and or the channel diag nostics As soon as all errors have been eliminated bit 3 is reset The bit is set again when there is a new diagnostics alarm in the bytes of the aforemen tioned diagnostics 4 1 The requested function is not supported by the DP sla...

Page 287: ...nostics alarm also changes Structure of station status 3 byte 2 Table 5 7 Structure of station status 3 byte 2 Bit Meaning 0 to 6 0 Bits are always set to 0 7 1 There are more diagnostic alarms pending than the DP slave is able to store The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostics alarms sent by the DP slave in its channel diagnostics buffer 5 3 4 Master PROFIBUS address The following is stored ...

Page 288: ...ier related diagnostics indicates whether modules of the ET 200AL distributed I O system have errors or not Identifier related diagnostics starts at byte 6 and comprises 6 bytes The figure below shows how the identifier related diagnostics for the ET 200AL distributed I O system is structured with the IM 157 1 DP interface module Figure 5 12 Structure of the identifier related diagnostics ...

Page 289: ...tatus of the configured modules and provides more information on the identifier related diagnostics with respect to the configuration The module status begins after the identifier related diagnostics and comprises 13 bytes The figure below shows how the module status for the ET 200AL distributed I O system is structured with the IM 157 1 DP interface module Figure 5 13 Module status structure ...

Page 290: ... provides information about channel errors in modules and details of the identifier related diagnostics Channel diagnostics begins after the module status Channel diagnostics does not affect the module status The figure below shows how the channel diagnostics for the ET 200AL distributed I O system is structured with the IM 157 1 DP interface module Figure 5 14 Structure of channel diagnostics ...

Page 291: ...ct function I M data Yes I M0 to I M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from ver sion From V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 3 PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 Configuration control via dataset Yes Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissi...

Page 292: ...lity Yes Direct data exchange slave to slave communication Yes DPV0 Yes DPV1 Yes Interrupts diagnostics status information Diagnostics function Yes Alarms Diagnostic alarm Yes Diagnostics indication LED RUN LED Yes green LED ERROR LED Yes red LED MAINT LED Yes Yellow LED Connection display DP Yes green LED Potential separation between the load voltages Yes between PROFIBUS DP and all other circuit...

Page 293: ...odules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for supply volt age M8 4 pole ET Connection ET Connection M8 4 pin shielded Dimensions Width 45 mm Height 159 mm Depth 46 mm Weights Weight appr...

Page 294: ...S7157 1AA00 0AB0 44 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32100641 AE Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the IM 157 1 DP interface module in the front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 295: ...ipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32100641 AE 45 Cycle times B The following figure shows the cycle times at ET Connection based on the number of I O modules Figure B 1 Cycle times The cycle time is independent of the PROFIBUS transmission rate ...

Page 296: ......

Page 297: ... 0AB0 Equipment Manual 05 2021 A5E32347036 AE Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters 4 Interrupts error messages diagnostics and system alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 Dimension drawing A Cycle times B ...

Page 298: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 299: ...ts systems machines and networks against cyber threats it is necessary to implement and continuously maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be con...

Page 300: ...d block diagram 22 3 2 Pin assignment 23 4 Parameters 26 4 1 Parameters 26 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 26 5 Interrupts error messages diagnostics and system alarms 27 5 1 Status and error displays 27 5 2 Interrupts 30 5 2 1 Evaluating interrupts 30 5 2 2 Trigger a diagnostics interrupt 30 5 2 3 Triggering a hardware interrupt 31 5 2 4 Triggering an insert remove module interrupt 31 5 3 Alarm...

Page 301: ...TIC ET 200AL distributed I O system The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ...

Page 302: ...upport industry siemens com My ww en mySupport Documentation With mySupport your personal workspace you make the best out of your Industry Online Support In mySupport you can save filters favorites and tags request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests...

Page 303: ...oduct configuration You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109767888 SIMATIC Automation Tool You can use the SIMATIC Automation Tool to perform commissioning and maintenance activities simultaneously on various SIMATIC S7 stations as a bulk operation independent of TIA Portal The SIMATIC Automation Tool provides a multitude of functions...

Page 304: ...mensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage In addition SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and h...

Page 305: ...f the module Figure 2 1 View of the IM 157 1 PN interface module Properties The module has the following technical properties Connects the ET 200AL distributed I O system with PROFINET IO 24 V DC supply voltage Support for 2 ET Connection lines Dimensions 45 x 159 mm The functions supported by the module are found in the chapter Functions Page 12 ...

Page 306: ...maximum amount of I O data including user data qualifier is limited to 360 bytes per controller Accessories The following component is included with the module in the packaging Identification labels Other components The following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for PROFINET Strippin...

Page 307: ...ED displays for the current operating status and diagnostics status X1 P1 R 1st PROFINET interface X1 P2 R 2nd PROFINET interface ET CON1 ET CON2 LED displays for ET Connection X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection1 X31 Socket for ET Connection2 P1 LINK P2 LINK LED displays for the curr...

Page 308: ...P MIB 2 LLDP Port diagnostics Deactivating of ports Real time communication Isochronous real time communication Minimum update time 250 μs Media redundancy MRP Media redundancy with planned duplication MRPD Device replacement with topological configuration Device replacement without topological configuration Shared Device Identification data I M0 to I M4 Firmware update via PROFINET IO Reset to fa...

Page 309: ...stems of third party manufacturers Depending on the range of functions of the third party system Real time communication A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on a cyclic data exchange with a provider consumer model Isochronous real time communication Synchronized transmission method for cyclic exchange of IRT data between PROFINET devices A reserved bandwidth within the send clock is availa...

Page 310: ...e that another communication path is made available in the event of a transmission section failure Shared device A shared device is an IO device that provides its data to up to four IO controllers The Shared device function allows the modules or submodules of an IO device to be divided up among different IO controllers Thus allowing flexible automation concepts You have for example the possibility...

Page 311: ...ble to switch off consumers in a coordinated and centrally controlled manner during break times regardless of the manufacturer or device This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required In so doing the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself the PROFINET device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings In PROFIenergy this...

Page 312: ...vice manuals I O modules https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps 14247 man System manual PROFINET System Description https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 19292127 PROFINET with STEP 7 V14 https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 49948856 function manual section Saving energy with PROFIenergy Application guide for implementation of shutdown concepts with PROFIenergy https...

Page 313: ...nergy sequence consists of the commands Start_Pause and End_Pause Always observe this sequence during programming LED displays PROFIenergy generally has no effect on the LED display Exceptions can be found in the device manuals of the I O modules Response to error detection All channels whose pause mode is set to PE_MODE_PROCEED report errors as in productive operation The following rules apply to...

Page 314: ...ule has failed The pause is exited and can be re activated by re sending the PROFIenergy parameter assignment followed by the Start_Pause command Stop controller1 Controller failure connection interrupted 1 Firmware update Reset to factory settings Deactivating the IO device1 The I O module was pulled and plugged Station stop1 Removing an I O module The pause is exited the PROFIenergy parameter as...

Page 315: ...n of the parameters to the I O modules and returns the result as a return value of the write job In the case of a negative return value there are one or more I O modules that have not accepted the parameter data record In this case the I O modules respond according to their last PROFIenergy parameter assignment in case of an incoming Start_Pause command Start_Pause End_Pause commands can be execut...

Page 316: ...d value is re tained 4D PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE substitute value 0 2 64 Block 32 Slot number See Block 1 65 Mode 1 The specific behavior depends on the used I O module with a digital input module for example the sensor supply is turned off or the outputs are without power supply and voltage supply with an analog output module 2 An analog output module e g with the output range 0 mA to 20 mA 20 mA or a...

Page 317: ... the PROFIenergy status PE_Identify 05H Reading the supported PROFIenergy services 1 The minimum configurable pause time for the ET 200AL distributed I O system is 10 s 2 3 3 Configuration control option handling Properties Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I O system for future extensions or options Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum ...

Page 318: ...on interface 2L Load voltage 2L switched Internal supply voltage 2M Ground 2M switched X1 P1 R 1 PROFINET interface RUN LED operating state green X1 P2 R 2 PROFINET interface ERROR LED diagnostics status red X80 Infeed of supply voltages MAINT LED diagnostics status yellow X81 Loop through of supply voltages P1 LINK P2 LINK PROFINET LEDs green X30 Infeed of the ET Connection ET CON1 ET CON2 ET Con...

Page 319: ...cables Pin assignment of the sockets for PROFINET The following table shows the pin assignment of the two sockets for PROFINET Table 3 1 Pin assignment of the PROFINET sockets Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X1 P1 R Socket X1 P2 R Socket X1 P1 R X1 P2 R 1 TXP RXP 2 RXP TXP 3 TXN RXN 4 RXN TXN Shield ing Functional earth FE Note Pin assignments If you disable Autonegotiation in STEP 7 you ...

Page 320: ...socket ET Connection1 X31 socket ET Connection2 X30 X31 1 RXP RXP Yellow 2 TXP TXP White 3 TXN TXN Blue 4 RXN RXN Orange Shield ing Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The following table shows the pin assignment for infeed of the supply voltage Table 3 3 Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of t...

Page 321: ...Front view of the socket X81 Socket power output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and the supply voltage Mixing up the ET Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can destroy the mod...

Page 322: ...e ET 200AL 4 2 Explanation of the parameters Configuration control You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200AL distributed I O system Note If you configure the enable the ET 200AL distributed I O system requires a control data record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200AL distributed I O system to operate the I O modules Reference You will f...

Page 323: ...sages diagnostics and system alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the interface module IM 157 1 PN RUN green ERROR red MAINT yellow ET CON1 green ET CON2 green P2 LINK green P1 LINK green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 324: ...tion software ET 200AL starts up ET 200AL is being assigned parameters On Not rele vant Not rele vant ET 200AL is currently exchanging data with the IO controller Not rele vant Flashes Not rele vant Group error Evaluate the diagnostics and eliminate the error The preset configuration does not corre spond to the actual configuration of the ET 200AL Check the configuration of the ET 200AL to see whe...

Page 325: ...or IO controller is disconnected On There is no connection between the PROFINET interface of your PROFINET de vice and a communication partner e g IO controller Flashes The Node flash test is run the RUN ERROR and MAINT LEDs also flash LED ET CON1 LED ET CON2 Table 5 3 Status displays of the LEDs ET CON1 and ET CON2 LEDs Meaning Solution ET CON1 ET CON2 Off There are no I O modules available at th...

Page 326: ...the error OB using the instruction RALRM read additional interrupt information System diagnostics In STEP 7 TIA Portal the updated system diagnostic is available for the modules of the S7 1500 automation system IO controller CPU S7 1500 and ET 200AL IO device Independent of the cyclic user program messages are made available on the display of the CPU S7 1500 the CPU web server and the HMI device Y...

Page 327: ...upt lost from I O module Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically If the hardware interrupt load is too high hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the number of I O modules and the communication load 5 2 4 Triggering an insert remove module interrupt When an insert remove module interrupt occurs the CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the insert remove module in...

Page 328: ... diagnostics data Table 5 4 Reading the diagnostics with STEP 7 Automation system with IO controller Application See SIMATIC S7 Diagnostics as plain text in STEP 7 in online and diagnostics view STEP 7 online help STEP 7 V13 and higher Func tion Manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13 http support automation si emens com WW view en 499 48856 STEP 7 V5 5 and higher Sys tem Manual PROFINET Sys tem Descripti...

Page 329: ...errupts user program execution and processes the diagnostic block OB 82 The event that triggered the maintenance event is entered in the start information of the OB 82 The interface module signals a maintenance event to the higher level diagnostics system in the case of the following event Table 5 5 Triggering of a maintenance event Maintenance alarm Event Alarm Meaning Maintenance de manded LED M...

Page 330: ...Layer Service definition V2 2 You can download the standard on the Internet http www profibus com from home page of the PROFIBUS user organization free of charge Structure of the manufacturer specific diagnostics data records The structure of the diagnostics data records is differentiated by the BlockVersion The following BlockVersion applies to the IM 157 1 PN interface modules Table 5 6 Structur...

Page 331: ...diagnostics from the IO device are received by the IO controller in the STOP state these diagnostics do not result in a start of the organization blocks after startup of the IO controller You must read the data record E00CH in OB 100 with the RDREC instruction Return of the SIMATIC IO device If you want to read out the diagnostics of a station after the station return you must read the data record...

Page 332: ... M0 to I M4 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from ver sion From V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 3 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Configuration control via dataset Yes Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28 8 V Re...

Page 333: ... 100 Mbit s full duplex 100BASE TX Autonegotiation Yes Autocrossing Yes Protocols PROFINET IO Device Services IRT Yes 250 µs 500 µs 1 ms 2 ms 4 ms 8 ms 16 ms 32 ms 64 ms 128 ms PROFIenergy Yes Shared device Yes Number of IO Controllers with shared device max 4 Redundancy mode Media redundancy MRP Yes MRPD Yes Open IE communication TCP IP Yes SNMP Yes LLDP Yes Interrupts diagnostics status informat...

Page 334: ... related tripping of standard modules Yes From FS01 Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 25 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for supply volt age...

Page 335: ...S7157 1AB00 0AB0 Equipment Manual 05 2021 A5E32347036 AE 39 Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the IM 157 1 PN interface module in the front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 336: ... delay wait time in the interface module via PROFINET The output data from PROFINET is also transmitted without further delay via ET Connection to the I O modules Thus the cycle time of the ET Connection based on then number of I O modules is always a multiple of the configured PROFINET send clock The chart shown above shows the trend for a send clock of 0 5 ms With larger send clocks the gradatio...

Page 337: ......

Page 338: ...x24VDC 8xM8 6ES7141 5BF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32349579 AD Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 PROFIenergy 7 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 339: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 340: ...aintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary an...

Page 341: ... 3 Wiring 12 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 12 3 2 Pin assignment 13 4 Parameters address space 16 4 1 Parameters 16 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 16 4 3 Address space 17 5 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 18 5 1 Status and error displays 18 5 2 Interrupts 20 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 20 6 Technical specifications 21 7 PROFIenergy 24 7 1 Pause function 24 7 2 Behavior of the digital input module 25 ...

Page 342: ...ct manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentation free of ch...

Page 343: ...s already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system You configur...

Page 344: ...titude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU error infor...

Page 345: ...erves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verificati...

Page 346: ...8xM8 6ES7141 5BF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32349579 AD 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7141 5BF00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module ...

Page 347: ...nctions Firmware update Identification and maintenance data I M0 to I M3 Value status Quality Information PROFIenergy Accessories The following components are included in the module package Identification labels Spacers Other components The following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool ...

Page 348: ...s and display elements of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the input signal X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED displays 0 to 7 for the channel status Figure 2 2 Operator ...

Page 349: ...re connection X31 Loop through of the ET Connection DI circuit 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Microcontroller 1M Ground 1M non switched ET Connection interface 2L Load voltage 2L switched Internal supply voltage 2M Ground 2M switched X10 to X17 Channels 0 to 7 1US 24 V encoder supply X80 Infeed of supply voltages DIn Input signal X81 Loop through of supply voltages DI Channel status LEDs 0 to 7...

Page 350: ...ts Table 3 1 Pin assignment for digital inputs Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X17 sockets for digital inputs X10 X12 X14 X16 X11 X13 X15 X17 1 24 V encoder supply 1US derived from 1L non switched 3 Encoder supply ground 1M 4 Input signal DI0 Connector X10 Input signal DI1 Connector X11 Input signal DI2 Connector X12 Input signal DI3 Connector X13 Input signal DI4 Connector X14 Inp...

Page 351: ...ET Connection IN X31 socket ET Connection OUT X30 X31 1 TXP RXP Yellow 2 RXP TXP White 3 RXN TXN Blue 4 TXN RXN Orange Shield ing Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage Table 3 3 Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire...

Page 352: ...he supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the power line cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and the supply voltage Mixing ...

Page 353: ...ows the parameters for the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module Table 4 1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Module 4 2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs ...

Page 354: ...are available The value status is not available for PROFIBUS Figure 4 1 Address space Configuration options of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module You have the following configuration options Configuration 1 without value status Configuration 2 with value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital...

Page 355: ...9 AD Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 7 green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 356: ... 1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their cur rent status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned...

Page 357: ...hort circuit of encoder supply to ground 5 3 Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital input module You can read out the diagnostics alarms for example in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 3 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics...

Page 358: ...igurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from ver sion From V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 3 PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28 8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes...

Page 359: ...urrent for signal 1 typ 3 2 mA Input delay for rated value of input voltage for standard inputs at 0 to 1 min 1 2 ms at 0 to 1 max 4 8 ms at 1 to 0 min 1 2 ms at 1 to 0 max 4 8 ms Cable length unshielded max 30 m Encoder Connectable encoders 2 wire sensor Yes permissible quiescent current 2 wire sensor max 1 5 mA Interrupts diagnostics status information Alarms Diagnostic alarm Yes Parameterizable...

Page 360: ...y related tripping of standard modules Yes From FS01 Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inputs and...

Page 361: ...and Start_Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Termination of ET Co...

Page 362: ...causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off Response to error detection All channels that are in pause mode on PE_MODE_PROCEED report their diagnostic status as in productive mode The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode Encoder supply switch off upon the start of pause does not result in the Short circuit alarms During the pause error detection of Short ...

Page 363: ... off at pause Encoder supply US switched off 1 Pause substitute value 0B Value status BAD 3D PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at pause Encoder supply US switched off 1 Pause substitute value Last input value Value status BAD 4D PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Substitute value at pause Encoder supply US switched off 1 Pause substitute value Configured pause substi tute value Value status BAD 1 As there is only on...

Page 364: ...S7141 5BF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32349579 AD 27 Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 365: ......

Page 366: ...8x24VDC 4xM12 6ES7141 5AF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36680963 AB Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 PROFIenergy 7 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 367: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 368: ...sly maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessa...

Page 369: ...1 Terminal and block diagram 12 3 2 Pin assignment 13 4 Parameters address space 16 4 1 Parameters 16 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 16 4 3 Address space 17 5 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 18 5 1 Status and error displays 18 5 2 Interrupts 20 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 20 6 Technical specifications 21 6 1 Technical specifications 21 7 PROFIenergy 24 7 1 Pause function 24 7 2 Behavior of the digital ...

Page 370: ...uct manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentation free of c...

Page 371: ...s already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system You configur...

Page 372: ...ltitude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU error info...

Page 373: ...serves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verificat...

Page 374: ...xM12 6ES7141 5AF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36680963 AB 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7141 5AF00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module ...

Page 375: ...Firmware update Identification and maintenance data I M0 to I M3 Value status Quality Information PROFIenergy Accessories The following components are included in the module package Identification labels Spacers Other components The following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for ET C...

Page 376: ...and display elements of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X13 Sockets for the input signal X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED displays 0 to 7 for the channel status Figure 2 2 Operator c...

Page 377: ...tion X31 Loop through of the ET Connection 2 wire connection 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched DI circuit 1M Ground 1M non switched Microcontroller 2L Load voltage 2L switched ET Connection interface 2M Ground 2M switched Internal supply voltage 1US 24 V encoder supply X10 to X13 Channels 0 to 7 DIn Input signal X80 Infeed of supply voltages DI Channel status LEDs 0 to 7 green X81 Loop through of ...

Page 378: ... inputs Table 3 1 Pin assignment for digital inputs Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for digital inputs 1 24 V encoder supply 1US derived from 1L non switched 2 Input signal DI1 Connector X10 Input signal DI3 Connector X11 Input signal DI5 Connector X12 Input signal DI7 Connector X13 3 Encoder supply ground 1M 4 Input signal DI0 Connector X10 Input signal DI2 Connector X...

Page 379: ...ET Connection IN X31 socket ET Connection OUT X30 X31 1 TXP RXP Yellow 2 RXP TXP White 3 RXN TXN Blue 4 TXN RXN Orange Shield ing Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage Table 3 3 Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire...

Page 380: ...the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the power line cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and the supply voltage Mixing...

Page 381: ...s the parameters for the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module Table 4 1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Module 4 2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs ...

Page 382: ... is configured using the PROFINET interface module Figure 4 1 Address space Configuration options of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module You have the following configuration options Configuration 1 without value status Configuration 2 with value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital input mo...

Page 383: ...63 AB Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 7 green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 384: ... Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their cur rent status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned a...

Page 385: ...hort circuit of encoder supply to ground 5 3 Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital input module You can read out the diagnostics alarms for example in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 3 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics...

Page 386: ...g with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from ver sion V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28 8...

Page 387: ... for signal 1 11 to 30V Input current for signal 1 typ 3 2 mA Input delay for rated value of input voltage for standard inputs at 0 to 1 min 1 2 ms at 0 to 1 max 4 8 ms at 1 to 0 min 1 2 ms at 1 to 0 max 4 8 ms Cable length unshielded max 30 m Encoder Connectable encoders 2 wire sensor Yes permissible quiescent current 2 wire sensor max 1 5 mA Interrupts diagnostics status information Alarms Diagn...

Page 388: ...able for safety related tripping of standard modules Yes From FS01 Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for ...

Page 389: ...Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Termination of ET Connection1 ...

Page 390: ... is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 7 1 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at pause ...

Page 391: ...S7141 5AF00 0BA0 26 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36680963 AB Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 392: ......

Page 393: ...16x24VDC 8xM12 6ES7141 5AH00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36681813 AB Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 PROFIenergy 7 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 394: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 395: ...usly maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necess...

Page 396: ... 1 Terminal and block diagram 12 3 2 Pin assignment 13 4 Parameters address space 16 4 1 Parameters 16 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 16 4 3 Address space 17 5 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 18 5 1 Status and error displays 18 5 2 Interrupts 20 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 20 6 Technical specifications 21 6 1 Technical specifications 21 7 PROFIenergy 24 7 1 Pause function 24 7 2 Behavior of the digital...

Page 397: ...uct manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentation free of c...

Page 398: ...is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system You configu...

Page 399: ...ltitude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU error info...

Page 400: ...serves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verificat...

Page 401: ...xM12 6ES7141 5AH00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36681813 AB 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7141 5AH00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module ...

Page 402: ...ions Firmware update Identification and maintenance data I M0 to I M3 Value status Quality Information PROFIenergy Accessories The following components are included in the module package Identification labels Other components The following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for ET Conn...

Page 403: ...and display elements of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the input signal X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED displays 0 to 15 for the channel status Figure 2 2 Operator...

Page 404: ...tion X31 Loop through of the ET Connection 2 wire connection 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched DI circuit 1M Ground 1M non switched Microcontroller 2L Load voltage 2L switched ET Connection interface 2M Ground 2M switched Internal supply voltage 1US 24 V encoder supply X10 to X17 Channels 0 to 7 DIn Input signal X80 Infeed of supply voltages DI Channel status LEDs 0 to 15 green X81 Loop through of...

Page 405: ...X16 X11 X13 X15 X17 1 24 V encoder supply 1US derived from 1L non switched 2 Input signal DI1 Connector X10 Input signal DI3 Connector X11 Input signal DI5 Connector X12 Input signal DI7 Connector X13 Input signal DI9 Connector X14 Input signal DI11 Connector X15 Input signal DI13 Connector X16 Input signal DI15 Connector X17 3 Encoder supply ground 1M 4 Input signal DI0 Connector X10 Input signal...

Page 406: ... ET Connection IN X31 socket ET Connection OUT X30 X31 1 TXP RXP Yellow 2 RXP TXP White 3 RXN TXN Blue 4 TXN RXN Orange Shield ing Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage Table 3 3 Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Pin Assignment Assignment of the wir...

Page 407: ...the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the power line cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and the supply voltage Mixing...

Page 408: ...s the parameters for the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module Table 4 1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Module 4 2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs ...

Page 409: ...configured using the PROFINET interface module Figure 4 1 Address space Configuration options of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module You have the following configuration options Configuration 1 without value status Configuration 2 with value status Evaluating the value status An additional two bytes are occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital input...

Page 410: ...3 AB Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 15 green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 411: ...1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their cur rent status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned ...

Page 412: ...Short circuit of encoder supply to ground 5 3 Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event a diagnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital input module You can read out the diagnostics alarms for example in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 3 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostic...

Page 413: ...ing with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from ver sion V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28...

Page 414: ...V for signal 1 11 to 30V Input current for signal 1 typ 3 2 mA Input delay for rated value of input voltage for standard inputs at 0 to 1 min 1 2 ms at 0 to 1 max 4 8 ms at 1 to 0 min 1 2 ms at 1 to 0 max 4 8 ms Cable length unshielded max 30 m Encoder Connectable encoders 2 wire sensor Yes permissible quiescent current 2 wire sensor max 1 5 mA Interrupts diagnostics status information Alarms Diag...

Page 415: ...table for safety related tripping of standard modules Yes From FS01 Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for...

Page 416: ...d Start_Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Termination of ET Conn...

Page 417: ...t is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 7 1 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at pause...

Page 418: ...S7141 5AH00 0BA0 26 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36681813 AB Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 419: ......

Page 420: ...tal input digital output module DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 6ES7143 5BF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32349882 AD Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 PROFIenergy 7 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 421: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 422: ...ment and continuously maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a con...

Page 423: ...d display elements 12 3 Wiring 13 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 13 3 2 Pin assignment 14 4 Parameters address space 17 4 1 Parameters 17 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 18 4 3 Address space 19 5 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 21 5 1 Status and error displays 21 5 2 Interrupts 23 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 23 6 Technical specifications 24 7 PROFIenergy 28 7 1 Pause function 28 7 2 DI operating mode 2...

Page 424: ...Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the ...

Page 425: ...In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or ...

Page 426: ...tion Tool provides a multitude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Readin...

Page 427: ...ptimally and to plan reserves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to on...

Page 428: ...24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 6ES7143 5BF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32349882 AD 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7143 5BF00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 digital input digital output module ...

Page 429: ...ors Digital inputs 24 V DC supply voltage Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module Typical input delay of 3 ms Suitable for switches and proximity switches Digital outputs Rated load voltage 24 V DC Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Output current 0 5 A per output Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module Dimensions 30 x 159 mm The module supports...

Page 430: ...ng component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for ET Connection M8 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I O system http support automation siemens com WW view en 89254965 system manual ...

Page 431: ... elements of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 digital input digital output module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the input output signal PWR LED display for the load voltage 2L X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED...

Page 432: ... Connection Configured as input 3 wire connection 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Output 1M Ground 1M non switched DI DQ circuit 2L Load voltage 2L switched Microcontroller 2M Ground 2M switched Monitoring 1US 24 V encoder supply ET Connection interface DIQn Input output signal Internal supply voltage DQn Output signal DQ circuit DIQ LEDs channel status 0 1 2 and 3 green X10 to X17 Channels 0 to...

Page 433: ... Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for digital inputs digital outputs X10 X12 X11 X13 1 24 V encoder supply 1US derived from 1L non switched 3 Encoder supply ground 1M 4 Input output signal DIQ0 Connector X10 Input output signal DIQ1 Connector X11 Input output signal DIQ2 Connector X12 Input output signal DIQ3 Connector X13 NOTICE 24 V encoder supply 1US Use only the 24 V encoder supply...

Page 434: ...oltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage Table 3 4 Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the power line cable Front view of the connector X80 connector POWER input 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched ...

Page 435: ...8 6ES7143 5BF00 0BA0 16 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32349882 AD NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and the supply voltage Mixing up the ET Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can destroy the module ...

Page 436: ...module Table 4 1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics Missing load voltage 2L Disable Enable Disable Module Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Module Short circuit of encoder supply or of the output to ground Freely assignable channel 0 3 DI DQ DI Channel Reaction to CPU master STOP Shut down Keep last value Output substi tute value Shut down Module d...

Page 437: ...it of the encoder supply or output to ground Freely assignable channel n With this parameter you set whether the channel is to be operated as an input or output Reaction to CPU master STOP With this parameter you set the reaction of the digital outputs of the digital input digital output module after a CPU master STOP Shut down The digital output is de energized Keep last value The last value of t...

Page 438: ...us Quality Information QI The address space for the value status is allocated by the module if the value status is configured using the PROFINET interface module Figure 4 1 Address space DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8x8M Note Parameter assignment of the channels Parameters for the first four channels can be freely assigned For the channels 0 3 that are configured as input the corresponding values in the ...

Page 439: ...ddress space if you enable the value status for the digital input digital output module The value status of the inputs is assigned to bits 0 to 3 in input byte x 1 The value status of the outputs is assigned to bits 0 to 7 in input byte x 2 This additional information provides information regarding the validity of the digital values or channel status Bit 1 No error on channel Bit 0 Error on channe...

Page 440: ...21 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the digital input digital output module DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 7 green Load voltage 2L PWR green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 441: ...eaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their cur rent status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics LED channel status ...

Page 442: ...luate the error codes with the user program Table 5 4 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Short circuit 1H Short circuit encoder supply to ground Eliminate the short circuit Short circuit of outputs to ground Load voltage 2L missing 11H Load voltage 2L missing or too low Check the supply voltage Check the module If a short circuit o...

Page 443: ... Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from ver sion From V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 3 PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit D...

Page 444: ...usly controllable inputs all mounting positions up to 55 C max 4 Input voltage Rated value DC 24 V for signal 0 3 to 5V for signal 1 11 to 30V Input current for signal 1 typ 3 2 mA Input delay for rated value of input voltage for standard inputs at 0 to 1 min 1 2 ms at 0 to 1 max 4 8 ms at 1 to 0 min 1 2 ms at 1 to 0 max 4 8 ms Cable length unshielded max 30 m Digital outputs Number of digital out...

Page 445: ...ics status information Substitute values connectable Yes channel by channel parameterizable Alarms Diagnostic alarm Yes Parameterizable Diagnoses Short circuit Yes Outputs to M encoder supply to M module by module Diagnostics indication LED Channel status display Yes green LED for module diagnostics Yes green red LED For load voltage monitoring Yes green LED Potential separation between the load v...

Page 446: ...e for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inputs and outputs M8 3 pole Design of electrical connection for supply volt age M8 4 pole ET...

Page 447: ...PROFIenergy command Start_Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Term...

Page 448: ...rcuit is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 7 1 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at p...

Page 449: ...tion of Short circuit is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 7 2 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN...

Page 450: ... 8xM8 6ES7143 5BF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32349882 AD 31 Dimension drawing A The following figure shows the dimension drawing of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 digital input digital output module in front and side views Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 451: ......

Page 452: ...ital input digital output module DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 4xM12 6ES7143 5AF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36683613 AB Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 PROFIenergy 7 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 453: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 454: ... implement and continuously maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such...

Page 455: ...nts 12 3 Wiring 13 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 13 3 2 Pin assignment 14 4 Parameters address space 17 4 1 Parameters 17 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 18 4 3 Address space 19 5 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 21 5 1 Status and error displays 21 5 2 Interrupts 23 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 23 6 Technical specifications 24 6 1 Technical specifications 24 7 PROFIenergy 28 7 1 Pause function 28 7 2 DI ...

Page 456: ...Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the ...

Page 457: ... In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or...

Page 458: ...tion Tool provides a multitude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Readin...

Page 459: ...ptimally and to plan reserves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to on...

Page 460: ...4VDC 0 5A 4xM12 6ES7143 5AF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36683613 AB 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7143 5AF00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 4xM12 digital input digital output module ...

Page 461: ...tors Digital inputs 24 V DC supply voltage Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module Typical input delay of 3 ms Suitable for switches and proximity switches Digital outputs Rated load voltage 24 V DC Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Output current per output 0 5 A Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module Dimensions 30 x 159 mm The module support...

Page 462: ...nent can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for ET Connection M8 sealing cap M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I O system https support industry siemens com cs us en view 89254965 system manual ...

Page 463: ... elements of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 4xM12 digital input digital output module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X13 Sockets for the input output signal PWR LED display for load voltage 2L X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED di...

Page 464: ...T Connection Configured as input 2 wire connection 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Output 1M Ground 1M non switched DI DQ circuit 2L Load voltage 2L switched Microcontroller 2M Ground 2M switched Monitoring 1US 24 V encoder supply ET Connection interface DIQn Input output signal Internal supply voltage DQn Output signal DQ circuit DIQ LEDs channel status 0 1 2 and 3 green X10 to X13 Channels 0 t...

Page 465: ...e sockets X10 and X11 sockets for digital inputs digital outputs X10 X11 1 24 V encoder supply 1US derived from 1L non switched 2 Input output signal DIQ1 Connector X10 Input output signal DIQ3 Connector X11 3 Encoder supply ground 1M 4 Input output signal DIQ0 Connector X10 Input output signal DIQ2 Connector X11 5 Functional earth FE NOTICE 24 V encoder supply 1US Use only the 24 V encoder supply...

Page 466: ... the sockets X30 socket ET Connection IN X31 socket ET Connection OUT X30 X31 1 TXP RXP Yellow 2 RXP TXP White 3 RXN TXN Blue 4 TXN RXN Orange Shield ing Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage Table 3 4 Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Pin Assignmen...

Page 467: ... 3 5 Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the power line cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and th...

Page 468: ...odule Table 4 1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics Missing load voltage 2L Disable Enable Disable Module Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Module Short circuit of encoder supply or of the output to ground Freely assignable channel 0 3 DI DQ DI Channel Reaction to CPU master STOP Shut down Keep last value Output substi tute value Shut down Module di...

Page 469: ...it of the encoder supply or output to ground Freely assignable channel n With this parameter you set whether the channel is to be operated as an input or output Reaction to CPU master STOP With this parameter you set the reaction of the digital outputs of the digital input digital output module after a CPU master STOP Shut down The digital output is de energized Keep last value The last value of t...

Page 470: ...e if the value status is configured using the PROFINET interface module Figure 4 1 Address space Note Parameter assignment of the channels Parameters for the first four channels can be freely assigned For the channels 0 3 that are configured as input the corresponding values in the output data do not trigger any reaction For the channels 0 3 that are configured as output the input value in the pro...

Page 471: ... of the inputs is assigned to bits 0 to 3 in input byte x 1 The value status of the outputs is assigned to bits 0 to 7 in input byte x 2 This additional information provides information regarding the validity of the digital values or channel status Bit 1 No error on channel Bit 0 Error on channel If the channel is configured as input this means Short circuit to ground at sensor supply or Parameter...

Page 472: ...21 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the digital input digital output module DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 4xM12 Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 7 green Load voltage 2L PWR green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 473: ...aning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their cur rent status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics LED channel status T...

Page 474: ... evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 4 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Short circuit 1H Short circuit encoder supply to ground Eliminate the short circuit Short circuit of outputs to ground Load voltage 2L missing 11H Load voltage 2L missing or too low Check the supply voltage Check the module If a short circu...

Page 475: ... 5A HW functional status FS03 Firmware version V1 0 x Product function I M data Yes I M0 to I M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from version V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Supply voltage Load vo...

Page 476: ...Digital inputs Number of digital inputs 4 Parameterizable as DIQ Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131 type 3 Yes Number of simultaneously controllable inputs all mounting positions up to 55 C max 4 Input voltage Rated value DC 24 V for signal 0 3 to 5V for signal 1 11 to 30V Input current for signal 1 typ 3 2 mA Input delay for rated value of input voltage for standard inputs at...

Page 477: ...ncoders 2 wire sensor Yes permissible quiescent current 2 wire sen sor max 1 5 mA Interrupts diagnostics status information Substitute values connectable Yes channel by channel parameterizable Alarms Diagnostic alarm Yes Parameterizable Diagnoses Short circuit Yes Outputs to M encoder supply to M module by module Diagnostics indication LED Channel status display Yes green LED for module diagnostic...

Page 478: ...From FS01 Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inputs and outputs M12 5 pole Design of electrical co...

Page 479: ...FIenergy command Start_Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Termina...

Page 480: ...ircuit is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 7 1 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at ...

Page 481: ...ction of Short circuit is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 7 2 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MODE_SHUTDOW...

Page 482: ...A 4xM12 6ES7143 5AF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36683613 AB 31 Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 4xM12 digital input digital output module in front and side views Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 483: ......

Page 484: ...Digital input Digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 6ES7143 5AH00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E38688112 AD Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Configuration modes for digital inputs outputs 3 Counting 4 Technical specifications 5 PROFIenergy 6 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 485: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 486: ...mplement and continuously maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a...

Page 487: ...rs 23 3 3 3 Address space 24 3 4 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 27 3 4 1 Status and error displays 27 3 4 2 Interrupts 29 3 4 3 Diagnostics alarms 29 4 Counting 30 4 1 Configuration method 2xCount 32 4 1 1 Wiring 32 4 1 1 1 Terminal and block diagram 32 4 1 1 2 Pin assignment 33 4 1 2 Parameters address space 36 4 1 2 1 Parameters 36 4 1 2 2 Explanation of the parameters 39 4 1 2 3 Assignment of the...

Page 488: ...ssignment of the control interface 62 4 2 2 4 Explanations on the control interface 63 4 2 2 5 Assignment of the feedback interface 63 4 2 2 6 Explanations for the feedback interface 65 4 2 3 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 67 4 2 3 1 Status and error displays 67 4 2 3 2 Interrupts 69 4 2 3 3 Diagnostics alarms 70 4 3 Examples of counting 71 5 Technical specifications 77 6 PROFIenergy 81 6 1 Pause fu...

Page 489: ...vice information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the do...

Page 490: ...n addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or C...

Page 491: ...on Tool provides a multitude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading ...

Page 492: ...imally and to plan reserves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to onli...

Page 493: ...VDC 0 5A 8xM12 6ES7143 5AH00 0BA0 10 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E38688112 AD Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7143 5AH00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the digital input digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 ...

Page 494: ...ts Rated load voltage 24 V DC Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Output current per output 0 5 A Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module Counters Configuration method 2xCount or 4xCount with 2 or 4 counters Counting frequency 2 kHz Counting width 32 bits Counting direction parameterizable or controllable via direction input GATE function controllable via th...

Page 495: ...nt can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for ET Connection M8 sealing cap M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I O system https support industry siemens com cs us en view 89254965 system manual ...

Page 496: ...ay elements of the digital input digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the input output signal PWR LED display for load voltage 2L X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED disp...

Page 497: ... you information about the validity of the digital values and the channel status DQ16 All channels 0 15 are configured as outputs DI8 DQ8 Channels 0 7 are configured as inputs and channels 8 15 are configured as outputs DIQ MIX The channels 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 and 16 have a fixed configuration as outputs the channels 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 and 15 have a fixed configuration as inputs Note Project engineeri...

Page 498: ...on Monitoring X31 Loop through of the ET Connection ET Connection interface 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Internal supply voltage 1M Ground 1M non switched DI DQ circuit 2L switched 2L Load voltage 2L switched Parameterized as inputs 2 wire connection 2M Ground 2M switched Parameterized as outputs 1US 24 V encoder supply Configured as input 3 wire connection 2US 24 V encoder supply Configured ...

Page 499: ...ital inputs digital outputs in the configuration modes DIQ and DIQ with value status The tables below show the pin assignments of the 8 sockets for connection of the digital inputs digital outputs Table 3 1 Pin assignment for digital inputs digital outputs Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for digital inputs outputs X10 X12 X11 X13 1 24 V encoder supply 1US derived from 1...

Page 500: ...ut signal DIQ14 Connector X17 5 Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the sockets for digital inputs digital outputs in the configuration mode DQ16 The tables below show the pin assignments of the 8 sockets for connection of the digital inputs digital outputs in the configuration mode DQ16 In this configuration mode socket pins 2 and 4 are always permanently assigned to output signals Table 3 3 Pi...

Page 501: ... digital inputs digital outputs in the configuration mode DI8 DQ8 The tables below show the pin assignments of the 8 sockets for connection of the digital inputs digital outputs in the configuration mode DI8 DQ8 In this configuration mode pins 2 and 4 for the sockets X10 to X13 are always permanently assigned to the input signals pins 2 and 4 for the sockets X14 to X17 are always permanently assig...

Page 502: ...Pin assignment of the sockets for digital inputs digital outputs in the configuration mode DIQ MIX The tables below show the pin assignments of the 8 sockets for connection of the digital inputs digital outputs in the configuration mode DIQ MIX In this configuration mode socket pin 2 is always permanently assigned to input signals pin 4 is always permanently assigned to output signals Table 3 7 Pi...

Page 503: ...nt of the sockets for ET Connection The table below shows the pin assignments of the 2 sockets for the connection of ET Connection Table 3 9 Pin assignment for ET Connection Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the bus line cable for ET Connection Front view of the sockets X30 socket ET Connection IN X31 socket ET Connection OUT X30 X31 1 TXP RXP Yellow 2 RXP TXP White 3 RXN TXN Blue 4 T...

Page 504: ...ly voltage Table 3 11 Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the core color of the power cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Conne...

Page 505: ...stics Missing load voltage 2L Disable Enable Disable Module Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Module Short circuit of encoder supply or of the output to ground Reaction to CPU master STOP Shut down Keep last value Output substi tute value Shut down Module digital outputs Freely configurable channel DI DQ DI Channel Substitute value channel 0 1 0 Channel digital outputs Inp...

Page 506: ...nput or output You can only set this parameter in the DIQ and DIQ with value status configuration modes Reaction to CPU master STOP With this parameter you set the reaction of the channels configured as output of the digital input output module after a CPU master STOP Deactivate The digital output is de energized Keep last value The last value of the digital output remains activated Output substit...

Page 507: ...nt of the channels In the configuration modes for digital inputs and outputs either all channels are user configurable or all channels have a fixed configuration depending on the configuration For the channels that are configured as an input the corresponding values in the output data do not trigger any reaction For the channels that are configured as an output the input value in the process image...

Page 508: ...e digital input digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 with value status Quality Information QI in the configuration method DIQ The address space for the value status is allocated by the module if the value status is configured using the PROFINET interface module Figure 3 3 Address space in DIQ with value status configuration mode Configuration mode DQ16 In DQ16 configuration mode the addre...

Page 509: ...luating the value status An additional four bytes are occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital input digital output module The value status of the inputs is assigned to the input bytes x 2 and x 3 The value status of the outputs is assigned to the input bytes x 4 and x 5 This additional information provides information regarding the validity of the digital...

Page 510: ...ent Manual 08 2021 A5E38688112 AD 27 3 4 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 3 4 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the digital input module digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 15 green Load voltage 2L PWR green Figure 3 7 LED displays ...

Page 511: ...LED Meaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their cur rent status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics LED channel st...

Page 512: ...r codes with the user program Table 3 16 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short circuit1 1H Short circuit of an encoder sup ply to ground Eliminate the short circuit Short circuit of an output to ground Parameter as signment error 10H Module parameter assignment is faulty Correction of the parameter assignment Load voltage 2L m...

Page 513: ...e configurable and can be modified during runtime using the user program The maximum adjustable count limit amounts to 2147483647 231 1 The maximum adjustable count limit amounts to 2147483648 231 You can continue or stop counting automatic gate stop on violation of a counting limit At an overflow or underflow of the count value one event bit is respectively set in the feedback interface The count...

Page 514: ... DI7 You can activate and use the direction inputs in the 2xCount configuration method by using parameterization Overview of configuration methods The following table shows a list of the channel properties for the configuration methods 2xCount and 4xCount You can count with DI0 and DI2 configuration method 2xCount or respectively with DI0 DI2 DI4 and DI6 configuration method 4xCount Table 4 1 Conf...

Page 515: ...witched X81 Loop through of supply voltages Microcontroller X30 Infeed of the ET Connection Monitoring X31 Loop through of the ET Connection ET Connection interface 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Internal supply voltage 1M Ground 1M non switched DI DQ circuit 2L switched 2L Load voltage 2L switched Counting input counter 2M Ground 2M switched DQ for counters 1US 24 V encoder supply Gate start s...

Page 516: ...els Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for counting channels X10 X12 X11 X13 1 24 V encoder supply 1US derived from 1L non switched 2 Count output for Counter 0 Connector X10 Counting output for Counter 1 Connector X11 Counting direction of Counter 0 or Input signal DI5 Connector X12 Counting direction of Counter 1 or Input signal DI7 Connector X13 3 Ground 1M 4 Count inpu...

Page 517: ... signal DIQ15 Connector X17 3 Ground 2M 4 Input output signal DIQ8 Connector X14 Input output signal DIQ10 Connector X15 Input output signal DIQ12 Connector X16 Input output signal DIQ14 Connector X17 5 Functional earth FE NOTICE 24 V encoder supply 2US Use only the 24 V encoder supply 2US provided by the digital input digital output module to supply power to the encoder Pin assignment of the sock...

Page 518: ...d White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black Pin assignment of the socket for loop through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop through of the supply voltage Table 4 6 Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the core color of the power cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1...

Page 519: ... Default Scope Diagnostics Missing load voltage 2L Disable Enable Disable Module Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Module Short circuit of encoder supply or of the output to ground Behavior at CPU master STOP 8 15 Shut down Keep last value Output substitute value Shut down Module digital outputs The following table shows the parameters of Counter 0 and Counter 1 Table 4 8 ...

Page 520: ...er low limit2 2147483648 214748364 7 0 Counter Behavior Counter 0 DQ1 Counter 1 DQ3 Behavior DQ Count value between a comparison value and the high counting limit Count value between a comparison value and the low counting limit Count value between a com parison value and the high counting limit Counter Hardware interrupt DQ Inactive Comparison event for DQ has occurred Inactive Counter Behavior a...

Page 521: ...elay DI 0 05 ms 0 1 ms 0 4 ms 0 8 ms 1 6 ms 3 2 ms 12 8 ms 20 ms 3 2 ms Counter 1 Is ignored if DI5 DI7 is parameterized as the direction input 2 Cannot be parameterized with GSD file The table below shows the parameters of the freely assignable Channels 8 15 Table 4 9 Parameter freely assignable Channels 8 15 Parameter Value range Default Scope Freely assignable channel DI DQ DI Channel Substitut...

Page 522: ...energized Keep last value The last value of the digital output remains activated Output substitute value The digital output outputs a configured substitute value Parameter counting function Input delay DI This parameter can be used to suppress signal faults Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time Note Influences the counting frequ...

Page 523: ...iolated in the downward direction Stop counting After a counting limit is violated the internal gate is closed This stops the counting process The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit To start the counting process again you must close and reopen the SW gate Continue counting After a counting limit is violated the counter value is set to the opposite counting limit and counting conti...

Page 524: ...ster STOP Behavior DQ Continue Signal state of the count output continues to be controlled by comparison conditions Output substitute value The count output outputs a configured substitute value Note Count value at CPU Master STOP Independently of the selected reaction of the count output the count value continues to change during a CPU Master STOP depending on the input edge counting continues Su...

Page 525: ...t the counter forwards With signal 1 at the digital input the counter counts backwards Digital input without function No counting function is assigned to the digital input It functions like a standard digital input Parameter freely assignable Channels 8 15 Freely assignable channel With this parameter you set whether the channel is to be operated as an input or output Input delay channel This para...

Page 526: ... and the channels 8 15 of the module parameterized as an output The figure below shows the address assignment of the module in the process image output in the configuration method 2xCount At Counter 0 x stands for the output byte QB 2 in this case at Counter 1 you add 6 bytes to this output byte When you assign a different start address to the digital input digital output module the byte sequence ...

Page 527: ...every start of the counting process Both cases also apply at a parameterized HW gate as long as and until the SW gate is closed SW_GATE With this bit you open and close the SW gate of the respective counter Together with the hardware gate the software gate forms the internal gate The module only counts when the internal gate is open 0 means Software gate closed 1 means Software gate open RES_EVENT...

Page 528: ...iguration method 2xCount Digital input Digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 6ES7143 5AH00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E38688112 AD 45 Figure 4 3 Address space feedback interface configuration method 2xCount ...

Page 529: ...GATE This bit shows the status of the software gate 0 means Software gate closed 1 means Software gate open LD_STS_SLOT This bit indicates through a status change toggling for the respective counter that loading of the control interface has been carried out successfully LD_ERROR This bit indicates for the respective counter that an error has occurred during loading of the control interface The loa...

Page 530: ...wledgment principle The figure below shows an example for the course of the complete acknowledgment principle at an overflow The feedback bit EVENT_OFLW is set as a storing event at an overflow bit The set the control bit RES_EVENT_OFLW in order to initiate resetting of EVENT_OFLW The feedback bit RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK is set when the resetting of EVENT_OFLW has been recognized You reset the control ...

Page 531: ... A5E38688112 AD 4 1 3 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 4 1 3 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the digital input module digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 15 green Load voltage 2L PWR green Figure 4 5 LED displays ...

Page 532: ...supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their cur rent status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics LED channel status Table 4 13 LED...

Page 533: ...r Short circuit of an output to ground Load voltage 2L missing or too low Parameter assignment error Hardware interrupt The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following event Comparison event occurred for DQ For detailed information on the error event refer to the hardware interrupt organization block with the RALRM instruction read additional interrupt info and to the STEP 7 online help...

Page 534: ... of an encoder sup ply to ground Eliminate the short circuit Short circuit of an output to ground Parameter as signment error 10H Module parameter assignment is faulty Correction of the parameter assignment Load voltage 2L missing2 11H Load voltage 2L missing or too low Check the supply voltage Check the module Hardware inter rupt lost 16H At least one hardware interrupt could not be signaled beca...

Page 535: ...on Terminal and block diagram Page 15 DI DQ circuit 1L non switched X30 Infeed of the ET Connection Microcontroller X31 Loop through of the ET Connection Monitoring 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched ET Connection interface 1M Ground 1M non switched Internal supply voltage 2L Load voltage 2L switched DI DQ circuit 2L switched 2M Ground 2M switched Counting input counter 1US 24 V encoder supply DQ f...

Page 536: ...els Table 4 16 Pin assignment for counting channels Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for counting channels X10 X12 X11 X13 1 24 V encoder supply 1US derived from 1L non switched 2 Count output for Counter 0 Connector X10 Counting output for Counter 1 Connector X11 Counting output for Counter 2 Connector X12 Counting output for Counter 3 Connector X13 3 Ground 1M 4 Count ...

Page 537: ...signal DIQ15 Connector X17 3 Ground 2M 4 Input output signal DIQ8 Connector X14 Input output signal DIQ10 Connector X15 Input output signal DIQ12 Connector X16 Input output signal DIQ14 Connector X17 5 Functional earth FE NOTICE 24 V encoder supply 2US Use only the 24 V encoder supplies 2US provided by the digital input digital output module to supply power to the encoder Pin assignment of the soc...

Page 538: ...d White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black Pin assignment of the socket for loop through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop through of the supply voltage Table 4 20 Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the core color of the power cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output ...

Page 539: ...Diagnostics Missing load voltage 2L Disable Enable Disable Module Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Module Short circuit of the encoder supply or of the output to ground Behavior at CPU master STOP 8 15 Shut down Keep last value Output substitute value Shut down Module digital outputs The table below shows the parameters of Counter 0 to Counter 3 Table 4 22 Parameters of C...

Page 540: ...648 2147483 647 2147483647 Counter Low counting limit1 2147483648 2147483 647 0 Counter Behavior Counter 0 DQ1 Counter 1 DQ3 Counter 2 DQ5 Counter 3 DQ7 Behavior DQ Count value between a comparison value and the high count ing limit Count value between a comparison value and the low counting limit Count value be tween a compari son value and the high counting limit Counter Hardware interrupt DQ In...

Page 541: ...ts See also Pin assignment Page 53 4 2 2 2 Explanation of the parameters General parameters Diagnostics Missing load voltage 2L Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient load voltage 2L Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics at short circuit of an encoder supply or of an output to ground Behavior at CPU master STOP 8 15 With this parameter you set the reactio...

Page 542: ...e The respective counter counts all the rising edges at the counter input At falling edge The respective counter counts all the falling edges at the counter input Behavior when a counting limit is exceeded With this parameter you select the behavior when the high counting limit is violated in the upward direction or the low counting limit is violated in the downward direction Stop counting After a...

Page 543: ...e High counting limit or Count value between a comparison value and the low counting limit Low counting limit Count value Comparison value Hardware interrupt DQ With this parameter you specify whether or not a hardware interrupt is generated by the event Comparison event occurred for DQ Behavior at CPU master STOP for DQ With this parameter you set the reaction of the count output of a counter aft...

Page 544: ... 8 15 Freely assignable channel With this parameter you set whether the channel is to be operated as an input or output Input delay channel This parameter can be used to suppress signal interference Changes to the signal are only detected if they are constantly pending longer than the set input delay time Substitute value channel With this parameter you set substitute values for the digital output...

Page 545: ...5 of the module parameterized as an output The figure below shows the address assignment of the module in the process image output in the configuration method 4xCount At Counter 0 x stands for the output byte QB 2 in this case at Counters 1 to 3 you add 6 bytes 12 bytes and 18 bytes respectively to this output byte When you assign a different start address to the digital input digital output modul...

Page 546: ... with the current count value at every start of the counting process Both cases apply as long as and until the SW gate is closed SW_GATE With this bit you open and close the SW gate of the respective counter The module only counts when the software gate is open 0 means Software gate closed 1 means Software gate open RES_EVENT_UFLW With this bit you trigger the resetting of the stored event in the ...

Page 547: ...iguration method 4xCount Digital input Digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 6ES7143 5AH00 0BA0 64 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E38688112 AD Figure 4 9 Address space feedback interface configuration method 4xCount ...

Page 548: ... software gate 0 means Software gate closed 1 means Software gate open LD_STS_SLOT This bit indicates through a status change toggling for the respective counter that loading of the control interface has been carried out successfully LD_ERROR This bit indicates for the respective counter that an error has occurred during loading of the control interface The load value was not accepted One of the f...

Page 549: ...wledgment principle The figure below shows an example for the course of the complete acknowledgment principle at an overflow The feedback bit EVENT_OFLW is set as a storing event at an overflow bit The set the control bit RES_EVENT_OFLW in order to initiate resetting of EVENT_OFLW The feedback bit RES_EVENT_OFLW_ACK is set when the resetting of EVENT_OFLW has been recognized You reset the control ...

Page 550: ...E38688112 AD 67 4 2 3 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 4 2 3 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the digital input module digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 15 green Load voltage 2L PWR green Figure 4 11 LED displays ...

Page 551: ...supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their cur rent status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics LED channel status Table 4 27 LED...

Page 552: ...r Short circuit of an output to ground Load voltage 2L missing or too low Parameter assignment error Hardware interrupt The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following event Comparison event occurred for DQ For detailed information on the error event refer to the hardware interrupt organization block with the RALRM instruction read additional interrupt info and to the STEP 7 online help...

Page 553: ... of an encoder sup ply to ground Eliminate the short circuit Short circuit of an output to ground Parameter as signment error 10H Module parameter assignment is faulty Correction of the parameter assignment Load voltage 2L missing2 11H Load voltage 2L missing or too low Check the supply voltage Check the module Hardware inter rupt lost 16H At least one hardware interrupt could not be signaled beca...

Page 554: ...rocess starts again depends on the content of the control interface These conditions only apply if you do not use a HW gate configuration method 2xCount Behavior DQ Count value between a comparison value and the high counting limit counting direction forward The following section shows the behavior of the count output with the parameter assignment Set output DQ Count value between a comparison val...

Page 555: ...put with the parameter assignment Set output DQ Between a comparison value and the low counting limit The count output is set to 1 if the current values lies between the comparison value and the low count limit You can optionally enable a hardware interrupt through the parameterization This is generated with the rising edge of the count output The following figure shows an example of the signal st...

Page 556: ...tion with Behavior when a counting limit is exceeded Stop counting If you set the HW gate to 1 via the control input the counting process is started If you set the HW gate to 0 the counting process stops Note that the counting process also stops if you close the SW gate while the HW gate is opened HW gate ans SW gate together form the internal gate The module only counts when the internal gate is ...

Page 557: ...zed the digital input of a counter as a direction input you can change the counting direction via corresponding signals at this input Irrespective of the parameterization the counter always forward id the signal state 0 is set at direction input or respectively backward if the signal state is 1 If you change the counting direction via a signal change at the direction input the edge detection risin...

Page 558: ...ve entered the bit string 011 in the control byte of the control interface This bit string loads the value defined in the load value SLOT as the start value of the counter via the load request LD_SLOT After the high counting limit is violated counting is aborted counting stops and the counted value jumps to the low counting limit The bit STS_GATE is reset in the feedback interface the bit EVENT_OF...

Page 559: ... interface Page 62 After the low counting limit is underpassed the counted value jumps to the high counting limit and counting is continued The bit STS_GATE is not reset when a count limit is exceeded The following figure shows an example of the principle of stopping counting when the low count limit is exceeded counting direction backward The behavior Behavior DQ is set to Count value between a c...

Page 560: ...on I M data Yes I M0 to I M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V14 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from version V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Operating mode DI Yes Counter Yes DQ Yes Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V pe...

Page 561: ...umber of digital inputs 16 Parameterizable as DIQ Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131 type 3 Yes Number of simultaneously controllable inputs all mounting positions up to 55 C max 16 Digital input functions parameterizable Freely usable digital input Yes Counter Yes Number max 4 Counting frequency max 2 kHz Counting width 32 bit Incl sign Counting direction up down Yes Input vo...

Page 562: ...on values Yes Freely usable digital output Yes Switching capacity of the outputs on lamp load max 5 W Load resistance range lower limit 48 Ω upper limit 4 kΩ Output voltage for signal 1 min L 0 8 V Output current for signal 1 rated value 0 5 A for signal 0 residual current max 0 5 mA Switching frequency with resistive load max 100 Hz with inductive load max 0 5 Hz on lamp load max 1 Hz Total curre...

Page 563: ...oring Yes green LED Potential separation between the load voltages Yes Potential separation channels between the channels in groups of 8 between the channels and backplane bus Yes between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No 8 channels are non isolated and 8 channels are isolated from supply voltage 1L Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC type test Degree and class of protec...

Page 564: ...and Start_Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Termination of ET Co...

Page 565: ... is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 6 1 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at pause ...

Page 566: ...e error detection of Short circuit is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 6 2 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_...

Page 567: ...nels that belong to a counter must have the same PROFIenergy behavior If substitute value behavior is parameterized this also has to be the same for all channels of a counter If the PROFIenergy behavior is not the same for all the channels of a counter the module rejects the PROFIenergy parameterization Further information on the assignment of the counting channels for the configuration method 2xC...

Page 568: ...A 8xM12 6ES7143 5AH00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E38688112 AD 85 Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 digital input digital output module in front and side views Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 569: ...Equipment Manual Digital output module DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 6ES7142 5AF00 0BA0 ET 200AL 08 2021 Edition SIMATIC support industry siemens com ...

Page 570: ...ital output module DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 6ES7142 5AF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36683723 AB Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 PROFIenergy 7 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 571: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 572: ...and continuously maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connecti...

Page 573: ...Wiring 12 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 12 3 2 Pin assignment 13 4 Parameters address space 16 4 1 Parameters 16 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 17 4 3 Address space 18 5 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 19 5 1 Status and error displays 19 5 2 Interrupts 21 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 21 6 Technical specifications 22 6 1 Technical specifications 22 7 PROFIenergy 25 7 1 Pause function 25 7 2 Behavior of ...

Page 574: ...rmation Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentati...

Page 575: ...n your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system...

Page 576: ...rovides a multitude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CP...

Page 577: ...d to plan reserves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan a...

Page 578: ...x24VDC 2A 8xM12 6ES7142 5AF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36683723 AB 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7142 5AF00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 digital output module ...

Page 579: ...odule Dimensions 45 x 159 mm The module supports the following functions Firmware update Identification and maintenance data I M0 to I M3 Value status Quality Information PROFIenergy Accessories The following components are included in the module package Identification labels Other components The following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be...

Page 580: ...lay elements of the DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 digital output module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the output signal PWR LED display for load voltage 2L X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED displays 0 to 7 for the cha...

Page 581: ...o 2L X30 Infeed of the ET Connection DQ circuit 1L X31 Loop through of the ET Connection DQ circuit 2L 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Microcontroller 1M Ground 1M non switched Monitoring 2L Load voltage 2L switched ET Connection interface 2M Ground 2M switched Internal supply voltage 1US 24 V encoder supply X80 Infeed of supply voltages DQn Output signal X81 Loop through of supply voltages DQ C...

Page 582: ...r connection of the digital outputs Table 3 1 Pin assignment for digital outputs Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X17 sockets for digital outputs X10 X12 X14 X16 X11 X13 X15 X17 1 Unassigned 2 Unassigned 3 X10 X13 Ground 1M X14 X17 Ground 2M 4 Output signal DQ0 Connector X10 Output signal DQ1 Connector X11 Output signal DQ2 Connector X12 Output signal DQ3 Connector X13 Output signal...

Page 583: ...s X30 socket ET Connection IN X31 socket ET Connection OUT X30 X31 1 TXP RXP Yellow 2 RXP TXP White 3 RXN TXN Blue 4 TXN RXN Orange Shield ing Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage Table 3 3 Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Pin Assignment Assignmen...

Page 584: ...signment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the power line cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and the supply vo...

Page 585: ...DC 2A 8xM12 digital output module Table 4 1 Parameters Parameters Value range Default Scope Diagnostics Missing load voltage 2L Disable Enable Disable Module Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Module Short circuit of the output to ground Reaction to CPU master STOP Shut down Keep last value Output substi tute value Shut down Module Substitute value channel 0 7 0 1 0 Channel...

Page 586: ...ics Short circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics for short circuit of the output to ground Reaction to CPU master STOP With this parameter you set the reaction of the digital outputs of the module after a CPU master STOP Shut down The digital output is de energized Keep last value The last value of the digital output remains activated Output substitute value The module outputs a configured ...

Page 587: ...Configuration options of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 You have the following configuration options Configuration 1 without value status Configuration 2 with value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the digital output module The value status of the outputs is assigned to bits 0 to 7 in inpu...

Page 588: ...19 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the digital output module DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 7 green Load voltage 2L PWR green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 589: ...o supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their cur rent status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics LED channel status Table 5 2 LE...

Page 590: ...gnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital output module You can read out the diagnostics alarms for example from the diagnostics buffer of the CPU You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 4 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Short circuit 1H Short circuit of outputs to ground Elimina...

Page 591: ...Yes I M0 to I M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from ver sion V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissibl...

Page 592: ...r signal 1 permissible range max 2 A with inductive load to IEC 60947 5 1 DC 13 AC 15 for signal 0 residual current max 0 5 mA Switching frequency with resistive load max 100 Hz with inductive load max 0 1 Hz 0 25 Hz at 25 C on lamp load max 1 Hz Total current of the outputs Current per group max 4 A For inductive load max 2 channels per group Cable length unshielded max 30 m Interrupts diagnostic...

Page 593: ...h 707 V DC type test Standards approvals certificates Suitable for safety related tripping of standard modules Yes From FS01 Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 5...

Page 594: ...ergy command Start_Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Termination...

Page 595: ...rror detection of Short circuit is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 7 1 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MOD...

Page 596: ...A 8xM12 6ES7142 5AF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E36683723 AB 27 Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 digital output module in front and side views Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 597: ......

Page 598: ...I 4xU I RTD 4xM12 6ES7144 5KD00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32350124 AG Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 PROFIenergy 7 Dimension drawing A Representation of analog values B ...

Page 599: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 600: ...resent manual the system manual and the function manuals enables you to commission the ET 200AL distributed I O system Changes compared to previous version Compared to the previous version this manual contains the following adaptations in the section Technical specifications Page 38 Conventions Also observe notes marked as follows Note A note contains important information on the product described...

Page 601: ...d components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures e g firewalls and or network segmentation are in place For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented please visit https www siemens com industrialsecurity Siemens products and solutions un...

Page 602: ... 4 3 Explanation of the parameters 26 4 4 Address space 29 5 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 31 5 1 Status and error displays 31 5 2 Interrupts 33 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 35 6 Technical specifications 38 7 PROFIenergy 43 7 1 Pause function 43 7 2 Response of the analog input module 44 A Dimension drawing 46 B Representation of analog values 47 B 1 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ...

Page 603: ...mation Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentatio...

Page 604: ...your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system Y...

Page 605: ...ovides a multitude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU...

Page 606: ... to plan reserves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan an...

Page 607: ...xU I RTD 4xM12 6ES7144 5KD00 0BA0 10 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32350124 AG Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7144 5KD00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the analog input module AI 4xU I RTD 4xM12 ...

Page 608: ...nection Resolution 16 bit Dimensions 30 x 159 mm Configurable diagnostics can be set for each channel Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel two high and two low limits per channel The module supports the following functions Firmware update Identification and maintenance data I M0 to I M3 Value status Quality Information PROFIenergy Note Process values during startup As long ...

Page 609: ...ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for ET Connection M8 sealing cap M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I O system http support automation siemens com WW view en 89254965 system manual ...

Page 610: ...r controls and display elements of the analog input module AI 4xU I RTD 4xM12 DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X13 Sockets for the input signal X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED displays 0 to 3 for the channel status Figure 2 ...

Page 611: ... 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Current measurement 4 DMU with external power supply 1M Ground 1M non switched Multiplexer 2L Load voltage 2L switched Analog to digital converter ADC 2M Ground 2M switched Microcontroller Mn Measuring input positive channel n ET Connection interface Mn Measuring input negative channel n Internal supply voltage UV 24 V encoder supply X10 to X13 Channels 0 to 3 AI...

Page 612: ...Supply voltage 1L non switched Analog to digital converter ADC 1M Ground 1M non switched Microcontroller 2L Load voltage 2L switched ET Connection interface 2M Ground 2M switched Internal supply voltage Mn Measuring input positive channel n X10 to X13 Channels 0 to 3 Mn Measuring input negative channel n X80 Infeed of supply voltages Icn Icn Current output current feed RTD R channel n X81 Loop thr...

Page 613: ... X13 sockets for analog inputs voltage measurement 1 24 V encoder supply 1US derived from 1L non switched 2 Reserved 3 Encoder supply ground 1M 4 Measuring input M0 Connector X10 Measuring input M1 Connector X11 Measuring input M2 Connector X12 Measuring input M3 Connector X13 5 Functional earth FE Shield Functional earth FE Table 3 2 Pin assignment of the sockets for analog inputs current measure...

Page 614: ...c0 M0 Connector X10 Measurement cable Ic1 M1 Connector X11 Measurement cable Ic2 M2 Connector X12 Measurement cable Ic3 M3 Connector X13 4 Reserved 5 Functional earth FE Shield Functional earth FE Table 3 4 Pin assignment of the sockets for analog inputs RTD R 3 wire connection Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for analog inputs RTD R 3 wire connection 1 Constant current ...

Page 615: ... 2 sockets for the connection of ET Connection Table 3 5 Pin assignment for ET Connection Pin Assignment Assignment of the core color of the bus cable for ET Connection Front view of the sockets X30 socket ET Connection IN X31 socket ET Connection OUT X30 X31 1 TXP RXP yellow 2 RXP TXP white 3 RXN TXN blue 4 TXN RXN orange Shield Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of th...

Page 616: ...signment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the core color of the power cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched brown 2 Ground 2M switched white 3 Ground 1M non switched blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and the supply voltage...

Page 617: ...activated Voltage 1 V to 5 V 0 V to 10 V max 16 bit Current 4 wire transduc er 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA max 16 bit Current 2 wire transduc er 4 mA to 20 mA max 16 bit Resistance 3 wire connection Resistance 2 wire connection 150 Ω 300 Ω max 15 bit Resistance thermometer 3 wire connection Resistance thermometer 2 wire connection Pt 100 climatic range Pt 100 standard range Pt 0 003850 Pt 0 003916...

Page 618: ...he effective range of the parameters that can be set depends on the type of configuration The following configurations are possible Distributed operation on PROFINET IO Distributed operation with PROFIBUS DP NOTICE Match of encoder and parameters The default setting of the analog inputs is voltage measurement 1 V to 5 V Make sure that the connected encoders and the selected parameters match The co...

Page 619: ...ance 3 wire transducer R 2L Resistance 2 wire transducer RTD 3L Resistance thermometer 3 wire transducer RTD 2L Resistance thermometer 2 wire transducer Table 4 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults Parameters Value range Default GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Temperature unit Degrees Celsius Degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Degrees Celsius Module Module Measurement type measuring range...

Page 620: ... cl RTD 3L Pt100 392 std RTD 3L Pt100 3850 cl RTD 3L Pt100 3850 std RTD 2L Pt100 3851 cl RTD 2L Pt100 3851 std RTD 2L Pt100 3916 cl RTD 2L Pt100 3916 std RTD 2L Pt100 3902 cl RTD 2L Pt100 3902 std RTD 2L Pt100 392 cl RTD 2L Pt100 392 std RTD 2L Pt100 3850 cl RTD 2L Pt100 3850 std RTD 3L Ni100 618 cl RTD 3L Ni100 618 std RTD 3L Ni100 672 cl RTD 3L Ni100 672 std RTD 2L Ni100 618 cl RTD 2L Ni100 618 ...

Page 621: ...le Channel Hardware interrupt high limit 1 channel n Disable Enable Disable Channel Hardware interrupt low limit 1 channel n Disable Enable Disable Channel Hardware interrupt high limit 2 channel n Disable Enable Disable Channel Hardware interrupt low limit 2 channel n Disable Enable Disable Channel High limit 1 channel n The value range depends on the meas urement type The value range min max per...

Page 622: ...0 mA 1 19 22 81 4 20 mA 4863 32510 0 27648 Decimal Resistance 150 ohm 0 01 176 37 0 01 150 Ω 1 32510 1 27648 Decimal 300 ohm 0 01 352 75 0 01 300 Ω 1 32510 1 27648 Decimal Resistance thermometer Pt100 cl 144 99 154 99 120 130 C 14499 15499 12000 13000 Decimal 228 99 310 99 184 266 F 22899 31099 18400 26600 Decimal Ni100 cl 104 99 154 99 60 130 C 10499 15499 6000 13000 Decimal 156 99 310 99 76 266 ...

Page 623: ...sured values Note Unused channels Deactivate unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the module A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH Temperature coefficient for RTD resistance thermometer The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material In Europe only one value is used per sensor type default value The correction facto...

Page 624: ...ule cycles k cycle time of the module The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100 depending on the configured smoothing This is valid for all signal changes at the analog input No smoothing k 1 Weak k 4 Medium k 16 Strong k 32 Figure 4 1 Smoothing Interference frequency suppression channel n This parameter suppresses interference for ana...

Page 625: ...r leaving the under range Diagnostics alarm Low limit violated Wire break disabled1 Underflow disabled Wire break 8000H Measured value after leaving the under range 1 Measuring range limits for detection of wire break and measuring range undershoot 1 V to 5 V at 0 296 V 4 mA to 20 mA at 1 185 mA The table below shows the diagnostics that can occur for wire break with the measurement type RTD R Tab...

Page 626: ...hardware interrupt when the high limit 1 or 2 or the low limit 1 or 2 is violated Requirement An OB 4x must be assigned to the CPU device Additional information on the structure of hardware interrupts is available in the section Interrupts Page 33 High low limit 1 or 2 channel n Specify a threshold at which a hardware interrupt is triggered when it is exceeded or undershot 4 4 Address space The fi...

Page 627: ...ions Configuration 1 without value status Configuration 2 with value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog input module a bit is also assigned in the input address space Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assigned to a channel and provide information on the validity of the analog value The value status is independent of whether or not diagnostics was configured...

Page 628: ...2350124 AG 31 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED display status and error displays of the analog input module AI 4xU I RTD 4xM12 Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 1 2 and 3 green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 629: ...upply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their current status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics LED for the channel status Table 5 ...

Page 630: ... diagnostic interrupt depending on the parameter assignment Table 5 3 Diagnostic interrupts Measure ment type Measuring range Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Wire break Underflow1 Overflow1 Underflow Overflow2 Voltage 1 V to 5 V x x x x x 0 V to 10 V x x x x Current 2 DMU 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x 4 DMU 0 mA to 20 mA x x x x 4 DMU 4 mA to 20 mA x x x x x Resistance 150 Ω x x x 300 Ω x x x Resist...

Page 631: ...nt is available in the hardware interrupt organization block with the instruction RALRM Read additional interrupt information and in the STEP 7 online help The start information of the organization block includes information on which channel of the analog input module triggered the hardware interrupt Note Violation of two limits If two limits are violated at the same time limit 1 is always signale...

Page 632: ...r of the CPU You can evaluate the error codes with the user program The following tables set out the diagnostics alarms for the set measuring range Table 5 5 Diagnostics alarms for the measuring range 1 V to 5 V 2 DMU 4 mA to 20 mA and 4 DMU 4 mA to 20 mA Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Short circuit 1H Short circuit encoder supply to ground Correct interplay between mod ule and encode...

Page 633: ...be signaled because too many hardware interrupts are pending Correct the program or the pro cess Table 5 7 Diagnostics alarms for the measuring range 150 Ω and 300 Ω Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Wire break 6H Impedance of encoder circuit too high Use a different encoder type or modify the wiring for example using cables with larger cross section Wire break between the module and sen...

Page 634: ...ross section Wire break between the module and sensor Connect the cable Channel not connected open Deactivate diagnostics Connect the channel Deactivate channel High limit violat ed 7H Value is above overrange Correct interplay between mod ule and sensor Low limit violat ed 8H Value is below underrange Correct interplay between mod ule and sensor Parameter error 10H Module parameter assignment is ...

Page 635: ...eering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from version From V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 3 PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28 8 ...

Page 636: ...t for temperature measurement adjustable Yes Degrees Celsius degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Input ranges rated values voltages 0 to 10 V Yes Input resistance 0 to 10 V 10 MΩ 1 V to 5 V Yes Input resistance 1 V to 5 V 10 MΩ Input ranges rated values currents 0 to 20 mA Yes Input resistance 0 to 20 mA 50 Ω 4 mA to 20 mA Yes Input resistance 4 mA to 20 mA 50 Ω Input ranges rated values resistance ther mom...

Page 637: ... Yes 1x cycle time Step low Yes 4x cycle time Step Medium Yes 16x cycle time Step High Yes 32x cycle time Encoder Connection of signal encoders for voltage measurement Yes for current measurement as 2 wire transducer Yes for current measurement as 4 wire transducer Yes for resistance measurement with two wire connection Yes for resistance measurement with three wire connection Yes Errors accuracie...

Page 638: ...es Wire break Yes at 4 mA to 20 mA and 1 V to 5 V Short circuit Yes Encoder supply to M channel by channel Overflow underflow Yes Diagnostics indication LED Channel status display Yes green LED for module diagnostics Yes green red LED Potential separation between the load voltages Yes Potential separation channels between the channels No between the channels and backplane bus Yes between the chann...

Page 639: ...00 0BA0 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inputs and outputs M12 5 pole Design of electrical connection for supply voltage M8 4 pole ET Connection ET Connection M8 4 pin shielded Dimensions Width 30 mm Height 159 mm Depth 40 mm Weights Weight approx 168 g ...

Page 640: ...OFIenergy command Start_Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Termin...

Page 641: ...that are in pause mode on PE_MODE_PROCEED report their diagnostic status as in productive mode The following applies for all channels which switch to a different pause mode Encoder supply switch off upon the start of pause does not result in the alarm Wire break Wire break Short circuit High limit violated and Low limit violated error detection is not possible during the pause Alarms for errors al...

Page 642: ...DE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at pause Encoder supply US switched off 1 Pause substitute value 7FFFH Value status BAD 3D PE_MODE_LAST_VALUE Last value at pause Encoder supply US switched off 1 Pause substitute value Last input value Value status BAD 4D PE_MODE_SUBST_VALUE Substitute value at pause Encoder supply US switched off 1 Pause substitute value Configured pause sub stitute value Value status BAD ...

Page 643: ...D 4xM12 6ES7144 5KD00 0BA0 46 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E32350124 AG Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the AI 4xU I RTD 4xM12 analog input module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 644: ... V Nominal range 20736 5100 4 V 7 5 V 1 1 1 V 144 7 µV 0 V 361 7 µV 0 0 1 V 0 V 1 FFFF Underrange 4864 ED00 0 296 V 1 759 32768 8000 0 296 V 1 759 Underflow B 2 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges Table B 2 Current measuring ranges 0 mA to 20 mA and 4 mA to 20 mA Values Current measuring range Range Dec Hex 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 32767 7FFF 23 52 mA 22 81 mA Overflow 3...

Page 645: ...s Resistance based sensor Table B 3 Resistance based sensor of 150 Ω and 300 Ω Values Resistance based sensor range Range Dec Hex 150 Ω 300 Ω 32767 7FFF 176 38 Ω 352 77 Ω Overflow 32511 7EFF 176 38 Ω 352 77 Ω Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 150 Ω 300 Ω Nominal range 20736 5100 112 5 Ω 225 Ω 1 1 5 43 mΩ 10 85 mΩ 0 0 0 Ω 0 Ω 1 4864 FFFF ED00 negative values are physically impossible Underrange1 3276...

Page 646: ...23 3 12732 11233 31BC 2BE1 Overrange 850 0 200 0 8500 2000 2134 F830 1562 0 328 0 15620 3280 3D04 F330 1123 2 73 2 11232 732 2BE0 2DC Nominal range 200 1 243 0 2001 2430 F82F F682 328 1 405 4 3281 4054 F32F F02A 73 1 30 2 731 302 2DB 12E Underrange 243 0 32768 8000 405 4 32768 8000 30 2 32768 8000 Underflow Table B 5 Resistance thermometer Pt 100 climatic Pt x00 climatic in C 1 digit 0 01 C Values...

Page 647: ...ange 250 0 60 0 2500 600 9C4 FDA8 482 0 76 0 4820 760 12D4 FD08 523 2 213 2 5232 2132 1470 854 Nominal range 60 1 105 0 601 1050 FDA7 FBE6 76 1 157 0 761 1570 FD07 F9DE 213 1 168 2 2131 1682 853 692 Underrange 105 0 32768 8000 157 0 32768 8000 168 2 32768 8000 Underflow Table B 7 Resistance thermometer Ni 100 climatic Ni x00 climatic in C 1 digit 0 01 C Values Ni x00 climatic in F 1 digit 0 01 F V...

Page 648: ......

Page 649: ...odule AI 4xRTD TC 4xM12 6ES7144 5KD50 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E48753535 AB Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 Dimension drawing A Representation of analog values B ...

Page 650: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 651: ...ks In order to protect plants systems machines and networks against cyber threats it is necessary to implement and continuously maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and co...

Page 652: ...n of the parameters 26 4 4 Structure of a data record for dynamic reference temperature 31 4 5 Address space 33 5 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 34 5 1 Status and error displays 34 5 2 Interrupts 36 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 38 6 Technical specifications 39 6 1 Technical specifications 39 A Dimension drawing 45 A 1 Dimension drawing 45 B Representation of analog values 46 B 1 Representation of analog ...

Page 653: ...ation Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentation...

Page 654: ...your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system Y...

Page 655: ...vides a multitude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU ...

Page 656: ...to plan reserves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and...

Page 657: ... 4xRTD TC 4xM12 6ES7144 5KD50 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E48753535 AB 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7144 5KD50 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the analog input module AI 4xRTD TC 4xM12 ...

Page 658: ...isolated non isolated thermocouples Resolution 16 bit Dimensions 30 x 159 x 40 mm Accuracy according to AMS2750E Configurable diagnostics can be set for each channel Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel two high and two low limits per channel Various options to compensate for the reference junction temperature The module supports the following functions Firmware update Iden...

Page 659: ...rdered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for ET Connection M8 sealing cap M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I O system https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 89254965 system manual ...

Page 660: ...r control and display elements of the analog input module AI 4xRTD TC 4xM12 DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X13 Sockets for the input signal X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED displays 0 to 3 for the channel status Figure 2 2 ...

Page 661: ...of the ET Connection Multiplexer 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Analog to digital converter ADC 1M Ground 1M non switched Microcontroller 2L Load voltage 2L switched ET Connection interface 2M Ground 2M switched Internal supply voltage Mn Measuring input positive channel n X10 bis X13 Channels 0 to 3 Mn Measuring input negative channel n X80 Infeed of supply voltages AI Channel status LEDs 0 1 ...

Page 662: ...n 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Multiplexer 1M Ground 1M non switched Analog to digital converter ADC 2L Load voltage 2L switched Microcontroller 2M Ground 2M switched ET Connection interface Mn Measuring input positive channel n Internal supply voltage Mn Measuring input negative channel n X10 to X13 Channels 0 to 3 Icn Icn Current output current feed RTD R channel n X80 Infeed of supply volt...

Page 663: ...onnector X10 Measuring input M1 Connector X11 Measuring input M2 Connector X12 Measuring input M3 Connector X13 4 Measuring input M0 Connector X10 Measuring input M1 Connector X11 Measuring input M2 Connector X12 Measuring input M3 Connector X13 5 Functional earth FE Shield Functional earth FE Table 3 2 Pin assignment for analog inputs RTD R 2 wire connection Pin Assignment Front view of the socke...

Page 664: ...FE Table 3 4 Pin assignment for analog inputs RTD R 4 wire connection Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 X13 sockets for analog inputs RTD R 4 wire connection 1 Constant current cable Ic0 Connector X10 Constant current cable Ic1 Connector X11 Constant current cable Ic2 Connector X12 Constant current cable Ic3 Connector X13 2 Measuring line M0 Connector X10 Measuring line M1 Connector X11...

Page 665: ...s X30 socket ET Connection IN X31 socket ET Connection OUT X30 X31 1 TXP RXP Yellow 2 RXP TXP White 3 RXN TXN Blue 4 TXN RXN Orange Shield Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage Table 3 6 Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Pin Assignment Assignment of...

Page 666: ...signment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the core color of the power cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and the supply voltage...

Page 667: ...t Resistance 2 wire connection Resistance 3 wire connection Resistance 4 wire connection 150 Ω 300 Ω Max 15 bit Thermal resistor 2 wire connection Thermal resistor 3 wire connection Thermal resistor 4 wire connection Pt 100 climatic range Pt 100 standard range Pt 1000 climatic range Pt 1000 standard range Pt 0 003851 EN 60751 Pt 0 003916 Pt 0 003902 Pt 0 00392 Pt 0 00385 Max 16 bit incl sign Ni 10...

Page 668: ...ROFINET IO Distributed mode with PROFIBUS DP Central operation with an ET 200SP CPU NOTICE Match of encoder and parameters The default setting of the analog inputs is voltage measurement 80 mV Make sure that the connected encoders and the selected parameters match Parameters and presettings of the analog input module The table below shows the PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DPparameters for the analog in...

Page 669: ... 80 mV Resistance 2 3 4 wire connection 150 Ω 300 Ω Thermal resistor 2 3 4 wire connection Pt 100 climatic range Pt 1000 climatic range Pt 100 standard range Pt 1000 standard range Ni 100 climatic range Ni 1000 climatic range Ni 100 standard range Ni 1000 standard range Thermocouple Type B Type N Type E Type R Type S Type J Type L Type T Type K Type U Type C Temperature coeffi cient Pt 0 003851 EN...

Page 670: ...ium Strong None Channel Channel Interference fre quency suppression 60 Hz 16 6 ms 50 Hz 20 ms 1 16 6 Hz 60 ms 50 Hz 20 ms 1 Channel Channel Diagnostics Reference junction Disable Enable Disable Channel Channel Diagnostics Wire break Disable Enable Disable Channel Channel Diagnostics Overflow underflow diagnostics Disable Enable Disable Channel Diagnostics Underflow Disable Enable Disable Channel D...

Page 671: ...limit 2 27648 Channel Low limit 2 0 Channel 1 Interference frequency suppression Noise at 400 Hz is automatically included in the filtering at 50 Hz 2 For 2 wire connection only Note Unused channels Deactivate unused inputs in the parameter assignment to shorten the cycle time of the module A deactivated input always returns the value 7FFFH Value ranges of the hardware interrupts The table below s...

Page 672: ... 104 9 294 9 C 1049 2949 Decimal 156 9 562 9 F 1569 5629 Decimal 168 3 568 1 K 1683 5681 Decimal Ni 100 Cl Ni 1000 Cl 104 99 154 99 C 10499 15499 Decimal 156 99 310 99 F 15699 31099 Decimal Thermocouple Type B 119 9 2069 9 C 1199 20699 Decimal 183 9 3276 5 F 1839 32765 Decimal 153 3 2343 1 K 1533 23431 Decimal Type N 269 9 1549 9 C 2699 15499 Decimal 453 9 2821 9 F 4539 28219 Decimal 3 3 1823 1 K ...

Page 673: ...C 1999 11499 Decimal 327 9 2101 9 F 3279 21019 Decimal 73 3 1423 1 K 733 14231 Decimal Type T 269 9 539 9 C 2699 5399 Decimal 453 9 1003 9 F 4539 10039 Decimal 3 3 813 1 K 33 8131 Decimal Type K 269 9 1621 9 C 2699 16219 Decimal 453 9 2951 5 F 4539 29515 Decimal 3 3 1895 1 K 33 18951 Decimal Type U 199 9 849 9 C 1999 8499 Decimal 327 9 1561 9 F 3279 15619 Decimal 73 3 1123 1 K 733 11231 Decimal Ty...

Page 674: ... the parameters Temperature unit You use this parameter to set the temperature unit with which you want to measure the temperature Type range of measurement You use this parameter to set the measurement type or the measuring range for acquiring the measured values Note Unused channels Deactivate unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the module A deactivated chann...

Page 675: ...re parameter The possible value range is displayed in the Table 4 4 Value ranges for the reference temperature for thermocouples Page 26 The configured reference junction temperature applies to all channels of the module that you have selected for this type of compensation Wiring Connect the thermocouples to terminals 3 and 4 from the reference junction with copper cables If you detect the referen...

Page 676: ...t for this type of compensation receive the same reference junction temperature Wiring Connect the thermocouples directly or with compensating lines to the AI 4xRTD TC 4xM12 No compensation Properties With this compensation type the reference junction temperature of the thermocouples is measured outside the AI 4xRTD TC 4xM12 electronic module You can for example connect a compensating box to the t...

Page 677: ... module The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value to approach 100 depending on the configured smoothing This is valid for all signal changes at the analog input No smoothing k 1 Weak k 4 Medium k 16 Strong k 32 Figure 4 1 Smoothing Interference frequency suppression This parameter suppresses interference for analog input modules which is caused by the...

Page 678: ...a Diagnostics alarm per channel Enabled Disabled Disabled Wire break 0x7FFF Wire break Disabled Disabled Enabled Wire break 0x7FFF Disabled Enabled Disabled Wire break 0x7FFF High limit violated Disabled Enabled Enabled Wire break 0x7FFF High limit violated Disabled Disabled Disabled Wire break 0x7FFF Diagnostics Overflow Underflow for PROFIBUS only Enabling of the diagnostics when the measured va...

Page 679: ...ed or undershot See also Parameters Page 20 4 4 Structure of a data record for dynamic reference temperature The WRREC instruction is used to transfer the reference junction temperature via data record 192 to data record 195 to the module The description of the WRREC instruction can be found in the online help from STEP 7 If you have set the Dynamic reference temperature value for the Reference ju...

Page 680: ...ord Temperature unit Decimal Hexadecimal Celsius default 1450 1550 FA56H 60EH Fahrenheit default 2290 3110 F70EH C26H Kelvin default 1282 3276 502H CCCH Celsius climatic 14500 15500 C75CH 3C8CH Fahrenheit climatic 22900 31100 A68CH 797CH Kelvin climatic 12820 32760 3214H 7FF8H Note Thanks to the flexible content of the data records DS 192 DS 195 you can use a separate reference junction for each c...

Page 681: ...FIBUS Figure 4 3 Address space Configuration options of the AI 4xRTD TC 4xM12 analog input module You have the following configuration options Configuration 1 without value status Configuration 2 with value status Evaluating the value status If you enable the value status for the analog input module then a byte is additionally assigned in the input address space Bits 0 to 3 in this byte are assign...

Page 682: ...5E48753535 AB Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED display status and error displays of the AI 4xRTD TC 4xM12 analog input module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 1 2 and 3 green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 683: ...LED Meaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their current status No connection to the ET connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics LED for the channel status Table 5 2 Status display of t...

Page 684: ... Hardware interrupt lost Voltage x x x x x Resistance x x x x x Thermal resistor x x x x x x Thermocou ple x x x x x x x Hardware interrupt The analog input module generates a hardware interrupt with the following events Low limit 1 violated High limit 1 violated Low limit 2 violated High limit 2 violated Detailed information on the event is available in the hardware interrupt organization block w...

Page 685: ...n Table 5 4 Structure of the additional interrupt information Data block name Contents Comment Bytes USI User Structure Identifi er W 16 0001 Additional interrupt info for hardware inter rupts of the I O module 2 The channel that triggered the hardware interrupt follows Channel B 16 00 to B 16 03 Number of channel which triggered the event 1 The error event that triggered the hardware interrupt fo...

Page 686: ...errange Correct interplay between module and sensor Wire break2 See wire break Low limit violated1 8H Value is below underrange Correct interplay between module and sensor Error 9H Value is significantly above or be low underrange overrange Correct interplay between module and sensor Parameter error 10H The module cannot evaluate parameters for the channel Module parameter assignment is faulty Cor...

Page 687: ... 4xRTD TC HW functional status FS01 Firmware version V1 0 x Product function I M data Yes I M0 to I M3 Engineering with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V16 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from version V5 5 SP4 and higher PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 34 Supply voltage Load voltage 1...

Page 688: ... Yes Degrees Celsius degrees Fahrenheit Kelvin Input ranges rated values voltages 80 mV to 80 mV Yes 16 bit incl sign Input resistance 80 mV to 80 mV 10 MΩ Input ranges rated values thermocouples Type B Yes 16 bit incl sign Input resistance Type B 10 MΩ Type C Yes 16 bit incl sign Input resistance Type C 10 MΩ Type E Yes 16 bit incl sign Input resistance Type E 10 MΩ Type J Yes 16 bit incl sign In...

Page 689: ...ard climate Input resistance Ni 1000 10 MΩ Pt 100 Yes Standard climate Input resistance Pt 100 10 MΩ Pt 1000 Yes Standard climate Input resistance Pt 1000 10 MΩ Input ranges rated values resistors 0 to 150 ohms Yes Input resistance 0 to 150 ohms 10 MΩ 0 to 300 ohms Yes Input resistance 0 to 300 ohms 10 MΩ Thermocouple TC Temperature compensation parameterizable Yes internal temperature compensatio...

Page 690: ...nal conversion time for resistance measurement 2 ms Interference voltage suppression for interfer ence frequency f1 in Hz 60 50 16 7 Smoothing of measured values parameterizable Yes Step None Yes 1x cycle time Step low Yes 4x cycle time Step Medium Yes 16x cycle time Step High Yes 32x cycle time Encoder Connection of signal encoders for resistance measurement with two wire connection Yes for resis...

Page 691: ...nge 0 15 Thermocouple relative to input range 0 25 Interference voltage suppression for f n x f1 0 5 f1 interference frequency Series mode interference peak value of inter ference rated value of input range min 40 dB Interrupts diagnostics status information Alarms Diagnostic alarm Yes Parameterizable Limit value alarm Yes Parameterizable Diagnoses Wire break Yes Not for 80 mV Overflow underflow Y...

Page 692: ...le for applications according to CQI 9 Yes Based on AMS 2750 E Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the ...

Page 693: ...44 5KD50 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E48753535 AB 45 Dimension drawing A A 1 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the AI 4xRTD TC 4xM12 analog input module in the front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 694: ... the decimal and hexadecimal values codes of the voltage measuring range Table B 1 Voltage measuring range 80 mV Values Voltage measuring range Range Dec Hex 80 mV 32767 7FFF 94 1 mV Overflow 32511 7EFF 94 1 mV Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 80 mV Nominal range 20736 5100 60 mV 1 1 2 89 µV 0 0 0 mV 1 FFFF 2 89 µV 20736 AF00 60 mV 27648 9400 80 mV 27649 93FF Underrange 32512 8100 94 1 mV 32768 800...

Page 695: ...nd 300 Ω Values Resistance based sensor range Range Dec Hex 150 Ω 300 Ω 32767 7FFF 176 38 Ω 352 77 Ω Overflow 32511 7EFF 176 38 Ω 352 77 Ω Overrange 27649 6C01 27648 6C00 150 Ω 300 Ω Nominal range 20736 5100 112 5 Ω 225 Ω 1 1 5 43 mΩ 10 85 mΩ 0 0 0 Ω 0 Ω Note Negative value for 2 wire connection A negative value is possible in these constellations Configured conductor compensation sum of conductor...

Page 696: ... 1562 1 18320 15621 4790 3D05 1273 2 1123 3 12732 11233 31BC 2BE1 Overrange 850 0 200 0 8500 2000 2134 F830 1562 0 328 0 15620 3280 3D04 F330 1123 2 73 2 11232 732 2BE0 2DC Nominal range 200 1 243 0 2001 2430 F82F F682 328 1 405 4 3281 4054 F32F F02A 73 1 30 2 731 302 2DB 12E Underrange 243 0 32768 8000 405 4 32768 8000 30 2 32768 8000 Underflow Table B 4 Thermal resistor Pt 100 Pt 1000 Climatic P...

Page 697: ...e 250 0 60 0 2500 600 9C4 FDA8 482 0 76 0 4820 760 12D4 FD08 523 2 213 2 5232 2132 1470 854 Nominal range 60 1 105 0 601 1050 FDA7 FBE6 76 1 157 0 761 1570 FD07 F9DE 213 1 168 2 2131 1682 853 692 Underrange 105 0 32768 8000 157 0 32768 8000 168 2 32768 8000 Underflow Table B 6 Thermal resistor Ni 100 Ni 1000 Climatic Ni x00 Climatic in C 1 digit 0 01 C Values Ni x00 Climatic in F 1 digit 0 01 F Va...

Page 698: ...0 0 18200 0 4718 0000 2786 5 32 0 27865 320 6CD9 0140 2093 2 273 2 20932 2732 51C4 0AAC Nominal range 0 1 120 0 1 1200 FFFF FB50 31 9 184 0 319 1840 013F F8D0 273 1 153 2 2731 1532 0AAB 05FC Underrange 120 0 32768 8000 184 0 32768 8000 153 2 32768 8000 Underflow Table B 8 Thermocouple type C Type C in C Values Type C in F Values Type C in K Values Range Dec Hex Dec Hex Dec Hex 2500 0 32767 7FFF 32...

Page 699: ...Values Type J in F Values Type J in K Values Range Dec Hex Dec Hex Dec Hex 1450 0 32767 7FFF 2642 0 32767 7FFF 1723 2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1450 0 1200 1 14500 12001 38A4 2EE1 2642 0 2192 1 26420 21921 6734 55A1 1723 2 1473 3 17232 14733 4350 398D Overrange 1200 0 210 0 12000 2100 2EE0 F7CC 2192 0 346 0 21920 3460 55A0 F27C 1473 2 63 2 14732 632 398C 0278 Nominal range 210 0 32768 8000 346 0 32768 8...

Page 700: ...ex Dec Hex Dec Hex 1550 0 32767 7FFF 2822 0 32767 7FFF 1823 2 32767 7FFF Overflow 1550 0 1300 1 15500 13001 3C8C 32C9 2822 0 2372 1 28220 23721 6E3C 5CA9 1823 2 1573 3 18232 15733 4738 3D75 Overrange 1300 0 270 0 13000 2700 32C8 F574 2372 0 454 0 23720 4540 5CA8 EE44 1573 2 3 2 15732 32 3D74 0020 Nominal range 270 0 32768 8000 454 0 32768 8000 3 2 32768 8000 Underflow Table B 14 Thermocouples R an...

Page 701: ...33 1FC4 1AAD Overrange 400 0 270 0 4000 2700 0FA0 F574 752 0 454 0 7520 4540 1D60 EE44 673 2 3 2 6732 32 1AAC 0020 Nominal range 270 0 32768 8000 454 0 32768 8000 3 2 32768 8000 Underflow Table B 16 Thermocouple type U Type U in C Values Type U in F Values Type U in K Values Range Dec Hex Dec Hex Dec Hex 850 0 32767 7FFF 1562 0 32767 7FFF 1123 2 32767 7FFF Overflow 850 0 600 1 8500 6001 2134 1771 ...

Page 702: ......

Page 703: ...AQ 4xU I 4xM12 6ES7145 5ND00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E38687953 AC Preface ET 200AL Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 PROFIenergy 7 Dimension drawing A Representation of analog values B ...

Page 704: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 705: ...mation provided in the present manual the system manual and the function manuals enables you to commission the ET 200AL distributed I O system Changes compared to the previous version Compared to the previous version this manual contains the following adaptations in the section Technical specifications Page 26 Conventions Please also observe notes marked as follows Note A note contains important i...

Page 706: ... components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures e g firewalls and or network segmentation are in place For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented please visit https www siemens com industrialsecurity Siemens products and solutions und...

Page 707: ...dress space 17 4 1 Output ranges 17 4 2 Parameters 18 4 3 Explanation of the parameters 20 4 4 Address space 22 5 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 23 5 1 Status and error displays 23 5 2 Interrupts 25 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 25 6 Technical specifications 26 7 PROFIenergy 30 7 1 Pause function 30 7 2 Response of analog output module 31 A Dimension drawing 32 B Representation of analog values 33 B 1 Rep...

Page 708: ...tion Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentation ...

Page 709: ...our data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your CAx or CAe system Yo...

Page 710: ...ides a multitude of functions Scanning of a PROFINET Ethernet system network and identification of all connected CPUs Address assignment IP subnet gateway and station name PROFINET device to a CPU Transfer of the date and the programming device PC time converted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU e...

Page 711: ...o plan reserves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and ...

Page 712: ...AQ 4xU I 4xM12 6ES7145 5ND00 0BA0 10 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E38687953 AC Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7145 5ND00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the analog output module AQ 4xU I 4xM12 ...

Page 713: ...wing functions Firmware update Identification and maintenance data I M0 to I M3 Value status Quality Information PROFIenergy Accessories The following components are included in the module package Identification labels Spacers Other components The following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Strippin...

Page 714: ... controls and display elements of the AQ 4xU I 4xM12 analog output module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X13 Sockets for the output signal X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT LED displays 0 to 3 for the channel status Figure 2 2 O...

Page 715: ...y voltage 1L non switched Output driver 1M Ground 1M non switched Digital to analog converter DAC 2L Load voltage 2L switched Microcontroller 2M Ground 2M switched ET Connection interface 1UA 24 V actuator supply Internal supply voltage QVn QIn Voltage current output positive channel n X10 to X13 Channels 0 to 3 QVn QIn Voltage current output negative channel n X80 Infeed of supply voltages AQ Cha...

Page 716: ...s Table 3 1 Pin assignment of the sockets for analog outputs voltage output Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for analog outputs voltage output 1 24 V actuator supply 1UA derived from 1L Non Switched 2 Voltage output positive QV0 Connector X10 Voltage output positive QV1 Connector X11 Voltage output positive QV2 Connector X12 Voltage output positive QV3 Connector X13 3 Gr...

Page 717: ...nector X13 3 Ground for actuator supply 1M 4 Current output negative QI0 Connector X10 Current output negative QI1 Connector X11 Current output negative QI2 Connector X12 Current output negative QI3 Connector X13 5 Functional earth FE Shield Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the sockets for ET Connection The table below shows the pin assignments of the 2 sockets for the connection of ET Connec...

Page 718: ...on switched blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched black Pin assignment of the socket for loop through of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the socket for loop through of the supply voltage Table 3 5 Pin assignment of the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the core color of the power cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L no...

Page 719: ...ndicates which output types and ranges are configurable Output type and output ranges Table 4 1 Output type and output ranges Output type Output range Disabled Voltage 10 V 0 V to 10 V 1 V to 5 V Current 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA The tables of the output ranges overflow overrange etc are provided in the appendix Representation of analog values Page 33 ...

Page 720: ...ttings are possible Table 4 2 Configurable parameters and their defaults Parameters Value range Default GSD file PROFINET IO GSD file PROFIBUS DP Output type range Disabled Voltage 10 V Voltage 0 V to 10 V Voltage 1 V to 5 V Current 20 mA Current 0 mA to 20 mA Current 4 mA to 20 mA Current 4 mA to 20 mA Channel Channel Diagnostics Actuator supply short circuit to ground Disable Enable Disable Modu...

Page 721: ...agnostics Diagnostics Actuator supply short circuit to ground and Diagnostics Short circuit to ground for voltage outputs are activated or deactivated using a module wide parameter Diagnostics Short circuit to ground They cannot be adjusted independently of one another Short circuit detection The diagnostics for short circuit to ground can be configured for the voltage output type Short circuit de...

Page 722: ...cs if a short circuit of the actuator supply to ground occurs Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short circuit of the output to ground occurs Diagnostics Wire break Enabling of the diagnostics if the line to the actuator is broken Diagnostics Underflow Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value violates the underrange falls below the minimum output value or...

Page 723: ...ameter you set substitute values for the analog outputs The table below shows the permitted value ranges for the substitute values Table 4 3 Permissible substitute values for the output ranges Output type Output range Valid substitute value Current 10 V 0 V to 10 V 1 V to 5 V 32512 to 32511 0 32511 6912 to 32511 Voltage 20 mA 0 mA to 20 mA 4 mA to 20 mA 29031 29030 0 29030 692 to 29376 ...

Page 724: ...tus is configured using the PROFINET interface module Figure 4 1 Address space Configuration options of the AQ 4xU I 4xM12 analog output module You have the following configuration options Configuration 1 without value status Configuration 2 with value status Evaluating the value status An additional byte is occupied in the input address space if you enable the value status for the analog output m...

Page 725: ...8687953 AC 23 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED display status and error displays of the AQ 4xU I 4xM12 analog output module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 1 2 and 3 green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 726: ... No supply voltage 1L Flashes Module parameters not assigned after switching on the supply voltage 1L Loading firmware while the firmware update is being performed all LEDs retain their current status No connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and diagnostics LED for the channel status Table 5 2 Status ...

Page 727: ...ram The following tables show the diagnostics alarms for all measuring ranges Table 5 3 Diagnostics alarms Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short circuit to ground 1H Short circuit of actuator sup ply to ground Short circuit of output to ground Correct the process wiring Wire break 6H Actuator circuit impedance too high Use a different actuator type or modify the wiring e g use cables...

Page 728: ...Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V14 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from version V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28 8 V Reverse polarity pro...

Page 729: ...Connection of actuators for voltage output two wire connection Yes for voltage output four wire connection Yes for current output two wire connection Yes for current output four wire connection Yes Load impedance in rated range of output with voltage outputs min 1 kΩ with voltage outputs capacitive load max 1 µF with current outputs max 500 Ω with current outputs inductive load max 1 mH Destructio...

Page 730: ... limit at 25 C Voltage relative to output range 0 15 Current relative to output range 0 15 Interrupts diagnostics status information Substitute values connectable Yes channel by channel parameterizable Alarms Diagnostic alarm Yes Parameterizable Diagnoses Wire break Yes channel by channel only for output type current Short circuit Yes Actuator supply module by module channel by channel for output ...

Page 731: ...elated tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inputs and outputs M12 5 pole Design of electrical connection for supply voltage M8 4 pole ET Connection ET...

Page 732: ...ergy command Start_Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Termination...

Page 733: ... is possible during the pause These errors are reported The selection of an incorrect pause substitute value which does not correspond to the output range may result in the message High limit violated or Low limit violated The pause substitute output value effective at the channel is limited to the high or low control limit for the output range Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode par...

Page 734: ...I 4xM12 6ES7145 5ND00 0BA0 32 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E38687953 AC Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the AQ 4xU I 4xM12 analog output module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 735: ...alues Analog value Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte 16 1 1H Sign 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 B 1 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges The tables below list the decimal and hexadecimal values codes of the possible voltage output ranges Table B 2 Voltage output range 10 V Values Voltage output range Range Dec Hex 10 V 118 5149 32767 7FFF 11 76 V Maximum output value 3...

Page 736: ...2511 7EFF 11 76 V Overrange 27649 6C01 100 27648 6C00 10 V Nominal range 75 20736 5100 7 5 V 0 003617 1 1 361 7 µV 0 0 0 0 V 1 FFFF 0 V Minimum output value 118 519 32768 8000 Table B 4 Voltage output range 1 to 5 V Values Voltage output range Range Dec Hex 1 V to 5 V 118 519 32767 7FFF 5 70 V Maximum output value 32512 7F00 117 589 32511 7EFF 5 70 V Overrange 27649 6C01 100 27648 6C00 5 V Nominal...

Page 737: ...value 29031 7167 105 29030 7166 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA 723 4 nA 100 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range 75 20736 5100 15 mA 0 003617 1 1 723 4 nA 0 0 0 0 mA 1 FFFF 723 4 nA 75 20736 AF00 15 mA 100 27648 9400 20 mA 27649 93FF 20 mA 723 4 nA Underrange 105 29031 8E99 21 mA 29032 8E98 21 mA Minimum output value 118 519 32768 8000 Table B 6 Current output range 0 mA to 20 mA Values Current output...

Page 738: ... Current output range 4 mA to 20 mA Values Current output range Range Dec Hex 4 mA to 20 mA 118 5149 32767 7FFF 21 mA Maximum output value 29377 72C1 106 25 29376 72C0 21 mA Overrange 27649 6C01 20 mA 578 7 nA 100 27648 6C00 20 mA Nominal range 75 19008 4A40 16 mA 0 003617 1 1 4 mA 578 7 nA 0 0 0 4 mA 1 FFFF 3 9995 mA Underrange 2 5 692 FD4C 3 6 mA 693 FD4B 3 6 mA Minimum output value 118 519 3276...

Page 739: ......

Page 740: ...147 5JD00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 04 2021 A5E32352322 AE Preface Documentation guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Diagnostics alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 Replacing modules 7 PROFIenergy 8 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 741: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 742: ...maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary a...

Page 743: ...odule to factory settings 13 3 Wiring 14 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 14 3 2 Pin assignment 15 4 Parameters address space 18 4 1 Parameters 18 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 20 5 Diagnostics alarms 25 5 1 Status and error displays 25 5 2 Diagnostics alarms 28 6 Technical specifications 33 7 Replacing modules 33 8 PROFIenergy 34 8 1 Pause function 34 8 2 DI operating mode 35 8 3 DQ operating m...

Page 744: ...manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties terminal diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can download the documentation free of cha...

Page 745: ...F file or in a format that can be edited later You can find mySupport Documentation on the Internet http support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area in mySupport you can access the current product data for your CAx or CAe system You configure your own download package with a few clicks In doing so you can select Product images 2D dimension drawings 3...

Page 746: ...operation independently of the TIA Portal General function overview Network browsing and creation of a table showing the accessible devices in the network Flashing of device LEDs or HMI display to locate a device Downloading of addresses IP subnet gateway to a device Downloading the PROFINET name station name to a device Placing a CPU in RUN or STOP mode Setting the time in a CPU to the current ti...

Page 747: ...ensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage In addition SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reserves This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and he...

Page 748: ...xM12 6ES7147 5JD00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 04 2021 A5E32352322 AE 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7147 5JD00 0BA0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the CM 4xIO Link 4xM12 communication module ...

Page 749: ...or V1 1 devices Suitable for connection of IO Link devices with 3 wire and 5 wire connection Configurable diagnostics can be set for each channel Dimensions 30 x 159 mm The module supports the following functions Table 2 1 Version dependencies of the module functions Function Firmware version of the module Firmware update V1 0 or higher Identification and maintenance data I M V1 0 or higher PROFIe...

Page 750: ... spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for ET Connection M8 sealing cap M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I O system http support automation siemens com WW view en 89254965 system manual ...

Page 751: ...2 communication module DIAG LED display for mode and diagnostic status C1 to C4 LED displays for port status Q1 to Q4 LED displays for channel status in SIO mode X10 to X13 Sockets for device connection PWR LED display for the load voltage 2L X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X31...

Page 752: ...iew en 65949252 function manual 2 4 Reset communication module to factory settings Effects of resetting to the factory settings Use the Reset to factory settings function to restore the parameter assignments of your CM 4xIO Link 4xM12 communication module made with S7 PCT to the factory state After a Reset to factory settings the parameters of the CM 4xIO Link 4xM12 communication module are assign...

Page 753: ... B Type B 2L Load voltage 2L switched IO Link device 2M Ground 2M switched IO Link switching 1US 24 V encoder supply Microcontroller 2UA 24 V actuator supply Monitoring 1M Ground for encoder supply ET Connection interface 2M Ground for actuator supply Internal supply voltage C Q Port n X10 to X13 Channels 0 to 3 Cn LEDs channel status green X80 Infeed of supply voltages Qn LED status in SIO mode g...

Page 754: ... communication module CM 4xIO Link 4xM12 a 3 wire connection cable should be used Port Class A compatibility The table below shows the pin assignments of the 4 sockets for the connection of IO Link Table 3 1 Pin assignment of the IO Link Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 to X13 sockets for IO Link 1 24 V encoder supply 1US from 1L Port Class A Type A Port Class B Type B 2 24 V actuator ...

Page 755: ...gnment for ET Connection Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the bus line cable for ET Connection Front view of the sockets X30 socket ET Connection IN X31 socket ET Connection OUT X30 X31 1 TXP RXP Yellow 2 RXP TXP White 3 RXN TXN Blue 4 TXN RXN Orange Shield Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of...

Page 756: ...the supply voltage socket Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the power line cable Front view of the socket X81 socket POWER output 1 Supply voltage 1L non switched Brown 2 Ground 2M switched White 3 Ground 1M non switched Blue 4 Load voltage 2L switched Black NOTICE ET Connection supply voltage Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET Connection and the supply voltage Mixing...

Page 757: ...iagnostics Diagnostics No supply volt age 2L Disable Enable Disable Module Diagnostics port 1 Disable Enable Disable Channel Diagnostics port 2 Disable Enable Disable Channel Diagnostics port 3 Disable Enable Disable Channel Diagnostics port 4 Disable Enable Disable Channel Configuration Input output type See table in section Explanation of the parameters Page 23 32I 32O Module Port configuration ...

Page 758: ...al length of the module Depending on the total length of the module Vendor ID Vendor ID of the connected IO Link device 0 Device ID Device ID of the connected IO Link device 0 Testing accuracy data storage Same type V1 0 without Backup Restore Type compatible V1 1 without Backup Restore Type compatible V1 1 with Backup Restore Type compatible V1 1 with Restore Type compatible V1 1 with Backup Rest...

Page 759: ...rt The diagnostics possible depends on the IO Link device in use Additional information about the diagnostic interrupts can be found in the description of the utilized IO Link device Input output type This parameter sets the maximum length of the input and output data of the module Port configuration without S7 PCT This parameter releases the port configuration without S7 PCT for the module Port Q...

Page 760: ...dy for operation IO Link manual The connected IO Link device is not started automatically You must store the Vendor ID and Device ID of the connected IO Link device in STEP 7 In addition you can select the inspection severity for data storage Identical type V1 0 without Backup Restore Type compatible V1 1 without Backup Restore Type compatible V1 1 with Backup Restore Type compatible V1 1 with Res...

Page 761: ...e outputs X X 8 byte inputs 8 byte outputs X X X 12 byte inputs 8 byte outputs X X 16 byte inputs 16 byte outputs X X X 20 byte inputs 16 byte outputs X X 32 byte inputs 32 byte outputs X X X 36 byte inputs 32 byte outputs X 48 byte inputs 48 byte outputs X 52 byte inputs 48 byte outputs X 64 byte inputs 64 byte outputs X 68 byte inputs 64 byte outputs X 80 byte inputs 80 byte outputs X 84 byte in...

Page 762: ... mode Operated as DI Operated as DQ Disabled Port configuration with S7 PCT Requirement You deselected the Port configuration without S7 PCT check box in the configuration of the IO Link master in STEP 7 Procedure You configure the port configuration of the IO Link master using the port configuration tool S7 PCT as of V3 2 Port Qualifier Information PQI You can enable the Port Qualifier Informatio...

Page 763: ...rs CM 4xIO Link 4xM12 6ES7147 5JD00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 04 2021 A5E32352322 AE 24 Figure 4 1 Structure of the PQI byte Reference For more information please refer to the IO Link system http support automation siemens com WW view en 65949252 function manual ...

Page 764: ... of the CM 4xIO Link 4xM12 communication module Diagnostics DIAG green red Port status IO Link status Cn green Load voltage 2L PWR green Channel status in SIO mode Qn green Figure 5 1 LED displays Meaning of the LEDs The following tables set out the meaning of the status and error displays Corrective measures for diagnostics alarms can be found in the section Diagnostics alarms Page 32 ...

Page 765: ... connection to the ET Connection and or the fieldbus On Module parameters assigned and no module diagnostics Flashes Module parameters assigned and module diagnostics LEDs Cn Valid for IO Link port in IO Link mode Table 5 2 Status displays of the C1 C2 C3 and C4 LEDs C1 C2 C3 or C4 LED Meaning Off Port disabled or in SIO mode Flashes Port in IO Link mode device not connected or port not connected ...

Page 766: ... 5JD00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 04 2021 A5E32352322 AE 27 LEDs Qn Valid for IO Link port in SIO mode Table 5 4 Status displays of the Q1 Q2 Q3 and Q4 LEDs Q1 Q2 Q3 and Q4 LEDs Meaning Off Process signal 0 in SIO mode deactivated or in IO Link mode On Process signal 1 in SIO mode ...

Page 767: ...6H No IO Link device connected There is a break on the signal line to the IO Link device IO Link device cannot communicate due to a different error 1800H X Overflow 7H Process tag range exceeded 8C10H Measuring range exceeded 8C20H X Underflow 8H Process tag range too low 8C30H X Error 9H All IO Link error codes which are not listed here are mapped to this PROFIBUS DP error X Parameter as signment...

Page 768: ...ng IO Link error code IO Link master IO Link device Safety shutdown 19H Serious error master has to be replaced 1880H X External fault 1AH Error during data backup 1809H 180AH 180BH 180CH 180DH More than six errors are pending simultaneously on the IO Link device 1808H Consistency error in electronic coding element 1885H Process data length exceeded 1887H X ...

Page 769: ... with STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable integrated from version STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher STEP 7 configurable integrated from ver sion From V5 5 SP4 Hotfix 3 PROFIBUS from GSD version GSD revision GSD as of Revision 5 PROFINET from GSD version GSD revision GSDML V2 3 1 Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28 8 V Rev...

Page 770: ...ss data output per module 128 byte Memory size for device parameter 2 kbyte for each port Master backup Possible with function block IO_LINK_MASTER Configuration without S7 PCT Possible autostart manual function Cable length unshielded max 20 m Operating modes IO Link Yes DI Yes DQ Yes max 100 mA Connection of IO Link devices Port type A Yes via 3 core cable Port type B Yes Additional device suppl...

Page 771: ...ping of standard modules Yes From FS01 Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inputs and outputs M12 5...

Page 772: ...MASTER function block As a result the IO Link ports and the IO Link master are configured with the values stored in the master backup A typical application is the restoration of parameters after replacement of the IO Link master Note Availability Note that the Master Backup function is available only for IO Link devices that are specified for the IO Link Standard as of V1 1 You will find informati...

Page 773: ...mand Start_Pause or End_Pause to the modules Use the Start_Pause command to start a pause Use the End_Pause command to end a pause The following conditions will also cause a pause to be ended Reconfiguration in RUN Controller failure Firmware update Station stop Restart of the interface module through POWER OFF POWER ON of an interface module POWER OFF POWER ON of an I O module Termination of ET C...

Page 774: ... is not possible Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 8 1 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at pause ...

Page 775: ... Manual 04 2021 A5E32352322 AE 36 Note Supply voltages 1US and 2UA Supply voltages 1US and 2UA can only be switched off separately for each module If all channels require switching off during the pause all supply voltages are switched off if no channel is assigned in PE_MODE_PROCEED ...

Page 776: ... errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 8 2 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value status GOOD 1D PE_MODE_SHUTDOWN Switch off at pause Supply voltages 1US and 2UA...

Page 777: ...147 5JD00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 04 2021 A5E32352322 AE 38 Note Supply voltages 1US and 2UA Supply voltages 1US and 2UA can only be switched off separately for each module If all channels require switching off in the pause the supply voltages are switched off ...

Page 778: ...on is not possible during the pause no IO Link device communication Alarms for errors already pending before the pause are retained After the pause is over the error status is updated and incoming outgoing errors are reported correspondingly Mode parameter The following table shows the Mode parameter Table 8 3 Mode parameter Element Code Explanation Mode 0D PE_MODE_PROCEED Proceed at pause Value s...

Page 779: ...ES7147 5JD00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 04 2021 A5E32352322 AE 40 Note Supply voltages 1US and 2UA Supply voltages 1US and 2UA can only be switched off separately for each module If all channels require switching off in the pause the supply voltages are switched off ...

Page 780: ...147 5JD00 0BA0 Equipment Manual 04 2021 A5E32352322 AE 41 Dimension drawing A The following figure shows the dimension drawing of the CM 4xIO Link 4xM12 communication module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 781: ......

Page 782: ... digital input module DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 6ES7141 5BF00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926568 AB Preface ET 200AL IO Link I O modules Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 783: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 784: ...ants systems machines and networks against cyber threats it is necessary to implement and continuously maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be c...

Page 785: ...perties 8 2 2 Operator controls and display elements 10 3 Wiring 11 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 11 3 2 Pin assignment 12 4 Parameters address space 14 4 1 Parameters 14 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 14 4 3 Address space 14 4 4 IODD parameters 15 5 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 16 5 1 Status and error displays 16 5 2 Interrupts 17 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 18 6 Technical specifications 19 A Dim...

Page 786: ...evice information Equipment manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO Link system You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet https support industry si...

Page 787: ...n area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your ...

Page 788: ...gy overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 67460624 SIMATIC S7 PCT The Port Configuration Tool PCT is PC based software for the parameter assignment of Siemens IO Link master modules and IO Lin...

Page 789: ...DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 6ES7141 5BF00 0BL0 8 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926568 AB Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7141 5BF00 0BL0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO Link digital input module ...

Page 790: ...ass A Type A Supply of module electronics and sensor supply The module supports the following functions Firmware update IO Link profile General profile Accessories The following components are included in the module package Identification labels Spacers Other components The following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories...

Page 791: ...8 AB 2 2 Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO Link digital input module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the input signal X35 IO Link interface LED displays 0 to 7 for the channel status Figure 2 2 Operator controls and display elements ...

Page 792: ...gnment of signal outputs with 2 and 3 wire connection 2 wire connection 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched 3 wire connection 1M Ground 1M non switched DI circuit 1US 24 V encoder supply Microcontroller DIn Input signal Internal supply voltage DI Channel status LEDs 0 to 7 green X10 to X17 Channels 0 to 7 DIAG LED diagnostic status red green X35 IO Link interface Figure 3 1 Terminal and block diagra...

Page 793: ...ly ground 1M 4 Input signal DI0 X10 Input signal DI1 X11 Input signal DI2 X12 Input signal DI3 X13 Input signal DI4 X14 Input signal DI5 X15 Input signal DI6 X16 Input signal DI7 X17 NOTICE 24 V encoder supply 1US Use only the 24 V encoder supply 1US provided by the digital input module to supply power to the encoder Pin assignment of the IO Link connector The following table shows the pin assignm...

Page 794: ...ent IO Link digital input module DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 6ES7141 5BF00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926568 AB 13 Note Note that the module can only be supplied with a protective low voltage according to the standard SELV PELV ...

Page 795: ...Default Scope ISDU index deci mal ISDU subin dex deci mal Value Dec Hex Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable 0 0 Disable Module 131 1 Enable 255 FF 4 2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs 4 3 Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for the DI 8...

Page 796: ... process and diagnostic data Device data Text description Image of the device Manufacturer logo The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers The structure of the IODD is always represented in the identical manner by the IO Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacturer for Siemens S7 PCT This ensures that the handling is the same for all IO Link devices regardl...

Page 797: ... A5E47926568 AB Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO Link digital input module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 7 green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 798: ... No data exchange with the IO Link Master for example due to wire break Firmware is loading On Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and no module diagnostics Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and module diagnostics LED channel status Table 5 2 LED channel status display LED channel status Meaning Off Process signal 0 On Process signal 1 5 2 ...

Page 799: ... alarms for example in the diagnostics buffer of the CPU You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 3 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Short circuit 0x7710 Short circuit of an encoder sup ply to ground Eliminate the short circuit Note Short circuit at the sensor supply A short circuit at the sensor supply can ...

Page 800: ...eID 229379 Engineering with IODD file Yes Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V Supply from 1Us of the IO Link master permissible range lower limit DC 18 V permissible range upper limit DC 30 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Against destruction encoder power supply outputs applied with reversed polarity Input current Current consumption rated value 15 mA without load Encoder supply N...

Page 801: ...30 m Encoder Connectable encoders 2 wire sensor Yes permissible quiescent current 2 wire sen sor max 1 5 mA IO Link IO Link protocol 1 1 Yes Transmission rate 38 4 kBd COM2 Cycle time min 2 1 ms Size of process data input per module 1 byte Size of process data output per module 0 byte Supported IO Link profiles common profile Cable length unshielded max 20 m Connection of IO Link devices Port type...

Page 802: ...on Potential separation channels between the channels No between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC type test Degree and class of protection IP degree of protection IP65 67 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Dimensions Width 30 mm Height 159 mm Depth 40 mm Weights Weight approx 124 g ...

Page 803: ...DC 8xM8 6ES7141 5BF00 0BL0 22 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926568 AB Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 IO Link digital input module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 804: ......

Page 805: ...k digital input module DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 6ES7141 5AH00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926661 AB Preface ET 200AL IO Link I O modules Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 806: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 807: ...stributed I O system ET 200AL IO Link I O modules are described in this manual The information provided in this manual and in the system manual and function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200AL IO Link I O modules Changes compared to the previous version This manual contains the following changes compared to the previous version Supplements in the section Parameters Page 15 Conventio...

Page 808: ...s and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures e g firewalls and or network segmentation are in place For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented please visit https www siemens com industrialsecurity Siemens products and solution...

Page 809: ...operties 9 2 2 Operator controls and display elements 11 3 Wiring 12 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 12 3 2 Pin assignment 13 4 Parameters address space 15 4 1 Parameters 15 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 15 4 3 Address space 15 4 4 IODD parameters 16 5 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 17 5 1 Status and error displays 17 5 2 Interrupts 18 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 19 6 Technical specifications 20 A Dim...

Page 810: ...Device information Equipment manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO Link system You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet https support industry s...

Page 811: ...on area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for your...

Page 812: ...ogy overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 67460624 SIMATIC S7 PCT The Port Configuration Tool PCT is PC based software for the parameter assignment of Siemens IO Link master modules and IO Li...

Page 813: ... 16x24VDC 8xM12 6ES7141 5AH00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926661 AB 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7141 5AH00 0BL0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO Link digital input module ...

Page 814: ...nnector A coded IO Link Port Class A Supply of the module electronics Encoder supply The module supports the following functions Firmware update IO Link profile General profile Accessories The following components are included in the module package Identification labels Other components The following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be order...

Page 815: ...B 11 2 2 Operator controls and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO Link digital input module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the input signal X35 IO Link interface LED displays 0 to 15 for the channel status Figure 2 2 Operator controls and display elements ...

Page 816: ...gnal inputs with 2 wire and 3 wire connection 3 wire connection 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched 2 wire connection 1M Ground 1M non switched 2 wire connection 1US 24 V encoder supply DI circuit DIn Input signal Microcontroller DI Channel status LEDs 0 to 15 green Internal supply voltage DIAG Diagnostic status LED red green X10 to X17 Channels 0 to 7 X35 IO Link interface Figure 3 1 Terminal and b...

Page 817: ... switched 2 Input signal DI1 Connector X10 Input signal DI3 Connector X11 Input signal DI5 Connector X12 Input signal DI7 Connector X13 Input signal DI9 Connector X14 Input signal DI11 Connector X15 Input signal DI13 Connector X16 Input signal DI15 Connector X17 3 Encoder supply ground 1M 4 Input signal DI0 Connector X10 Input signal DI2 Connector X11 Input signal DI4 Connector X12 Input signal DI...

Page 818: ...he connector for the IO Link connection The IO Link interface corresponds to the specification according to Port Class A Table 3 2 Pin assignment of the IO Link interface Pin Assignment Front view of the connector Port Class A X35 1 1L 2 Unassigned 3 Ground 1M 4 Switching and communication cable C Q 5 Unassigned Note Note that the module can only be supplied with a protective low voltage according...

Page 819: ...ault Scope ISDU index hexadecimal ISDU subindex hexadecimal Value Dec Hex Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable 0 0 Disable Module 131 1 Enable 255 FF 4 2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics if a short circuit of the encoder supply to ground occurs 4 3 Address space The figure below shows the assignment of the address space for the DI...

Page 820: ...tion process and diagnostic data Device data Text description Image of the device Manufacturer logo The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers The structure of the IODD is always represented in the same manner by the IO Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacturer for Siemens S7 PCT This ensures that the handling is the same for all IO Link devices regardle...

Page 821: ...E47926661 AB 17 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO Link digital input module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 15 green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 822: ...L Flashes No data exchange with the IO Link master e g wire break Firmware is loading On Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and no module diagnostics Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and module diagnostics LED channel status Table 5 2 LED channel status display LED channel status Meaning Off Process signal 0 On Process signal 1 5 2 Interr...

Page 823: ... alarms for example from the status of the IO Link master You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 3 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Short circuit 0x7710 Short circuit of an encoder supply to ground Eliminate the short circuit Note Short circuit at the sensor supply A short circuit at the sensor supply can ...

Page 824: ...iceID 229380 Engineering with IODD file Yes Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V Supply from 1Us of the IO Link master permissible range lower limit DC 18 V permissible range upper limit DC 30 V Reverse polarity protection Yes Against destruction encoder power supply outputs applied with reversed polarity Input current Current consumption rated value 20 mA without load Encoder supply...

Page 825: ... 30 m Encoder Connectable encoders 2 wire sensor Yes permissible quiescent current 2 wire sen sor max 1 5 mA IO Link IO Link protocol 1 1 Yes Transmission rate 38 4 kBd COM2 Cycle time min 2 5 ms Size of process data input per module 2 byte Size of process data output per module 0 byte Supported IO Link profiles common profile Cable length unshielded max 20 m Connection of IO Link devices Port typ...

Page 826: ...ion Potential separation channels between the channels No between the channels and the power supply of the electronics No Isolation Isolation tested with 707 V DC type test Degree and class of protection IP degree of protection IP65 67 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Dimensions Width 45 mm Height 159 mm Depth 40 mm Weights Weight approx 155 g ...

Page 827: ...C 8xM12 6ES7141 5AH00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926661 AB 23 Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 IO Link digital input module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 828: ......

Page 829: ...k digital output module DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 6ES7142 5AF00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926730 AB Preface ET 200AL IO Link I O modules Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 830: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 831: ...ET 200AL IO Link I O modules are described there The information provided in this manual and in the system manual and function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200AL IO Link I O modules Changes compared to the previous version This manual contains the following changes compared to the previous version Supplements in the section Parameters Page 15 Update of the section Technical specifi...

Page 832: ...nes and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures e g firewalls and or network segmentation are in place For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented please visit https www siemens com industrialsecurity Siemens products and soluti...

Page 833: ...Properties 9 2 2 Operator controls and display elements 11 3 Wiring 12 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 12 3 2 Pin assignment 13 4 Parameters address space 15 4 1 Parameters 15 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 15 4 3 Address space 16 4 4 IODD parameters 16 5 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 17 5 1 Status and error displays 17 5 2 Interrupts 19 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 19 6 Technical specifications 20 A D...

Page 834: ... Device information Equipment manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO Link system You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet https support industry ...

Page 835: ...tion area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product data for yo...

Page 836: ...ology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 67460624 SIMATIC S7 PCT The Port Configuration Tool PCT is PC based software for the parameter assignment of Siemens IO Link master modules and IO ...

Page 837: ...x24VDC 2A 8xM12 6ES7142 5AF00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926730 AB 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7142 5AF00 0BL0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 IO Link digital output module ...

Page 838: ...IO Link and power supply M12 connector A coded IO Link Port Class A Supply of module electronics Load voltage supply of output M12 connector L coded The module supports the following functions Firmware update IO Link profile General profile Accessories The following components are included in the module package Identification labels Other components The following component can be ordered as spare ...

Page 839: ...The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the IO Link DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 digital output module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the output signal PWR LED display for load voltage 2L X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER input X35 IO Link interface LED displays 0 to 7 for the channel status Figure 2 2 Operator controls and ...

Page 840: ... to 2L 1L Supply voltage 1L non switched DQ circuit 1M Ground 1M non switched Microcontroller 2L Load voltage 2L switched Monitoring 2M Ground 2M switched Internal supply voltage DQn Output signal X10 to X17 Channels 0 to 7 DQ Channel status LEDs 0 to 7 green X35 IO Link interface DIAG Diagnostic status LED red green X80 Connector for infeed of supply voltage 2L PWR Supply voltage LED 2L green Fig...

Page 841: ...X16 X11 X13 X15 X17 1 Unassigned 2 Unassigned 3 Ground 2M 4 Output signal DQ0 Connector X10 Output signal DQ1 Connector X11 Output signal DQ2 Connector X12 Output signal DQ3 Connector X13 Output signal DQ4 Connector X14 Output signal DQ5 Connector X15 Output signal DQ6 Connector X16 Output signal DQ7 Connector X17 5 Functional earth FE Pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply volta...

Page 842: ...gnment of the connector for IO Link The IO Link interface corresponds to the specification according to port Class A Table 3 3 Pin assignment of the IO Link interface Pin Assignment Front view of the connector Port Class A X35 1 1L 2 Unassigned 3 Ground 1M 4 Switching and communication cable C Q 5 Unassigned Note Note that the module can only be supplied with a protective low voltage according to ...

Page 843: ...utdown 0 0 Shutdown Module 131 3 Keep last value 2 2 Output substi tute value 3 3 Substitute value channel 0 0 0 0 Channel 131 4 11 1 255 FF 4 2 Explanation of the parameters Diagnostics Missing load voltage 2L Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient load voltage 2L Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Enabling of the diagnostics for short circuit of the output to ground Reaction to...

Page 844: ...gration Communication properties Device parameters with value range and default value Identification process and diagnostic data Device data Text description Image of the device Manufacturer logo The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers The structure of the IODD is always represented in the same manner by the IO Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacture...

Page 845: ...17 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 IO Link digital output module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 7 green Load voltage 2L PWR green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 846: ...display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes No data exchange with the IO Link Master e g wire break Firmware is loading On Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and no module diagnostics Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and module diagnostics LED channel status Table 5 2 LED channel status display LED channel st...

Page 847: ...2L missing or too low 5 3 Diagnostics alarms For each diagnostic event a diagnostics alarm is issued and the LED DIAG flashes red on the digital output module You can read out the diagnostics alarms for example from the status of the IO Link master You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 4 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code...

Page 848: ...version V1 0 x Engineering with IODD file Yes Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V Supply from 1Us of the IO Link master permissible range lower limit DC 18 V permissible range upper limit DC 30 V Reverse polarity protection Yes against destruction Load voltage 2L Rated value DC 24 V Supply via M12 connector L coded permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limi...

Page 849: ...ad max 1 Hz Total current of the outputs Current per module max 8 A Cable length unshielded max 30 m IO Link IO Link protocol 1 1 Yes Transmission rate 38 4 kBd COM2 Cycle time min 2 1 ms Size of process data input per module 0 byte Size of process data output per module 1 byte Supported IO Link profiles common profile Cable length unshielded max 20 m Connection of IO Link devices Port type A Yes ...

Page 850: ... safety related tripping of standard modules Yes From FS01 Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inpu...

Page 851: ... 6ES7142 5AF00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926730 AB 23 Derating curve The following figure show the load current derating with mounting clearance observed depending on the ambient temperature Figure 6 1 Derating curve IO Link digital output module DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 ...

Page 852: ...A 8xM12 6ES7142 5AF00 0BL0 24 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926730 AB Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DQ 8x24VDC 2A 8xM12 IO Link digital output module in front and side views Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 853: ......

Page 854: ... digital input digital output module DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 6ES7143 5BF00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47925743 AB Preface ET 200AL IO Link I O modules Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 855: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 856: ...orks In order to protect plants systems machines and networks against cyber threats it is necessary to implement and continuously maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and ...

Page 857: ...iew 8 2 1 Properties 8 2 2 Operator controls and display elements 11 3 Wiring 12 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 12 3 2 Pin assignment 13 4 Parameters address space 15 4 1 Parameters 15 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 16 4 3 Address space 17 4 4 IODD parameters 18 5 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 19 5 1 Status and error displays 19 5 2 Interrupts 21 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 21 6 Technical specificat...

Page 858: ...I O modules Device information Equipment manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO Link system You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet https suppor...

Page 859: ... Documentation area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product d...

Page 860: ...ns The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 67460624 SIMATIC S7 PCT The Port Configuration Tool PCT is PC based software for the parameter assignment of Siemens IO Link master modul...

Page 861: ...24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 6ES7143 5BF00 0BL0 8 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47925743 AB Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7143 5BF00 0BL0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 IO Link digital input digital output module ...

Page 862: ...able diagnostics can be set for each module Typical input delay of 3 ms Suitable for switches and proximity switches Digital outputs Rated load voltage 24 V DC Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Output current 0 5 A per output Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module Dimensions 30 x 159 mm Interface for IO Link and power supply M12 connector A coded IO Link ...

Page 863: ...he following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables M8 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I O system https support automation siemens com WW view en 109773203 IO Link I O modules system manual ...

Page 864: ...trols and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 IO Link digital input digital output module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the input output signal PWR LED display for load voltage 2L X35 IO Link interface LED displays 0 to 7 for the channel status Figure 2 2 Operator controls and displ...

Page 865: ...onfigured as input 2 wire connection 1M Ground 1M non switched Configured as input 3 wire connection 2L Load voltage 2L switched Output 2M Ground 2M switched DI DQ circuit 2L switched 2US 24 V encoder supply Microcontroller DIQn Input output signal Monitoring DQn Output signal Internal supply voltage DIQ LEDs channel status 0 1 2 and 3 green DQ circuit 2L switched DQ LEDs channel status 4 5 6 and ...

Page 866: ...ets X10 to X13 sockets for digital inputs outputs X10 X12 X11 X13 1 24 V encoder supply 2US derived from 2L switched 3 Ground 2M 4 Input output signal DIQ0 X10 Input output signal DIQ1 X11 Input output signal DIQ2 X12 Input output signal DIQ3 X13 NOTICE 24 V encoder supply 2US Use only the 24 V encoder supply 2US provided by the digital input digital output module to supply power to the encoder Ta...

Page 867: ... assignment of the connector for the IO Link connection The IO Link interface corresponds to the specification according to Port Class B Table 3 3 Pin assignment of the IO Link interface Pin Assignment Front view of the connector Port Class B X35 1 1L 2 2L 3 Ground 1M 4 Switching and communication cable C Q 5 Ground 2M Note Note that the module can only be supplied with a protective low voltage ac...

Page 868: ...e ISDU index decimal ISDU sub index decimal Value Dec Hex Diagnostics Missing load volt age 2L Disable 0 0 Disable Module 131 1 Enable 255 FF Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable 0 0 Disable Module Short circuit of encoder supply or of the output to ground 131 2 Enable 255 FF Freely assignable channel 0 3 DI 0 0 DI Channel 131 3 6 DQ 255 FF Reaction to CPU master STOP Shutdown 0 0 Shutdown ...

Page 869: ... circuit of the encoder supply or output to ground Freely assignable channel n With this parameter you set whether the channel is to be operated as an input or output Reaction to CPU master STOP With this parameter you set the reaction of the digital outputs of the digital input digital output module after a CPU master STOP Shut down The digital output is de energized Keep last value The last valu...

Page 870: ...he address space for the IO Link DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 Figure 4 1 Address space IO Link DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8x8M Note Parameter assignment of the channels Parameters for the first four channels can be freely assigned For the channels 0 3 that are configured as input the corresponding values in the output data do not trigger any reaction For the channels 0 3 that are configured as output the...

Page 871: ...default value Identification process and diagnostic data Device data Text description Image of the device Manufacturer logo The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers The structure of the IODD is always represented in the same manner by the IO Link Configuration Tool of the master manufacturer for Siemens S7 PCT This ensures that the handling is the same for all ...

Page 872: ...19 Interrupts diagnostics alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 IO Link digital input digital output module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 7 green Load voltage 2L PWR green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 873: ...splay of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes No data exchange with the IO Link Master for example due to wire break Firmware is loading On Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and no module diagnostics Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and module diagnostics LED channel status Table 5 2 LED channel status display L...

Page 874: ...agnostics alarm is issued and the DIAG LED flashes red on the digital input output module You can read out the diagnostics alarms for example from the port status of the IO Link master You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 4 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Remedy Short circuit1 0x7710 Short circuit of an encode...

Page 875: ...ile Yes Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V Supply from 1Us of the IO Link master permissible range lower limit DC 18 V permissible range upper limit DC 30 V Reverse polarity protection Yes against destruction Load voltage 2L Rated value DC 24 V Supply from 2UA of the IO Link master permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28 8 V Reverse polarity prot...

Page 876: ...t delay for rated value of input voltage for standard inputs at 0 to 1 min 1 2 ms at 0 to 1 max 4 8 ms at 1 to 0 min 1 2 ms at 1 to 0 max 4 8 ms Cable length unshielded max 30 m Digital outputs Number of digital outputs 8 4 DQ fixed 4 DIQ parameterizable Short circuit protection Yes per channel electronic Response threshold typ 0 7 A Limitation of inductive shutdown voltage to 2L 50 V Switching ca...

Page 877: ...ofile Cable length unshielded max 20 m Connection of IO Link devices Port type B Yes Interrupts diagnostics status information Substitute values connectable Yes channel by channel parameterizable Alarms Diagnostic alarm Yes Parameterizable Diagnoses Short circuit Yes outputs to ground encoder supply to ground module by module Diagnostics indication LED Channel status display Yes green LED for modu...

Page 878: ...pping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inputs and outputs M8 3 pole Type of electrical connection for IO Link M12 5 pin A coded Dimensions Width 30 mm Heigh...

Page 879: ...5A 8xM8 6ES7143 5BF00 0BL0 26 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47925743 AB Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DIQ 4 DQ 4x24VDC 0 5A 8xM8 IO Link digital input digital output module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 880: ......

Page 881: ...k digital input digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 6ES7143 5AH00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926885 AB Preface ET 200AL IO Link I O modules Documentation Guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 Technical specifications 6 Dimension drawing A ...

Page 882: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 883: ...O system ET 200AL IO Link I O modules are described there The information provided in this manual and in the system manual and function manuals supports you in commissioning the ET 200AL IO Link I O modules Changes compared to the previous version This manual contains the following changes compared to the previous version Supplements in the section Parameters Page 15 Update of the section Technica...

Page 884: ...ems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures e g firewalls and or network segmentation are in place For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented please visit https www siemens com industrialsecurity Siemens products a...

Page 885: ...ew 9 2 1 Properties 9 2 2 Operator controls and display elements 12 3 Wiring 13 3 1 Terminal and block diagram 13 3 2 Pin assignment 14 4 Parameters address space 15 4 1 Parameters 15 4 2 Explanation of the parameters 16 4 3 Address space 17 4 4 IODD parameters 17 5 Interrupts diagnostic alarms 18 5 1 Status and error displays 18 5 2 Interrupts 20 5 3 Diagnostics alarms 20 6 Technical specificatio...

Page 886: ...O modules Device information Equipment manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties wiring diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC IO Link system You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet https support ...

Page 887: ...Documentation area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet https support industry siemens com My ww en documentation mySupport CAx data In the CAx data area of mySupport you can access the latest product da...

Page 888: ...s The topology overview automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 67460624 SIMATIC S7 PCT The Port Configuration Tool PCT is PC based software for the parameter assignment of Siemens IO Link master module...

Page 889: ...4VDC 0 5A 8xM12 6ES7143 5AH00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926885 AB 9 Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article number 6ES7143 5AH00 0BL0 View of the module Figure 2 1 View of the DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 IO Link digital input digital output module ...

Page 890: ...and proximity switches Typical input delay of 3 ms Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module Digital outputs Rated load voltage 24 V DC Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Output current per output 0 5 A Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module Dimensions 45 x 159 mm Interface for IO Link and power supply M12 connector A coded Supply of the module e...

Page 891: ... following component can be ordered as spare part Identification labels The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I O system https support industry siemens com cs us en view 89254965 IO Link I O modules system manual ...

Page 892: ...rols and display elements The figure below shows the operator controls and display elements of the DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 IO Link digital input digital output module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status X10 to X17 Sockets for the input output signal PWR LED display for load voltage 2L X35 IO Link interface LED displays 0 to 15 for the channel status Figure 2 2 Operator controls and display ...

Page 893: ...1L Supply voltage 1L non switched Configured as outputs 1M Ground 1M non switched Configured as input 3 wire connection 2L Load voltage 2L switched Configured as output 2M Ground 2M switched Configured as input 2 wire connection 2US 24 V encoder supply DI DQ circuit 2L switched DIQn Input output signal Microcontroller DIQ LEDs channel status 0 15 green Monitoring DIAG Diagnostic status LED red gre...

Page 894: ...ctor X13 Input output signal DIQ9 Connector X14 Input output signal DIQ11 Connector X15 Input output signal DIQ13 Connector X16 Input output signal DIQ15 Connector X17 3 Ground 2M 4 Input output signal DIQ0 Connector X10 Input output signal DIQ2 Connector X11 Input output signal DIQ4 Connector X12 Input output signal DIQ6 Connector X13 Input output signal DIQ8 Connector X14 Input output signal DIQ...

Page 895: ...al Value Dec Hex Diagnostics Missing load volt age 2L Disable 0 0 Disable Module 131 1 Enable 255 FF Diagnostics Short circuit to ground Disable 0 0 Disable Module Short circuit of encoder supply or of the output to ground 131 2 Enable 255 FF Freely assignable channel 0 7 DI 0 0 DI Channel 131 3 10 DQ 255 FF Freely assignable channel 8 15 DI 0 0 DQ Channel 131 11 18 DQ 255 FF Reaction to CPU maste...

Page 896: ...t of an encoder supply or of an output to ground Freely assignable channel With this parameter you set whether the channel is to be operated as an input or output Reaction to CPU master STOP With this parameter you set the reaction of the channels configured as output of the digital input output module after a CPU master STOP Deactivate The digital output is de energized Keep last value The last v...

Page 897: ...f information for system integration Communication properties Device parameters with value range and default value Identification process and diagnostic data Device data Text description Image of the device Manufacturer logo The structure of the IODD is identical for all devices from all manufacturers The structure of the IODD is always represented in the same manner by the IO Link Configuration T...

Page 898: ...AB Interrupts diagnostic alarms 5 5 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 IO Link digital input digital output module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status 0 to 15 green Load voltage 2L PWR green Figure 5 1 LED displays ...

Page 899: ...1 Error display of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes No data exchange with the IO Link Master e g wire break Firmware is loading On Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and no module diagnostics Flashes Module is currently exchanging data with the IO Link master and module diagnostics LED channel status Table 5 2 LED channel status display LED ch...

Page 900: ...gital output module You can read out the diagnostics alarms for example from the status of the IO Link master You can evaluate the error codes with the user program Table 5 4 Diagnostics alarms their meanings and corrective measures Diagnostics alarm Error code Meaning Solution Short circuit1 0x7710 Short circuit of an encoder sup ply to ground Eliminate the short circuit Short circuit of an outpu...

Page 901: ...Yes Supply voltage Load voltage 1L Rated value DC 24 V Supply from 1Us of the IO Link master permissible range lower limit DC 18 V permissible range upper limit DC 30 V Reverse polarity protection Yes against destruction Load voltage 2L Rated value DC 24 V Supply from 2UA of the IO Link master permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28 8 V Reverse polarity protecti...

Page 902: ...nal 1 11 to 30V Input current for signal 1 typ 3 mA Input delay for rated value of input voltage for standard inputs at 0 to 1 min 1 2 ms at 0 to 1 max 4 8 ms at 1 to 0 min 1 2 ms at 1 to 0 max 4 8 ms Cable length unshielded max 30 m Digital outputs Number of digital outputs 16 Parameterizable as DIQ Short circuit protection Yes per channel electronic Response threshold typ 0 7 A Limitation of ind...

Page 903: ...Size of process data input per module 2 byte Size of process data output per module 2 byte Supported IO Link profiles common profile Cable length unshielded max 20 m Connection of IO Link devices Port type B Yes Interrupts diagnostics status information Substitute values connectable Yes channel by channel parameterizable Alarms Diagnostic alarm Yes Parameterizable Diagnoses Short circuit Yes outpu...

Page 904: ...les Yes From FS01 Highest safety class achievable for safety related tripping of standard modules Performance level according to ISO 13849 1 PL d Category according to ISO 13849 1 Cat 3 SILCL according to IEC 62061 SILCL 2 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inputs and outputs M12 5 pin A coded Type of ...

Page 905: ...A 8xM12 6ES7143 5AH00 0BL0 Equipment Manual 08 2021 A5E47926885 AB 25 Dimension drawing A The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the DIQ 16x24VDC 0 5A 8xM12 IO Link digital input digital output module in front and side view Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 906: ......

Page 907: ...pment Manual V1 0 05 2021 A5E51082342 AA Preface Documentation guide 1 Product overview 2 Wiring 3 Parameters address space 4 Applications of the F I O module 5 Interrupts diagnostic messages diagnostics 6 Technical specifications 7 Dimension drawing A Response times B Switching of loads C ...

Page 908: ...by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens product...

Page 909: ...s in the SIMATIC Safety Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual have to be observed You can find the current version of the manual on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 54110126 Conventions Please observe notes marked as follows Note Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid Security information Siemens prov...

Page 910: ...olutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used Use of product versions that are no longer supported and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers exposure to cyber threats To stay informed about product updates subscribe to the ...

Page 911: ...lications 39 5 1 1 Applications 1 and 2 1oo1 evaluation of single channel sensors 41 5 1 2 Applications 3 and 4 1oo2 evaluation of equivalent sensors 44 5 1 3 Applications 5 and 6 1oo2 evaluation of a 3 wire nonequivalent sensor circuit 46 5 1 4 Applications 7 and 8 1oo2 evaluation of a 4 wire nonequivalent sensor circuit 49 5 2 Digital output applications 51 5 2 1 Application 1 Wiring a directly ...

Page 912: ...s 67 6 5 Fault types causes and corrective measures 70 7 Technical specifications 78 7 1 Specifications 78 A Dimension drawing 82 A 1 Dimension drawing 82 B Response times 83 B 1 Maximum response time 83 B 2 Response time parameters for the F DI 4 F DQ 2 digital inputs 83 B 3 Response time parameters for the F DI 4 F DQ 2 digital outputs 85 C Switching of loads 86 C 1 Connecting capacitive loads 8...

Page 913: ...amming Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties terminal diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I O system e g diagnostics communication Motion Control Web server You can down...

Page 914: ...parated from the focus on individual products You will find the application examples on the Internet https support industry siemens com sc ww en sc 2054 TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool you can select configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation TIA This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology...

Page 915: ...ion Tool on the Internet http www siemens com safety evaluation tool You can find Functional Examples on the Internet http www siemens com safety functional examples You can find SITRAIN classes on the Internet http www siemens com sitrain safetyintegrated You can find the RT_calculator on the Internet http support automation siemens com WW view en 49368678 133100 ...

Page 916: ...DC 2A 4xM12 6ES7146 5FF00 0BA0 10 Equipment Manual V1 0 05 2021 A5E51082342 AA Product overview 2 2 1 Properties Article Number 6ES7146 5FF00 0BA0 View of the Module Figure 2 1 View of the F DI 4 F DQ 2x24VDC 2A 4xM12 Fail Safe I O module ...

Page 917: ... channel Configurable input delay Suitable for switches and 3 4 wire proximity switches Fail safe digital outputs Rated load voltage 24 V DC Suitable for solenoid valves DC contactors and indicator lights Output current per output 2 0 A Configurable diagnostics can be set for each channel Dimensions 45 x 159 mm The module supports the following functions Firmware update Identification and maintena...

Page 918: ...e ordered as a spare part Identification labels Yellow eCoding plug The following components can be ordered as accessories Connectors Cables Stripping Tool for ET Connection M8 sealing cap M12 sealing cap See also You can find more information on accessories in Accessories spare parts in the ET 200AL distributed I O system system manual https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 89254965 ...

Page 919: ...ator controls and display elements of the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module DIAG LED display for the diagnostic status LED displays for the channel status X40 eCoding plug connection PWR LED display for load voltage 2L X81 Socket for loop through of the supply voltage POWER output X31 Socket for ET Connection OUT X30 Socket for ET Connection IN X80 Connector for infeed of the supply voltage POWER inp...

Page 920: ...he fail safe digital inputs use two microcontrollers to implement the safety function One microcontroller monitors inputs 0 and 1 and the other microcontroller monitors inputs 2 and 3 The corresponding channels 0 2 and 1 3 form a 1oo2 channel group The lower numbered channel of the group is called the primary input and the other channel is called the secondary input The first of the two inputs in ...

Page 921: ...put consists of two switches A P switch connects 24 V DC positive L to the load An M switch connects the load to M or 24 V DC return Both switches must be ON for current to flow to the load The fail safe digital outputs use two microcontrollers to implement the safety function One microcontroller controls the P switch while the other microcontroller controls the M switch Status of the P switch is ...

Page 922: ...ent Manual V1 0 05 2021 A5E51082342 AA The module can detect a broken wire or missing load when the output PV is OFF If the broken wire diagnostic is enabled then the load must be wired in the PM configuration or a broken wire diagnostic will occur see applications 1 3 or 4 in section 5 2 Digital output applications Page 51 ...

Page 923: ...2342 AA 17 Wiring 3 WARNING You can come into contact with live electrical wires connected to the main power supply Death or serious personal injury and damage to machines and equipment may result if proper precautions are not taken Shut off the supply and load voltage before you wire the fail safe module ...

Page 924: ...rocontrollers X81 Loop through of supply voltages F DQ circuit 2L VSn 24 V sensor supplies eCoding plug 1L Supply voltage 1L ET Connection interface 1M Ground 1M Internal supply voltage 2L Load voltage 2L Outputs 2M Ground 2M Inputs Configured as 1oo1 sensor using internal sensor supply DIn Input signal X10 X12 F DI input channels DQn P Output signal P switch X14 X16 F DQ output channels DQn M Out...

Page 925: ...3 1 Pin assignment for fail safe digital input sockets Pin Assignment Front view of the sockets X10 and X12 sockets for fail safe digital inputs X10 X12 1 24 V DC sensor supply VS1 2 Input signal DI2 Connector X10 Input signal DI3 Connector X12 3 Sensor supply ground 1M 4 Input signal DI0 Connector X10 Input signal DI1 Connector X12 5 24 V DC sensor supply VS2 Table 3 2 Pin assignment for fail saf...

Page 926: ... connector for infeed of the supply voltage The table below shows the pin assignment of the connector for infeed of the supply voltage Table 3 4 Pin assignment of the supply voltage connector Pin Assignment Assignment of the wire color of the power line cable Front view of the connector X80 connector POWER input 1 Supply voltage 1L Brown 2 Ground 2M White 3 Ground 1M Blue 4 Load voltage 2L Black P...

Page 927: ... DI 4 F DQ 2 with eCoding Plug Attached side view The eCoding plug stores the following information PROFIsafe source address PROFIsafe destination address Address validity information The eCoding plug occupies the X40 M12 socket utilizing a B coded plug You use the eCoding plug to facilitate module replacement The eCoding plug stores assigned PROFIsafe source and destination addresses The Assign P...

Page 928: ...ge to the fail safe module and associated machines equipment may result if proper precautions are not taken Only remove or replace the eCoding plug when the power is disconnected Always comply with the required standards and safety guidelines when configuring a system Note When replacing the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module transfer the eCoding plug of the failed module to the replacement module to ...

Page 929: ...guration You can find further information on F parameters such as the F monitoring time the PROFIsafe address assignment F source address F destination address F parameter signature with or without addresses and the F I O DB in the SIMATIC Industrial Software SIMATIC Safety Configuring and Programming Programming and Operating Manual on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view...

Page 930: ...odule F parameter signature with address es 0 to 65535 always disabled no Module F parameter signature without ad dresses 0 to 65535 always disabled no Module Behavior after channel fault Passivate channel Passivate entire module Passivate channel always enabled no Module Reintegration after channel fault Adjustable All channels automatically All channels manually All channels manually always enab...

Page 931: ... ms no Channel Channel n n 2 Sensor evaluation 1oo1 evaluation 1oo2 evaluation 2 channel equiv alent 2 channel 3 wire non equivalent 2 channel 4 wire non equivalent 1oo2 evaluation 2 channel equivalent no Channel Discrepancy behavior Supply value 0 Supply last valid value Supply value 0 no Channel Discrepancy time 5 ms to 30 s 5 ms no Channel Reintegration after discrepancy error Test 0 Signal not...

Page 932: ...annel failure acknowledge Automatic Manual Manual no Channel Maximum readback time 1 0 ms to 400 0 ms 2 0 ms no Channel Maximum readback time switch on test 0 5 ms to 5 0 ms 1 0 ms no Channel Disable dark test max SIL 2 Cat 3 PL d dark test is disabled dark test is enabled dark test is enabled no Channel 4 3 Explanation of parameters 4 3 1 F parameters Information on F parameters is available in t...

Page 933: ...et the Behavior after channel fault parameter to Passivate the entire module you can only select the same reintegration type for all channels 4 3 2 DI parameters Short circuit test You can enable the short circuit detection for the channels of the F module for which Internal sensor supply is set The short circuit test is only useful if you are using simple switches that do not have their own power...

Page 934: ...onfigured discrepancy time Tsct configured short circuit test duration Tfilter configured input filter time Tda actual discrepancy time time between process signal changes that can be detected as a fault The range of detected discrepancy time is as follows If Tfilter Tsct Tdisc Tfilter Tsct Tda Tdisc If Tfilter Tsct Tdisc 2 x Tsct Tda Tdisc Your configured discrepancy time should account for this ...

Page 935: ...hannel n input operates individually 1oo1 or is paired with its companion channel n 2 input 1oo2 Defines signal evaluation and wiring definitions These selections correspond with the various application mode wiring examples 1oo1 evaluation One sensor is connected to the module on a single channel 1oo2 evaluation Two input channels are occupied by either 2 channel equivalent with equivalent signals...

Page 936: ... discrepancy between two relevant input channels which means while discrepancy time is running You assign the discrepancy behavior as follows Supply last valid value Supply value 0 Note Sensor actuator response time is increased when you add more input discrepancy time The discrepancy time adds directly to the maximum response time of a 1oo2 evaluation if the two signals do not agree in logical st...

Page 937: ...e safety program If you disable a channel channel diagnostics are no longer reported to the F CPU for the deactivated channel Whenever you disable all output channels you do not have to power 2L and 2L undervoltage reporting is suspended Input filters The module filters the digital inputs to remove contact bounce and short duration noise This parameter assigns the duration of the filter time Chann...

Page 938: ...is used again A persistent fault is reported to the fail safe CPU and the affected channels are passivated Wire break You can enable or disable wire break testing Wire break is only detected when the channel is in the OFF state process value is 0 Activated You can enable the corresponding channel for signal processing in the safety program If you disable a channel channel diagnostics are no longer...

Page 939: ... module WARNING Short circuit cross circuit detection may not be possible for high frequency signals Through the configured Maximum readback time short circuits cross circuits to a signal with a frequency greater than 1 2 x configured Maximum readback time Hz cannot be detected 50 50 sampling ratio You must take this into consideration for your application and respective requirements of your produ...

Page 940: ...eadback time Increase the Maximum readback time If you have set the Maximum readback time to the maximum value of 400 ms and there is still a passivation of the output channel there is either an external fault or the connected capacitance is outside the permitted range Dark test Dark tests are switch off tests which occur during an output bit pattern test sequence When dark test is disabled on an ...

Page 941: ... This action tests the P and M switches on a channel such that only one switch is turned on at a time Unless there is a fault in the system for example actuator shorted to ground the actuator is not energized during either the P or M switch on tests Under single fault conditions either internal or external to the module test pulses applied to either the P or the M switch of channels in the OFF sta...

Page 942: ...y turn off the supply or load voltage of the F module and turn it on again WARNING Loss of cross circuit detection between channels When you use the function Disable dark test cross circuits between channels with 1 signal are not detected You must take this into consideration for your application and respective requirements of your product standards You must also take into consideration the respec...

Page 943: ...figure below shows the assignment of the address space for the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module with value status Quality Information QI Figure 4 3 Address space Evaluating the value status The value status bits provide information regarding the validity of the digital values or channel status Bit 1 Corresponding process value is valid Bit 0 Channel is passivated ...

Page 944: ...afety function perform these actions Choose an appropriate architecture Choose sensors and actuators that are appropriately rated Provide a safety program that meets the requirements of the safety function Provide diagnostics and proof tests to maintain the ratings of the sensors and actuators Use wiring installation practices diagnostics and proof tests to assure wiring integrity Generate and con...

Page 945: ...or should not respond to an OFF signal up to the Maximum readback time duration or to an ON signal up to the Maximum readback time switch on test duration The F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module digital outputs expect to complete and confirm any commanded transition from the ON to OFF output state After your program changes the process output value from 1 to 0 do not change the 0 back to a 1 until the ...

Page 946: ...r supply to detect short circuit or overload Cycles the sensor supply once on each power up to assure control and readback are working This ensures operational integrity of the sensor supply at power up even when disabled Monitors the readback during input short circuit tests Configure a discrepancy time to identify unacceptable differences between 1oo2 inputs Configure a filter time for each chan...

Page 947: ... The F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module uses M12 I Oconnections and is intended for use outside a cabinet in IP67 applications everything sealed If you require the use of an external supply cut the M12 cable and make the connection inside a sealed cabinet or inside a sealed sensor For external supplies do not connect the pin 1 wire VS1 or the pin 5 wire VS2 in the M12 cable This action prevents the se...

Page 948: ...r supply 1oo1 evaluation of a single channel sensor shown Use Y cable 6ES7194 6KB00 0XA0 for F DI application mode 1 to connect two single channel sensors in 1oo1 evaluation as follows Figure 5 2 F DI application mode 1 Internal sensor supply 1oo1 evaluation of two single channel sensors shown Parameter assignment Parameter name Parameter value Sensor evaluation 1oo1 evaluation Sensor supply Inter...

Page 949: ...evaluation When you use an external sensor supply the module does not evaluate that channel for short circuit testing Note To incorporate F DI application mode 2 into a SIL 2 rated application ensure the sensors are appropriately qualified devices Figure 5 3 F DI application mode 2 External sensor supply 1oo1 evaluation of two single channel sensors shown Parameter assignment Parameter name Parame...

Page 950: ...ses a two channel sensor or two single channel sensors in a 1oo2 voting with discrepancy evaluation When you use an internal sensor supply you can successfully perform short circuit detection Note To incorporate F DI application mode 3 into a SIL 3 rated application ensure the sensors are appropriately qualified devices Figure 5 4 F DI application mode 3 Internal sensor supply 1oo2 evaluation of t...

Page 951: ...ameter name Parameter value Sensor evaluation 1oo2 evaluation 2 channel equivalent Sensor supply Internal Short circuit test Enable F DI application mode 4 This application mode uses a two channel sensor or two single channel sensors in a 1oo2 voting with discrepancy evaluation When you use an external sensor supply the module does not evaluate that channel for short circuit testing Note To incorp...

Page 952: ...on of a 3 wire nonequivalent sensor circuit F DI application mode 5 This application mode uses a two channel sensor or two single channel sensors with two nonequivalent outputs in a 1oo2 voting with discrepancy evaluation When you use an internal sensor supply you can successfully perform short circuit detection The application mode uses the following pins Pin 2 channels 2 and 3 is the inverted in...

Page 953: ...5 2021 A5E51082342 AA 47 Figure 5 7 F DI application mode 5 Internal sensor supply 1oo2 evaluation of two channel sensor with nonequivalent outputs shown Use Y cable 6ES7194 6KA00 0XA0 for application mode 5 as follows Figure 5 8 F DI application mode 5 Internal sensor supply 1oo2 evaluation of two single channel sensors with nonequivalent outputs shown ...

Page 954: ...tion When you use an external sensor supply the module does not evaluate that channel for short circuit testing The application mode uses the following pins Pin 2 channels 2 and 3 is the inverted input of the nonequivalent configuration Pin 4 channels 0 and 1 is the non inverted input of the nonequivalent configuration Note To incorporate F DI application mode 6 into a SIL 3 rated application ensu...

Page 955: ...epancy evaluation When you use an internal sensor supply you can successfully perform short circuit detection The application mode uses the following pins Pin 2 channels 2 and 3 is the inverted input of the nonequivalent configuration Pin 4 channels 0 and 1 is the non inverted input of the nonequivalent configuration Note To incorporate F DI application mode 7 into a SIL 3 rated application ensure...

Page 956: ...rnal Short circuit test Enable F DI application mode 8 This application mode uses two single channel sensors or a two channel sensor with two nonequivalent outputs in a 1oo2 voting with discrepancy evaluation When you use an external sensor supply the module does not evaluate that channel for short circuit testing The application mode uses the following pins Pin 2 channels 2 and 3 is the inverted ...

Page 957: ...alent Sensor supply External 5 2 Digital output applications You should consider the application modes presented here along with the features of the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module as described in the overview Refer to Fail safe digital outputs Page 15 The main features of the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module digital outputs include the following items which apply to each output channel The fail safe...

Page 958: ...o reach Cat 4 ensure that the following conditions are met The dark testing is enabled The external contactors are SIL rated with sense contacts The diagnostics are within limits when you read the sense contacts back and confirm the external contactor response in your program Siemens recommends using an F DI input for sense contact and other safety diagnostic inputs Output architectures for achiev...

Page 959: ... application mode 1 5 2 2 Application 2 Wiring external contactors Separate P and M controlled contactors The module supports application mode 2 where the module controls the load using series connected normally open contacts of two relays The coil of one relay connects the P output of a channel and M The coil of the other relay connects the M output of the same channel and L Note This configurati...

Page 960: ...e series connected normally open contacts of two relays You connect the coils of both relays in parallel across the outputs of one channel Note This configuration achieves SIL 3 Cat 4 PL e if the CPU checks the relay status feedback using a separate digital input and if neither channel is configured to disable the dark test Application mode 3 is the preferred way of controlling an actuator using r...

Page 961: ...ing the series connected normally open contacts of two relays Connect the coils of both relays across the outputs of two channels In the safety program write the same process value ON or OFF to both output channels Note This configuration achieves SIL 3 Cat 4 PL e if the CPU checks the relay status feedback using a separate digital input and neither channel is configured to disable the dark test F...

Page 962: ... DI application mode 4 to connect the Laser Scanner output signal switching device with 1oo2 evaluation to the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module Alternatively use F DI application mode 3 and disable the parameter Short circuit test for both sensor supplies ESTOP Emergency Stop 1oo2 evaluation For the ESTOP use F DI application mode 3 to connect an ESTOP device with 1oo2 evaluation to the F DI 4 F DQ ...

Page 963: ... two single channel sensors with 1oo1 evaluation to one input connection of the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module Use F DI application mode 3 1oo2 evaluation using two single channel sensors on the same safety door Alternatively use F DI application mode 5 with the fail safe Y cable 6ES7194 6KA00 0XA0 to connect two nonequivalent single channel sensors with 1oo2 evaluation on the same safety door Saf...

Page 964: ...nd F output to the safety position switch Note This configuration achieves SIL 3 Cat 4 PL e if neither output channel is configured to disable the dark test Note To incorporate this application into a SIL 3 rated application ensure the sensors are appropriately qualified devices either SIL 3 or SIL 2 with the Systematic Capability rules defined in the SIRIUS documentation For further information r...

Page 965: ... module Digital I O module F DI 4 F DQ 2x24VDC 2A 4xM12 6ES7146 5FF00 0BA0 Equipment Manual V1 0 05 2021 A5E51082342 AA 59 Connect devices to F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module The figures below are examples of field devices connected to the input and output sockets of the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module ...

Page 966: ...ons of the F I O module 5 3 Examples of application modes for the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module Digital I O module F DI 4 F DQ 2x24VDC 2A 4xM12 6ES7146 5FF00 0BA0 60 Equipment Manual V1 0 05 2021 A5E51082342 AA ...

Page 967: ...example short circuit and discrepancy errors The fail safe CPU enters information about detected system faults into the diagnostic buffer Automatic safety measures and the PROFIsafe protocol ensure that the safe state is set if the system detects a fault Fail safe modules do not remember errors upon power cycle When the system is powered down and then restarted the modules detect any faults still ...

Page 968: ...ration only the affected channel or all channels may be passivated For a 1oo2 both in puts of the channel group in the 1oo2 configuration are passivated Fail safe digital outputs Tests are evaluated per channel in order to allow chan nel granular passivation of defective outputs Diagnostic evaluations are performed separately for each of the two switches of a channel Depending on your configuratio...

Page 969: ...ing effects of high ambient temperature or high applied voltage Solid state switch outputs can be damaged by high currents prior to protective device activations The PFD and PFH reliability calculations assume the fail safe module is operated within its specified operating parameters When a module has passivated due to a high stress event even though it apparently works correctly and passes all di...

Page 970: ...ences to any passivated fail safe inputs are removed from any operating F CPU Safety program logic that can result in activation of a safety function output Do not depend on channel or module passivation to maintain safe state for more than 100 hours Do not depend on deactivation or lack of configuration to maintain safe state in any circumstances WARNING Unintentional activation of F I O module w...

Page 971: ...s is subject to single point failures in electronics or software These reports are offered as maintenance and debugging aids Observe and interpret the reports with caution In the presence of single faults any or all LED indications can be wrong You should not rely solely on the presence or absence of red or green LED indicators to make safety decisions In the presence of single faults diagnostic m...

Page 972: ...arameters from the fail safe CPU at power up P and M switch ON tests are sequenced so that normally or in the presence of a single detected fault there is no complete PM circuit to energize the load The F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module executes tests for its digital inputs of the sensor supply at power up including ON and OFF pulses whether or not you have enabled the sensor supply or short circuit ...

Page 973: ...1 A5E51082342 AA 67 6 4 Diagnostics by LED display 6 4 1 Status and error displays LED displays The figure below shows the LED displays status and error displays of the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module Diagnostic status DIAG red green Channel status and channel error red green for each channel F DI 0 3 F DQ 0 and 1 Load voltage 2L status PWR green Figure 6 1 LED displays ...

Page 974: ...available DIAG LED Table 6 3 Meaning of the DIAG LED DIAG LED Meaning Off No supply voltage 1L Flashes green Configuration parameterization has not been received and no module diagnostics Alternately Flashes red green Module wide reintegratable faults such as the following are resolved and are awaiting reintegration Overvoltage Undervoltage PROFIsafe CRC error PROFIsafe timeout error On green Modu...

Page 975: ...ndary input LED Meaning Off Off Process signal 0 equivalent On green On green Process signal 1 equivalent Off On green Process signal 0 nonequivalent On green Off Process signal 1 nonequivalent On red On red Channel fault or module fault affecting the channel Alternately Flashes red green Alternately Flashes red green Fault resolved awaiting reintegration Channel LED for output channels Table 6 6 ...

Page 976: ...d where either the P terminal or M terminal is at an unexpected potential Short circuit of the output Short circuit be tween channels with different sig nals Output overload Maximum read back time switch on test value is configured too small Short circuit of output to M Defective output driver Eliminate the short circuit Eliminate the over load Increase Maximum readback time switch on test if perm...

Page 977: ... fail safe CPU The module LEDs give an immediate indication of this fault i Parameter CRC error Invalid i parameters for ex ample invalid se lection parameter out of range un supported feature selected and wrong value of re served field Any PROFIsafe parameterization problem detected by the PROFIsafe driver Correct the parameter assignment Parameterization failure address assignment fail ure Modul...

Page 978: ...ecked after new parameters received eCoding plug has been replaced with a different plug eCoding plug is defective Reassign the PROFIsafe F ad dresses using STEP 7 TIA Portal Replace the eCod ing plug 16x0042 Safety source address not valid F_Source_Add Module The PROFIsafe driver has detected a source address mismatch or an invalid source ad dress Checked after new parameters received eCoding plu...

Page 979: ...rror timeout watchdog time 1 or 2 elapsed Adjust F monitoring time Check Safety pro gram and all other CPU activities for excessive execu tion or demands Interrupts Ethernet com munication OB scheduling conflicts Long program paths 16x004F Channel failure acknowledge ment Module Channel configured for manual acknowledge ment is ready to rein tegrate Manual acknowledge ment required Manually acknow...

Page 980: ...rflow of the diag nostic events queue has occurred A newly occurred diagnostic event could not be queued for transmis sion to the CPU be cause the buffer is full This can happen if channel errors come and go very quickly for example discrep ancy errors Examine the Diagnos tics buffer to see what errors are occurring then address that issue 16x0300 Discrepancy fail ure channel state 0 0 F DI 4 F DQ...

Page 981: ...minate the short circuit Reduce load on sensor supply Replace the fail safe module 16x030D F address memory not ac cessible Module The memory where the F address is stored is not accessible eCoding plug is missing eCoding plug is defective Install an eCoding plug into X40 of the module Replace the defec tive eCoding plug 16x030E No valid F address available Module Fail safe address is not valid F ...

Page 982: ...d but wired to external L Input defective Check correct ex ternal short circuit Make wiring and configuration agree Replace the fail safe module 16x031E Read back failure F DI 4 F DQ 2 digital outputs The module has de tected a channel prob lem where the expected terminal voltage s are not reached Maximum read back time or Max imum readback time switch on test configured value is too small Output ...

Page 983: ...unication errors disturb external and internal signal measurements and cause processing errors When error reports do not apparently relate to an identifiable device failure wiring problem programming or configuration error consider sources of electromagnetic interference and installation and wiring problems that might introduce electromagnetic interference in your installation Typical problem sour...

Page 984: ...imit DC 28 8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes against destruction Load voltage2 L Rated value DC 24 V permissible range lower limit DC 20 4 V permissible range upper limit DC 28 8 V Reverse polarity protection Yes against destruction outputs applied with reversed polarity for loads connected between M switch and 2L will conduct Input current Current consumption rated value 55 mA 1L 40 mA 2L witho...

Page 985: ...min 0 8 ms at 1 to 0 max 12 8 ms Cable length unshielded max 30 m Digital outputs Number of digital outputs 2 in groups of 2 Short circuit protection Yes per channel electronic Response threshold typ 10 A measured at M switch threshold for P switch is higher Open circuit detection Yes per channel only detects when output is off Overload protection Yes Response threshold typ 3 4 A measured at P swi...

Page 986: ...ED Potential separation between the load voltages Yes Potential separation channels between the channels in groups of 4 DI channels are isolated from 2 DQ channels between the channels and backplane bus Yes between the channels and the power supply of the electronics DI channels are not isolated from supply voltage 1L and DQ channels are isolated from supply voltage 1L Isolation Isolation tested w...

Page 987: ...L2 1 0E 08 1 h DI single channel 1 0E 07 1 h DQ with dark test disabled High demand continuous mode PFH in accord ance with SIL3 1 0E 09 1 h DI two channel 1 0E 08 1 h DQ with dark test enabled Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation min 30 C max 55 C Connection method Design of electrical connection for the inputs and outputs M12 5 pin Design of electrical connection for supply vo...

Page 988: ...F00 0BA0 82 Equipment Manual V1 0 05 2021 A5E51082342 AA Dimension drawing A A 1 Dimension drawing The figure below shows the dimension drawing of the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module in front and side views The dimensions are in mm Figure A 1 Dimension drawing ...

Page 989: ...esponse time using the SIMATIC STEP 7 Safety Advanced F Execution Times F Runtimes F Monitoring and Reaction Times http support automation siemens com WW view en 49368678 133100 Excel file RT_calculator Use your configured individual fail safe module timing parameters and the module characteristic parameters found in this appendix to determine the maximum response time of your system Data transpor...

Page 990: ...ter Tdis as a separate item Tfilter Configured Input filters time for the channel TOFDT_i One Fault Delay Time Maximum response time for the fail safe module s digital input to report a channel as passivated Tscf Time delay for short circuit fault duration Configured Interval for short circuit test when operating in high demand or continuous mode and depending on the short circuit test to achieve ...

Page 991: ...d Maximum readback time switch on test for the channel TWCDT_q Worst Case Delay Time Maximum response time of the fail safe module s digital output DC from the receipt of a safety message frame from the safety program in the fail safe CPU to the signal transition at the digital output The term 2 x Tcycle allows for a new process value to be delivered from the fail safe CPU just after the beginning...

Page 992: ...nd resistors so that when you turn off the output the voltage on the capacitor is not present at the P output Typically power supplies with input capacitors that have reverse voltage protection have this diode built into the power supply Using the added diode you can greatly reduce the Maximum readback time to some portion of the hold up time of the power supply capacitor This reduced Maximum read...

Page 993: ...han the internal suppression threshold to avoid overloading the internal suppression Figure C 1 Switching of inductive loads for the F DI 4 F DQ 2 Fail Safe module depending on the load current and switching frequency WARNING Unsuppressed inductive loads can lead to failures The following failures can result Unsuppressed inductive loads can lead to early stuck on failures of the fail safe module d...

Page 994: ...nstitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures e g firewalls and or network segmentation are in place ...

Page 995: ...multaneously If the problem occurs Perform one of the following actions to restore the module to normal operation Power cycle the IM independently Power cycle the CPU independently Download the hardware configuration to the F CPU using STEP7 TIA Portal or Step 7 Classic Steps to avoid the problem The problem can be avoided by ensuring that for any situation in which the module is power cycled with...

Page 996: ...Diagnostics ...

Page 997: ...Manual 11 2019 A5E03735838 AF Preface Function manuals Documentation Guide 1 Overview of system diagnostics 2 Quick start 3 Setting and determining system diagnostics 4 System diagnostics by means of the user program 5 Alarms 6 Diagnostics of the S7 1500R H redundant system 7 ...

Page 998: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 999: ...ics Overview of the options for establishing system diagnostics information Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the function manual General knowledge in the field of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge of working with STEP 7 and WinCC Knowledge about the use of Microsoft Windows operating systems Scop...

Page 1000: ...nction manual Edition 10 2018 compared to Edition 09 2016 What s new What are the customer benefits Where can I find the infor mation New contents Description of the diagnos tics of the S7 1500R H re dundant system You obtain information in compact form on the special features of the diagnostics in the S7 1500R H redundant systems Section Diagnostics of the S7 1500R H redundant system Page 97 Chan...

Page 1001: ...ogic ana lyzer function https support industry sieme ns com cs ww en view 648971 28 function manual Assignment of different project languages extended You can assign up to three different pro ject languages for comments and alarm texts to the user interface languages of display devices Section Editing alarms in the alarm editor Page 78 Changed contents Scope of the function man ual expanded to inc...

Page 1002: ...ic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appr...

Page 1003: ...vices Field Services Technical Support spare parts and training offers Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages support queries and configurable documents This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet https support industry siemens com Industry Mall The Indust...

Page 1004: ... Explanation of diagnostics symbols 29 4 2 2 2 Accessible devices without project 31 4 2 2 3 Devices networks 33 4 2 2 4 Online diagnostics 36 4 2 2 5 Diagnostics tab in the Inspector window 39 4 2 2 6 CPU diagnostics buffer 42 4 2 2 7 Online tools task card 45 4 2 2 8 Configuring the settings for I O modules in STEP 7 47 4 2 3 Diagnostics information using the web server 48 4 2 4 Diagnostics info...

Page 1005: ...sk 83 6 5 2 Example 1 Program alarm without associated values 84 6 5 3 Example 2 Program alarm with associated value 89 6 5 4 Displaying the alarm 96 7 Diagnostics of the S7 1500R H redundant system 97 7 1 Online and Diagnostics view 100 7 2 Online Tools task card 103 7 3 Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view 106 7 4 Diagnostics in the RUN Redundant system st...

Page 1006: ... specific information you require Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration installation wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro 2 PN The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming Device information Product manual...

Page 1007: ... Internet S7 1500 ET 200MP https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 86140384 ET 200SP https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 84133942 ET 200AL https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 95242965 mySupport With mySupport your personal workspace you make the best out of your Industry Online Support In mySupport you can save filters favorites and tags request CAx data and comp...

Page 1008: ...information You can minimize unscheduled standstill times with plant wide diagnostics The SIMATIC automation system monitors the following states in the running plant Device failure recovery Insert remove event Module fault I O access error Channel fault Parameter assignment error Failure of the external auxiliary voltage Properties ofSIMATIC system diagnostics Integrated as standard in the hardwa...

Page 1009: ...m the field level all the way to the management level The various diagnostics media give you a uniform view of maintenance related information of every automation component in the plant System status module and network status alarms for system errors are available plant wide in a uniform display Figure 2 1 Overview of system diagnostics in a plant ...

Page 1010: ...ly and signaled to the higher level HMI devices the Web server and the display of the SIMATIC S7 1500 CPU even in STOP mode This makes system diagnostics consistent with the actual plant state at all times Uniform display concept All clients of a system are provided with diagnostics information by a uniform mechanism The same system diagnostics information is used regardless of the display medium ...

Page 1011: ...ation describe the different options for establishing system diagnostics All described options can be used independently of one another This chapter gives you an overview of the basic procedure to get initial diagnostics information fast Note System diagnostics is generally available for the devices of the SIMATIC series ...

Page 1012: ... up status information in different menus on the display Requirements A project has been created The project has been downloaded to the CPU Determining diagnostics information using the display of the SIMATIC S7 1500 CPU To determine diagnostics information using the display follow these steps 1 Select the Diagnostics menu on the display 2 Select the Diagnostics buffer command from the Diagnostics...

Page 1013: ...hich they occur Figure 3 2 Display of the diagnostics buffer in the display of the SIMATIC S7 1500 CPU Note Automatic updating of diagnostics information You set automatic updating of the diagnostics information under Display DiagnosticRefresh Additional information You can find information about the configuration of alarms in the section Configuring alarms for system diagnostics Page 23 ...

Page 1014: ...erface Determining diagnostics information using STEP 7 To determine diagnostics information using STEP 7 follow these steps 1 Open the respective project in STEP 7 2 Open the portal view of STEP 7 3 Select the Online Diagnostics portal 4 Select the Online status action The Select device dialog opens The dialog is an image of the configured devices in the project Figure 3 3 Device selection for on...

Page 1015: ...Quick start 3 2 Using STEP 7 Diagnostics Function Manual 11 2019 A5E03735838 AF 19 7 The Go online dialog opens Figure 3 4 Establishing an online connection 8 Make the settings for the interface ...

Page 1016: ...2019 A5E03735838 AF 9 Click on the Go online button The project view of STEP 7 opens The network view is opened in the work area The symbols in the project tree provide initial information about the faulty modules Figure 3 5 Display of the fault in the network view ...

Page 1017: ...module directly This is the CPU in the example The device view of the CPU is opened in the work area In this view you can see directly in which module the error has occurred Figure 3 6 Display of the faulty module in the device view 11 Open the Diagnostics tab and the subordinate Device information tab in the Inspector window for a more detailed error description ...

Page 1018: ...he device and to the diagnostics buffer there for example This includes more information on all diagnostics events in the order in which they occurred Figure 3 7 Diagnostics buffer with detailed error description Note Symbols and their meaning You can find a legend with the meaning of each symbol in Explanation of diagnostics symbols Page 29 and in the online help for STEP 7 ...

Page 1019: ...alarms for system diagnostics on your display device Alarms are provided on the display of the SIMATIC S7 1500 CPU the CPU Web server and the HMI device Alarms are enabled by default If you do not want to receive alarms for system diagnostics on your display devices you can disable the sending of alarms 4 1 Configuring alarms for system diagnostics Predefined alarm texts are available for establis...

Page 1020: ...igure 4 1 Properties of system diagnostics and alarm settings 3 In the settings specify the alarm category that is to be displayed and if it needs to be acknowledged The check boxes in the Activation column are enabled by default When you disable all check boxes the status of the HMI system diagnostics view is still updated with the Info Report functionality Result You have configured the alarms f...

Page 1021: ...rom the SIMATIC S7 1500 product series that is connected to an ET 200S distributed I O system and an HMI Comfort Panel via PROFINET Figure 4 2 System diagnostics display options The following sections include figures that illustrate how diagnostics information is displayed with the help of different display options Using the LEDs on the hardware Page 26 Local error analysis via the display of the ...

Page 1022: ... below include examples for the arrangement of LEDs on some modules Table 4 1 LED displays on the modules CPU 1516 3 PN DP IM 155 5 PN ST DI 32x24VDC HF PS 25W 24VDC RUN STOP LED two colored LED green yellow RUN LED two colored LED green yellow RUN LED single colored LED green RUN LED single colored LED green ERROR LED single colored LED red ERROR LED single colored LED red ERROR LED single colore...

Page 1023: ...ion The meaning of the individual LED displays their different combinations and the remedial measures resulting from them in case of errors are device specific The explanation can be found in the manuals of the modules 4 2 1 2 Display of the CPU Introduction Each CPU in the S7 1500 automation system has a front cover with a display and operating keys You can display status information in various m...

Page 1024: ...iew with diagnostics symbols Order number CPU version and central I O modules Module status for central and distributed modules Information about the currently installed firmware Additional information For additional information on the topic Functions and operation of the display of the SIMATIC S7 1500 CPU see the documentation for the S7 1500 automation system http support automation siemens com ...

Page 1025: ...incompatible with a configured CPU 1516 3 PN DP On establishment of the online connection to a protected CPU the password dia log was terminated without specification of the correct password No fault Maintenance required Maintenance demanded Error The module or device is deactivated The module or the device cannot be reached from the CPU valid for modules and devices below a CPU Diagnostics data i...

Page 1026: ...ine versions differ only in the project tree in at least one lower level hardware component Software error in lower level component The online and offline versions differ only in the project tree in at least one lower level software component Online and offline versions of the object are different Object only exists online Object only exists offline Online and offline versions of the object are th...

Page 1027: ...ng status The following table shows the possible symbols and their meaning Table 4 5 Symbols in the event table Symbol Meaning Incoming event Outgoing event Incoming event for which there is no independent outgoing event User defined diagnostics event Additional information For additional information on the individual symbols please refer to the online help for STEP 7 4 2 2 2 Accessible devices wi...

Page 1028: ...devices even without an offline project follow these steps 1 Establish a connection to the respective CPU 2 Select the command Accessible devices from the Online menu The Accessible devices dialog opens Figure 4 4 Accessible devices dialog 3 Make the settings for the interface 4 Select the respective device under Accessible nodes of the selected interface 5 Confirm the dialog with the Display butt...

Page 1029: ...age and the diagnostics buffer Figure 4 5 Device in the project tree 4 2 2 3 Devices networks Devices networks Go online You can get an overview of the current state of your automation system in the device view or network view You implement the following tasks in the device view Device configuration and parameter assignment Module configuration and parameter assignment You implement the following ...

Page 1030: ...tate of your automation system follow these steps 1 Open the Network view in the working area 2 Select the CPU 3 Click the Go online button in the toolbar The Go online dialog opens Figure 4 6 Go online 4 Make the settings for the interface 5 Select the respective device under Compatible devices in the target subnet 6 Confirm the dialog with the Connect button The online mode is started ...

Page 1031: ...n the working area Here you get an overview of the current state of your automation device Figure 4 7 CPU with diagnostic information You get to the Device view with a double click on the device The diagnostic information for the individual modules is displayed in this view Note Symbols and their meaning You will find a legend with the meaning of each symbol in Explanation of diagnostics symbols P...

Page 1032: ...l devices Depending on the properties of a device you are offered specific diagnostics options and certain functions in online mode Diagnostics General module information Diagnostics status Cycle time Memory Diagnostics buffer Display Interface information e g IP parameter port information Functions Assign IP address Set time and date of the CPU Firmware update e g for PLC display Assign device na...

Page 1033: ...nline connection at least one PG PC interface must be installed that is physically connected with a device for example with an Ethernet cable The current online status of a device is indicated by a symbol to the right of the device in the project tree Figure 4 8 Partial view of network view Requirements STEP 7 is open A project is open The project view is open ...

Page 1034: ...nostics The online and diagnostics view of the module to be diagnosed is started Figure 4 9 Setting online access 3 Make the settings for the interface Here you can change an interface access that has already been set for an online connection that was successfully established previously 4 Click on the Go online button The online connection is established Result You can find detailed diagnostics in...

Page 1035: ...evices Online status Includes the online status as diagnostics symbol and in words Operating mode Includes the operating mode as symbol and in words Device module Name of the affected device or the affected module Connection established via Specifies the path used to establish the connection to the failed device Alarm This explains the entry in the previous columns and displays an alarm if necessa...

Page 1036: ...s There will only be information on the Connection information tab if there is an active online connection to at least one end point of the relevant connection If a connection has been selected connection table the tab contains the following groups Connection details Address details of the connection Figure 4 11 Connection information tab and open connection overview If a module has been selected ...

Page 1037: ...ve alarms in STEP 7 follow these steps 1 Open the project view 2 Select the required CPU in the project tree 3 To connect online with the respective CPU select the shortcut menu command Go online 4 Select the required CPU once again in the project tree and select the shortcut menu command Receive alarms Figure 4 13 Receive alarms 5 Alarms are now displayed in the alarm display Archive view is enab...

Page 1038: ...ces SIMATIC S7 1500 Web server and display of the CPU Diagnostic events The entries available in the diagnostics buffer include Internal and external errors on a module System errors in the CPU Operating mode transitions e g from RUN to STOP Errors in the user program Removal insertion of modules Security events The contents of the diagnostics buffer are stored in the retentive memory in case of a...

Page 1039: ...ion Manual 11 2019 A5E03735838 AF 43 Procedure To display the diagnostics buffer of a CPU in STEP 7 follow these steps 1 Select the respective CPU 2 Select the shortcut menu command Online Diagnostics The Online access view is opened in the work area Figure 4 14 Setting up online access 3 Set the interface ...

Page 1040: ...area Diagnostics buffer Figure 4 15 Diagnostics buffer in STEP 7 Note Filtering events You can filter the entries in the diagnostics buffer in the settings of the Diagnostics buffer area to only display specific types of events This means that specific events such as CPU and configuration internal events or Connection diagnostics events can be displayed separately ...

Page 1041: ...the diagnostics buffer being swamped by large numbers of identical security events you can set parameters so that these events are entered in the diagnostics buffer as a group alarm For every interval monitoring time the CPU then only generates one group alarm per event type Configuring a group alarm for security events To configure group alarms for security events follow these steps 1 Click on th...

Page 1042: ...d below it the measured cycle times as absolute values The Memory pane contains the current memory usage of the associated CPU The free memory is shown both as a bar graph and as a numerical value percentage The display for Load memory contains in addition to the online project data program code data blocks hardware configuration etc all other data that may be on the SIMATIC memory card such as re...

Page 1043: ...project view is open A design with I O modules has been configured Procedure To make settings for system diagnostics of I O modules in STEP 7 follow these steps 1 Select the respective I O module in the device view 2 Open the Properties tab in the Inspector window 3 Select the area Inputs for example You have access to the settings for system diagnostics of the I O module If you select Wire break ...

Page 1044: ...ntegrated Web server and let you display the system diagnostics information by means of PROFINET Any terminal devices such as PCs or smartphones can thus access module data user program data and diagnostics data of a CPU by using an Internet browser This means access to CPUs is possible without installed STEP 7 In addition to normal websites the Web server provides so called basic websites with re...

Page 1045: ...gnostics buffer Module information Alarms Information about communication PROFINET topology Motion Control diagnostics Trace Configuring the Web server in STEP 7 Proceed as follows to activate the Web server Requirements You have opened STEP 7 You have added a CPU to the project You have opened the project view Procedure 1 Open the network view 2 Select the CPU 3 Open the Properties tab in the Ins...

Page 1046: ...lobal security settings of STEP 7 and assign a CA signed server certificate to the Web server in the properties of the CPU You can find additional information on handling Web server certificates in the Configuring the Web server section of the Web server function manual http support automation siemens com WW view en 59193560 Detailed information on Certification Authority CA certificates device ce...

Page 1047: ...ple input https 192 168 3 141 The intro page of the CPU opens 4 You need to perform the installation of the CA certificate again for each display device you want to use A valid CA certificate is available for download from the Intro web page under Download certificate You can find instructions for installing the certificate in the help system of your Web browser and in the FAQ with the entry ID 10...

Page 1048: ...mware version etc Program protection This tab provides information on whether the PLC program contains know how protection or copy protection Memory This tab contains current values on the memory currently in use Runtime information Current information on program communication load and cycle time can be found in this tab Fail safe only with an F CPU The safety program of an F CPU consists of one o...

Page 1049: ...playing system diagnostics Diagnostics Function Manual 11 2019 A5E03735838 AF 53 Diagnostics option Diagnostics buffer The browser displays the content of the diagnostics buffer on the Diagnostics buffer Web page Figure 4 21 Web server Diagnostics buffer Web page ...

Page 1050: ...Module information Web page Modules are displayed on the Module information Web page in the Name column with a link You can thus get to the faulty module in hierarchical order Figure 4 22 Web server Module information Web page Diagnostics option Messages The Web browser displays the content of the message buffer on the Messages Web page The messages can be acknowledged via the Web server if you ha...

Page 1051: ...lowing tabs Parameter A summary of the information on the PROFINET and Ethernet interfaces of the selected CPU is available in this tab Statistics You will find information on data transmission in this tab Resources Information about the resource consumption of the connections is available in this tab Connections Information about the status of the communication connections is available in this ta...

Page 1052: ...em diagnostics Diagnostics 56 Function Manual 11 2019 A5E03735838 AF Topology diagnostics option The Topology Web page provides information on the topological configuration and status of the PROFINET devices in your PROFINET IO system Figure 4 25 Web server Topology Web page ...

Page 1053: ...ostics web page provides detailed information on the configured technology objects in the following views Diagnostics This view provides an overview list of configured technology objects the status and error messages of a selected technology object as well as values and limits of the movement status for a selected axis Service overview This view contains diagnostic information for multiple technol...

Page 1054: ...unction consists of several areas The example in the figure below shows how the Web server user interface is divided when the Trace web page is first called Figure 4 27 Web server Trace home page without measurement Additional information Additional information on the topic is available in the Web server function manual http support automation siemens com WW view en 59193560 You can find additiona...

Page 1055: ...ble devices in your plant You navigate directly to the cause of the error and the associated device You have access to all diagnostics capable devices that you have configured in the STEP 7 hardware and network editor System diagnostics window The system diagnostics window is an operating element and display object The functions of the system diagnostics window are the same as for the system diagn...

Page 1056: ...of all devices available in your plant The system diagnostics window behaves like the system diagnostics view but is only available in the global screen Requirements At least one CPU has been set up in the project An HMI device e g Comfort Panel has been set up in the project CPU and the HMI device are connected with each other by an HMI connection You have created a screen for the system diagnost...

Page 1057: ...ndow 3 Select the area Columns 4 Enable the columns that you require in the device view for WinCC Runtime for example Status Name Operating mode Slot Address 5 Enable the columns that you require in the detail view for WinCC Runtime for example Status Name Operating mode Plant designation Address 6 You can change the column headers in the Columns area if necessary 7 Select the Display area 8 Enabl...

Page 1058: ...ics view has been added to the screen The diagnostics status of the entire plant is displayed in the system diagnostics view in WinCC Runtime Figure 4 29 System diagnostics view in the screen The system diagnostics window has been added to the global screen If there is an error message in the plant the system diagnostics window responds and displays the affected device ...

Page 1059: ...ws available in the system diagnostics view and the system diagnostics window Device view Details view Distributed I O view only for PROFIBUS and PROFINET systems Device view The device view shows all the available devices of a layer in a table Double clicking on a device opens either the lower level devices or the detail view Symbols in the first column provide information about the current state...

Page 1060: ...playing system diagnostics Diagnostics 64 Function Manual 11 2019 A5E03735838 AF Details view The detail view gives detailed information about the selected device and any pending errors Check whether the data is correct in the detail view Figure 4 31 Details view ...

Page 1061: ...ributed I O view shows the status of the devices of the PROFIBUS PROFINET subnet Each element in the view shows the device name the device type and the IP address or the PROFIBUS address Figure 4 32 Distributed I O view Navigation buttons Button Function Opens the lower level devices or the detail view if there are no lower level devices Opens the higher level device or the device view if there is...

Page 1062: ...tics indicator is a predefined graphic symbol of the library which alerts you to errors in your plant The library object shows two different states No error Error Requirements An HMI device e g Comfort Panel has been set up in the project The Libraries task card is opened The global library Buttons and Switches DiagnosticsButtons is open A screen is open The system diagnostics window has been set ...

Page 1063: ...e DiagnosticsIndicator object in the library 2 Drag and drop the library object to the position in the work area where you want to insert the object The library object is added Figure 4 33 Inserting library object in the work area 3 Select the library object 4 Open the Events tab in the Inspector window The ShowSystemDiagnosticsWindow is preset for the event Click ...

Page 1064: ...ccess to the system diagnostics windows 1 Select the DiagnosticsIndicator object in the screen 2 Open the Properties tab in the Inspector window 3 Select an authorization in the Security in Runtime area A logon dialog opens when you click on the system diagnostics indicator in WinCC Runtime The system diagnostics window does not open unless you have the required authorization 4 2 4 4 Configuring b...

Page 1065: ...d to the screen 2 Enable the Properties tab in the Inspector window and the Graphic mode in the General area 3 Select the bit graphics list as graphics list 4 Select the Properties tab in the Inspector window and select the tag DiagnosticsIndicatorTag under Tag in the General area 5 To assign a function to the button select the Events tab in the Inspector window 6 Select the Click event 7 Click on...

Page 1066: ...rror events from the CPU The button changes when an error event occurs in Runtime Figure 4 34 Configured button The button has two states Error The system diagnostics view opens when you click on the button The system diagnostics view shows the detail view of the affected device No error The system diagnostics view opens when you click on the button The system diagnostics view shows the device vie...

Page 1067: ...ides information on cause and location of error DPNRM_DG Reads the current diagnostics data of a DP slave DP standard diagnostics GEN_DIAG Generates diagnostics information To generate diagnostics information the module or submodule is identified with its logical address Gen_UsrMsg Generates an alarm that is entered in the diagnostics buffer GET_DIAG Provides diagnostics information To provide dia...

Page 1068: ...m run time You can find details in the online help under Supervising machinery and plants with ProDiag Manuals You can find additional information about evaluating diagnostic information in the user program in the following manuals PROFINET function manual http support automation siemens com WW view en 49948856 From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 192899...

Page 1069: ...n the preceding sections is made available asynchronously to the program processing To ensure the correct processing of the input and output data in the case of faults while reading the input and output data some modules offer the so called value status QI Quality Information for evaluation Requirement for evaluation of the value status The diagnostics information about the process image input is ...

Page 1070: ...um Faulty channel Logical 0 0 Invalid Fault free channel Logical 0 actual value 1 Valid Influence of the value status The value status of an active channel is Invalid when any one of the following factors is given Channel diagnostics pending regardless of whether diagnostics for example wire break is configured for this channel For output channels Reaction to CPU STOP feature is active due to CPU ...

Page 1071: ...hannel and its circumference is calculated If the value status indicates the channel is error free the circumference is to be calculated If the value status indicates the channel is defective the value 0 is to be output as substitute value for the circumference The figure below shows the evaluation of the value status in the user program Figure 5 2 Example Evaluation of the value status in the use...

Page 1072: ...am_Alarm instruction You edit the attributes and alarm texts in the alarm editor in STEP 7 You can output the alarm status with the Get_AlarmState instruction Advantages of program alarms Compared to other alarm methods such as HMI discrete alarms program alarms offer the following advantages Central engineering in STEP 7 You only configure a program alarm once for the CPU The program alarm is aut...

Page 1073: ... signal changes from 0 to 1 and an outgoing program alarm if the signal changes from 1 to 0 The program alarm is triggered synchronously to program execu tion The time stamp is automatically created when the alarm event occurs in the automation system and is passed along with the alarm You can append up to ten associated values to the program alarm at the parameters SD_i 1 i 10 The associated valu...

Page 1074: ...ram_Alarms depends on the CPU used With a 1515 2 PN CPU for example a maximum of 600 program alarms are possible You can find this information in the device manual for the respective CPU under Number of reserved user interrupts Sometimes it is not possible for all program alarms that are active at the same time to be output within one cycle Query the status of each Program_Alarm and activate the i...

Page 1075: ... This is where the type alarms created in a function block with the Program_Alarm instruction are displayed Type alarms serves as templates for instance alarms All the inputs you make for the type alarm are automatically included in the instance alarms derived from it You can find more information on type alarms in the STEP 7 online help under Alarm types and alarms Instance alarms area When you a...

Page 1076: ...ps 1 In the Inspector window of the alarm editor open the Properties tab and the lower level Texts tab 2 Enter the text in the desired project language 3 Open the Properties tab in the Inspector window of the CPU and select the Display command in the General area navigation Under Multilingual assign one of the activated project languages to each interface language of the display devices Overall yo...

Page 1077: ...matically made available to the display devices You have the following options to display the alarms STEP 7 HMI Web server of the CPU Display of the CPU Figure 6 3 Display of program alarms Multilingual alarms You can have program alarms displayed in multiple languages by assigning different project languages to the interface languages See section Editing alarms in the alarm editor Page 78 ...

Page 1078: ...ts the alarm state of a program alarm The output of the alarm state always refers to a program alarm that was created using the Program_Alarm instruction The program alarm is selected with the Alarm input parameter Specify the instance DB of the Program_Alarm instruction at the Alarm parameter Figure 6 4 Call Get_AlarmState Additional information You can find additional information on evaluation o...

Page 1079: ...problem but use a different approach Example 1 does not use associated values In example 2 an associated value is assigned to the program alarm to reference a text list Example Minimum maximum fill level of a tank A tank is filled with a liquid The fill level is monitored by two sensors If the liquid in the tank drops below a minimum fill level an alarm is output for low fill level If the liquid i...

Page 1080: ... is output Steps The following steps are necessary for this example 1 Define tags for signal acquisition 2 Create function block 3 Create program alarms 4 Call function block 5 Edit alarm text Define tags for signal acquisition The following table shows the tags that are used in this example Define these tags in the standard tag table The standard tag table is available in the project tree under P...

Page 1081: ...unction block follow these steps 1 Open the Program blocks folder in the project tree 2 Double click Add new block The Add new block dialog opens 3 Select the button Function block Figure 6 7 Create FB 4 Enter a name for the new block 5 Select the language SCL 6 Click on OK to confirm your input Result You have created a function block ...

Page 1082: ...ter level_max as the name and confirm the call options by clicking OK Result The input tags of the Program_Alarm instruction are displayed in the instruction part 4 Supply the SIG input tag of the Program_Alarm instruction with the tags for the maximum fill level level_max SIG max SIG If a signal change occurs at the SIG input tag the Program_Alarm instruction generates a program alarm 5 Insert an...

Page 1083: ...e OB e g OB1 in which you want to call the function block and open the cycle OB with a double click 2 Select the function block you want to call in the Program blocks folder 3 Drag the function block into the instruction part of the cycle OB The Call options window opens Figure 6 9 Call function block 4 Confirm the call options by clicking OK Result You have called the alarm block in the user prog...

Page 1084: ...pe alarm for the maximum fill level 3 Enter the alarm text for the maximum fill level in the Alarm text column 4 Select the type alarm for the minimum fill level 5 Enter the alarm text for the minimum fill level in the Alarm text column Figure 6 10 Edit alarm text Result You have created the alarm texts for both type alarms Additional information You can learn how to create multilingual texts unde...

Page 1085: ...um fill level is undershot or the maximum fill level is exceeded The associated value 1 of the Program_Alarm instruction is assigned the tag for the maximum fill level The associated value references a text list with the entries 0 and 1 The following scenarios are possible for output of the alarm text Associated value is 0 The entry 0 of the text list with the alarm text for the undershot fill lev...

Page 1086: ...the standard tag table The standard tag table is available in the project tree under PLC tags Table 6 2 Tags for fill level alarms Name Data type Description max BOOL Tag for maximum fill level If max 1 the maximum fill level is exceeded min BOOL Tag for minimum fill level If min 1 the minimum fill level is undershot The figure below shows the standard tag table with the defined tags max and min F...

Page 1087: ...nction block follow these steps 1 Open the Program blocks folder in the project tree 2 Double click Add new block The Add new block dialog opens 3 Select the button Function block Figure 6 12 Create FB 4 Enter a name for the new block 5 Select the language SCL 6 Click on OK to confirm your input Result You have created a function block ...

Page 1088: ...w opens Figure 6 13 Call Program_Alarm 3 Enter level_alarm as the name and confirm the call options by clicking OK Result The input tags of the Program_Alarm instruction are displayed in the instruction part 4 Supply the SIG input tag of the Program_Alarm instruction with the XOR logic operation of the tags for minimum and maximum fill level and the input tag SD_1 with the tag for the maximum fill...

Page 1089: ...e OB e g OB1 in which you want to call the function block and open the cycle OB with a double click 2 Select the function block you want to call in the Program blocks folder 3 Drag the function block into the instruction part of the cycle OB The Call options window opens Figure 6 14 Call function block 4 Confirm the call options by clicking OK Result You have called the alarm block in the user pro...

Page 1090: ...ick Add in the Text lists area A new text list is added 3 Name the text list level_textlist 4 Double click Add in the Text list entries area of level_textlist A new text list entry is added in the level_textlist text list 5 Enter the alarm text for the maximum fill level in the Entry column 6 Add another entry in the text list 7 Enter the alarm text for the minimum fill level in the Entry column F...

Page 1091: ... command Insert a dynamic parameter text list Figure 6 16 Edit alarm text The window below opens Figure 6 17 Insert a dynamic parameter text list 5 Select the text list level_textlist and the tag max Confirm your selection by clicking OK Result You have created the alarm text for the type alarms If the tag max associated value 1 is 0 the alarm text level too low is output If the tag max associated...

Page 1092: ...w shows the display of the alarm in the Web server for both examples Figure 6 18 Displaying the alarm in the Web server Displaying the alarm in STEP 7 Note Displaying alarms in STEP 7 To display alarms in STEP 7 enable the option Receive alarms in the shortcut menu of the CPU The figure below shows the display of the alarm in STEP 7 for both examples Figure 6 19 Display in STEP 7 ...

Page 1093: ... well as internal and external errors through their LEDs The special features of the diagnostics of S7 1500R H redundant systems are described below In addition the information of the current function manual and the STEP 7 online help also apply to S7 1500R H redundant systems Diagnostics information in STEP 7 Hardware diagnostics can be performed as follows Via the Online and Diagnostics view Via...

Page 1094: ...nd diagnostics of the backup CPU The following are not displayed Online data and diagnostics from the primary CPU Online data and diagnostics of the distributed I O Backup CPU RUN Solo or STOP Display of the 3 operator panels in the Online Tools task card Primary CPU or backup CPU Not relevant Online Tools task card Page 103 Cycle time of the primary CPU of the system and memory of the primary CPU...

Page 1095: ...ble devices As for standard S7 1500 systems the following can be displayed in STEP 7 All devices accessible from programming device PC The diagnostics information of devices of a redundant system for example from the R H CPUs The procedure is described in the section Accessible devices without project Page 31 ...

Page 1096: ...t system Online access For the S7 1500R H redundant system it is displayed whether an online connection exists between the programming device PC and a CPU The additional note Online via Primary CPU or Online via Backup CPU indicates which role the Online connected CPU has If you enable Receive alarms you receive asynchronous alarms of diagnostics events from the CPU with online connection The disp...

Page 1097: ...2019 A5E03735838 AF 101 Diagnostics Diagnostics provides an overview for the redundant system about the System state Pairing state Operating states of the CPU Status of which CPU is the primary CPU and which CPU is the backup CPU Figure 7 2 Online and Diagnostics view Diagnostics status of the S7 1500R H system ...

Page 1098: ...f the redundant system irrespective of which of the two CPUs the online connection has been made In non redundant mode the programming device PC displays the data of the CPU for which there is an online connection i e either the primary CPU or of the backup CPU You select the CPU for display of the online data in the project tree Figure 7 3 Online and Diagnostics view CPU RUN Redundant system stat...

Page 1099: ...em button can be used to switch the S7 1500R H system to the system state STOP Note Reaching RUN Redundant system state Note that you cannot switch the S7 1500R H to RUN Redundant system state using the R H System operator panel You reach the RUN Redundant system state by switching the operating state for each CPU to RUN in the operator panel of the respective CPU CPU operator panel The two CPU op...

Page 1100: ...nction Manual 11 2019 A5E03735838 AF Example The following figure shows an example of the Online Tools task card for the RUN Solo system state The primary CPU is in RUN operating state the backup CPU in STOP operating state Figure 7 4 Online Tools task card Operator panel RUN Solo system state ...

Page 1101: ...ime of the primary CPU matches the cycle time of the system In the RUN Solo system state the panes show the current values for the CPU for which there is an online connection The display corresponds to the representation for standard CPUs Figure 7 5 Online Tools task card Cycle time and memory of the primary CPU Reference You can find information on the operating and system states in the Redundant...

Page 1102: ... RUN operating state Identifier of the folder for the primary CPU STARTUP operating state Identifier of the folder for the backup CPU STARTUP operating state Identifier of the folder for the primary CPU STOP operating state Identifier of the folder for the backup CPU STOP operating state Identifier of the folder of a CPU of the redundant system Online via partner The other CPU of the redundant sys...

Page 1103: ... Solo system state PLC_1 is in RUN operating state PLC_2 is in STOP operating state Because the system is in RUN Solo system state the following is displayed For the system maintenance demanded with problem in lower level component For PLC_1 maintenance demanded For PLC_2 online connection via partner is displayed as the programming device PC is connected online to PLC_1 Figure 7 6 Diagnostics exa...

Page 1104: ... shows no faults for the H CPUs or the IO device Maintenance demanded in lower level component indicated for the system since the system is not in the RUN Redundant system state No operating states and system states of the redundant system are displayed in the network view Figure 7 7 Diagnostics example Network view of redundant system RUN Solo Doubling clicking on the system gives you access to t...

Page 1105: ...s above PLC_1 Green icon PLC_1 is in the RUN operating state Yellow icon wrench for maintenance demanded PLC_2 is in the STOP operating state PLC_2 indicates that the online connection is available through the partner PLC_1 You can find more detailed information on the system faults in the Diagnostics tab in Device information The device information indicates maintenance demanded and RUN operating...

Page 1106: ... the alarms of the CPU for which there is an online connection are displayed via the Alarm display tab in the example from PLC_1 Figure 7 9 Diagnostics example Alarm display of redundant system RUN Solo Device view of the IO device The IO device is an interface module IM 155 6 PN HF with two I O modules and one server module The device view shows that there is no faults in the modules Figure 7 10 ...

Page 1107: ...t system irrespective of which of the two CPUs the online connection has been made The diagnostics between the two CPUs is synchronized diagnostics entries diagnostics events The Alarm display tab shows the alarms of the redundant system You can find more information in the Diagnostics view in the project tree and in the device view and network view Page 106 No error in RUN Redundant system state ...

Page 1108: ...cy of the system can be restricted e g during the interruption of one of the two redundancy connections in S7 1500H You can find information on the redundancy scenarios in the Redundant System S7 1500R H System Manual https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109754833 Special examples of a redundant system S7 1500H are shown below S7 1500H Example 1 The PROFINET ring between the CPU of the...

Page 1109: ...work view indicates errors at the affected port of the PROFINET interfaces of PLC_2 Figure 7 12 Diagnostics example RUN Redundant system state open PROFINET ring You can evaluate the diagnostics using the displays of the CPUs via the Diagnostics menu as with standard CPUs You can find additional information in the section Display of the CPU Page 27 S7 1500H Example 2 A synchronization module has b...

Page 1110: ...project tree shows Maintenance demanded in lower level component in the S7 1500H system Maintenance demanded in lower level components of PLC_1 and PLC_2 Maintenance demanded in lower level components of local modules of PLC_1 and PLC_2 The diagnostics in the network view displays Errors for the Synchronisationsmodul_1 of the Synchronisationsschnittstelle_2 of PLC_1 Synchronisationsmodul_1 of Sync...

Page 1111: ...lows 1 Navigate to Pairing state via the menu commands Overview Redundancy 2 This is displayed as the pairing state Single paired X4 This means that the redundancy connection is available at the H Sync interface X4 but not at the X3 3 Navigate to Alarms via the Diagnostics menu command 4 View the details of the alarm evaluate diagnostics buffer S7 1500H Example 3 A redundancy connection in S7 1500...

Page 1112: ...r level component in the S7 1500H system Maintenance demanded in lower level components of PLC_1 and PLC_2 Maintenance demanded in lower level components of local modules of PLC_1 and PLC_2 The diagnostics in the network view displays Errors for the Synchronisationsmodul_1 of the Synchronisationsschnittstelle_2 of PLC_1 Errors for the Synchronisationsmodul_1 of the Synchronisationsschnittstelle_1 ...

Page 1113: ...e Restrictions in the RUN Solo system state The primary CPU records the diagnostics states of the distributed I O Figure 7 15 Diagnostics of the primary CPU and backup CPU in RUN Solo system state Diagnostics of the backup CPU The following restrictions apply to the backup CPU Diagnostics information from the backup CPU is only available when there is an online connection to the backup CPU A memor...

Page 1114: ... CPU Page 27 7 6 System diagnostics by means of the user program Instructions Instructions for determining the system diagnostics are listed in the section System diagnostics options in the user program Page 71 The following instruction for diagnostics cannot be used for S7 1500R H redundant systems DPNRM_DG Read diagnostics data from a DP slave Organization blocks You can find the description of ...

Page 1115: ...circuit Device Modules with a network connection are referred to as device Devices are installed on racks where they can be interconnected with other modules Diagnostics buffer A buffered memory area in the CPU it stores diagnostics events in the order of their occurrence Firmware of the CPU In SIMATIC a distinction is made between the firmware of the CPU and user programs The firmware is a softwa...

Page 1116: ...te Operating states Operating states describe the behavior of a single CPU at a specific time The CPUs of the SIMATIC standard systems feature the STOP STARTUP and RUN operating states The primary CPU of the S7 1500R H features the STOP STARTUP RUN RUN Syncup and RUN Redundant operating states The backup CPU features the STOP SYNCUP and RUN Redundant operating states PLC Programmable Logic Control...

Page 1117: ...dule is used to provide a redundant connection between the CPUs of the S7 1500H redundant system You require two synchronization modules per CPU which you connect using a fiber optic cable System diagnostics In the SIMATIC environment the term system diagnostics refers to diagnostics of devices and modules System diagnostics is used for example to monitor the states of the following components in ...

Page 1118: ...units Firmware see glossary entry Firmware of the CPU Value status The value status describes a specific signal state The value status is constantly updated and cyclically transmitted by the field device as quality statement together with the measured value Web server Software communication service for data exchange using Ethernet The web server provides the documents by means of standardized tran...

Page 1119: ... 33 Go online 33 Diagnostics buffer Diagnostic events 42 Retentive memory 42 Display of the CPU Display options 27 Input options 27 Status information 27 dynamize Object appearance 68 F FAQs Download certificate 51 Implementing channel diagnostics in the user program 72 H HMI System diagnostics view 59 System diagnostics window 59 HMI diagnostics view Comfort Panels 59 Details view 63 Device view ...

Page 1120: ... For hardware diagnostics 29 For operating mode 30 For software diagnostics 30 Synchronization module 113 System diagnostics Advantages 14 Alarm settings 24 Button 68 Display concept 14 Properties 12 System diagnostics indicator Button as system diagnostics indicator 68 Inserting 66 System diagnostics window 66 System diagnostics view 59 Configuring 60 System diagnostics indicator 66 System diagno...

Page 1121: ......

Page 1122: ...Product overview 2 Communications services 3 PG communication 4 HMI communication 5 Open User Communication 6 S7 communication 7 Point to point link 8 OPC UA communication 9 Addressing via DHCP 10 Routing 11 Connection resources 12 Diagnostics and fault correction 13 Communication with the redundant system S7 1500R H 14 Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543 1 15 ...

Page 1123: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 1124: ...rs the following Overview of the communication services Properties of the communication services Overview of the user activities for setting up the communication services Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the Function manual General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about how to use S...

Page 1125: ...s of the PLC in one opera tion Supporting information to select suitable settings for own application Protection of confidential configura tion data Page 61 Certificate management via OPC UA Global Discovery Server GDS Certificate update during runtime Support of CRLs Access protection for certificate management Certificate management via Global Discovery Server GDS Page 185 Transferring CPU alarm...

Page 1126: ...k default IP router address and further optional network parame ters such as DNS and NTP server addresses Addressing via DHCP Page 359 Name based addressing with DNS DNS server addresses can be obtained from the CPU via DHCP The CPU can obtain host and domain names from a DHCP server for applications that are implemented with OPC UA or Secure OUC The CPU may transfer configured host or domain name...

Page 1127: ... OPC UA server only performs a restart during download from the TIA Portal when the newly downloaded data has an effect on the data management of the OPC UA server Server interface modeling It is now possible in the TIA Portal to model server interfaces or import OPC UA Companion Specifications and map them to the PLC data management Section OPC UA communication Page 152 What s new in the Communic...

Page 1128: ...s new What are the customer benefits Where can I find the information OPC UA server OPC UA is a uniform standard for data communi cation and is independent of any particular oper ating system platforms OPC UA uses integrated safety mechanisms on various automation systems for example with data exchange at application level for the legit imation of the user The OPC UA server provides a large amount...

Page 1129: ... and networks against cyber threats it is necessary to implement and continuously maintain a holistic state of the art industrial security concept Siemens products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterp...

Page 1130: ...ices Field Services Technical Support spare parts and training offers Forums For answers and solutions concerning automation technology mySupport Your personal working area in Industry Online Support for messages support queries and configurable documents This information is provided by the Siemens Industry Online Support in the Internet http www siemens com automation service support Industry Mal...

Page 1131: ...ion data 63 3 6 2 3 Changing your password 65 3 6 2 4 Resetting the password 67 3 6 2 5 Assign password via SIMATIC Memory Card 68 3 6 2 6 Special features when backing up and restoring a CPU 70 3 6 2 7 Tips for error avoidance and error handling 71 3 6 2 8 Rules for the replacement parts scenario 72 3 6 3 Secure Open User Communication 73 3 6 3 1 Secure OUC of an S7 1500 CPU as TLS client to an e...

Page 1132: ...int to point link 147 9 OPC UA communication 152 9 1 What you need to know about OPC UA 152 9 1 1 OPC UA and Industrie 4 0 152 9 1 2 General features of OPC UA 153 9 1 3 OPC UA for S7 1200 S7 1500 CPUs 156 9 1 4 Access to OPC UA applications 157 9 1 5 Addressing nodes 161 9 1 6 What you need to know about OPC UA clients 165 9 1 7 Mapping of data types 169 9 2 Security at OPC UA 172 9 2 1 Security ...

Page 1133: ...4 OPC UA server interface configuration 243 9 3 4 1 What is a server interface 243 9 3 4 2 Using OPC UA companion specifications 245 9 3 4 3 Creating a server interface for companion specification 253 9 3 4 4 Creating a user defined server interface 259 9 3 4 5 Data types for companion specifications 265 9 3 4 6 Rules for OPC UA XML files 269 9 3 4 7 Creating a server interface for reference names...

Page 1134: ... configured connection 348 9 5 Tips and recommendations 354 9 5 1 Rules for subscriptions 355 9 5 2 Rules for the user program 356 9 5 3 Master copies for OPC UA communication 357 10 Addressing via DHCP 359 10 1 Principle of address assignment via DHCP 361 10 2 DHCP with DNS 363 10 3 Activate DHCP 368 10 4 Configuring the client ID 368 10 5 Get addresses of the DNS servers via DHCP 370 10 6 Get ad...

Page 1135: ...ndant system S7 1500R H 415 14 5 HMI communication with the redundant system S7 1500R H 416 14 5 1 HMI connection via the system IP address 416 14 6 Open User Communication with the redundant system S7 1500R H 419 14 6 1 Setting up the connection of the Open User Communication with the redundant S7 1500R H system 419 15 Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543 1 425 15 1 Firewall 426 15 2 Logging...

Page 1136: ...ific information you require Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration installation wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems Use the corresponding operating instructions for the CPUs 1513 1516pro 2 PN The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming Device information Produ...

Page 1137: ...om cs ww en view 84133942 ET 200AL https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 95242965 mySupport With mySupport your personal workspace you make the best out of your Industry Online Support In mySupport you can save filters favorites and tags request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you ca...

Page 1138: ...examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products You will find the application examples on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps ae TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool you can select configure and order device...

Page 1139: ...to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU error information Reading of the CPU diagnostics buffer Reset to factory settings Firmware update of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 98161300 PRONETA SIEMENS PR...

Page 1140: ...This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of ...

Page 1141: ... and communications processors PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces are integrated in the S7 1500 CPUs The CPU 1516 3 PN DP for example has two PROFINET interfaces and one PROFIBUS DP interface Other PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces are available by using communications modules CM and communications processors CP PROFINET interface X2 with 1 port PROFINET interface X1 with 2 port switch PROFIBUS...

Page 1142: ...unications modules Interfaces of communications modules CMs extend the interfaces of CPUs for example the communication module CM 1542 5 adds a PROFIBUS interface to S7 1500 automation system PROFIBUS DP interface Figure 2 2 PROFIBUS DP interface of the CM 1542 5 and CM DP to an ET 200SP CPU ...

Page 1143: ... additional functionality to what is provided by the integrated interfaces of the CPUs CPs allow special applications for example the CP 1543 1 provides Industrial Ethernet security functions for protecting Industrial Ethernet networks via its Industrial Ethernet interface Industrial Ethernet interface Figure 2 3 Industrial Ethernet interface of the CP 1543 1 ...

Page 1144: ... to point connections The communication modules for point to point connections provide communication via their RS 232 RS 422 and RS 485 interfaces for example Freeport or Modbus communication Interface for point to point connections Figure 2 4 Example of interface for point to point connection at the CM PtP RS422 485 BA ...

Page 1145: ...ted I O ET 200MP ET 200SP and ET 200AL to PROFINET or PROFIBUS of the higher level IO controller or DP master PROFINET interface with 2 port switch Figure 2 5 PROFINET interfaces IM 155 5 PN ST ET 200MP IM 155 6 PN ST ET 200SP and IM 157 1 PN ET 200AL Communications services The communications services described below use the interfaces and communication mechanisms provided by the system via CPUs ...

Page 1146: ...tion2 On commissioning testing diagnostics X X HMI communication2 On operator control and monitoring X X Open communication via TCP IP2 Data exchange via PROFINET Industrial Ethernet with TCP IP Instructions TSEND_C TRCV_C TSEND TRCV TCON T_DISCON X Open communication using ISO on TCP2 Data exchange via PROFINET Industrial Ethernet with ISO on TCP Instructions TSEND_C TRCV_C TSEND TRCV TCON T_DISC...

Page 1147: ...dbus TCP Data exchange via PROFINET with Modbus TCP pro tocol Instructions MB_CLIENT MB_SERVER X E mail Sending process alarms via e mail Instruction TMAIL_C X FTP only CPs with PROFINET Industrial Ethernet interface File management and file access via FTP File Trans fer Protocol CP can be FTP client and FTP server Instruction FTP_CMD X Fetch Write only CPs with PROFINET Industrial Ethernet interf...

Page 1148: ...undant system S7 1500R H Page 407 Additional information Application example CPU CPU communication with SIMATIC controllers compendium You can find the application example on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 20982954 This FAQ https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 102420020 describes how to configure fetch write communication via CP1543 1 with S7 1500 Additio...

Page 1149: ...7 1500 software controllers also support the protocols listed in the following table for the Ethernet interfaces that are assigned to the software controller Table 3 2 Layers and protocols of the S7 1500 CPUs and software controllers via PROFINET interface of the CPU Protocol Port num ber 2 Link layer 4 Transport layer Function Description PROFINET protocols DCP Discovery and basic configu ration ...

Page 1150: ...ure connections HTTP Hypertext transfer proto col 80 4 TCP Hypertext transfer proto col HTTP is used for communication with the CPU internal web server ISO on TCP according to RFC 1006 102 4 TCP ISO on TCP protocol ISO on TCP according to RFC 1006 is used for mes sage oriented data exchange with remote CPU or software controller S7 communication with ES HMI OPC server etc NTP Network time protocol...

Page 1151: ... observing the port restrictions definitions of the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority 2 Do not use ports for OUC which are already used by other protocols The following table shows the protocols that are supported by the S7 1500 software controller via the Ethernet interfaces assigned to Windows Table 3 3 Layers and protocols of the S7 1500 Software Controller via Ethernet interface on the ...

Page 1152: ...Windows Firewall 2000 5000 recom mended4 5001 49151 can be used to limited extent3 4 IGMPv2 Internet Group Management Protocol Not relevant 3 Network layer Internet Group Management Protocol Network protocol for the organization of multicast groups Reserved 49152 65535 4 TCP 4 UDP Dynamic port range that is used for the active connec tion end point if the application does not determine the local p...

Page 1153: ...n Protocol DHCP is used to retrieve the IP Address Suite from a DHCP server when starting up the IE interface Secure NTPv3 Network time protocol 123 4 UDP Network time protocol Secure NTP is used to synchronize the CP 1543 1 in ternal system clock with an NTP server SNMP Simple net work man agement protocol 161 162 trap 4 UDP Simple net work man agement protocol SNMPv3 permits the CP 1543 1 to rea...

Page 1154: ...ing up a connection Page 33 Additional information You will find more detailed information on the allocation of connection resources and the display of connection resources in STEP 7 in the section Connection resources Page 391 3 4 Setting up a connection Automatic connection STEP 7 sets up a connection automatically for example PG or HMI connection if you have connected the PG PC interface to an ...

Page 1155: ...Communications services 3 4 Setting up a connection Communication 34 Function Manual 05 2021 A5E03735815 AJ Figure 3 1 Programmed setup ...

Page 1156: ...ication Function Manual 05 2021 A5E03735815 AJ 35 Setting up a configured connection You set up the configured connection in the network view of the Devices networks editor of STEP 7 in the context of a CPU or a software controller Figure 3 2 Configured setup ...

Page 1157: ...resources already used and those still available How do I set up a connection Table 3 5 Setting up the connection Connection Automatically Programmed setup Configured setup Programming device connection X HMI connection X X Web communication X OPC UA server communication X OPC UA client communication X Open communication via TCP IP connection X X Open communication via ISO on TCP connection X X Op...

Page 1158: ...ion for communication is interrupted for example by a hardware interrupt OB with higher priority This interrupts the transfer of the data area If the user program in this OB now changes the data that has not yet been processed by the communication instruction the transferred data originates from different times The following figure shows a data area that is smaller than the maximum size of the con...

Page 1159: ...struction only transfers as much data from the source data area into the destination data area as fits in the consistent data area At time T2 the instruction transfers the rest of the source data area to the destination data area After the transfer data from different points in time exist in the destination data area If the data in the source data area has changed in the meantime an inconsistency ...

Page 1160: ...sured in the user program Note Measures in the user program To achieve data consistency you can copy transferred data to a separate data area for example global data block While the user program continues to work with the original data you can transfer the data saved in the separate data area consistently with the communication instruction For the copying use uninterruptible instructions such as U...

Page 1161: ...a the following CPs CP 1243 1 as of firmware V3 2 CP 1243 8 IRC as of firmware V3 2 CP 1543 1 as of firmware V2 0 CP 1545 1 CP 1543SP 1 Secure Communication via CP 1242 7 GPRS V2 is not possible Public Key Infrastructure PKI The attribute secure is used for the identification of communication mechanisms that are based on a Public Key Infrastructure PKI for example RFC 5280 for Internet X 509 Publi...

Page 1162: ...r data to external computers in encrypted form via Intranet or public networks Common principles of secure communication Independent of the context secure communication is based on the concept of the Public Key Infrastructure PKI and contains the following components An asymmetric encryption scheme that allows Encryption or decryption of messages using public or private keys The verification of si...

Page 1163: ...ight such secure connections Open User Communication turns into secure Open User Communication The underlying protocol is also TLS E mail providers also offer access over the Secure SMTP over TLS protocol to increase the security of e mail communication The figure below shows the TLS protocol in the context of communication layers Figure 3 6 TLS protocol in the context of communication layers Secu...

Page 1164: ...ncrypted message key algorithm decrypted message Symmetric encryption The central aspect of symmetric encryption is that both communication partners use the same key for message encryption and decryption as shown in the figure below Bob uses the same key for encryption as Alice uses for decryption In general we also say that the two sides share the secret key with which they encrypt or decrypt a m...

Page 1165: ...s only Alice has the pri vate key and never discloses it only she can decrypt the message With her private key she can decrypt any message encrypted with her public key not only messages from Bob Figure 3 8 Asymmetric encryption The system can be compared to a mailbox into which anyone can put a message but from which only the person with the key can remove messages Advantages A message encrypted ...

Page 1166: ...t tell what identity is assigned to a public key from the bit string A fraud could provide their public key and claim to be someone else If a third party then uses this key thinking that they are addressing their required communication partner confidential information could end up with the fraud The fraud then uses their private key to decrypt the message that was not intended for them and sensiti...

Page 1167: ...pplicant can be clearly established the certificate authority confirms that identity by issuing a signed certificate The applicant has now become the certificate subject The figure below is a simplified overview of the process It does not show how Alice can check the digital signature Figure 3 9 Signing of a certificate by a certificate authority Self signed certificates Self signed certificates a...

Page 1168: ...ion select the correct entry from the list of possible usages e g TLS Specification of a Subject Alternative Name SAN which is used in secure communication with Web servers HTTP over TLS for example to ensure that the certificate in the address bar of the Web browser also belongs to the Web server specified in the URL How signatures are generated and verified Asymmetric key usage ensures that cert...

Page 1169: ...s the certificate authority CA to verify the signature on Bob s public key All that is required for verification is therefore the availability of the certificate from the certificate authority at the moment of checking The validation itself is executed automatically in the TLS session Figure 3 10 Verification of a certificate with the public key of the certificate of a certificate authority Signin...

Page 1170: ...ished along the entire chain of trust to the root certificate Conclusion The chain of intermediate certificates to the root certificate the certificate path must be available in every device that is to validate an end entity certificate of the communication partner irrespective of the type of secure communication that you configure 3 6 1 4 Managing certificates with STEP 7 STEP 7 as of version V14...

Page 1171: ...ates in the project or not If you do not use the certificate manager in the global security settings you only have access to the local certificate memory of the CPU You do not have access for example to imported certificates or root certificates Without these certificates only a restricted functionality is available You can for example only generate self signed certificates If you use the certific...

Page 1172: ...ption has been activated in the Inspector window of the CPU When you double click User login in the project tree below the global security settings and log in a line called Certificate manager is displayed among other data When you double click the Certificate manager line you obtain access to all the certificates in the project divided into the tabs CA certificate authorities Device certificates ...

Page 1173: ...ings for certificate manager option influences the previously used private key If you have already created certificates without using the certificate manager in the global security settings and then change the option for using the certificate manager the private keys are lost and the certificate ID can change A warning draws your attention to this fact Therefore specify at the beginning of the pro...

Page 1174: ...project are used to sign the device certificates The certificates are to be referenced by their certificate ID in the user program TCON communication instruction in combination with the associated system data type for example TCON_IPV4_SEC STEP 7 assigns the certificate ID automatically during the generation or creation of certificates Procedure STEP 7 automatically loads the required CA certifica...

Page 1175: ...not recommended because the resulting certificates do not exist in the global certificate memory and can therefore not be assigned directly to a partner CPU As described above you should select the name of the certificate subject with care so that the right certificate can be assigned to a device without any doubt Verification with the CA certificates of the STEP 7 project is not possible for self...

Page 1176: ...ttings in the project tree 2 Select the appropriate table trusted certificates and root certificate authorities for the certificate to be imported 3 Right click in the table to open the shortcut menu Click Import and import the required certificate or the required CA certificates Through the import the certificate has a certificate ID assigned to it and can be assigned to a module in the next step...

Page 1177: ...re the following certificates For the S7 1500 CPU you generate a device certificate server certificate with a private key and download it with the hardware configuration into the S7 1500 CPU You use the Signed by certificate authority option when generating the server certificate The private key is required for the key exchange as explained in the figure for the example HTTP over TLS You have to e...

Page 1178: ...e to open the shortcut menu Click Import and import the required certificate or the required CA certificates As a result of the import the certificate has a certificate ID assigned to it and can be assigned to a module in the next step 4 Mark PLC_1 and navigate to the Certificates of partner devices table in the Protection Security section 5 Click in an empty line in the Certificate subject column...

Page 1179: ...period Note The current date time must be set in the CPU When using secure communication for example HTTPS secure OUC OPC UA make sure that the corresponding modules have the current time of day and the current date Otherwise the modules will evaluate the certificates used as invalid and secure communication will not work Loading the Web server certificate The server certificate generated by STEP ...

Page 1180: ...ad from the Intro Web page of the CPU Web server under Download certificate STEP 7 offers a different possibility Export the CA certificate of the project with the certificate manager into the global security settings in STEP 7 Subsequently import the CA certificate into the browser Course of the secure communication The figure below shows in simplified terms how communication is established hands...

Page 1181: ...obtaining the intermediate certificates The server itself sends the required intermediate certificates to Alice along with its end entity certificate in the form of a signed message so that Alice can verify the integrity of the certificate chain The certificates often contain the URLs of the certificate issuer Alice can load the required intermediate certificates from these URLs When you work with...

Page 1182: ...e private keys for example are protected The presence of key information is a prerequisite for secure communication such as TLS based secure PG HMI communication The CPU can handle certificates which are required for Secure Communication only if this key information is available The following figure shows the relationships described Figure 3 15 Contexts for protecting confidential configuration da...

Page 1183: ... disable the Protect confidential PLC configuration data option 4 Complete the configuration and create the user program 5 Load the CPU When loading the hardware configuration you will be asked once to re enter the password Background The configured password is used in the TIA Portal to generate the key information to protect confidential configuration data and thus to protect this data For securi...

Page 1184: ...assword for confidential PLC configuration data must be transferred to the new replacement CPU in addition to the configuration see Rules for the replacement parts scenario Page 72 With S7 1500R H CPUs the password for confidential PLC configuration data is only loaded onto one of the two CPUs during loading In order that the sync up process works and that the partner CPU also works properly the p...

Page 1185: ...tion data here in load memory memory card Key information generated from password to use the protected confidential configuration data here in the memory area in the CPU Figure 3 16 Principle for protection of confidential configuration data Two memory areas for more security The charged components are related to each other like two matching puzzle pieces The project is bound to the loaded key inf...

Page 1186: ...e option Protect confidential PLC configuration data 4 Enter the previously valid password in the dialog In case of a password change also enter the new password and confirm the new password As long as you have not yet loaded a configuration into the CPU the CPU is in a provisioning phase see CPU behavior from loading to operational readiness Page 96 and you can load any valid configuration with y...

Page 1187: ...protection of confidential PLC configuration data Click the Delete button If the Delete button is not available no password has been set in the CPU yet Enter the required password and click the Set button If the correct password has been entered the CPU can use the protected PLC configuration data No write access to the CPU If you do not have write access to the load memory read access level remov...

Page 1188: ...icates of the CPU e g certificates for web server for OPC UA server for PG PC communication and HMI communication may no longer be used after the reset and may have to be created again and reassigned If you use the global security settings for the certificate manager you must reassign the certificates from the certificate manager If you do not use the global security settings for the certificate m...

Page 1189: ...also use a SIMATIC memory card for this function The use of a SIMATIC memory card is suitable for the following purposes Preparing a new CPU If a CPU is set up again it should be configured with a password to protect the confidential PLC configuration data After this configuration is completed it is possible to use another SIMATIC memory card with the desired project S7 1200 CPU A transfer card wi...

Page 1190: ...LED flashes while the CPU is setting the password After the process has been completed successfully the RUN STOP LED lights up yellow and the MAINT LED flashes yellow The result of the operation is displayed in the diagnostics buffer as success or error message If the password could not be set the error LED flashes together with the other LEDs Creating a SIMATIC memory card with SET PASSWORD job 1...

Page 1191: ...for example to test product enhancements to change programs for troubleshooting in the system or you can replace components on a test basis You can then restore the originally backed up configuration of the CPU Backing up the configuration In backing up a CPU Online menu Load backup from online device in TIA Portal the password for the protection of confidential PLC configuration data is backed up...

Page 1192: ...s already received another password Example CPU is exchanged for another CPU from the stock The replacement CPU was not completely reset reset to factory settings with option Delete password for protection of confidential PLC configuration data Remedy Always prepare replacement CPUs with the appropriate option password deleted For the configuration to be loaded use the same password that was alrea...

Page 1193: ...e not assigned a password to a CPU in your project to protect confidential PLC configuration data you can insert the memory card of the CPU to be replaced into a brand new unused CPU without any further action needed If the replacement CPU has already been configured with a password to protect confidential PLC configuration data you must first reset this CPU to the factory settings using the optio...

Page 1194: ...ystem data type yourself assign parameters and call it directly at one of the instructions TSEND_C TRCV_C or TCON Requirements Current date and time are set in the CPU Your network includes at least one DNS server You have configured at least one DNS server for the S7 1500 CPU TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates To set up a secure TCP connection to a TLS server follow thes...

Page 1195: ...r the value 1 the client validates the subjectAlternateName in the X 509 V3 certificate of the server to verify the identity of the server This validation is executed in the context of the instruction TLSServerCertRef ID of the X 509 V3 certificate usually a CA certificate that is used by the TLS client to validate the TLS server authentication If this parameter is 0 the TLS client uses all CA cer...

Page 1196: ...Communication Page 40 3 6 3 2 Secure OUC of an S7 1500 CPU as TLS server to an external PLC TLS client The following section describes how you can set up Open User Communication via TCP from an S7 1500 CPU as TLS server to a TLS client Setting up a secure TCP connection via the domain name of the communication partner S7 1500 CPUs as of firmware version V2 0 support secure communication with addre...

Page 1197: ...ock in the project tree 2 Define a tag of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC in the global data block The example below shows the global data block Data_block_1 in which the tag DNS ConnectionSEC of the data type TCON_FDL_SEC is defined Figure 3 21 TCON_QDN_SEC_Server 3 Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the Start value column Enter for example the local ID of the TCP connection for ID...

Page 1198: ...rtificate handling from the perspective of the S7 1500 as TLS server TLSClientCertRef ID of the X 509 V3 certificate or a group of X 509 V3 certificates that is used by the TLS server to validate TLS client authentication If this parameter is 0 the TLS server uses all CA certificates currently loaded in the server certificate store to validate the client authentication 5 Create one of the instruct...

Page 1199: ...ess one S7 1500 CPU acts as TLS client active establishing of the connection and the other S7 1500 CPU as TLS server passive establishing of the connection Setting up a secure TCP connection between two S7 1500 CPUs For secure TCP communication between two S7 1500 CPUs you need to create a data block with the TCON_IP_V4_SEC system data type yourself in every CPU assign parameters and call it direc...

Page 1200: ...Note Connection parameter Interface ID Note that you can enter the value 0 for the interface ID in the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC In this case the CPU itself searches for a suitable local CPU interface 4 Set the parameters for secure communication in the Start value column ActivateSecureConn Activation of secure communication for this connection If this parameter has the value FALSE the subsequent s...

Page 1201: ...ver 3 Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the Start value column For example enter the IPv4 address of the TLS client for RemoteAddress 4 Set the parameters for secure communication in the Start value column ActivateSecureConn Activation of secure communication for this connection If this parameter has the value FALSE the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant You can set...

Page 1202: ...6 3 4 Secure OUC via CP interface The following sections describes the particular points to be taken into consideration in the case of Secure Open User Communication via a CP interface At least one station is an S7 1500 station with the following modules S7 1500 CPU as of firmware version V2 0 with the exception of S7 1500 Software Controller CP 1543 1 as of firmware version V2 0 or CP 1543SP 1 as...

Page 1203: ...STEP 7 as described here or for the S7 1500 CPU Example Setting up a secure TCP connection between two S7 1500 CPUs via CP interfaces For secure TCP communication between two S7 1500 CPs you need to create a data block with the TCON_IP_V4_SEC system data type yourself in every CPU assign parameters and call it directly at one of the instructions TSEND_C TRCV_C or TCON Requirements Both S7 1500 CPU...

Page 1204: ... shows the different certificates in the devices for the case that both communication partners communicate via a CP 1543 1 In addition the figure shows the transfer of the device certificates during establishment of the connection Hello Figure 3 28 Certificate handling in secure OUC between two S7 1500 CPUs via CP interfaces ...

Page 1205: ... Figure 3 29 IP_V4_SEC_Client 3 Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the Start value column For example enter the IPv4 address of the TLS server for RemoteAddress 4 Set the parameters for secure communication in the Start value column ActivateSecureConn Activation of secure communication for this connection If this parameter has the value FALSE the subsequent security parameters ...

Page 1206: ... the TLS server follow these steps 1 Create a global data block in the project tree 2 Define a tag of the data type TCON_IP_4_SEC in the global data block The example below shows the global data block Data_block_1 in which the tag SEC connection 1 TLS Server of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC is defined The interface ID has the value of the HW identifier of the IE interface of the local CP TLS server...

Page 1207: ...oject the certificates of the CP are not uploaded in contrast to the certificates of the CPU After the device has been loaded as a new station no more certificates are contained in the corresponding tables of the CPs for the device certificates You have to perform configuration of certificates again after the upload Otherwise renewed loading of the configuration results in the certificates that or...

Page 1208: ...TLS server have all the required certificates Example of setting up a secure Modbus TCP connection to a Modbus TCP server The following section describes how you can set up a Secure Open User Communication over Modbus TCP from a Modbus TCP client to a Modbus TCP server To set up a secure connection from a Modus TCP client TLS client to a Modbus TCP server TLS server and set up the IPv4 address of ...

Page 1209: ...t to validate the authentication of the Modbus TCP server 5 Create an MB_CLIENT instruction in the program editor 6 Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of the MB_Client instruction with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_4_SEC 3 6 3 6 Secure OUC via e mail Setting up a secure connection to a mail server over the CPU interface For secure communication to a mail server you need to create a data block ...

Page 1210: ...STARTTLS to do this The client then establishes a secure connection to the mail server Advantage If the mail server does not support TLS client and mail server can communicate unsecured with each other You use the Remote Port setting in the data types at the block parameter MAIL_ADDR_PARAM to define which process is used for the communication Table 3 6 Port numbers for the SMTPS and STARTTLS proce...

Page 1211: ...verAddress Note Connection parameter Interface ID Note that as of instruction version V5 0 of TMAIL_C instruction in the TMAIL_V4_SEC data type you need to enter the value 0 for the Interface ID In this case the CPU itself searches for a suitable local CPU interface 4 Set the parameters for secure communication in the Start value column Enter the certificate ID of the CA certificate of the communi...

Page 1212: ...urself assign parameters and call it directly at the TMAIL_C instruction Requirements TMAIL_C instruction with version V4 0 S7 1500 CPU as of firmware version V2 0 with communication module CP 1543 1 as of firmware version V2 0 ET 200SP CPU as of firmware version V2 0 with communication module CP 1542SP 1 IRC as of firmware version V1 0 You have assigned all the CA certificates of the mail server ...

Page 1213: ...ied PCs and Comfort Panels Also updated are SINAMICS RT SW as of version V6 1 and STARTDRIVE as of version V17 Properties of PG HMI communication One characteristic of PG communication and HMI communication above all is their simplicity Establishing an online connection from a programming device with installed TIA Portal to a CPU for example to load a program requires little effort This online con...

Page 1214: ...ecause another equivalent protection is present It is possible to do without the password if you have implemented measures to prevent unauthorized access to the TIA Portal project and the configuration of the CPU WARNING Without password weak protection of private keys Note that without a password to protect trusted configuration data the private keys for certificates required for secure communica...

Page 1215: ...ection of the connection in the same context or have it generated by the TIA Portal If you have assigned a password or if you have deactivated the option to protect confidential PLC configuration data i e no password has been set then a certificate with suitable settings and a valid default name is already preset in the Protection Security Connection mechanisms area Procedure If you want to have a...

Page 1216: ...Portal is in possession of the CA certificate certification authority and all CPUs that can be reached in the network from the TIA Portal have device certificates issued by this CA certificate Advantage of this solution TIA Portal can check device certificates automatically even if the device certificates of the communication partners are not available in TIA Portal The solution with a CA certific...

Page 1217: ...ce certificate is in the certificate revocation list a dialog appears in the TIA Portal asking whether you still want to trust the certificate If you decline the connection will not be established To add a device certificate to the certificate revocation list follow these steps 1 Copy the device certificate to the following directory C ProgramData Siemens Automation Certstore CRL 2 Start TIA Porta...

Page 1218: ...ocated in a protected environment i e you can identify the CPU to be loaded and control the connection between CPU and programming device Initial establishment of connetion to the CPU provisioning phase The first connection establishment for loading the CPU is secured by the TLS procedure in terms of Secure PG HMI Communication However the CPU uses its manufacturer device certificate if available ...

Page 1219: ...ed from the password in the project Therefore the password is requested in a dialog when loading the project for the first time or when loading a new project and transferred to the CPU as key information Only after this step the CPU is able to use the protected PLC configuration data this completes the provisioning phase and the CPU can start operating If you do not protect the confidential PLC co...

Page 1220: ...e HMI communication if both devices meet the requirements for this type of communication The basis of secure HMI communication is that the HMI device can verify the authenticity of the CPU using the PLC communication certificate that the CPU sends when establishing communication and considers the CPU to be trustworthy Secure HMI communication is only possible when this turns out to be the case Thi...

Page 1221: ... communication certificate is already available on the HMI device with the trustworthy status a secure HMI communication is automatically set up between the CPU and the HMI device When the PLC communication certificate is not available in the trustworthy status on the HMI device you will see a message in the alarm view of the HMI device informing you that the CPU is not trusted along with an error...

Page 1222: ...connection partners set their connection mechanisms automatically to the highest possible security method Only special circumstances see Information about compatibility Page 102 cause a fallback to the old PG PC communication called Legacy PG PC communication There may be some cases in which the higher security is not desirable because it can impact the transmission rate of CPUs with weak communic...

Page 1223: ...MI connection Projects created with TIA Portal V17 For example if you have created a project with TIA Portal version V16 for an S7 1500 CPU e g version V2 8 then the corresponding configuration with TIA Portal V17 can also be loaded into an S7 1500 CPU V2 9 e g in a spare part scenario with the same behavior as a configuration on an S7 1500 CPU V2 8 Even projects created with TIA Portal V17 and tr...

Page 1224: ...s for a programming device with TIA Portal PG HMI and CPU come with the V17 or subsequent version TLS procedure is used PG HMI comes from a predecessor version V17 Legacy procedure is used provided that you have deactivated the option Only allow secure PG PC and HMI communication in the CPU properties CPU comes with V17 or higher several PGs HMIs are connected and come from both V17 or higher and ...

Page 1225: ...ons it is useful to disable SNMP Examples The security guidelines in your network do not allow the use of SNMP You use your own SNMP solution e g with your own communications instructions If you disable SNMP for a device various diagnostics options for the network topology e g in the PRONETA tool or in the Web server of the CPU are no longer available Disabling SNMP To disable SNMP for one of the ...

Page 1226: ...on V2 0 STEP 7 as of V14 Solution First create a data block that contains the structure of data record B071H The figure below shows the data block Deactivate SNMP The data block Deactivate SNMP contains the data record B071H as well as additional tags that you use to transfer the data record The tag snmp_deactivate is used to trigger the job for WRREC Place this tag in the retentive memory area so...

Page 1227: ...P snmp_done OR Deactivate SNMP snmp_error END_REPEAT END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK Using program code You will find the full program code here Follow these steps to apply the program code to your project 1 Copy the entire program code to the clipboard with Ctrl A Ctrl C 2 Open a text editor e g Editor 3 Paste the content of the clipboard to the text editor with Ctrl V 4 Save the document as an scl file e...

Page 1228: ...l version V17 the TLS Transport Layer Security protocol is supported for PG HMI communication to secure the data exchange between PG PC and CPU using standardized security mechanisms For more information refer to the following sections Requirements for secure communication Page 61 Secure PG HMI communication Page 92 Requirements The PG PC is physically connected to the communication capable module...

Page 1229: ...list select the PG PC interface e g Ind Ethernet card you want to use to establish the online connection Select the interface or the S7 subnet with which the programming device PC is physically connected from the Connection to interface subnet drop down list If the communication capable module can be reached via an S7 router gateway select the S7 router that connects the subnets in question from t...

Page 1230: ...hat you can address with PG communication appear shortly thereafter in the table Compatible devices in target subnet 5 In the Compatible devices in target subnet table select the relevant CPU and confirm with Go online Additional information You can find more information on Go online in the STEP 7 online help ...

Page 1231: ...curity mechanisms For more information refer to the following sections Requirements for secure communication Page 61 Secure PG HMI communication Page 92 Procedure for setting up HMI communication As soon as you drag and drop a tag for example a tag from a global data block into an HMI screen or into the HMI tag table STEP 7 automatically sets up an HMI connection Alternatively you can also set up ...

Page 1232: ...es of the HMI connection some of which you can change Figure 5 1 Setting up HMI communication 5 Download the hardware configuration to the CPU 6 Download the hardware configuration to the HMI device Additional information You can find information on S7 routing for HMI connections in the section S7 Routing Page 373 You can find more information on setting up HMI connections in the STEP 7 online hel...

Page 1233: ...connection types available Secure Communication To protect your automation system you can exchange data securely over Open User Communication With Secure Open User Communication the data is sent signed and encrypted see also Secure Open User Communication Page 73 Open User Communication is possible in various automation systems see technical specifications of the respective manuals Examples Integr...

Page 1234: ...l Modbus TCP TCP according to RFC 793 E mail TCP according to RFC 793 FTP TCP according to RFC 793 TCP ISO on TCP ISO UDP Prior to data transfer these protocols except UDP establish a transport connection to the communications partner Connection oriented protocols are used when potential loss of data needs to be avoided The following is possible with UDP Unicast to one device or broadcast to all d...

Page 1235: ... The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol with linear topology based on a master slave architecture In the Modbus TCP Transmission Control Protocol the data is transmitted as TCP IP packets Communication is controlled solely by suitable instructions in the user program E mail and FTP You can use email to send for example data block contents e g process data as an attachment You can use the ...

Page 1236: ... configuring the connection in STEP 7 in the hardware and network editor Regardless of whether you set up the connection by programming or configuring instructions are always required in the user programs of both communications partners for sending and receiving the data Setting up the connection via the user program If the connection is set up by programming the connection establishment and termi...

Page 1237: ...on for Open User Communication between two S7 1500 CPUs Protocols system data types and employable instructions for programmed setup The following table shows the protocols of the Open User Communication and the matching system data types and instructions Table 6 3 Instructions for programmed setup of the connection Protocol System data type Instructions TCP TCON_QDN TCON_IP_v4 Establish connectio...

Page 1238: ... connections of the Secure Open User Communication and the matching system data types and instructions Secure OUC connection System data type Instructions Secure TCP connection from an S7 1500 CPU as TLS client to a third party PLC TLS server Secure TCP connection from an S7 1500 CPU as TLS server to a third party PLC TLS client TCON_QDN_SEC TSEND_C TRCV_C TCON TSEND TRCV Secure TCP connection bet...

Page 1239: ...C or TSEND TRCV or TUSEND TURCV ISO on TCP ISO according to ISO IEC 8073 Class 4 UDP Send receive data via TSEND_C TRCV_C or TUSEND TURCV FDL Send receive data via TSEND_C TRCV_C or TSEND TRCV or TUSEND TURCV Modbus TCP Not supported E mail Not supported FTP Not supported Additional instructions for open communication You can use the following instructions for connections set up in the user progra...

Page 1240: ...Communication with addressing via domain names As of firmware version V2 0 S7 1500 CPUs ET 200SP CPUs and the CPUs 1513 1516pro 2 PN support Open User Communication with addressing via Domain Name System DNS A DNS client is integrated in the CPU In the case of communication via DNS you use domain names as an alias for IP addresses to address communication partners Addressing of the communication p...

Page 1241: ... via its domain name The CPU supports up to 4 different DNS servers To set up communication via domain names for an S7 1500 CPU follow these steps 1 Select the CPU in the network view of STEP 7 2 In the Inspector window navigate to Properties General Advanced configuration DNS configuration 3 Enter the IPv4 address of a DNS server in the DNS server addresses column of the Server list table You can...

Page 1242: ...ion partner follow these steps 1 Create a global data block in the project tree 2 Define a tag of the data type TCON_QDN in the global data block The example below shows the global data block Data_block_1 in which the tag DNS Connection1 of data type TCON_QDN is defined Figure 6 2 Data type TCON_QDN 3 Program the parameters of the TCP connection for example the fully qualified domain name FQDN in ...

Page 1243: ... contrast to the TCP the UDP protocol does not work connection oriented For every edge at the block parameter REQ the TUSEND or TURCV command performs queries of the DNS server This can lead to high network load or load on the DNS server Additional information You can find more information about the system data types TCON_QDN TADDR_SEND_QDN and TADDR_RCV_IP in the STEP 7 online help How to set up ...

Page 1244: ...Connection parameters group Until you select a connection partner only the empty drop down list for the partner end point is enabled All other input options are disabled The connection parameters already known are displayed Name of the local end point Interface of the local end point IPv4 address of the local end point Figure 6 4 Connection parameters for TSEND_C ...

Page 1245: ... unspecified device or a CPU in the project as the communication partner Certain connection parameters are then entered automatically The following parameters are set Name of the partner end point Interface of the partner end point IPv4 address of the partner end point If the connection partners are networked the name of the subnet is displayed 5 In the Configuration type drop down list select bet...

Page 1246: ... list a new data block with the changed name but with the same structure and content is generated and used for the connection Changed names of a data block must be unique in the context of the communication partner A connection description DB must have the structure TCON_Param TCON_IP_v4 or TCON_IP_RFC depending on CPU type and connection A data block cannot be selected for an unspecified partner ...

Page 1247: ...or TCP ISO and ISO on TCP You can decide which communication partner establishes the connection actively Changed values are checked immediately for input errors by the connection configuration and entered in the data block for the connection description Note Open User Communication between two communication partners can only work when the program section for the partner end point has been download...

Page 1248: ...xample TSEND and drag it to a network of OB1 8 At the ID parameter of the instruction assign the local ID of the configured connection to be used for the transmission of data 9 Interconnect the DATA parameter of the TSEND instruction with the user data for example in a data block 10 Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU Based on the procedure described above set up the co...

Page 1249: ... TSEND_C instruction in the program editor 2 Select the TSEND_C instruction and go to Properties General Connection parameters in the Inspector window 3 Under End point select the partner end point Use one of the two partner end points below CPU S7 1500 with CM 1542 5 Unspecified 4 Under Configuration type select Use configured connection 5 Under Connection type select FDL 6 Under Interface select...

Page 1250: ...ag of the data type TCON_FDL The example below shows the global data block FDL_connection in which the tag FDL_connection of the data type TCON_FDL is defined Figure 6 7 Programming an FDL connection 3 Program the parameters of the FDL connection e g the PROFIBUS addresses in the tag of the data type TCON_FDL 4 Create a TCON instruction in the program editor 5 Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of...

Page 1251: ...odbus responses You also control the setup of the TCP connection with this instruction The MB_SERVER instruction communicates as a Modbus TCP server via the TCP connection The instruction processes connection requests of a Modbus client receives and processes Modbus requests and sends responses You also control the setup of the TCP connection Requirement The client can reach the server via IP comm...

Page 1252: ... must be specified for each MB_CLIENT connection Each MB_CLIENT or MB_SERVER connection must use a unique instance DB with one of the data structures TCON_IP_v4 TCON_QDN or TCON_Configured Each connection requires a unique connection ID The connection ID and instance DB belong together in pairs and must be unique for each connection Figure 6 9 MB_CLIENT Figure 6 10 MB_SERVER 5 Download the hardwar...

Page 1253: ...RED_CLIENT or MB_RED_SERVER instructions refer to the STEP 7 online help Modbus TCP server as gateway to Modbus RTU If you use a Modbus TCP server as a gateway to a Modbus RTU protocol address the slave device in the serial network using the static parameter MB_UNIT_ID The MB_UNIT_ID parameter corresponds to the field of the slave address in the Modbus RTU protocol The MB_UNIT_ID parameter in this...

Page 1254: ...eters to the instruction TMAIL_C for example enter the subject of the e mail in Subject 3 In a global data block create a variable of the type TMAIL_v4 TMAIL_v6 only CP 1543 1 or TMAIL_FQDN only CP 1543 1 4 Set the connecting parameters of the TCP connection in the variable in the Start value column Enter the IPv4 address of the mail server for example for the MailServerAddress for TMAIL_v4 Note C...

Page 1255: ...ow FTP client and server functionality Files can be sent by a CPU to an FTP server and can be received from the FTP server Communication with FTP is only possible for the S7 1500 using the CP 1543 1 The CP can be an FTP server FTP client or both FTP clients can also be third party systems PCs For the FTP server functionality configure the CP accordingly in STEP 7 You can use the FTP client functio...

Page 1256: ... 7 At the same time you need to select the option Permit access with PUT GET communication from remote partner PLC HMI OPC in the HW configuration of the S7 1500 CPU under the Protection area navigation in the section Connection mechanisms 2 Make the following settings in the properties of the CP under FTP configuration Select the Use FTP server for S7 CPU data check box Assign the CPU a data bloc...

Page 1257: ...d within this DB a tag of the type FTP_CONNECT_IPV4 FTP_CONNECT_IPV6 or FTP_CONNECT_NAME 5 Interconnect the tag within the data block with the FTP_CMD instruction 6 For the connection to the FTP server specify the following in the DB The user name the password and the IP address for the FTP access in the relevant data type FTP_CONNECT_IPV4 FTP_CONNECT_IPV6 or FTP_CONNECT_NAME 7 Download the hardwa...

Page 1258: ...alling TSEND_C TRCV_C or TCON Calling TSEND_C TRCV_C or TCON on the active partner starts connection establishment If the connection could be established there is positive feedback to the instructions in the user program After you have terminated a connection using the instruction T_RESET the connec tion is reestablished If the connection aborts the active partner attempts to re establish the conn...

Page 1259: ... For an S7 connection configured at one end the configuration for this connection takes place in only one communication partner and is only downloaded to it A one sided S7 connection can be configured to a CPU that is only a server of an S7 connection e g CPU 315 2 DP The CPU is configured and the address parameters and interfaces are thus known In addition a one sided S7 connection can be configu...

Page 1260: ...CPU configuration in the Protection area This FAQ https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 82212115 provides information about how to configure and program an S7 instruction and the GET and PUT communication instructions for data exchange between two S7 1500 CPUs BSEND BRCV The BSEND instruction sends data to a remote partner instruction of the type BRCV The BRCV instruction receives data ...

Page 1261: ...ive device on PROFIBUS You can only set up S7 connections configured at one end for this DP slave Figure 7 1 Test commissioning routing check box Configuring S7 connections for PUT GET instructions You can create S7 connections and assign the parameters for these in the connection parameter assignment of the PUT GET instructions Changed values are checked immediately by the connection parameter as...

Page 1262: ... a connection partner only the empty drop down list for the partner end point is enabled All other input options are disabled The connection parameters already known are displayed Name of the local end point Interface of the local end point IPv4 address of the local end point Figure 7 2 Connection configuration for PUT instruction ...

Page 1263: ... sure that you load not only the connection description of the local CPU on the device but also that of the partner CPU as well Configuring S7 connections for e g BSEND BRCV If you want to use the instructions for BSEND BRCV for S7 communication for example you first need to configure an S7 connection To configure a S7 connection follow these steps 1 Configure the communications partners in the ne...

Page 1264: ...igured connection to be used for the transmission of data 9 Assign the parameters for the instructions indicating which data will be written to where and which data will be read from where 10 Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU s S7 communication via CP 1543 1 If you set up S7 communication via the Industrial Ethernet interface of the CP 1543 1 you can select the transp...

Page 1265: ...option of using an S7 connection over multiple S7 subnets PROFIBUS PROFINET Industrial Ethernet S7 routing Page 373 1 Configure the communications partners in the network view of the Devices networks editor of STEP 7 2 Select the Network button 3 Connect the relevant interfaces with the S7 subnets PROFIBUS PROFINET Industrial Ethernet using drag and drop ...

Page 1266: ...ections button and the S7 connection entry from the drop down list 5 Using drag and drop in our example connect PLC_1 in the left S7 subnet PROFIBUS to PLC_3 in the right S7 subnet PROFINET The S7 connection between CPU 1 and CPU 3 is configured Figure 7 4 S7 connections via different subnets ...

Page 1267: ...IC PC station to None or a different Windows setting Since the PLC now no longer handles routing functions for this connection when the CPU 1515SP PC F is compiled no message relating to the invalid connection is displayed The invalid routed S7 connection is displayed only when the end points of the connection are compiled The interfaces required for routed S7 connections must remain explicitly as...

Page 1268: ...tners are possible Protocols for communication via a point to point connection Freeport protocol also called ASCII protocol Procedure 3964 R Modbus protocol in RTU format RTU Remote Terminal Unit USS protocol universal serial interface protocol The protocols use different layers according to the ISO OSI reference model Freeport Uses layer 1 physical layer 3964 R USS and Modbus Use layer 1 and 2 ph...

Page 1269: ... Configure an S7 1500 configuration with CPU and CM in the device view of the hardware and network editor of STEP 7 2 Select the interface of the CM in the device view of STEP 7 3 Assign the parameters of the interface for example connection communication configuration of message sending in the Inspector window of STEP 7 under Properties General 4 Select the Send_P2P or Receive_P2P instruction in ...

Page 1270: ...on data is overwritten but not stored permanently in the target system The Port_Config instruction is used for the program controlled configuration of the relevant port of the communications module The P3964_Config instruction is used for the dynamic configuration of protocol parameters Properties of the USS protocol Simple serial data transfer protocol with cyclic message frame traffic in half du...

Page 1271: ...change parameters on the drive 4 Assign the parameters for the instructions according to your configuration 5 Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU Properties of the Modbus protocol RTU Communication takes the form of serial asynchronous transfer with a transmission speed of up to 115 2 kbps half duplex Data transfer works according to the master slave principle The Modbu...

Page 1272: ...ion The Modbus_Master instruction is used for Modbus master functionality The Modbus_Slave instruction is used for Modbus slave functionality 4 Assign the parameters for the instructions according to your configuration 5 Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU Additional information You can find more detailed information on communication via point to point connections and b...

Page 1273: ...le for data exchange across different levels thanks to its independence from specific operating systems its secure transfer procedures and the semantic description of data Machine data controlled variables measured values or parameters can also be transferred in this way An important component of this concept is that OPC UA communication can take place in parallel with real time communication for ...

Page 1274: ...s do not support this transport mechanism Binary data exchange is supported by all OPC UA applications required in OPC UA specification Simple client server principle An OPC UA server provides a great deal of information within a network e g relating to the CPU the OPC UA server itself the data and the data types An OPC UA client accesses this information Implementation in different programming la...

Page 1275: ...le of the OPC Foundation This profile is functionally equivalent to the core server facet and defines the OPC UA TCP binary protocol as the required transport profile The profile allows for connections without UA Security and does not allow subscriptions or method calls Support for diagnostic objects and variables is optional for this profile Additional profiles build on the Nano Embedded Device 2...

Page 1276: ...ces to types are optimized over time These optimizations lead to new versions of the OPC UA Specification e g V1 03 V1 04 PLC tag mapping The information of the OPC UA server for example the PLC tags is modeled as nodes connected to one another via references The semantics are displayed by the server in the address space and can be acquired by clients while navigating This makes it possible to bro...

Page 1277: ...rate companion specifications into the address space of the OPC UA server OPC UA server of the S7 1200 CPU As of firmware V4 4 an S7 1200 CPU is equipped with an OPC UA server The OPC UA server is generally configured as it is for an S7 1500 CPU the scope of functions and the quantity limits are limited according to the supported Micro Embedded Device 2017 Server Profile Unlike for an S7 1500 CPU ...

Page 1278: ...mplify handling the API we offer a higher level NET helper class The client API is based on the NET OPC UA stack of the OPC Foundation The application example shows how to establish connections between servers and clients for example It also demonstrates the reading and writing of PLC tags Link to download OPC UA NET client for the SIMATIC S7 1500 OPC UA Server http support automation siemens com ...

Page 1279: ...a virtual interface W1 IP based applications can then be accessed via the IP address parameters of this virtual interface The schematic is shown in the following figure CPU S7 1500 FW V2 8 or higher e g CPU 1515 2 PN CP 1543 1 FW V2 2 or higher Virtual interface W1 Protocol conversion PROFINET Industrial Ethernet on backplane bus or backplane bus on PROFINET Industrial Ether net Backplane bus Figu...

Page 1280: ...U the following interfaces of the S7 1500 station are available The local PROFINET interfaces of the S7 1500 CPU The Ethernet interface of a CP 1543 1 firmware version V2 2 and higher The following figure shows an example of a possible configuration The CPU could also have the role OPC UA client and the device on the subnet of the CP could have the role OPC UA server Figure 9 2 Example Access of O...

Page 1281: ...ia an S7 1500 CPU in which case the S7 1500 CPU operates as an IP Forwarder This configuration option allows for flexible expansion of existing systems Figure 9 3 Example Access of OPC UA clients to OPC UA servers via S7 1500 CPU with activated IP Forwarding Additional information Additional information on access options via the virtual interface and via IP forwarding can be found in the following...

Page 1282: ... information about the given OPC UA server These nodes can be found in the namespace of the OPC Foundation and have the index 0 The OPC Foundation also defines data types and tag types Namespace Namespace In addition to the above described namespace of the OPC Foundation the namespace for accessing CPU data is of interest All the tags or methods of an S7 1500 OPC UA server are contained in the nam...

Page 1283: ...can consist of several components The individual components are then separated by a dot The following example reads the MyDB array data block completely This data block contains an array with ten integer values All ten values should be read in one pass Therefore 0 9 is entered at the array range Example of NodeIds identifiers and namespaces The following figure illustrates the relation between Nod...

Page 1284: ...igure below shows where the PLC tags in the example are located in the address space of the OPC UA server excerpt from UA client The MyDB data block is a global data block The data block is therefore located below the node DataBlocksGlobal StartTimer is a memory tag and is therefore stored below the Memory node Figure 9 4 PLC tags in the address space of the OPC UA server ...

Page 1285: ...021 A5E03735815 AJ Methods in the address space of the OPC UA server If you implement a method via your user program it takes the following form in the address space of the OPC UA Server see Providing methods on the OPC UA server Page 279 Figure 9 5 Methods in the address space of the OPC UA server ...

Page 1286: ...nts of the OPC UA servers Page 203 Reading out information from the OPC UA server When a connection to an end point of the server exists you can use the navigation function of the client You navigate starting from a defined starting point from the root node through the address space of the server The following information is provided in the process Enabled PLC tags data blocks and data block compo...

Page 1287: ... Range you specify which components of the array you want to overwrite The Good status code indicates that the values were transferred successfully However you can only write the values to the S7 1500 but not the time stamps of these values The time stamps can only be read Faster access through registration Registered Read Write lends itself to repeated optimized access to data with maximum perfor...

Page 1288: ...A server Page 222 Subscription The term Subscription is used for a function in which only those tags for which an OPC UA client has registered at the OPC UA server are transferred The OPC UA server only sends a message to the OPC UA client for these registered tags monitored Items when a value has changed The monitoring of these tags makes constant sampling by the OPC UA client Polling superfluous...

Page 1289: ...cation load Therefore select intervals as large as possible which are still sufficient for the application For information about the consistency of tags refer to Consistency of CPU tags Page 213 Monitoring of PLC tags When the Subscription has been created you inform the server which tags are to be monitored with it In the following example the Voltage tag was added to the subscription The Voltage...

Page 1290: ...he original data type in SIMATIC Example A tag has the SIMATIC data type COUNTER You read COUNTER UInt16 in the table You now know that you do not need to convert the COUNTER value is sent over the line as a UInt16 data type The client detects from the attribute DataType that the tag is actually the SIMATIC data type COUNTER With this knowledge the client reconstructs the data type Table 9 1 SIMAT...

Page 1291: ... an array index 0 and length 1 The data type is simply sent repeatedly on the line For the tags the DataType attribute indicates the basic data type The attributes ValueRank and ArrayDimensions show whether or not you are dealing with an array and how large the array is Data types based on arrays There are SIMATIC data types for which an OPC UA value is mapped to an array of bytes An array of thes...

Page 1292: ... can be read and interpreted more quickly and easily A client only determines the setup of the structure once before or during the first access and then uses this information for the duration of the session Special SIMATIC data types SIMATIC data types that are not in the table above and cannot be defined as elements of a structure or PLC data type are not supported by the OPC UA client These are ...

Page 1293: ...cludes an OPC UA security policy with the setting no security which corresponds to the end point None Note Disabling security policies you do not want If you have enabled all security policies in the secure channel settings of the S7 1500 OPC UA server thus also the end point None no security unsecured data traffic neither signed nor encrypted between the server and client is also possible The OPC...

Page 1294: ...the client and classifies it as trusted See section Handling client and server certificates Page 227 The client must also check and trust the certificate of the server The server and client must show their identities and prove that they are what they claim to be They must prove their identity Mutual authentication of client and server for example prevents man in the middle attacks Man in the middl...

Page 1295: ...The CPU clock must therefore be set and date time must be within the validity period otherwise no communication takes place Signing and encryption To allow you to check whether a certificate has been manipulated certificates are signed There are various possible procedures here Within the TIA Portal you have the possibility to generate and sign certificates If you have protected your project and a...

Page 1296: ...with the encrypted hash value to the recipient To verify the signature the recipient needs the public key of the sender this is contained in the X509 certificate of the sender The recipient uses the sender s public key to decrypt the hash value received The recipient then forms the hash value themselves from the plain text received the hash process is contained in the sender s certificate The reci...

Page 1297: ...on has been established the client and server generate an internal key only known to them which they both use for signing and encrypting messages This symmetric process a shared key is much faster than asymmetric processes private and public key See also Creating self signed certificates Page 178 Certificates with OPC UA Page 177 Secure Communication Page 40 Using certificates with TIA Portal http...

Page 1298: ...s This X 509 certificate identifies a specific version of the client or server software These certificates contain attributes that describe which tests this version of the software has passed during certification by the OPC Foundation or recognized test laboratories For the Organization name attribute you enter the name of the company that has developed or markets the software Note Software certif...

Page 1299: ... the first program start The documentation for this example describes the procedure for handling these certificates Using the certificate generator of the TIA Portal If you use an OPC UA client that does not generate a client certificate you can create self signed certificates with STEP 7 To do this follow these steps 1 In the properties of the CPU double click Add new under Protection Security Ce...

Page 1300: ...OpenSSL under Windows If you are using a 64 bit version of the operating system install OpenSSL in the C OpenSSL Win64 directory for example You can obtain OpenSSL Win64 as a download from various providers for open source software 2 Create a directory for example C demo 3 Open the command prompt To do so click Start and enter cmd or command prompt in the search field Right click cmd exe in the re...

Page 1301: ...Country name for example DE for Germany FR for France State or province name for example Bavaria Location Name for example Augsburg Organization Name Enter the name of your company Organizational Unit Name for example IT Common Name for example OPC UA client of machine A Email Address Note Note for S7 1500 CPU as server with firmware version V2 5 The IP address of the client program has to be stor...

Page 1302: ...wn in the next step Signing the certificate yourself Enter the following command so that you can generate and sign your certificate self signed certificate yourself x509 req days 365 in myRequest csr signkey myKey key out myCertificate crt The figure below shows the command line with the command and OpenSSL The command generates an X 509 certificate with the attributes that you transfer with the C...

Page 1303: ... In order to use this security policy establish a connection to a None end point of a server Signing All message are signed This allows the integrity of the messages received to be checked Manipulations are detected In order to use this security policy establish a connection to a Sign end point of a server Sign Encrypt All messages are signed and encrypted This allows the integrity of the messages...

Page 1304: ...ta to the session The secure channel forwards data of the session that is to be sent to the transport layer In Sign security mode the secure channel signs the data messages that is sent When a message is received the secure channel checks the signature to detect any manipulations With a SignAndEncrypt security policy the secure channel signs and encrypts the send data Data received is decrypted by...

Page 1305: ...uted as follows 1 The client starts establishing the session by sending a CreateSessionRequest to the server This message contains a Nonce a random number that is only used once The server must sign this random number Nonce to prove that it is the owner of the private key The private key belongs to the certificate that the server uses to establish the secure channel This message and all subsequent...

Page 1306: ...te update supported as of TIA Portal V17 CPU firmware version V2 9 Discovery server To connect to an OPC UA server an OPC UA client requires information about its endpoint such as the endpoint URL and the security policy When a large number of possible servers are available in the network a discovery server can take over the search and management of this server information OPC UA servers register ...

Page 1307: ... UA GDS as OPC UA client The GDS in the role of certificate manager uses these methods to transfer push certificates and trusted list updates see explanation of the concept for automated certificate update below As of firmware version V2 9 the S7 1500 CPU currently only supports push management for the OPC UA server of the CPU You cannot transfer certificates for the OPC UA client instructions of ...

Page 1308: ...n The OPC UA server of the S7 1500 CPU as certificate receiver provides the standardized methods and attributes that the OPC UA client certificates need to read and write trust lists and CRLs The focus in the context of the OPC UA server of the S7 1500 CPU is the description of the push function in contrast to the usual manner in which certificates are provided to the CPU By loading the hardware c...

Page 1309: ...o grant access to the OPC UA server for up to 62 OPC UA clients and fill the trusted list accordingly When you add a Certificate Revocation List entry in the trusted list you can only trust up to 61 client certificates Additional OPC UA certificates can not be transferred by loading the hardware configuration to the CPU Tip To keep the number of required certificates low we recommend having the OP...

Page 1310: ... additional user management via project security settings The Users and roles with OPC UA function rights Page 238 section describes how to set the function rights Activating GDS When the requirements listed above are met you must still enable the GDS 1 In the Inspector window CPU parameters go to the OPC UA Server General area 2 Enable the Enable Global Discovery Services Push option Determining ...

Page 1311: ...nnection to clients not known to the server is possible For example clients that the server cannot authenticate using existing certificates or trust lists until it has received the corresponding client certificate or the corresponding trust list The provisioning phase is characterized by lower security therefore the provisioning phase is indicated by a lit Maintenance LED and a corresponding diagn...

Page 1312: ...OPC UA communication 9 2 Security at OPC UA Communication Function Manual 05 2021 A5E03735815 AJ 191 Sequence of the provisioning phase The sequence of the provisioning phase is described below ...

Page 1313: ...oading the hardware configuration Provisioning phase diagnostics In addition to the lit Maintenance LED the GDS address model has two nodes that provide information on whether the OPC UA server of the CPU is in the provisioning phase You can only use the two nodes as marked in the figure for diagnostics if the requirements for GDS are met endpoint security signed encrypted plus administrator funct...

Page 1314: ...y pair internal CPU keys that are already available are used Certificate update with creation of a new key pair CPU internal There is also the possibility to generate certificates with externally created key pairs NOTICE Recommended procedure to generate certificates Transport of private keys should be avoided a private key should not leave a device We therefore recommend the generation of a certi...

Page 1315: ...t program communication load and cycle time of your user program Via a controller you can get help on the effects of a changed communication load on the cycle time Create certificate with externally created key pair The certificate is generated with the help of tools for example that can generate additional keys Certificate and keys are transferred to the CPU using the UpdateCertificate method Due...

Page 1316: ... for access to the address model The methods and attributes are briefly described below with special features and restrictions of the specific address model of the S7 1500 CPU The OPC UA specification listed above contains the general description You can find a detailed description of the individual methods below this overview table Method Attribute Variable Description CreateSigningRequest Method...

Page 1317: ...signed to an OPC UA applica tion Details on the structure of the CertificateGroups object and the methods and attributes that are available in the object are described in the next section CreateSigningRequest The method has the following parameters Parameter Data type Description in certificateGroupId NodeId NodeId of the CertificateGroup object Only one certificate groups is currently supported b...

Page 1318: ...tion in certificateGroupId NodeId NodeId of the CertificateGroup object Only one certificate groups is currently supported by the CPU DefaultApplicationGroup in certificateTypeId NodeId Requested certificate type List of permitted certificate types is specified by the CertificateTypes variable of the certificate group Currently only the certificate type RsaSha256ApplicationCertificateType in certi...

Page 1319: ...n rights Bad_SecurityChecksFailed Error occurred when verifying the integrity of the certificate Apply Changes The method has no parameters Method Result Codes Result Code Description Bad_UserAccessDenied The current user does not have the required func tion rights GetRejectedList The method has the following parameters Parameter Data type Description out certificates ByteStrings DER coded list of...

Page 1320: ...CertificateTypes node The CertificateTypes variable specifies the NodeIds of the certificate types that are assigned to the server application Currently only RsaSha256ApplicationCertifcateType is supported TrustList node The node for the trust list object TrustList file defines an OPC UA file type Binary encoded stream that contains information on the certificates and CRLs that can be read and upd...

Page 1321: ...formation Model Method Attribute Variable Description LastUpdateTime Variable that shows the time of the last update OpenWithMasks Method that permits a client to only read a part of the Trus tList CloseAndUpdate Method for closing the TrustList file and applying the changes AddCertificate Method for adding a single certificate to the TrustList RemoveCertificate Method for removing a single certif...

Page 1322: ...he CPU over the backplane bus of the automation system is not possible via CPs under the following conditions Configuration with TIA Portal Version V16 or higher S7 1500 CPU firmware version 2 8 or higher and CP 1543 1 firmware version V2 2 or higher For configuration see Access to OPC UA applications Page 157 Direct access to the OPC UA server of the CPU over the backplane bus of the automation s...

Page 1323: ... method or a property The example below shows the address space of the OPC UA server of an S7 1500 CPU extract from the OPC UA client UaExpert from Unified Automation Figure 9 7 Example of the address space of the OPC UA server of an S7 1500 CPU In the figure above the MyValue tag is selected highlighted in gray This tag is located below the Memory node which has the node class Object Memory is be...

Page 1324: ...The server returns a list with all the security settings endpoints that the server offers Structure of end points End points consist of the following components Identifier for OPC opc tcp IP address 192 168 178 151 in the example Port number for OPC UA 4840 standard port The port number can be configured Security setting for messages Message Security Mode None Sign SignAndEncrypt Encryption and ha...

Page 1325: ...er OPC UA servers provide a wide range of information The values of PLC tabs and DB components which clients may access The data types of these PLC tags and DB components Information on the OPC UA server itself and on the CPU This gives clients an overview and allows them to read out specific information Previous knowledge of the PLC program and the CPU data is not required You do not need to ask ...

Page 1326: ...e information 9 3 1 3 Runtime behavior of the OPC UA server OPC UA server in operation The OPC UA server of the S7 1500 CPU starts when you activate the server and download the project to the CPU How to activate the OPC UA server is described here Behavior in the operating state STOP of the CPU An activated OPC UA server remains in operation even if the CPU switches to STOP The OPC UA server conti...

Page 1327: ...estarts STEP 7 does not show a warning in this case When objects are downloaded in RUN operating state of the CPU the OPC UA server only stops if the downloaded objects are or could be OPC UA relevant The OPC UA server restarts after re initialization due to the modified OPC UA data Before OPC UA relevant objects are loaded into the CPU and stop the OPC UA server STEP 7 displays a warning in the p...

Page 1328: ...eading CPU operating mode over OPC UA server The OPC UA server allows you to read out the CPU mode see figure below Figure 9 9 Reading CPU operating mode over OPC UA server In addition to the operating mode of the CPU you can for example read out information in the manual DeviceManual or firmware version HardwareRevision ...

Page 1329: ...n be read completely in one pass by OPC UA clients see Addressing nodes Page 161 The check boxes at Accessible from HMI OPC UA and Writable from HMI OPC UA are activated for all the components of the array Result OPC UA clients can both read and write these components Removing write rights If you want to write protect a tag deselect the Writable from HMI OPC UA option for that tag This removes the...

Page 1330: ...ss over OPC UA if write rights are genuinely necessary for specific PLC tags and tags of data blocks If you have reset the Accessible from HMI OPC UA option for all elements of a data block the data block for an OPC UA client is no longer visible in the address space of the OPC UA server of the S7 1500 CPU You can also prevent access to an entire data block centrally see Managing write and read ri...

Page 1331: ...contents for OPC UA clients Note Effect on settings in the DB editor If you hide a DB using the DB attribute described here the settings for the components in the DB editor are no longer relevant individual components can no longer be accessed or written Tip Using the overview of all program blocks If you are using multiple data blocks it is appropriate to use the detailed overview of the Program ...

Page 1332: ... information model the attribute AccessLevel regulates access to tags AccessLevel is defined bit by bit Bit 0 CurrentRead and Bit 1 CurrentWrite The meaning of the bit combinations is as follows AccessLevel 0 no access AccessLevel 1 read only AccessLevel 2 write only AccessLevel 3 read write Example of the assignment of write and read rights read write Definition of write and read rights in STEP 7...

Page 1333: ...nd Writable from HMI OPC UA are selected in the PLC tag table Result This tag can only be read Rules If write rights are required AccessLevel 2 oder 3 Writable from HMI OPC UA enabled If read rights are required AccessLevel 1 AccessLevel 3 is also possible but misleading The settings suggests that an OPC UA client has write and read rights Accessible from HMI OPC UA enabled Writable from HMI OPC U...

Page 1334: ...bled x Read only 2 Enabled Disabled No access 3 Enabled Disabled Read only 2 Enabled Enabled Write only 3 Enabled Enabled Read write x don t care See also Consistency of CPU tags Page 213 Managing write and read rights Page 208 9 3 2 4 Consistency of CPU tags AccessLevelEx attribute extends access properties As of firmware version V2 6 the OPC UA server of the S7 1500 CPU supports not only the att...

Page 1335: ...An OPC UA tag structure is readable and writable but inconsistent for reading and writing access Consequently Bits 0 1 8 and 9 are set AccessLevelEx 771 1 2 256 512 Another structure is read only Consequently Bits 0 and 8 are set bit 1 and bit 9 are not set AccessLevelEx 257 1 0 256 0 Handling of the attribute in the server The AccessLevelEx attribute is only available in the OPC UA server The att...

Page 1336: ...data types are also consistent Example HW_ANY derived from UINT UInt16 Tip If you browse in the address space of the S7 1500 CPU e g with the OPC UA Client UaExpert you can find the consistent data types under Types BaseDataType Enumeration Number String Tags of the following data types are not consistent nonatomic in the language usage of OPC UA SIMATIC structures are generally not consistent Thi...

Page 1337: ...OPC UA server If you access specific tags regularly recurring access you should use the functions RegisteredRead and RegisteredWrite Allow a greater communication load for the PLC by increasing the value for Cycle load due to communication Make sure that your application still works properly with the changed settings Procedure for creating an array DB You can create arrays for example in global da...

Page 1338: ...del of an OPC UA server to be provided to a client in advance or information models can be downloaded to an OPC UA server A file in this format is called a nodeset file because it describes an information model as a set of nodes With STEP 7 TIA Portal you can easily export the standard SIMATIC information model of the S7 1500 CPU as a server to an OPC UA XML file node set file including all PLC va...

Page 1339: ...ng the OPC UA server Requirement If you use certificates for secured communication e g HTTPS Secure OUC OPC UA make sure that the modules involved have the current time of day and the current date Otherwise the modules evaluate the used certificates as invalid and secure communication does not work You have acquired a runtime license for the operation of the OPC UA functions see License for OPC UA...

Page 1340: ...UA client of the CPU when connecting to an OPC UA Server This means that the CPU enters this application name automatically as ApplicationName for the instruction OPC_UA_Connect tag of type OPC_UA_SessionConnectInfo at the parameter SessionConnectInfo of the instruction OPC_UA_Connect When you program the instruction OPC_UA_Connect you must therefore assign an empty string to the ApplicationName Y...

Page 1341: ... version V2 2 or higher For configuration see Access to OPC UA applications Page 157 Direct access to the OPC UA server of the CPU over the backplane bus of the automation system is not possible via CMs With SIMATIC S7 1500 SW controllers access to the OPC UA server is possible via PROFINET interfaces that are assigned to the software PLC Additional access options of SW controllers are described i...

Page 1342: ...e IP address at which the OPC UA server can be accessed from the Ethernet subnet 192 168 1 TCP Port number Default 4840 standard port The port number can be changed under OPC UA Server Port Dynamic IP addresses In the example below the IP address for the PROFINET interface X2 has not yet been specified Figure 9 15 Display of the server addresses with dynamic IP address The placeholder dynamically ...

Page 1343: ...d standard SIMATIC server interface Even if you disable the standard SIMATIC server interface OPC UA clients can read general device information about the OPC UA server of the CPU Examples of such device information DeviceManual DeviceRevision OrderNumber In this case however all objects of the application program remain invisible to clients If you want to prevent that this device information is n...

Page 1344: ...nt place cursor in field Each registration ties up resources Note No error message following attempt to register more than the configured maximum number of registrable nodes If a client tries to register more nodes during runtime than the configured maximum number the server of the S7 1500 CPU only registers the configured maximum number Starting from the configured maximum number of registrable n...

Page 1345: ...nterpret a simpler solution was introduced with OPC UA Specification V1 04 attribute DataTypeDefinition at the data type node If your client supports the OPC UA specification V1 04 or higher then disable the option Advantages of the data type definitions according to OPC UA specification as of V1 04 The server starts faster The memory is used more efficiently The Browse function is faster 9 3 3 4 ...

Page 1346: ...blishing interval With Minimum publishing interval you set the time intervals at which the server sends a message to the client with the new values in the event of changes 250 ms is used as the Minimum sampling interval in the figure below The value 200 ms is entered as the Minimum publishing interval Figure 9 18 Subscription settings In the example following a value change the OPC UA server will ...

Page 1347: ...the option Discard Oldest has to be activated in this case The most recent values are sent to the client Maximum number of monitored elements monitored items In this field you specify the maximum number of elements that the OPC UA server of the CPU simultaneously monitors for a value change The monitoring ties up resources The maximum number of monitored elements is dependent on the utilized CPU A...

Page 1348: ...security prompts STEP 7 automatically generates the certificate for the server and saves it in the local certificate directory of the CPU You can view and manage this directory with the local certificate manager of the CPU exporting or deleting certificates The figure below shows the local certificate manager of the CPU with the automatically generated certificate for the OPC UA server Figure 9 19...

Page 1349: ... client certificate come from Client of the S7 1500 If you are using the OPC UA client of an S7 1500 CPU OPC UA client enabled you can create certificates for these clients with STEP 7 V15 and higher 1 In the project tree select the CPU you want to use as a client 2 Double click Device configuration 3 In the properties of the CPU click Protection Security Certificate manager 4 Double click Add new...

Page 1350: ...rtificates Announcing client certificates to the server You need to send client certificates to the server to allow a secure connection to be established To do this follow these steps 1 Select the Use global security settings for certificate manager option in the local certificate manager of the server This makes the global certificate manager available You will find this option under Protection S...

Page 1351: ...at you have imported 15 Click the button with the green check mark 16 Compile the project 17 Load the configuration onto the S7 1500 CPU Result The server now trusts the client If the server certificate is also considered trusted the server and client can establish a secure connection Accepting client certificates automatically When you select the option Automatically accept all client certificate...

Page 1352: ...u do not want If you have enabled all security policies in the secure channel settings of the S7 1500 OPC UA server default setting thus also the end point None no security unsecured data traffic neither signed nor encrypted between the server and client is also possible The identity of the client remains unknown with No security Each OPC UA client can then connect to the server irrespective of an...

Page 1353: ... 256 bit hashing and 256 bit encryption This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing Basic256Sha256 Sign Encrypt Secure endpoint supports a series of algorithms for 256 bit hashing and 256 bit encryption This endpoint protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and encryption To enable the security setting click the check box in the relevant line Note...

Page 1354: ...or the security of the OPC UA server use the global security settings The global security settings are enabled in the CPU properties under Protection Security Certificate manager Customizing server certificates STEP 7 automatically generates a certificate for the OPC UA server of the S7 1500 when you activate the server see Activating the OPC UA server Page 218 In the process STEP 7 uses the defau...

Page 1355: ...021 A5E03735815 AJ 3 The dialog for generating new certificates is displayed figure below The values for an example are already entered Figure 9 22 Customizing server certificates 4 Use other parameters if this is necessary in accordance with the security specifications in your company or your customer ...

Page 1356: ...e project name is PLC1 In the properties of the CPU set the project name under General Project information Name Keep the default or enter a different name that is more meaningful for the OPC UA server under Certificate holder Signature Here you select the hash and encryption process that is to be used when signing the server certificate The following entries are available sha1RSA sha256RSA Valid f...

Page 1357: ...ect Alternative Name SAN The following is entered in the example above URI urn SIMATIC S7 1500 OPC UAServer PLC1 IP 192 168 178 151 IP 192 168 1 1 This URI must be correctly entered because it is checked against the communicated application description The following entry would also be valid IP 192 168 178 151 IP 192 168 1 1 The important thing here is that the IP addresses via which the OPC UA se...

Page 1358: ...assword authentication option under OPC UA Server Security User authentication Deactivate the guest authentication Enter the user in the User management table To do so click the Add new user entry A new user is created with an automatically assigned name You can edit the user name and enter the password for the user name You can add a maximum of 21 users Additional user administration via the secu...

Page 1359: ...cient rights for example as administrator Settings in the project tree Security settings You access the central user settings and roles in the protected project in the project tree under Security settings This is where you centrally define users with user name password and function rights You can simply use these settings elsewhere Figure 9 23 Setting user and roles Reusing central security settin...

Page 1360: ...o save the user name and password centrally Here is an example to illustrate this type of rights use 1 Under Security settings Users and roles you define a new role in the Roles tab with the name PLC opcua role all inclusive for example Tip The tab may be covered by an information window The current status has not yet been checked In this case first close the information window 2 In the Function r...

Page 1361: ...ntime push function This function right is required for automated certificate handling for example in the context of GDS Global Discovery Service User authentication of the OPC UA client This function right apples on the OPC UA client of the S7 1500 CPU with client instructions Only when this option is selected can the user with the role PLC opcua role all inclusive use the user name and password ...

Page 1362: ...tics behavior that supports the most important diagnostics without appreciably increasing the communication load You enable diagnostics for subscriptions when the OPC UA server also uses subscriptions i e if necessary during the commissioning phase only Reason A large volume of diagnostic activity generates a high communication load in the CPU and may suppress other important messages Or the high ...

Page 1363: ...uired for CPU 1511 CPU 1512 CPU 1513 ET 200SP CPUs CPU 1515SP PC SIMATIC OPC UA S7 1500 medium required for CPU 1515 CPU 1516 Software Controller CPU 1507 CPU 1516pro 2PN SIMATIC OPC UA S7 1500 large required for CPU 1517 CPU 1518 The required license type is displayed under Properties General Runtime licenses OPC UA Type of required license Figure 9 26 OPC UA server Runtime licenses To confirm pu...

Page 1364: ...ed of members of the OPC Foundation and another industry organization who have jointly specified an OPC UA information model for a specific purpose for example for data exchange with RFID devices or with injection molding machines This information model is realized in the form of OPC UA nodes in the address space of an OPC UA server OPC UA clients can access these OPC UA nodes You can also use the...

Page 1365: ...Ts Page 273 User defined server interface For this type of server interface you combine OPC UA nodes of an OPC UA server into a unit To do this use the specifications for your project or the requirements for your machine or your plant as a basis Additional information on the user defined server interface is available here Page 259 Injection molding machine as an example for companion specification...

Page 1366: ...o up to the individual user application developer to program and name server methods that can be called over OPC UA Information modeling and standardization for devices and sectors For applications of the same kind it is worth standardizing your device or machine interface with the OPC UA toolkit Many different bodies and working groups have driven forward standardization and developed a range of ...

Page 1367: ...ata between injection molding machines and the higher level MES Manufacturing Execution System This allows the MES to connect all lower level injection molding machines in the same way The standardized data interface facilitates the integration of injection molding machines into a plant Using companion specifications Overview Euromap 77 is described in the OPC UA XML file Opc_Ua EUROMAP77 NodeSet2...

Page 1368: ...n type and import the XML file you created in step 1 The Creating a server interface for companion specification Page 253 section describes how to proceed 4 Assign the OPC UA nodes of the new server interface to the corresponding PLC tags which you created in step 2 The Creating a server interface for companion specification Page 253 section describes how to proceed Step 1 Create instances in SiOM...

Page 1369: ...e OPC UA server The object type IMM_MES_InterfaceType is the root object type of Euromap 77 IMM stands for Injection Moulding Machine Follow these steps 1 Download the files Opc_Ua EUROMAP77 NodeSet2 xml and Opc_Ua_EUROMAP83_NodeSet2 xml from the Euromap website see above 2 Download the file Opc Ua Di NodeSet2 xml from the OPC Foundation website The Opc Ua Di NodeSet2 xml file contains type defini...

Page 1370: ...new namespace The YourCompany org namespace is used in the example SiOME now also displays the new namespace Figure 9 28 Display of the namespace in SiOME 10 Create an instance from the root object type IMM_MES_InterfaceType of the Companion specification Euromap 77 To do so in the Information model area right click the DeviceSet directory and select Add Instance SiOME displays the Add Instance di...

Page 1371: ...ionUnits directory in the Information model area and select Add Instance SiOME displays the Add Instance dialog For Name enter a meaningful name for the instance In the example enter InjectionUnit_1 For TypeDefinition select InjectionUnitType Click OK 14 Create a new Mould_1 instance of the MouldType object type in the Moulds directory 15 Create a new instance PowerUnit_1 of the PowerUnitType obje...

Page 1372: ...ation model area Figure 9 31 Export XML button in SiOME SiOME shows the Export XML dialog 18 Leave all namespaces activated and click OK SiOME displays the Save as dialog 19 Select a meaningful name and save the exported file In the example name the XML file IMM_Manufacturer_01234 Result You have now created an XML file which uses the companion specification Euromap 77 once with one instance ...

Page 1373: ...is data type has the same structure as InjectionUnit in the type IMM_MES_InterfaceType Make sure that you use SIMATIC data types that are compatible with the OPC UA data types see Mapping of data types below Figure 9 32 Creating a UDT in STEP 7 2 Add a new global data block to your STEP 7 project In the example name the data block IMM_Manufacturer_01234 so that there is a reference to the injectio...

Page 1374: ... functions and tags that are required for example for higher level systems MES systems The following description shows how to create a server interface in STEP 7 TIA Portal which contains only the Euromap 77 companion specification If you want to make OPC UA clients accessible to other tags or methods than those required for the management of an injection molding machine simply create another OPC ...

Page 1375: ... number The example uses the name IMM_Manufacturer_01234 6 In the Import XML file field select an XML file that describes an information model The Using OPC UA companion specifications Page 245 section describes how to create such an XML file with the SiOME tool The figure below shows a section from the information model IMM_MANUFACTURER_0123456 an instance use of the type IMM_MES_InterfaceType wh...

Page 1376: ...spaces http opcfoundation org UA DI http www euromap org euromap83 http www euromap org euromap77 Tip STEP 7 displays missing namespaces in the lower area of the OPC UA interface editor Properties tab To do this select the server interface in the project tree here IMM_Manufacturer_01234 and select the Namespaces area in the inspector window Missing namespaces are selected If one or more namespaces...

Page 1377: ...tive OPC UA elements the local PLC tags are assigned to the respective OPC UA nodes of Euromap 77 The figure below shows a section from the assignment of the local data PLC tags to the OPC UA nodes of the Euromap 77 NOTICE Checking the mapping of CPU local data on nodes of the OPC UA server interface When invalid assignments mappings exist in the server interface they can result in incorrect read ...

Page 1378: ...ication in the example above by Euromap 77 These node names must not be changed This ensures a uniform view of all injection molding machines which complies with the specification Node type Type of the OPC UA node The type is specified by the companion specification that is used In the following cases STEP 7 marks a node type in the table in color No definition is included for this in the imported...

Page 1379: ...no methods or input output arguments of methods After you have clicked the button or selected the shortcut menu you must select in the follow up dialog box whether the local data should be created in a new DB or in an existing DB Consistency check You have the option to check the server interface STEP 7 TIA Portal checks whether the OPC UA node of the server interface PLC tags data blocks has been...

Page 1380: ...y passing through Gate_1 The CPU publishes a server interface via which the driverless transport systems arrange for Gate_1 to open The server interface contains the server method smOpenGate for opening the gate and the tag Gate_1_State which indicates the status of the gate open or closed Creating a user defined server interface To create an Server interface follow these steps 1 Select the CPU th...

Page 1381: ...oject and have the property Accessible from HMI OPC UA You can add the OPC UA elements to the new server interface Cell_1 7 Drag the OPC UA elements into the Add new line of the new server interface Note The following applies in general If you store data blocks or technology objects in the left area of the table STEP 7 TIA Portal creates an object in the server interface The elements of the data b...

Page 1382: ... area This server method is located within the smOpenGate_DB DB3 data block in the right area STEP 7 TIA Portal displays the dialog as follows Figure 9 38 Adding OPC UA elements to the server interface NOTICE Checking the mapping of CPU local data on nodes of the OPC UA server interface When invalid assignments mappings exist in the server interface they can result in incorrect read and write oper...

Page 1383: ...PC UA properties of the S7 1500 CPU so that the filtered nodes cannot be accessed any other way Figure 9 39 Disabling the standard server interface You can also disable the visibility of each configured OPC UA server interface in the properties of the server interface and thus prevent that this server interface can be used by clients during operation To do this select the server interface and righ...

Page 1384: ... the table This means that it no longer belongs to the server interface and is no longer visible to OPC UA clients DisplayName Similar to BrowseName However the name can be translated and is displayed if available in the corresponding language Node ID NodeId of the OPC UA node e g http Server Node_1 i 1 Node type Type of the OPC UA node for example BOOL BYTE INT These node types were defined by Si...

Page 1385: ...clicked the button or selected the shortcut menu you must select in the follow up dialog box whether the local data should be created in a new DB or in an existing DB Consistency check You have the option to check the server interface During the consistency check STEP 7 checks whether the OPC UA nodes of the server interface are each assigned to a suitable OPC UA element identical data type or whe...

Page 1386: ...You can also use the listed data types for example as elements of structures UDTs for input and output parameters of self created server methods UAMethod_InParameters and UAMethod_OutParameters Table 9 3 Mapping of data types SIMATIC data type OPC UA data type BOOL Boolean SINT SByte INT Int16 DINT Int32 LINT Int64 USINT Byte UINT UInt16 UDINT UInt32 ULINT UInt64 REAL Float LREAL Double LDT DateTi...

Page 1387: ...ment for the use of the basic data types listed above as variables in the application program The basic data types have to exist as complex data types that are structured exactly like the corresponding OPC UA basic data types OpcUa_NodeId and OpcUa_QualifiedName exist as system data types that s why you can use these data types not only for single variables but also as elements of a structure For ...

Page 1388: ...r tag depends on the identifier type Numeric identifier The node is labeled with a number for example 12345678 String identifier The node is labeled with a name for example MyTag No distinction is made be tween upper and lower case IdentifierType UDINT Type of identifier 0 Numeric identifier 1 String identifier 2 GUID 3 Opaque System data type OPC_UA_QualifiedName See the following table for the s...

Page 1389: ...ncodingByte indicates which fields Locale or Text are available EncodingByte Meaning 0 The fields Locale and Text are empty 1 The field Locale has content the field Text is empty 2 The field Locale is empty the field Text has content 3 The fields Locale and Text have content UDT ByteString For the basic data type ByteString create the following PLC data type in this case for example a ByteString a...

Page 1390: ... to an S7 1500 CPU Please note the following information when importing server interfaces that come from the OPC UA XML export of an S7 1500 Note Import blocked for namespace http www siemens com simatic s7 opcua You cannot import server interfaces with the namespace http www siemens com simatic s7 opcua to an S7 1500 CPU because this namespace is reserved for S7 1500 CPUs standard SIMATIC server ...

Page 1391: ...ting a server interface for reference namespace Companion specifications and referenced namespaces A series of OPC UA object types as well as additional definitions are defined in a companion specification These object types are each defined in namespaces so that the names of the object types type definitions are unique To use a companion specification in your project create instances of object ty...

Page 1392: ...I http www euromap org euromap83 http www euromap org euromap77 The following description shows you how to proceed Creating a server interface for a reference namespace To create a server interface for a namespace proceed as follows 1 Select the CPU that you want to use as an OPC UA server 2 Click OPC UA communication Server interfaces 3 Double click Add new server interface STEP 7 TIA now display...

Page 1393: ...e references If a companion specification uses additional namespaces add a new server interface for each namespace Add additional server interfaces for Euromap77 For Euromap 77 you still need the following namespaces http www euromap org euromap83 http www euromap org euromap77 First add a server interface for the namespace http www euromap org euromap83 This namespace contains basic definitions f...

Page 1394: ...dd more FB instances or UDT usages or if you add existing instances delete you do not need to worry about adapting the server interface STEP 7 automatically adjusts the server interface when compiling the program Example You create a function block FB in the user program of the CPU and define in the Static area of the interface of the FB the parameters that form the memory of the FB The instances ...

Page 1395: ...ing figure shows the assignment of the elements from the user program of the CPU to the elements of the OPC UA server interface The order of the elements does not have to match Automatic generation of the OPC UA server instances in the server interface Principle The figure below shows the compilation of the project The instances of the user program are also generated in the server interface ...

Page 1396: ...B elements in the Static area of an FB interface can be mapped to OPC UA type descriptions When mapping the data types OPC UA elements from the same FB interface or from the same UDT must always be selected for an object Mapping from different FBs or UDTs to an object is not permitted Requirement The FB types used defined in the Static area of an FB must be configured as Accessible for OPC UA The ...

Page 1397: ...of the editor in the Mapping of local data area the option Generate OPC UA nodes based on the local data mapping is enabled If not enable the option now Edit the Interface name field to do this click on the three dots on the right edge of the field Select an existing server interface or create a new server interface Add button When adding a new server interface is created If you select an existing...

Page 1398: ...check The consistency check Consistency check button of the editor also checks the mapping of the data types and updates the display of the data types in the corresponding column of the editor 9 3 4 9 Notes on configuration limits when using server interfaces When you use OPC UA server interfaces you must comply with limits for the following objects in line with the S7 1500 CPU performance class N...

Page 1399: ...rver interfaces Technical specification value CPU 1510SP F CPU 1511 C F T TF CPU 1512C CPU 1512SP F CPU 1513 F CPU 1505 S SP SP F SP T SP TF CPU 1515 F T TF CPU 1515 SP PC F T TF CPU 1516 F T TF CPU 1507S F CPU 1517 F T TF CPU 1518 F Use of imported companion specifications information models Maximum number of OPC UA server interfaces Companion specification type Reference namespace type Server in...

Page 1400: ...ciple operates like a know how protected function block that is called by an external OPC UA client in runtime The OPC UA client only sees the defined inputs and outputs The content of the function block the method or algorithm remains hidden to the external OPC UA client The OPC UA client receives feedback on successful execution and values returned by the function block method or an error messag...

Page 1401: ... example access to other function blocks or global data blocks If the server method uses input parameters these parameters are available to you This section of the server method should only be executed if an OPC UA client has called the server method After successful execution of the method you set the output parameters of the server method if the method has output parameters 3 Responding to serve...

Page 1402: ...hod Cool If the server method has not been called program execution returns directly to the cyclic user program over and The CPU resumes the cyclic user program after Cool1 If the server method has been called this information is returned to the server method Cool over The actual functionality is now executed in the Cool server method see Method Functionality in the graphic The server method then ...

Page 1403: ... been called called Synchronous call of the instruction OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre as a multi instance stating the storage area for the input data from the OPC UA server The return value indicates whether or not the method has been called by the OPC UA client Check whether the method has been completed or is still active busy D Check whether the method has been completed If it has the output data of t...

Page 1404: ...f the data types You can also use the listed data types for example as elements of structures arrays UDTs for input and output parameters of self created server methods UAMethod_InParameters and UAMethod_OutParameters SIMATIC data type OPC UA data type BOOL Boolean SINT SByte INT Int16 DINT Int32 LINT Int64 USINT Byte UINT UInt16 UDINT UInt32 ULINT UInt64 REAL Float LREAL Double LDT DateTime WSTRI...

Page 1405: ...method instances OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost instructions 20 50 100 Maximum number of arguments per method More than the specified number of arguments can be configured and loaded into the CPU but an OPC UA client can not call the method 20 20 20 Error message when exceeded If the maximum number of server methods is exceeded the OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre or OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost ...

Page 1406: ...000 9 OPC Unified Architecture Part 9 Alarms Conditions specification Controller alarms in SIMATIC The OPC UA server of the S7 1500 CPUs supports the controller alarms listed below which are available to S7 1500 CPUs You configure or program these alarms in the usual way without the need to consider additional rules for use of these alarms by OPC UA clients The added benefit of OPC UA Alarms and C...

Page 1407: ...d additional information for details You can find the setting options for program alarms in the alarm editor double click on PLC supervisions and alarms in the project tree select the Alarms tab For the S7 1500 CPU you set here via the alarm class whether an alarm needs to be acknowledged or not In addition to the acknowledgment behavior when creating a new alarm class you define the default prior...

Page 1408: ...ed and went out you need to click the Alarm archive button The three events that belong to this alarm are listed one after another only in this view You can only find the current state in the Current alarms view Info reports alarms with the Information only property are only displayed in the Alarm archive view Because these alarms are only triggered once and not buffered they do not appear in the ...

Page 1409: ...eteness we also mention that further type definitions are contained in the server address space for this purpose as nodes under Types Type definitions under BaseEventType and ConditionType ensure that the fields used by SIMATIC alarms are also provided in the OPC UA server After the activation of OPC UA Alarms and Conditions CPU properties in the hardware configuration the OPC UA address space of ...

Page 1410: ...ceipt of program alarms Details about the OPC UA model for Alarms and Conditions are given in the next selection especially for the Overloads node you can find more information here Handling memory limits for OPC UA Alarms and Conditions Page 301 Additional information on the alarm types The concepts and configuration options for controller alarms are not described further here For information on ...

Page 1411: ...nt types of Conditions and Alarms which are discussed in the next section The OPC UA specification defines for the BaseEventType and for derived EventTypes which properties fields of an event are mandatory and which are optional The following figure shows the hierarchical structure of BaseEventType The following sections show how specialized EventTypes are derived from the root of the derivation h...

Page 1412: ... are not used by the OPC UA server of the CPU are omitted You can also find a general description of the fields in the specification OPC 10000 5 OPC Unified Architecture Part 5 Information Model Release 1 04 BrowsePath DataType Explanations EventId ByteString Unique Event ID of the event EventType NodeId Node ID of the event type Time UtcTime Time stamp of the event Event occurrence ReceiveTime Ut...

Page 1413: ...nt8 Acknowledgment group for alarms that are acknowledged together Assignment of Priority SIMATIC Severity OPC UA The following table shows how the 17 priorities that you can assign to alarms in the SIMATIC environment are mapped to the 1000 level Severity with the OPC UA server of the S7 1500 CPU This assignment depends on the manufacturer Different assignments may apply to other devices OPC Rang...

Page 1414: ...ient to completely map the characteristics of SIMATIC alarms in the OPC UA server From the ConditionType which is derived from the BaseEventType OPC UA defines further derived event types such as AcknowledgeableConditionType and AlarmConditionType AcknowledgeableConditionType supplements the properties of ConditionType with the Acknowledgeable characteristic AckedState AlarmConditionType thus adds...

Page 1415: ...are omitted You can also find a description of the fields in the specification OPC 10000 9 OPC Unified Architecture Part 9 Alarms Conditions Release 1 04 BrowsePath DataType Explanations ConditionClassId NodeId Node IDs for SystemConditionClassType ProcessConditionClassType or BaseCondi tionClassType are possible ConditionClassName LocalizedText Display name of the ConditionClassId Retain Boolean ...

Page 1416: ...er events only become visible in the address space when the option is activated 3 If required also activate the option Allow message acknowledgment by OPC UA client In this case every connected OPC UA client can acknowledge an alarm requiring acknowledgment with the Acknowledge method Recommendation Activate diagnostics Requests of a remote OPC UA client failed When the OPC UA server cannot alloca...

Page 1417: ...wse name of the corresponding field OPC UA also defines so called Where Clauses A Where Clause in the event filter is used to further limit the number of events that are supplied by the OPC UA server for the selected object for example by filtering to a severity range Example client UaExpert The example of the UaExpert OPC UA client shows how events of an OPC UA server can be received via a subscr...

Page 1418: ...nding alarms are not lost after a server restart The OPC UA server supports the ConditionRefresh method with which it makes the current state of the system available to the OPC UA client for example after download of a new data block requires server restart and connection re establishment 9 3 6 6 Methods for OPC UA Alarms and Conditions The OPC UA specification Part 9 OPC 10000 9 Alarms Conditions...

Page 1419: ...on itored items of the subscription are updated Synchronization of pending alarm objects from the OPC UA server of the CPU is indicated e g in the following situa tions Connecting for the first time or resuming the connection after interrupting the communication Screen change on an operator screen of an HMI device AddComment Method for adding comments to alarm objects Calling the Acknowledge and A...

Page 1420: ...nchAlreadyAcked Acknowledgment has already been made BadNodeIdUnknown Method was called with the wrong ConditionId see notes on ObjectId BadEventIdUnknown Method was called with the wrong EventId ConditionRefresh The ConditionRefresh method MethodId i 3875 has the following parameters Parameter Data type Description in SubscriptionId Uint32 SubscriptionId of the subscription to be updat ed Method ...

Page 1421: ...larms object was modified When the AddComment method is called Time and Comment SourceTimestamp are identical Special features of Alarms and Conditions comments for the OPC UA server of the CPU The AddComment method MethodId i 9029 has the following parameters Parameter Data type Description in EventId ByteString EventId identifies the event notification for which a state was reported in comment L...

Page 1422: ...ts e g after a server restart the comment no longer exists either The corresponding Comment and Comment SourceTimestamp event fields are then reset zero The Time event field is then set as if the method call AddComment did not exist Example If you comment on an unacknowledged Alarms object the Time event field receives the time of this comment change After a server restart the Time event field doe...

Page 1423: ...ms and Conditions system OutstandingProgramAlarms 0 and Number of alarms in the OPC UA Alarms and Conditions system Hysteresis cleaned maximum value for OPC UA alarms MaxAlarmsInQueue OverloadHysteresis Alarms that are not available in the OPC UA Alarms and Conditions system due to the overload situation are buff ered by the CPU as OutstandingAlarms When an OPC UA client executes the ConditionRefr...

Page 1424: ...ditions and thus to the connected OPC UA clients This fact influences e g statistical evaluations of alarm progressions To avoid a high alarm frequency for the Overloads Alarm if the number of alarms oscillates around the maximum value the limit for triggering the alarm is higher than the limit for canceling this alarm The value for this difference is displayed in the OverloadHysteresis node Examp...

Page 1425: ...tics Sessions Diagnostics Subscriptions Diagnostics In the address space of the server for example the following nodes are available with diagnostic information ServerDiagnosticsSummary Server diagnostics summary CurrentSessionCount Number of active sessions SecurityRejectedSessionCount Number of sessions rejected due to mismatching end point security settings between client and server SessionsDia...

Page 1426: ...e also shows the properties of the client application accessing the server within the session Figure 9 51 Sessions diagnostics with the properties of the client application Diagnostics of the connection between client and server To diagnose the status of the connection during program runtime in the client use the following instruction OPC_UA_ConnectionGetStatus Read connection status ...

Page 1427: ... service request from a partner client Requirement The Change of OPC UA server status option is selected OPC UA Server Diagnostics in the OPC UA properties of the CPU Note If this option is selected the CPU also automatically enters the lowest set security policy into the diagnostic buffer after startup Examples If the OPC UA server of the CPU shuts down due to a download process and then starts w...

Page 1428: ...ividual states that the OPC UA server can assume are explained below Server states Explanation Shutdown Initial status After POWER ON After loading the hardware configuration with activated or deactivated OPC UA server After loading OPC UA relevant data Starting OPC UA address space in server is initialized Running OPC UA server running normal productive state for OPC UA server Failed Error state ...

Page 1429: ...curity events If the CPU diagnostics detects a security event during the OPC UA communication it can enter it in the diagnostic buffer Requirements S7 1500 CPUs as of firmware version 2 8 The Check for security events option is activated properties of the CPU OPC UA Server Diagnostics Security events detected in diagnostics S7 1500 CPUs perform diagnostics on the following OPC UA relevant security...

Page 1430: ...oes not exist or if a resource is requested that does not exist In this case the corresponding service that caused the fault is entered in the diagnostic buffer and the corresponding session ID is also entered Service fault If a service itself fails the server returns a ServiceFault In this case the status code Bad and the according session ID are entered in the diagnostics buffer Example of limit...

Page 1431: ...ective client application converts the requests into the service requests defined in OPC UA The names of these services are defined and grouped according to their use see also opcfoundation org In the case of an incorrect use you can find precisely these names of the services together with the corresponding session ID in the diagnostic buffer as the service that caused the error The services avail...

Page 1432: ...as of firmware version V2 8 are able to create an entry in the diagnostic buffer at state changes of a subscription The diagnostic buffer displays the new state exception KeepAlive Requirement In the OPC UA properties of the CPU the option Subscriptions Change of status OPC UA Server Diagnostics is selected Example An OPC UA client is connected to an S7 1500 CPU as OPC UA server and generates a su...

Page 1433: ...active Closed Client has deleted the subscription KeepAlive Status if the monitored items do not change over a long period of time These state transitions are not entered in the diagnostic buffer Late Client has generated a subscription with minimal sampling and publishing inter vals The amount of monitored items is not transmitted to the client during this time Client no longer transmits requests...

Page 1434: ...completed and a publishing request has been received the server sends the elements to the client Figure 9 55 Error free subscription Subscription with error If there are too many elements in the queue there may be an overload of the communication stack The CPU cannot check all elements in the given sampling interval and must therefore skip the next sampling job In this case the CPU sends the statu...

Page 1435: ...f the CPU OPC UA Server Diagnostics Summarize diagnostics area Example An OPC UA client repeatedly overloads an S7 1500 CPU as OPC UA server with a sampling rate that the server cannot handle overload The Summarize diagnostics in case of high message volume setting is activated A message appears in the diagnostics buffer for this diagnostic option It states that the sampling rate cannot be reached...

Page 1436: ...ms depending on the selected monitoring time and duration of the diagnostic surge Diagnostic results of a group of a type for example Sampling rate could not be reached Interval monitoring time When a diagnostic event occurs the first time or reoccurs the monitoring time is started or restarted Single alarms The first three diagnostic events from the same group are entered in the diag nostics buff...

Page 1437: ...en OPC UA client for IEC61131 3 Convenient editors in STEP 7 For the parameter assignment of the instructions for OPC UA clients a convenient editor is available in the TIA Portal the connection parameter assignment Page 218 As of Version 15 1 STEP 7 also features an editor for client interfaces Page 322 This section describes how you work with these editors First you will be shown how to create a...

Page 1438: ...PC UA client instructions you are able to control communication for the following tasks with the S7 1500 CPU as an OPC UA client Read write tags of the OPC UA server Call methods in the OPC UA server Optional instructions can be used to determine the following information The status of the connection between the OPC UA client and OPC UA server Node IDs of nodes with known hierarchy of the address ...

Page 1439: ... inserted instruction for request ing for example the NodeIDs of nodes of the OPC UA server You can determine the connection status between the establishment and termination of the connection in parallel with other instructions Instructions for clean up Figure 9 60 Run sequence of optional instructions Convenient editors in STEP 7 The OPC UA client instructions are described in detail in the refer...

Page 1440: ... connection terminations Registered Read Registered Write Registered Method Call 9 4 3 Number of client instructions that can be used simultaneously SIMATIC error codes for OPC UA client instructions The following limits apply to the simultaneous use of OPC UA client instructions up to date technical specifications of the CPUs can be found on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww e...

Page 1441: ... 4 10 40 OPC_UA_ConnectionGetStatus 4 10 40 maximum 1 per connection Maximum number of usable OPC UA client interfaces If you create OPC UA client interfaces using the connection parameter assignment the number of client interfaces is limited to 40 Create the OPC UA client interfaces by double clicking the Add new client interface symbol in the project tree of the OPC UA communication area The max...

Page 1442: ...fication number of the blank The tag has the data type Int Temperature This tag contains temperature values recorded during the production of the blank The tag is an array with elements of the Real data type In addition this CPU provides the following writable tag ProductionEnabled The tag is set by the OPC UA client The tag has the data type BOOL If the value is set to TRUE the production line is...

Page 1443: ...ition the client interface contains all methods that the OPC UA server provides and that you want to call with your user program that acts as an OPC UA client If you create a client interface STEP 7 also creates data blocks for the parameter assignment of the connection to the OPC UA server from which you want to read data or to which you want to write data Maximum number of client interfaces You ...

Page 1444: ... You configure a connection in the properties of the client interface see Example configuration for OPC UA Page 320 Client_Interface_1_Data A data block for the PLC tags that you want to read or write from an OPC UA server as well as for methods that you want to call in the OPC UA server You use this data block in your user program This data block is currently still empty 5 Select a descriptive na...

Page 1445: ...rver interface for companion specification Page 253 8 Create a read list in this client interface To do this follow these steps Click Add new read list in the left section of the editor STEP 7 adds a new list named ReadList_1 For the example change the name to ReadListProduct Now add the new read list of the PLC tags that you want to read from the OPC UA server In the example the NewProduct and Pr...

Page 1446: ...st Data_for_OPC_UA_Clients In addition the object contains the tag Temperature Delete the Temperature tag from the read list Since they should not be read in the example Change the name of the read list in ReadListProduct The following figure shows the content of the read list Figure 9 64 Read list Note Read and write lists do not support all node types The OPC UA client of the S7 1500 CPU does no...

Page 1447: ...g to the write list ProductionEnabled Select the Tag of right field of the editor OPC UA Server interface Drag the tag to the write list in the middle field of the editor Alternative You can also create a new write list by selecting a node of the type Object or Folder in the right field of the editor OPC UA server interface and then dragging to Add new write list in the left field of the editor Th...

Page 1448: ... method list by selecting a method node of the type Object in the right field of the editor OPC UA Server interface and then dragging it to Add new method list in the left field of the editor The new method list then contains the method of the relevant node The following figure shows the content of the method list Figure 9 66 Methods list If you want to call another method of the OPC UA server you...

Page 1449: ...d list node and the node is already used in a programmed block for the method call OPC_UA_MethodCall the compilation of the project leads to consistency errors During the compilation the UDTs of the method are generated with the changed name The references to the method used in the program are then no longer correct To correct the consistency errors you can either undo the name change of the metho...

Page 1450: ... OPC UA client In addition the data block contains general default values for parameter assignment of the connection to an OPC UA server If you are working with connection parameter assignment this data block will be filled ProductionLine_Data A data block for the PLC tags that you have entered in the client interface editor In the example this data block is called Productionline_Data The figure b...

Page 1451: ...eck whether a read value is valid Check whether the value in Productionline_Data ReadListProduct NodeStatusList 1 is equal to 0 Optional Check when this value was sent from the OPC UA server This value is in Productionline_Data Product TimeStamps 1 If no time stamp is requested the communication load is reduced Example Writing the ProductEnabled value Transfer the new values for PLC tags in the ex...

Page 1452: ...rom this list you can jump to the respective error During the consistency check STEP 7 checks Whether all elements that you use in the respective list are also present in the server Do the data types used match For methods Do the number name order and data types of method arguments match 9 4 6 Determine server interface online With STEP 7 TIA Portal you can determine the interface of an OPC UA ser...

Page 1453: ... the example 2 Select the client interface in the example OPC UA Communication Client interfaces Productionline If no client interface has been created double click Add new client interface 3 Double click the selected client interface The editor for client interfaces is displayed Figure 9 68 Editor for client interface 4 In the left section of the editor click Add new read list Add new write list ...

Page 1454: ...necting after a disconnection select the Connect to Online Server button next to the Online selection field In the top right enter the IP address of the OPC UA server whose server interface you want to determine online 7 Click Find selected server STEP 7 establishes a connection to the OPC UA server and determines all security settings server endpoints that the server holds in readiness STEP 7 dis...

Page 1455: ...cted a secure end point then keep the default None 10 How do you want log on If you want to log onto the OPC UA server as guest then apply the default with User authentication If you want to log on with user name and password select User name and password Use the user name and password which was stored during the configuration of the OPC UA server in the properties of the CPU under General OPC UA ...

Page 1456: ...angle next to Objects STEP 7 now also displays the level below Objects 13 Click on the small black triangle next to Productionline STEP 7 now also displays the level below Productionline 14 Now open additional lower level folders Figure 9 71 Online view of OPC UA server interface See also Mapping of data types Page 169 Creating client interfaces Page 322 ...

Page 1457: ...fferently regarding the languages it offers In the XML file these are the following fields that can be prepared for different languages Display name Description Example for multilingual texts in an OPC UA XML file In the XML file below the display name and the description for example are entered with a default text and multiple localizable texts Default text is the first entry without localization...

Page 1458: ...mn If no default text is defined either but a text in any other language exists the DisplayName text is displayed in the first available language This rule does not apply to description texts If none of the conditions listed above is met no text is displayed Figure 9 73 Display for multilingual texts When you change the editing language the multilingual text in the imported interface will also cha...

Page 1459: ...and write lists connection parameterization and assign the PLC data types to the imported or online determined address model of the server the read and write accesses to structures operate trouble free in runtime The configuration by means of client interface automatically ensures that the sequence and the data type of the structural elements are coordinated on client and server side Recommendatio...

Page 1460: ... server do not match this rule violation will possibly not generate any error during compilation and also not in runtime Make sure not to change the configured assignments for structures in runtime If required reconfigure the assignment in the read and write lists 9 4 9 Using connection parameter assignment 9 4 9 1 Creating and configuring connections With the instructions for OPC UA clients you c...

Page 1461: ...n tab and set the connection to the OPC UA server Setting the connection parameters 1 Select a descriptive name for the session For the example select the name OPC UA Connection to ProductionLine 2 In the Address field enter the IP address of the OPC UA server to which your user program that operates as an OPC UA client is to establish a connection In the example configuration the CPU that control...

Page 1462: ... client interface The entry then consists of the components OPC Schematic Prefix IP address Port number and Server path for example opc tcp 192 168 0 10 4840 example path The following figure shows the entry of the IP address for the OPC UA server Figure 9 74 Connection parameters 4 If the OPC UA server is not using the standard port 4840 you must insert the port number here For example enter the ...

Page 1463: ...ulations can thus be detected Sign Encrypt OPC UA server and OPC UA client sign and encrypt the data transmission all messages Security policy Set the encryption techniques for the signing and encryption of messages The following settings are possible No security Basic128Rsa15 Basic256 Basic256Sha256 To configure a secure connection you must observe the following items A certificate is required fo...

Page 1464: ... area of the Configuration tab you can for example influence the language of the texts returned by the server as follows In the Languages area enter a number of languages that the server transfers to the client during connection setup The language or the local ID language code associated with it that you enter in the first line is the language preferred by the client If the server can provide the ...

Page 1465: ...here Creating self signed certificates Page 178 Certificate of the OPC UA client of the S7 1500 CPU A secure connection between the OPC UA server and an OPC UA client is only established if the server classifies the certificate of the client as trusted Therefore you have to make the client certificate known to the server The following sections describe how you can initially generate a certificate ...

Page 1466: ...uble click Add new in the Device certificates table STEP 7 opens a dialog 5 Click the Add button 6 Select the OPC UA client entry from the Usage list 7 Click OK STEP 7 now shows the client certificate in the Device certificates table 8 If the server is in another project Right click this line and select Export certificate from the shortcut menu 9 Select a directory where you will store the client ...

Page 1467: ...r STEP 7 opens the global certificate manager Click the Device certificates tab Right click in the tab on a free area not on a certificate Select the Import shortcut menu The dialog for importing certificates is displayed Select the client certificate that the server is to trust Click Open to import the certificate The certificate of the client is now contained in the global certificate manager No...

Page 1468: ...e user must prove authorization no anonymous access The OPC UA server checks whether the client user is authorized to access the server Authorization is given by the user name and the correct password These inputs cannot be checked by the client interface which means all values are accepted as being valid Note STEP 7 stores user name and password unencrypted in the data block instance data block R...

Page 1469: ...onnection can be established in runtime S7 1500 as OPC UA client OPC UA server which supports no encryption of authentication data when No Security none is set as security policy See also Users and roles with OPC UA function rights Page 238 9 4 9 4 Using a configured connection Introduction This section shows you how to use a configured connection for OPC UA instructions third step Requirements Yo...

Page 1470: ...odeReleaseHandleList instruction can be omitted if OPC_UA_Disconnect is called immediately afterwards Figure 9 75 Call sequence for write and read operations STEP 7 TIA Portal automatically supplies the parameters of these instructions if you are using a client interface and a configured connection to an OPC UA server The procedure is shown in the following section Using a client interface and con...

Page 1471: ...mming language uses the following display The editor for the Ladder Logic LAD programming language displays the instruction similarly 4 Click the toolbox symbol in the editor for FBD or LAD The symbol is located in the heading of the instruction If you are using the editor for STL or SCL Click the small green rectangle below the first character of the instance name The example Page 320 uses OPC_UA...

Page 1472: ...ructions Communication OPC UA in the TIA Portal Select the Multi instance call option Click the toolbox symbol LAD and FBD or the small green box below the instance name STL and SCL if the editor is not already open Select the client interface that you want to use ProductionLine in the example STEP 7 now automatically interconnects all parameters of the OPC_UA_NamespaceGetIndexList instruction 7 U...

Page 1473: ...n Manual 05 2021 A5E03735815 AJ STEP 7 now automatically interconnects all parameters of the OPC_UA_NodeGetHandleList instruction If you want to write data to an OPC UA server select the write list you want to use under Data access Read Writelist the ProductionStatus write list in the example ...

Page 1474: ... server under Data access Writelist ProductionStatus write list in the example 9 If you use different read lists or write lists as program controlled lists in your user program move the UA_NodeReleaseHandleList instruction to the program editor using drag and drop operation Select the client interface that you want to use Now select a read list or write list that you want to release Only release r...

Page 1475: ...omatically supplies the parameters if you are using a client interface and a configured connection to an OPC UA server OPC_UA_Connect OPC_UA_NamespaceGetIndexList OPC_UA_NodeGetHandleList OPC_UA_MethodGetHandleList OPC_UA_MethodReleaseHandleList OPC_UA_ReadList OPC_UA_WriteList OPC_UA_MethodCall OPC_UA_NodeReleaseHandleList OPC_UA_Disconnect 9 5 Tips and recommendations ...

Page 1476: ...tive CPU The information is based on a sampling publishing interval of 1 second You can find additional information in the FAQ 109755846 https support industry siemens com cs us en view 109755846 Select the same sampling and publishing intervals for the OPC UA client and for the OPC UA server Avoid arrays and structures as elements of subscriptions if the process allows Reason If even one value of...

Page 1477: ...to improved performance when loading in RUN Tip Using the detailed object display in the TIA Portal you can easily mark the non OPC UA relevant data blocks as not accessible from OPC UA Consistent transfer of data beyond the limits of simple data types is only possible with OPC UA methods If you use other OPC UA functions Subscriptions Read Write you must ensure data consistency in the application...

Page 1478: ...e project When you create the master copy in a global library it can be used in different projects The OPC UA capable CPUs differentiate between 3 interface types of the OPC UA server Standard OPC UA server interface Companion specification interface Namespace reference When adding the OPC UA interface in the project tree under OPC UA Communication each interface type gets its own symbol The same ...

Page 1479: ...ou want to create as master copies 2 Right click on the Master copies folder or any of its subfolders in the library 3 In the shortcut menu select Paste as a single master copy command If multiple interfaces are added to a master copy from the OPC UA server or OPC UA client the label and the symbol in the library are changed accordingly A symbol with is displayed instead of the simple symbol Figur...

Page 1480: ...tion and versatility make IT supported automation an economical solution for your requirements Functional expansions of the communication options of the S7 1500 CPUs in this direction give you more freedom for the possible uses of your system or machine You use IT technology to automate efficiently With the introduction of DHCP and the expansions of DNS for S7 1500 CPU as of firmware version V2 9 ...

Page 1481: ...n S7 1500 CPU you can set that address parameters such as the IP address with subnet mask can be got from a DHCPv4 server hereinafter DHCP server Figure 10 1 Overview of DHCP Areas of application Use of the S7 1500 CPU in a managed IT environment Adding new devices in a modular manufacturing structure ...

Page 1482: ...P client identifies itself to the DHCP server with the configured client ID or with its MAC ad dress DHCP Offer The DHCP server offers the DHCP client IP address parameters IPv4 address subnet mask optional default router and if necessary further data options DHCP Request The DHCPclient requests the IP address parameters and options offered in the DHCP offer The DHCP client of the S7 1500 CPU alwa...

Page 1483: ...parameters The CPU has an internal time monitoring for the lease time At certain times when the lease time expires the CPU has the option of extending the lease time Renewal Half of the lease time has expired The CPU contacts the original DHCP server and asks for an extension of the lease time The original DHCP server can either confirm the existing lease time or assign a new lease time With a new...

Page 1484: ...PC UA Open User Communication In the case of dynamic IP address assignment by the DHCP server unique addressing is always possible through the DNS name Certificates of the S7 1500 CPU may contain the complete name for example for OPC UA communication web server secure communication Only if you configure host name and domain for the S7 1500 CPU in STEP 7 then the complete name is entered in the dev...

Page 1485: ... CPU Figure 10 3 Obtain host and domain name via DHCP For this configuration you must first activate the host name and domain configuration in STEP 7 You then configure that the host and domain name are obtained via DHCP Obtain host and domain name via DHCP Page 371 Local assignment of host name and domain You can configure the host name and domain in STEP 7 or assign them in the user program Note...

Page 1486: ... For this configuration you must first activate the host name and domain configuration in STEP 7 You then configure the host name and domain in STEP 7 Central assignment of the domain and local assignment of host name You configure in STEP 7 that the CPU gets the domain via DHCP You can configure the host name in STEP 7 or assign it via the user program In the following configuration the host name...

Page 1487: ...uration Host and domain name Host and domain name configuration Host name 3 For Host name configuration select Set host name in the project from the drop down list 4 Enter the host name for Host name Enter your desired host name If you select the Host name identical to device name check box STEP 7 automatically assigns the device name as the host name Only if you have configured the host and domai...

Page 1488: ...STEP 7 2 In the properties of the CPU navigate to Advanced configuration Host and domain name Host and domain name configuration Domain 3 Under Hostname configuration select Set domain directly on the device for example PLC program display in the drop down list 4 Call the instruction CommConfig in the user program The DATA parameter must point to a UDT Conf_Domainname where the domain name is spec...

Page 1489: ...10 4 Configuring the client ID The client ID The S7 1500 CPU always identifies itself to a DHCP server with the client ID DHCP option 61 The client ID is interface specific The S7 1500 CPU supports the following two operating modes with regard to the client ID Use the MAC address as the client ID The MAC address of the CPU is used as the client ID for the DHCP client Note if you execute a device e...

Page 1490: ...your client ID You can also leave the field blank In this case you must select the Client ID can be changed at runtime check box 5 In order to make the user defined client ID adaptable during runtime select the Client ID can be changed during runtime check box Adapting the client ID during runtime You can use the CommConfig instruction to adapt the client ID via the user program Call the instructi...

Page 1491: ... select Set DNS server remotely e g DHCP in the drop down list Result If the DHCP server supplies addresses from DNS servers as option the CPU uses up to 4 addresses 10 6 Get addresses of the NTP servers via DHCP Requirements You have activated the address assignment via DHCP for at least one interface of the S7 1500 CPU Obtaining addresses from NTP servers via DHCP To obtain the addresses of up t...

Page 1492: ... navigate to Advanced configuration Host and domain name Host and domain name configuration Host name 3 For Host name configuration select Set host name remotely e g DHCP in the drop down list Result If the DHCP server supplies a host name as option the CPU uses this host name Obtaining a domain via DHCP To obtain the domain via DHCP follow these steps 1 Select the S7 1500 CPU in STEP 7 2 In the p...

Page 1493: ...nets Simple access from the control level to the field level for con figuration and parameter as signment of devices e g via PDM or Web browser Simplified integration of devic es for remote access e g for diagnostics during remote maintenance or firmware up date IP forwarding Page 378 Data record routing Data can be sent over PROFINET from an engineering station to field devices via multiple netwo...

Page 1494: ...S7 subnets the following order must be kept to when downloading First download the hardware configuration to the CPU s directly connected to the same S7 subnet as the PG PC then download one by one the CPUs of the S7 subnets beyond this starting with the nearest S7 subnet through to the S7 subnet furthest away The PG PC you want to use to establish a connection via a S7 router must be assigned to ...

Page 1495: ...ions With the PG PC you can reach devices beyond S7 subnets for example to do the following Download user programs Download a hardware configuration Execute test and diagnostics functions In the following figure CPU 1 is the S7 router between S7 subnet 1 and S7 subnet 2 Figure 11 1 S7 routing PROFINET PROFINET ...

Page 1496: ... subnet 2 CPU 2 is the S7 router between S7 subnet 2 and S7 subnet 3 Figure 11 2 S7 routing PROFINET PROFIBUS S7 routing for HMI connections You have the option of setting up an S7 connection from an HMI to a CPU via different subnets PROFIBUS and PROFINET or Industrial Ethernet In the following figure CPU 1 is the S7 router between S7 subnet 1 and S7 subnet 2 Figure 11 3 S7 routing via HMI connec...

Page 1497: ...e is described based on examples in the section S7 communication Page 138 Figure 11 4 S7 routing via CPU CPU communication Using S7 routing For the CPU select the PG PC interface and the S7 subnet in the Go online dialog of STEP 7 S7 routing is performed automatically Number of connections for S7 routing The number of connections available for S7 routing in the S7 routers CPUs CMs or CPs can be fo...

Page 1498: ...sing TeleService Additional information The allocation of connection resources with S7 routing is described in the section Allocation of connection resources Page 395 You can find more information on setting up TeleService in the STEP 7 online help You can find more information on S7 routing and TeleService adapters when you search the Internet using the following links Device manual Industrial So...

Page 1499: ...d IP subnets or to a configured router The following figure shows how a programming device accesses data of an HMI device Programming device and HMI device are located in different IP subnets The IP subnets are connected to the two interfaces X1 and X2 of the CPU Figure 11 6 Access of a programming device to an HMI via IP forwarding Areas of application Easy access from the control level to the fi...

Page 1500: ...U forwards received IP packets that are not addressed to itself How the CPU forwards the IP packets is defined in its internal IP route table The CPU automatically creates the IP route table from the following information of the loaded hardware configuration IP configuration of the Ethernet interfaces Configured router Example of a configuration with IP forwarding The following figure shows a samp...

Page 1501: ...ommunication 380 Function Manual 05 2021 A5E03735815 AJ For the PC the IP router the IO device and the HMI device the IP addresses of a standard gateway or the corresponding routes are also entered Figure 11 8 Sample configuration ...

Page 1502: ...ubnet of the HMI device both in the PC and in the IP router In the HMI device you configure the IP address of the CPU interface X1 as the standard gateway In a Windows computer for example you set up an additional IP route from the command prompt using the command route add destination IP subnet mask subnet mask gateway However you need certain access rights for this For this example enter the fol...

Page 1503: ...e reached via exactly one configurable router Because the S7 1500 CPU does not support additional IP routes you cannot build bi directional IP router cascades In the following configuration you can configure either Router 1 or Router 2 in the CPU Router 1 is configured as an example In this case you cannot configure Router 2 IP communication between the PC and the HMI device is not possible becaus...

Page 1504: ...ly reach devices in the IP subnet of interface X3 via interfaces X1 and X2 but also C C Runtime From the C C Runtime of the CPU 1518 4 PN DP MFP you reach all devices in the IP subnets of the interfaces X1 X2 and X3 Conditions IP forwarding is enabled for the CPU 1518 4 PN DP MFP The IP address of C C Runtime and the IP address of interface X3 are located in the same IP subnet The routes to the IP...

Page 1505: ... the CPU The CPU accesses the devices in the remote light green IP subnet A via the router The Access to PLC via communication module function is enabled for the CP 1543 in the CPU The CPU reaches all devices within the IP subnet D via W1 interface If IP forwarding is enabled in the CPU then a device from IP subnet A can access any device within IP subnets B C and D close to the CPU Protect your a...

Page 1506: ...tworks Since the engineering station addresses the field devices using standardized records and these records are routed via S7 devices the term data record routing is used to refer to this type of routing The data sent using data record routing include the parameter assignments for the participating field devices slaves and device specific information e g setpoint values limit values Data record ...

Page 1507: ...t automation siemens com WW view en 87611392 The figure below shows an example configuration with the data record routing with PCT Figure 11 13 Example configuration for data record routing with PCT Additional information The differences that exist between normal routing and data record routing are described in this FAQ https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 7000978 Whether or not the CP...

Page 1508: ...al interface is not a fully diagnosable interface with the familiar properties of conventional interfaces The virtual interface is not displayed in the graphical views because the internal connection via the backplane bus does not represent an S7 subnet and does not have any ports A physical connection by means of a network cable therefore cannot be established The IP address of the virtual interf...

Page 1509: ... support this function because R H CPUs do not support CPs Configuration of the virtual interface W1 In the properties of an S7 1500 CPU as of firmware V2 8 you can assign a plugged communication module to the virtual interface W1 under Advanced Configuration Access to PLC via communication module You can then use this for external access to the CPU If no CPs are plugged in or the plugged CPs do n...

Page 1510: ... configured and loaded IP address parameters of the virtual interface via display T_CONFIG instruction or online the loaded configuration is active again after the CPU restarts Configuration changes on the CP A change of the assigned communication module may have an effect on the configuration of the virtual interface In the properties of the CPU Assignment of a different CP The configuration is u...

Page 1511: ...over the virtual interface This means the security functions of the communication module cannot protect the data traffic via the virtual interface NOTICE Connecting to non secure networks If you connect the CP to a non secure network it is absolutely necessary to connect an additional firewall between the CP and the non secure network For example use the security modules SCALANCE S602 V3 and SCALA...

Page 1512: ...rmined by the CPU Reserved connection resources Each CPU has reserved connection resources for PG HMI and Web server communication This ensures for example that a PG can always establish at least one online connection with the CPU regardless of how many other communications services are already using connection resources Dynamic connection resources In addition dynamic resources exist The differen...

Page 1513: ...tation Available connection resources of the station of which A Reserved connection resources of the station A B Connection resources of CPU 1518 C Connection resources of communications module CM 1542 1 D Connection resources of communications processor CP 1543 1 Maximum communications resources of the station using the example of a configuration from CPU 1518 CM 1542 1 and CP 1543 1 Figure 12 1 ...

Page 1514: ...32 40 84 128 32 64 Additional connection re sources CM 1542 1 64 Additional connection re sources CP 1543 1 118 Additional connection re sources CM 1542 5 40 Additional connection re sources CP 1542 5 16 The number of connection resources that a CPU or a communication module supports is specified in the device manuals in the Technical Specifications Example You have configured a CPU 1516 3 PN DP w...

Page 1515: ...ection resources are reserved for stations with S7 1500 CPU ET 200SP CPU and ET 200pro CPU based on S7 1500 4 for PG communication required by STEP 7 for example for test and diagnostics functions or downloading to the CPU 4 for HMI communication which are occupied by the first HMI connections configured in STEP 7 2 for communication with the Web server ...

Page 1516: ...communication The Web server connection occupies at least one connection resource in the station The number of occupied connections depends on the browser PG communication The PG connection occupies one connection resource in the station OPC UA client server communication Connection resource allocation for the server see below OPC UA client server communication Connection resource allocation for t...

Page 1517: ...e occupied for HMI communication in the CPU Connection resources for OPC UA client communication Each connection that the OPC UA client of the CPU has established to an OPC UA server occupies a connection resource in the station When establishing and closing an OPC UA connection the OPC UA client temporarily occupies an additional connection resource According to RFC 793 this connection resource i...

Page 1518: ...resources table The number of resources for S7 routing depends on the CPU You will find the resources for S7 routing in the technical specifications of the CPU in Number of S7 routing connections Connection resource for S7 communication Special connection resources for S7 routing Figure 12 3 Connection resources with S7 routing Data record routing also enables transfer of data beyond S7 subnets fr...

Page 1519: ...nload the modified configuration to the CPU PG connection As soon as you have connected the PG to a CPU online in STEP 7 connection resources are occupied Web server As long as you have opened the Web server of the CPU in a browser connection resources are occupied in the CPU OPC UA server Each connection to the OPC UA server of the CPU occupies a connection resource in the station This connection...

Page 1520: ...ies of the CPU Figure 12 4 Example Reserved and available connection resources offline view Station specific connection resources The columns of the station specific connection resources provide information about the used and available connection resources of the station In the example a maximum of 256 station specific connection resources are available for the automation system 10 reserved connec...

Page 1521: ...ion resources from the CPU CP and CM either use a CPU with a higher maximum number of available station specific connection resources or reduce the number of communications connections Module specific connection resources The columns of the module specific connection resources provide information about the use of resources on the CPUs CPs and CMs of an automation system The display is per module a...

Page 1522: ...iew of the Connection resources table in addition to the offline view also contains columns with the connection resources currently being used Thus the online view displays all used connection resources in the automation system regardless of how the connection was set up The Other communication row displays connection resources assigned for communication with external devices The table is updated ...

Page 1523: ...er of connection resources for HMI communication and HTTP communications used offline in the HMI If the maximum number of available connection resources for an HMI device is exceeded a corresponding message is output by STEP 7 Maximum number of used PLC resources per HMI connection This parameter is a factor that is to be multiplied by the number of HMI connections used offline The product is the ...

Page 1524: ...ine view After selecting a CPU in the Devices networks editor of STEP 7 you will see the status of your connections displayed in the online view of the connections table Figure 13 1 Online view of the connections table After selecting the connection in the connections table you obtain detailed diagnostic information in the Connection information tab ...

Page 1525: ...s and fault correction 13 1 Connection diagnostics Communication 404 Function Manual 05 2021 A5E03735815 AJ Connection information tab Connection details Figure 13 2 Diagnostics of connections connection details ...

Page 1526: ...rver of a CPU On the Communication Web page you will find the following information about communication via PROFINET in various tabs Information on the PROFINET interfaces of the CPU for example addresses subnets physical properties Information on the quality of the data transfer for example number of data packets sent received error free Information about the allocation availability of connection...

Page 1527: ...d IP address You can set an emergency address regardless of the protection level of the CPU When do you need an emergency address Your CPU cannot be reached in the following cases The IP address of your PROFINET interface is assigned twice The subnet mask is set incorrectly Requirements You have selected Set IP address in the project for the IP protocol in the device configuration in STEP 7 The CP...

Page 1528: ... Secure PG HMI communication see also Secure PG HMI communication Page 92 SNMP Time of day synchronization via NTP Restrictions for communication with the S7 1500R H redundant system Open User Communication no configured connections No support for Secure Open User Communication Email The S7 1500R H CPUs support only the versions V5 0 of the TMAIL_C instruction Versions from V5 0 are not supported ...

Page 1529: ...u enable the system IP addresses in STEP 7 Advantages of the system IP addresses compared to device IP addresses The communication partner communicates specifically with the primary CPU Communication of the S7 1500R H redundant system via a system IP address still also works in the event of the failure of the primary CPU Applications You use the system IP addresses for the following applications H...

Page 1530: ... with other devices The following figure shows a configuration in which the communication partners are connected via the respective PROFINET interfaces X2 with the CPUs of the redundant system S7 1500R H Open User Communication between a different CPU and the S7 1500R H redundant system HMI communication with the S7 1500R H redundant system Open User Communication between the S7 1500R H redundant ...

Page 1531: ... connects the communication partners with the respective PROFINET interfaces X1 of the two CPUs As the CPU 1513R only has one PROFINET interface connection via the PROFINET ring is the only possibility of communicating via the system IP address X1 Open User Communication between the S7 1500R H redundant system and a different CPU HMI communication with the S7 1500R H redundant system Open User Com...

Page 1532: ...ROFINET devices which are connected to the interfaces X1 of the CPUs communicate via the system IP address X1 PROFINET devices which are connected to the interfaces X2 of the CPUs communicate via the system IP address X2 Open User Communication between the S7 1500R H redundant system and a different CPU HMI communication with the S7 1500R H redundant system Open User Communication between the S7 1...

Page 1533: ... 1500R H redundant system IP packets are forwarded even if one CPU fails In the following figure the PC is connected to the two X2 interfaces of the S7 1500R CPUs Enter the system IP address X2 as gateway in the PC for the route to the HMI device The HMI device is connected to the PROFINET ring of the redundant system S7 1500 via a switch The system IP address X1 is configured as router in the HMI...

Page 1534: ...ies General Ethernet addresses in the area System IP address for switched communication 3 Select the check box Enable the system IP address for switched communication STEP 7 automatically creates a system IP address Figure 14 5 Configure IP address 4 Change the system IP address if necessary 5 If required change the virtual MAC address To do this in Virtual MAC address assign a project wide unique...

Page 1535: ...YNCUP The processing of running instances of the instructions TSEND and TRCV is stopped The block parameter STATUS returns 80C4H temporary communication error 14 3 Response to primary backup switchover Response of communication connections via the system IP address during a primary backup switchover Running instances of the instructions TSEND and TRCV are stopped and return the status 80C4H tempor...

Page 1536: ... S7 1500R H redundant system Each communication connection to the redundant system S7 1500R H occupies connection resources in the S7 1500R H station The S7 1500R H station comprises the hardware setup of both CPUs of the redundant S7 1500R H system Depending on the IP address used a communication connection also uses connection resources in one or both CPUs of the redundant S7 1500R H system The ...

Page 1537: ...play of the connection resources in the inspector window under Diagnostics Connection information STEP 7 always displays the connection resources of the selected CPU and the S7 1500R H station Figure 14 6 Display of the connection resources of the S7 1500R H redundant system in STEP 7 14 5 HMI communication with the redundant system S7 1500R H 14 5 1 HMI connection via the system IP address Requir...

Page 1538: ... the S7 1500R H redundant system are networked together Figure 14 7 Networking an HMI device with the S7 1500R H redundant system 3 In the list of functions click the Connections icon This activates connection mode 4 Using a drag and drop operation draw a line between the HMI device and a CPU of the S7 1500R H redundant system The list Connection partners opens Figure 14 8 Setting up an HMI connec...

Page 1539: ...FINET interface In the event of the failure of this CPU then the HMI connection to this CPU permanently fails Figure 14 9 Properties of the HMI connection Note Automatic setup of HMI connection When you drag and drop a tag from the S7 1500R H redundant system into an HMI screen or into the HMI tag table STEP 7 automatically sets up an HMI connection This HMI connection exists by default between th...

Page 1540: ...C TRCV_C or TCON TSEND TRCV or TCON TUSEND TURCV connection can be terminated via TDISCON ISO on TCP TCON_IP_RFC UDP TCON_IP_v4 TADDR_Param TADDR_SEND_QDN TADDR_RCV_IP Establish connection and send receive data via TSEND_C TRCV_C TUSEND TURCV TRCV connection can be terminated via TDISCON Modbus TCP TCON_IP_v4 TCON_QDN MB_CLIENT MB_RED_CLIENT MB_SERVER MB_RED_SERVER 14 6 1 Setting up the connection...

Page 1541: ...d CPU In the event of the failure of the CPU then the entire communication via the device IP addresses of this CPU fails Setting up a connection via a system IP address The following describes how to establish a connection to another CPU via a system IP address of a PROFINET interface of the redundant S7 1500R H system You set up the connection in the user program of the redundant system S7 1500R ...

Page 1542: ...munication Function Manual 05 2021 A5E03735815 AJ 421 TSEND_C instruction in the user program of the S7 1500R H redundant system To set up a TCP connection to a different CPU follow these steps 1 Create a TSEND_C instruction in the user program Figure 14 11 S7 1500R H TSEND_C instruction 2 Select the TSEND_C instruction ...

Page 1543: ...selected The system IP address of the S7 1500R H redundant system is in Address Figure 14 12 S7 1500R H Assigning parameters to the TSEND_C instruction in STEP 7 4 In Partners under End point select the CPU 1516 3PN DP as the communication partner 5 In Partners under Interface select the PROFINET interface X2 of the CPU 1516 3PN DP 6 In Local under Connection data select the setting new STEP 7 cre...

Page 1544: ...500R H Communication Function Manual 05 2021 A5E03735815 AJ 423 TRCV_C instruction in the user program of the CPU 1516 3PN DP Create a TRCV_C instruction in the user program of the CPU 1516 3PN DP and assign parameters as below Figure 14 13 S7 1500 3PN DP Assigning parameters to the TRCV_C instruction in STEP 7 ...

Page 1545: ...device IP address of one of the two CPUs Select a suitable PROFINET interface of the S7 1500R H redundant system Deselect the Use address of H system check box Figure 14 14 OUC connection via a device IP address Reference You can find additional information on system states in the S7 1500R H https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109754833 system manual See also PROFINET FUNCTION MANUAL ...

Page 1546: ...to IEEE 802 3 layer 2 Bandwidth limitation Global firewall rules All network nodes located in the internal network segment of a CP 1543 1 are protected by its firewall Exception If you access the CPU via the interface of the CP with the Access to PLC via communication module function the firewall does not protect this connection Logging To allow monitoring events can be stored in log files that ca...

Page 1547: ...rview with links to the most important contributions on Industrial Security is available in this FAQ https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 92651441 15 1 Firewall Tasks of the firewall The purpose of the firewall functionality is to protect networks and stations from outside influences and disturbances This means that only certain previously specified communications relations are permitt...

Page 1548: ...iants Local logging With this variant you record the events in local buffers of the CP 1543 1 In the online dialog of the Security Configuration Tool you can then access these recordings visualize them and archive them on the service station Network Syslog With the network Syslog you use a Syslog server in the network This records the events according to the configuration in the log settings 15 3 ...

Page 1549: ...ncorrect With SNMPv3 data can be transferred encrypted To do this select either an authentication method or an authentication and encryption method Possible selection Authentication algorithm none MD5 SHA 1 Encryption algorithm none AES 128 DES You can deactivate the use of SNMP for the CP CPU Deactivate SNMP if the security guidelines in your network do not permit SNMP or if you use your own SNMP...

Page 1550: ...rimary CPU fails Bus Transmission medium that connects several devices together Data transmission can be performed electrically or via optical fibers either in series or in parallel Client Device in a network that requests a service from another device in the network server CM Communications module Communications module Module for communications tasks used in an automation system as an interface e...

Page 1551: ...ertificates are signed by a certificate authority CA The signature of an end entity certificate is checked with the public key of the certificate authority certificate The Subject attribute must not be identical to the Issuer attribute The Subject for example contains the name of a program as with the OPC UA application certificate Issuer is the certificate authority that signed the certificate Th...

Page 1552: ...etwork adapter Electronic circuitry for connecting a computer to an Ethernet network It allows the exchange of data communication within the network FETCH WRITE Server services using TCP IP ISO on TCP and ISO for access to system memory areas of S7 CPUs Access client function is possible from a SIMATIC S5 or a third party device PC FETCH Read data directly WRITE Write data directly Field device De...

Page 1553: ...ieldbus to the CPU IO controller DP master and prepares the data for the I O modules Intermediate CA certificate This is a certificate authority certificate that is signed with the private key of a root certificate authority An intermediate certificate authority signs end entity certificates with its private key The signature of these end entity certificates is verified with the public key of the ...

Page 1554: ...umber is divided into a network part and a host part ISO protocol Communications protocol for message or packet oriented transfer of data in an Ethernet network This protocol is hardware oriented very fast and allows dynamic data lengths The ISO protocol is suitable for medium to large volumes of data ISO on TCP protocol Communications protocol capable of S7 routing for packet oriented transfer of...

Page 1555: ...thernet NTP uses the connectionless UDP transport protocol for the Internet OPC UA OPC Unified Automation is a protocol for communication between machines developed by the OPC Foundation Operating states Operating states describe the behavior of a single CPU at a specific time The CPUs of the SIMATIC standard systems have the STOP STARTUP and RUN operating states The primary CPU of the redundant s...

Page 1556: ...s image output as a signal state to the output modules The CPU then reads the signal states of the input modules into the process image input The CPU then executes the user program PROFIBUS Process Field Bus European Fieldbus standard PROFIBUS address Unique identifier of a device connected to PROFIBUS The PROFIBUS address is sent in the frame to address a device PROFIBUS device Device with at lea...

Page 1557: ...ssed in exactly the same way as the centralized IO PROFINET IO as the Ethernet based automation standard of PROFIBUS PROFINET International defines a cross vendor communication automation and engineering model With PROFINET IO a switching technology is used that allows all devices to access the network at any time In this way the network can be used much more efficiently through the simultaneous d...

Page 1558: ...gure the OPC UA server of an S7 1500 in the TIA Portal the TIA Portal generates an end entity certificate for the OPC UA server and signs that certificate with its own private key The signature of this end entity certificate can be verified with the public key of the TIA Portal This key can be found in the root CA certificate of the TIA Portal Router Network node with a unique identifier name and ...

Page 1559: ...ue to the destruction of data Self signed certificates These are certificates that you sign with your private key and use as end entity certificates The signature of these end entity certificates is verified with your public key The Subject and Issuer attributes of self signed certificates must be identical You have signed your certificate yourself The CA field must be set to False You can for exa...

Page 1560: ...NET interfaces of the two CPUs system IP address X1 System IP address for the X2 PROFINET interfaces of the two CPUs system IP address X2 You use the system IP addresses for communication with other devices for example HMI devices CPUs PG PC The devices always communicate over the system IP address with the primary CPU of the redundant system This ensures that the communication partner can communi...

Page 1561: ...st and uncomplicated data transfer without acknowledgment There are no error checking mechanisms as found in TCP IP User program In SIMATIC a distinction is made between the CPU operating system and user programs The user program contains all instructions declarations and data by which a system or process can be controlled The user program is assigned to a programmable module for example CPU FM an...

Page 1562: ...ule 20 Communications processor 20 Communications services Connection resources 32 Connection Diagnostics 403 Instructions for Open User Communication 115 Connection diagnostics 403 Connection resources Data record routing 397 HMI communication 396 Module specific 400 occupying 398 Overview 32 391 S7 routing 397 Station specific 399 Consistency of data 37 CP 20 D Data consistency 37 Data record ro...

Page 1563: ...ificate 344 OPC UA server Address space 163 Addressing 220 Application name 219 Authentication 237 Basics 201 Commissioning 218 Customizing the server certificate 233 Generating a server certificate 227 Performance 216 Performance increase 216 Publishing interval 225 Runtime licenses 241 242 Sampling interval 226 Security settings 231 Subscription 223 TCP port 222 224 Write and read rights 208 XML...

Page 1564: ...ng up a connection 33 By configuring 126 ISO connection with CP 1543 1 127 Signature 47 SNMP 25 428 SSL 45 Symmetric encryption 43 Syslog 427 System data type 116 T TCON 115 TCP 25 113 122 TDISCON 115 Time of day synchronization 25 TLS 45 Transport Layer Security 45 TRCV 115 TRCV_C 115 TSEND 115 TSEND_C 115 U UDP 25 113 122 URCV 139 USEND 139 USS protocol 147 W Web server 25 Write 25 X X 509 41 ...

Page 1565: ......

Page 1566: ...OFINET with STEP 7 Function Manual 05 2021 A5E03444486 AL Preface Function manuals Documentation Guide 1 Description 2 Parameter assignment addressing 3 Diagnostics and maintenance 4 Functions 5 PROFINET with the redundant S7 1500R H system 6 ...

Page 1567: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 1568: ... manual is structured into the following subject areas PROFINET basics PROFINET diagnostics PROFINET functions Basic knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the manual General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about the use of Windows based computers Knowledge about how to use STEP 7 TIA Portal S...

Page 1569: ... 11 2019 compared to Edition 10 2018 Function What are the customer benefits Where can I find this information Direct data exchange In the case of direct data exchange an S7 1500 CPU provides cyclic user data from the I O area to one or more partners The Direct data exchange function enables deterministic isochronous IO communication between multiple S7 1500 CPUs Section Direct data exchange Page ...

Page 1570: ...ou can detect an existing IO device and enter it in your project STEP 7 inserts the IO device with all the modules and submodules into the project Article numbers and firmware versions between real and config ured IO devices match You reduce the project planning work required Asset management You can centrally manage non PROFINET com ponents assets of a PROFINET device The PROFINET device makes th...

Page 1571: ...ons in the ring the communication to the IO devices is maintained even when the ring is interrupted and does not result in device failure even with fast update times You achieve higher reliability than with MRP PROFINET perfor mance upgrade You can implement applications with high speed and send clock requirements This is of interest to applications with high demands on performance Better utilizat...

Page 1572: ... updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used Use of product versions that are no longer supported and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers exposure to cyber threats To stay informed about product updates subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed visit https www siemens com industrialsecurity Siemens Industry Onli...

Page 1573: ...e catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation TIA and Totally Integrated Power TIP You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet https mall industry siemens com and in the Information and Download Center ...

Page 1574: ...1 Device name 48 3 2 2 IP address 49 3 2 3 Assigning a device name and IP address 52 3 2 4 Assign device name via communication table 57 3 2 5 Permitting changes to the device name and IP address directly on the device 60 3 3 Configuring an IO device through hardware detection 62 3 4 Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device 64 3 5 Configuring topology 68 3 5 1 Topology view in STEP 7 70 3 5 ...

Page 1575: ...B Link to a PROFINET IO system 120 5 2 Intelligent IO devices I devices 122 5 2 1 I device functionality 122 5 2 2 Properties and Advantages of the I Device 123 5 2 3 Characteristics of an I Device 124 5 2 4 Data Exchange between higher and lower level IO system 128 5 2 5 Configuring the I device 130 5 2 6 Program examples 133 5 2 7 Diagnostics and interrupt characteristics 136 5 2 8 Rules for the...

Page 1576: ... Basics of Programming 226 5 7 5 2 Program execution according to the IPO model 227 5 7 5 3 Program execution according to the OIP model 229 5 8 Direct data exchange 231 5 8 1 Introduction 231 5 8 2 Configuring direct data exchange between two S7 1500 CPUs 234 5 8 3 Configuring direct data exchange between multiple IO controllers 237 5 9 Device replacement without exchangeable medium 241 5 9 1 Dev...

Page 1577: ...0 6 PROFINET with the redundant S7 1500R H system 292 6 1 Media redundancy in the redundant S7 1500R H system 293 6 2 H Sync Forwarding 293 6 3 System redundancy S2 295 6 4 Switched S1 device 296 6 5 Main differences between IO device with S2 system redundancy and standard IO device 298 6 6 Installation guidelines 299 6 7 Configuring PROFINET IO on a redundant S7 1500R H system 300 6 8 Assigning I...

Page 1578: ...specific information you require Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration installation wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems Use the corresponding operating instructions for the CPUs 1513 1516pro 2 PN The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming Device information P...

Page 1579: ...s com cs ww en view 84133942 ET 200AL https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 95242965 mySupport With mySupport your personal workspace you make the best out of your Industry Online Support In mySupport you can save filters favorites and tags request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you...

Page 1580: ...on examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus on individual products You will find the application examples on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en ps ae TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool you can select configure and order dev...

Page 1581: ...ted to UTC time to the module Program download to CPU RUN STOP mode switchover CPU localization by means of LED flashing Reading out of CPU error information Reading of the CPU diagnostics buffer Reset to factory settings Firmware update of the CPU and connected modules You can find the SIMATIC Automation Tool on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 98161300 PRONETA SIEMEN...

Page 1582: ...es This helps to prevent problems in commissioning or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation This increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety The advantages at a glance Network optimization thanks to port specific calculation of the network load Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification ...

Page 1583: ...ogy This ensures the integration of PROFIBUS DP into the PROFINET world PROFINET IO as the Ethernet based automation standard of PROFIBUS PROFINET International defines a cross vendor communication automation and engineering model Objectives of PROFINET The objectives of PROFINET Industrial networking based on Industrial Ethernet open Ethernet standard Compatibility of Industrial Ethernet and stan...

Page 1584: ...llation technology and network components are available as SIMATIC NET products Ethernet standard protocol and procedures e g SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol for network parameter assignment and diagnostics are used for remote maintenance and network diagnostics Figure 2 1 PROFINET overview configuration STEP 7 The STEP 7 engineering tool supports you in setting up and configuring an autom...

Page 1585: ...emens com profinet Overview of the most important documents and links A compilation of the most important PROFINET application examples FAQs and other contributions in the Industry Online Support is available in this FAQ https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 108165711 2 1 1 PROFINET terms Definition Devices in the PROFINET environment In the PROFINET environment device is the generic te...

Page 1586: ... address the connected IO devices This means that The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with field devices Programming device PC PROFINET IO supervisor PG PC HMI device used for commissioning and for diagnostics PROFINET Industrial Ethern et Network infrastructure HMI Human Machine In terface Device for operating and monitoring functions IO device A distributed field device that is ...

Page 1587: ... and written by means of PROFINET IO using what is referred to as IO communication The following figure provides an overview of IO communication by means of PROFINET IO A IO controller IO controller communication via PN PN coupler B IO controller I device communication C IO controller IO device communication D Direct data exchange between S7 1500 CPUs Figure 2 3 IO communication via PROFINET IO ...

Page 1588: ... as additional hardware The IO controllers mutually access configured address ranges i e transfer rang es which may be located inside or outside the process image of the CPU If parts of the process image are used as transfer ranges it is not permitted to use these for real I O modules Data transfer takes place using load and transfer operations via the process image or via direct access I O commun...

Page 1589: ...g Industrial Ethernet standard mechanisms of communication and information technology such as OPC XML can now be used along with standard protocols such as UDP TCP IP and HTTP in automation engineering This allows transparent access from company management level directly to the data from the automation systems at the control level and production level Management level Control level Production leve...

Page 1590: ...tion failure In STEP 7 the watchdog time is made up from an integral multiple of the update time and can be set by the user Send clock The period of time between two consecutive communication cycles The send clock is the shortest possible interval in data exchange and thus also the smallest value that can be set for the update time Relationship between the update time and send clock The calculated...

Page 1591: ...tation in STEP 7 are explained in the following Properties Every PROFINET device on the network is uniquely identified via its PROFINET interface For this purpose each PROFINET interface has A MAC address factory default An IP address A PROFINET device name Identification and numbering of the interfaces and ports Interfaces and ports for all modules and devices in the PROFINET system are identifie...

Page 1592: ... in STEP 7 Num ber Description PROFINET interface of an IO controller in STEP 7 PROFINET interface of an IO device in STEP 7 These lines represent the PROFINET interface These lines represent the ports of a PROFINET interface Figure 2 5 Representation of the PROFINET interfaces in STEP 7 Schematic Representation of a PROFINET Interface with Integrated Switch The following schematic diagram shows t...

Page 1593: ...version V2 0 PROFINET interface X1 PROFINET interface X2 2 ports with PROFINET IO functionality 1 port with PROFINET IO functionality Identification configuration and diagnostics PG communication HMI communication S7 communication Time of day synchronization Web server Open communication OPC UA server IO controller I device RT IRT Isochronous mode Media redundancy Prioritized startup Additional In...

Page 1594: ...ots into which the modules are inserted The modules have channels which are used to read and output process signals A compact device has the same design and can include modules however it cannot be physically expanded which means that no modules can be inserted This is illustrated by the following graphic Figure 2 7 Configuration of a PROFINET device Number Description Slot with bus interface Slot...

Page 1595: ...the device view of STEP 7 2 2 Setting up PROFINET Contents of this chapter The following chapter provides background information on building your communication network Overview of the most important passive network components These are network components that forward a signal without the possibility of actively influencing it for example cables connectors etc Overview of the most important active ...

Page 1596: ...et You can use Fast Ethernet to transfer data at a speed of 100 Mbps This transmission technology uses the 100 Base T standard for this Industrial Ethernet Structure of Ethernet in industrial environment The biggest difference from standard Ethernet is the mechanical current carrying capacity and noise immunity of the individual components 2 2 1 Active Network Components Introduction The following...

Page 1597: ...hes To use PROFINET with the RT class RT you can use any switch of PROFINET Conformance Class A or higher All switches of the SCALANCE product family meet these requirements If you want to use PROFINET functions that provide an additional value such as topology recognition diagnostics device exchange without exchangeable medium programming device you have to use a switch of the PROFINET Conformanc...

Page 1598: ...f devices need to communicate beyond the limits of a network you must configure the router so that it allows this communication to take place Information on routing with STEP 7 is available in the function manual Communication http support automation siemens com WW view en 59192925 2 2 2 Cabling technology Cables for PROFINET Electrical and optical cables are available for PROFINET The type of cab...

Page 1599: ...able consists of FC FO Termination Kit for SC and BFOC plug cleave tool Kevlar scissors buffer grip fiber remains container FC BFOC Plug FC SC Duplex plug FO FC Standard cable FO FC Trailing cable Simple method for the prefabrication of POF and PCF cables The following special tools provide an easy and safe way to prefabricate POF PCF cables and fit the SC RJ POF plugs POF cable Prefabrication cas...

Page 1600: ... are large differences in potential Insensitive towards electromagnetic radia tion Low line attenuation Considerably longer segments possible1 Plastic cladded glass fiber Polymer Cladded Fiber PCF 200 230 µm core diame ter external diameter ISO IEC 60793 2 100 Mbps full duplex 100 m BFOC Bayo net Fiber Optic Con nector and SC Subscrib er Connector ISO IEC 60874 Monomode glass fiber optic cable 10 ...

Page 1601: ...ted by using a single wireless network for reliable operation of a process with both process critical data alarm message for example and non critical communication service and diagnostics for example Cost effective connection to devices in remote environments that are difficult to access Predictable data traffic deterministic and defined response times Cyclical monitoring of the wireless link link...

Page 1602: ...missioning or cost effective networking where routing of wires is extremely expensive e g public streets railroad lines Stacker trucks automated guided vehicle systems and suspended monorail systems The following graphic illustrates the many possible applications and configurations for SIMATIC device family wireless networks Figure 2 9 Application example for the use of Industrial Wireless LAN Dat...

Page 1603: ...g on spatial factors the wireless standard used the data rate and the antennas on the send and receive sides 2 2 3 2 Tips on assembly Wireless networks SCALANCE device family With PROFINET you can also set up wireless networks with Industrial Wireless Local Area Network IWLAN technology We recommend implementing the SCALANCE W device line for this Update time in STEP 7 If you set up PROFINET with ...

Page 1604: ...mation solution are available here PROFINET planning guideline PROFINET installation guideline PROFINET commissioning guideline Additional documents for setup of PROFINET 2 2 4 Network security 2 2 4 1 Basics Introduction The topic of data security and access protection Security has become increasingly important in the industrial environment The increased networking of entire industrial systems ve...

Page 1605: ...ample through faulty configuration and denial of service attacks Threats Threats can arise from external and internal manipulation The loss of data security is not always caused by intentional actions Internal threats can arise due to Technical errors Operator errors Defective programs Added to these internal threats there are also external ones The external threats are not really any different to...

Page 1606: ...ll Authentication identification of the devices The security modules identify each other over a safe encrypted channel using authentication procedures It is therefore impossible for unauthorized parties to access a protected segment Encrypting the data traffic The confidentiality of data is ensured by encrypting the data traffic Each security module is given a VPN certificate which includes the en...

Page 1607: ... the office and production levels The following graphic contains an application example with protected areas at different levels of the company created using SCALANCE S and the security client The protected areas are highlighted in light gray Figure 2 11 Network configuration with the SCALANCE S security module and the SOFTNET security client ...

Page 1608: ...can be found on the homepage of the PROFIBUS user organization on the Internet http www profinet com In the Industrial Ethernet Security http support automation siemens com WW view en 56577508 manual In the SCALANCE S and SOFTNET Security Client http support automation siemens com WW view en 21718449 manual You can find general information on industrial security concepts functions and news on the ...

Page 1609: ...gs for the hardware components and for data communication are configured at the same time In STEP 7 you can assign parameters for the following settings PROFINET Device names and IP address parameters Port interconnection and topology Module properties parameters The parameters are loaded into the CPU and transferred to the corresponding modules when the CPU starts up Modules are easy to replace f...

Page 1610: ...en placed e g IM 155 6 PN ST Procedure To assign IO devices to an IO controller proceed as follows 1 Place the pointer of the mouse over the interface of the IO device 2 Press and hold down the left mouse button 3 Move the pointer The pointer now uses the networking symbol to indicate Networking mode At the same time you see the lock symbol on the pointer The lock symbol disappears only when the p...

Page 1611: ...face shows the I O communication of the complete station Information on S7 1500R H You can find the procedure for assigning an IO device with system redundancy S2 to the redundant S7 1500R H system in section Assigning IO device to the redundant S7 1500R H system Page 1 3 2 Device name and IP address Introduction In order that the PROFINET device can be addressed as node on PROFINET the following ...

Page 1612: ...47 In STEP 7 You can find the device name and the IP address under Ethernet addresses in the properties of the PROFINET interface in the Inspector window Figure 3 2 Device name and IP address in STEP 7 The function the assignment and the changing of the device name and the IP address are described in the following sections ...

Page 1613: ...hen a device is replaced by a device without removable medium the IO controller assigns the device name based on topological configuration see section Configuring topology Page 1 Structured device names The device name is automatically assigned by default for PROFINET devices S7 1200 S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP and ET 200AL when these are configured in STEP 7 The device names are formed from the nam...

Page 1614: ...a device on Industrial Ethernet this device also requires an IP address that is unique within the network The IP addresses are typically assigned automatically by STEP 7 and assigned to the devices based on the device name If it is a standalone network you can apply the IP address and subnet mask suggested by STEP 7 If the network is part of an existing Ethernet company network obtain the informat...

Page 1615: ...terface With this option the PROFINET interface is assigned an IP address by an DHCP server When you configure the option IP address from DHCP server for a PROFINET interface this interface does no longer support the PROFINET IO functionality For more information on addressing by a DHCP server please refer to the Communication http support automation siemens com WW view en 59192925 function manual...

Page 1616: ...55 255 0 Note Range of values for the first decimal point A value between 224 and 255 is also possible for the first decimal number of the IP address address class D etc However this is not recommended because there is no address check for these values Masking other subnets You can use the subnet mask to add further structures and form private subnets for a subnet that is assigned one of the addre...

Page 1617: ...avigate on the display via the menu items Settings Addresses X1 IE PN Parameters Using a memory card If your PROFINET device is equipped for a memory card Micro Memory Card SIMATIC memory card plug this into your programming device PC and save the hardware configuration together with the configured IP address on this memory card Then plug the memory card into the PROFINET device Once inserted the ...

Page 1618: ...he IO device the memory card with the valid name must be removed from the faulty IO device and added to the replaced device In the event of an error in the PROFINET device the memory card allows you to replace a module without a programming device PC You can also transfer the device data directly from the programming device PC to the memory card Procedure Changing the device name using properties ...

Page 1619: ... the tabular area of the network view 2 In the Device column overwrite the name in the row of the relevant PROFINET device The name is also changed accordingly in the graphic area of the network view Figure 3 5 Changing the device name of a PROFINET device in STEP 7 Procedure Changing the IP address To change the IP address follow these steps 1 In the network or device view of the STEP 7 hardware ...

Page 1620: ... IO device To load the configured device names to the IO device follow these steps 1 Connect your programming device PC to the same network as the relevant IO device The interface of the programming device PC must be set to TCP IP mode 2 In STEP 7 select the relevant IO device in the Accessible devices dialog based on the MAC address 3 Click Assign name to download the configured device name to th...

Page 1621: ... devices STEP 7 now automatically searches for the accessible devices and displays them in the Accessible devices in target subnet table Select the desired PROFINET device and click on the Flash LED button The PROFINET device is identified based on its MAC address Figure 3 7 Accessible devices dialog Using an different way to assign IP addresses for IO devices Various IO devices for example SCALAN...

Page 1622: ... were assigned offline to the corresponding IO devices online To do this use the buttons Check devices and Assign now Figure 3 8 Assign device name via communication table The objects displayed in the table of the Online assignment tab depend on the setting of the filter function If only selected objects should be displayed only objects of the corresponding context are displayed depending on the s...

Page 1623: ...to the devices Procedure step 1 To detect IO devices available online from the I O communication table follow these steps 1 Optional Entered known MAC addresses in the MAC address column After every valid entry the check box under Assign device is selected for the relevant row Note You can enter insert or import the MAC address in different formats The correct format is automatically entered in th...

Page 1624: ...address exists and matching device data was found but no PROFINET device name was found online You can update the data of the detected devices again via their MAC addresses at any time To do this you specify the MAC address and the status of the device is displayed immediately without having to re detect the device Procedure step 2 All PROFINET device names configured offline will be assigned to t...

Page 1625: ...table If there are conflicts with values already existing in the table you can decide whether the data should be overwritten or whether the import needs to be stopped 3 2 5 Permitting changes to the device name and IP address directly on the device Introduction Machines are frequently commissioned on site or integrated into the existing infrastructure without STEP 7 You can find typical applicatio...

Page 1626: ...ess directly on device you cannot use this PROFINET device as gateway for S7 routing Options for assigning IP addresses and device names Apart from the known address and device name assignment in the Ethernet addresses section of the Inspector window there are other ways in which the IP address and name can be assigned Assigning by means of the user program with the instruction T_CONFIG Assignment...

Page 1627: ...ection function A detected device can be imported into your project STEP 7 inserts the IO device with all the modules and submodules Requirements STEP 7 TIA Portal as of V15 It must be possible to technically access the IO device via IP Procedure To detect one or more existing IO devices in STEP 7 and add them to the project follow these steps 1 In STEP 7 navigate to Online Hardware detection 2 Cl...

Page 1628: ...g MAC address STEP 7 imports the MAC address of the detected IO device into the project IP settings If the detected IO device already has an IP address STEP 7 imports the IP address into the project If the detected IO device does not have an IP address STEP 7 automatically assigns an IP address in the project PROFINET device name If the detected IO device already has a PROFINET device name STEP 7 ...

Page 1629: ... You cannot configure an IP address of a router for the other PROFINET interfaces of the CPU IO devices that are connected to this PROFINET interface adopt this setting Up to and including STEP 7 V14 SP1 these IO devices did not have any possibility to reach devices in a different IP subnet As of STEP 7 V15 you have the possibility to assign the address of a router for an IO device independent of ...

Page 1630: ...ntroller A PROFINET IO device supports exactly one router irrespective of the number of interfaces You can configure a router for exactly one PROFINET interface All IO devices that are assigned to the PROFINET interface adopt the configured router from the IO controller You cannot configure a router for the further PROFINET interfaces of the CPU The further PROFINET interfaces take on the IP addre...

Page 1631: ...line 1 PROFINET interface X2 is connected with the subnet Production line 2 The two subnets Production line 1 and Production line 2 are each connected via a router with the higher level network Superior line For PROFINET X1 you configure the router Router 1 with the IP address 192 168 1 100 The IO device ET 200SP in the Production line 1 subnet adopts the router from the IO controller You cannot c...

Page 1632: ...r check box in the IP protocol field 4 Enter the IP address of the router at Router address Configuring a router for an IO device Requirements STEP 7 as of V15 CPU 1500 as of firmware version V2 5 IO device is assigned to the PROFINET interface of an IO controller The PROFINET interface of the IO controller uses the Set IP address in the project option Follow these steps to configure a router for ...

Page 1633: ...NET is merely a special form of tree star topology If a link element switch for example fails communication across the failed link element is no longer possible The network is then divided into 2 subsegments Linear bus topology structures require the least cabling Star If you connect communication devices to a switch with more than two PROFINET ports you automatically create a star network topolog...

Page 1634: ... as IO controller S7 300 as IO controller Industrial WLAN with SCALANCE W SCALANCE X 307 3 with seven electrical and three optical ports ET 200SP with integrated 2 port switch SCALANCE X 204 with four electrical ports PROFINET Industrial Ethernet IE PB Link PN IO PROFIBUS DP ET 200S with two optical ports Star topology Linear bus topology The combination of topology forms results in a tree topolog...

Page 1635: ... Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks http support automation siemens com WW view en 8763736 manual You can find basic information in the Communication with SIMATIC http support automation siemens com WW view en 1254686 manual 3 5 1 Topology view in STEP 7 Introduction The topology view is one of three working areas of the hardware and network editor You undertake the following tasks here Display...

Page 1636: ...wing figure shows the graphic area of the topology view Selector Device view Network view Topology view Toolbar Graphic area of the topology view Overview navigation Selector for the table area of the topology view Figure 3 13 Graphic area of the topology view Overview navigation Click in the overview navigation to obtain an overview of the created objects in the graphic area By holding down the m...

Page 1637: ...atically through offline online comparison or extended Offline Online comparison into STEP 7 Selector for the graphic area of the topology view Selector Device view Network view Topology view Selector Topology overview Topology comparison Table area of the topology view Figure 3 14 Table area of the topology view 3 5 2 Interconnecting ports in the topology view Requirement You are in the graphic v...

Page 1638: ...ou see the lock symbol on the pointer The lock symbol disappears only when the pointer is over a valid target position 4 Now drag the pointer to the target port You can keep the left mouse button pressed or release it when performing this action 5 Now release the left mouse button or press it again depending on your previous action Figure 3 15 Interconnecting ports in the topology view Result You ...

Page 1639: ...this setting in the Inspector window as follows Properties General Advanced Options Port Port Interconnection 3 In the Local port section you can find the settings at the local port In the case of fiber optic cable you can for example set the cable names here In the Partner port area select the drop down list for Partner port in order to display the available partner ports and make a selection Fig...

Page 1640: ...tomatically assigned to a configured device if the following properties of the two devices match up Article no Type PROFINET device name No automatic assignment In the following situations no automatic assignment is possible No device can be identified online to match a configured device This means that the corresponding columns in the Online topology area of the topology comparison table are empt...

Page 1641: ...repared too many port interconnections to be included in the project Select the rows belonging to the port interconnections you have mistakenly prepared for inclusion in the project using multi selection Select Reset Reset selected in the shortcut menu The content of the corresponding table cells in the Action column change to No action 5 Click the Synchronize button Result The port interconnectio...

Page 1642: ...if necessary for other configured devices without an online partner Result The selected device that was identified online is moved up from the end of the table Following this it is in the row of the configured device to which you have just assigned it 3 5 7 Automatic assignment of devices by advanced offline online comparison Overview With the advanced offline online comparison ICMP is also used a...

Page 1643: ...de detailed information Each individual error or several errors occurring concurrently are transferred from the IO device to the IO controller If you require the full status of the IO device including any pending errors you can also read the status directly from the IO device The following sections provide basic information on using diagnostics via PROFINET IO You can find a detailed description o...

Page 1644: ...tion The IO device detects an error and sends diagnostics data to the IO controller The IO controller notifies the programming HMI device The display of the system diagnostics is updated In STEP 7 you can read the station status for Accessible devices directly from the IO device regardless of the IO controller This is only possible if the programming device is connected to Industrial Ethernet This...

Page 1645: ...the IO controller The scope and volume of diagnostics information varies according to the level of diagnostics data evaluation and the PROFINET devices you are using Diagnostics levels You can evaluate diagnostics data at different levels The number and type of channels is selected for example at the diagnostics level 4 The following figure shows the diagnostics levels with PROFINET IO Figure 4 2 ...

Page 1646: ... the device view of STEP 7 based on the example of a distributed I O system ET 200MP Number Description Level 1 Error s in the device Level 2 Error s in the module Figure 4 3 Diagnostics levels in the device view of STEP 7 Which PROFINET nodes support the extended PROFINET diagnostics An overview of the PROFINET nodes that support extended PROFINET diagnostics and of what you have to configure is ...

Page 1647: ...k LED LED off There is no Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of the PROFINET device and the communication partner No data is currently being sent received via the PROFINET interface X X X X LED green There is an Ethernet connection between the PROFINET interface of your PROFINET device and a communication partner X X X X LED flashes green The LED flashing test is being performed X ...

Page 1648: ... in different menus You use operating keys to navigate through the menus and make a variety of settings in the process Diagnostics via the display The following indicators can be evaluated for diagnostics purposes on the display Error and alarm texts system diagnostics alarm messages Module status for central and distributed modules In the following example of a display of the CPU 1516 3 PN DP you...

Page 1649: ...ay through the menu items Module PROFINET I O X1 Station Slot Status Module status The module status indicates that a fault has occurred in the module The lower level status is the status of the module in the diagnostics level below this In the example the status is good i e the fault is not in the lower diagnostics level submodule or channel but instead in the module Figure 4 5 Display of module ...

Page 1650: ...he display via the menu items Diagnostics Diagnostics buffer Figure 4 6 Display of diagnostics buffer To show the alarm messages of the automation system navigate through the menu items Diagnostics Alarms Alarm text on the display Note Updating the alarm display The display shows the currently read status of the CPU in static form the display is not automatically updated The alarm display is updat...

Page 1651: ...4486 AL Figure 4 7 Display of alarms Figure 4 8 Display of alarm message Additional information You can find the description of the operation and functions of the display in the SIMATIC S7 1500 Display Simulator http www automation siemens com salesmaterial as interactive manuals getting started_simatic s7 1500 disp_tool start_de html ...

Page 1652: ...wide range of functions The following diagnostics options are available to you Start page with general CPU information Information on diagnostics Contents of the diagnostics buffer Module information Alarms Information about communication PROFINET topology Motion Control diagnostics Trace Contents of the diagnostic buffer Module status Actual topology of the PROFINET system Set topology of the PRO...

Page 1653: ... topology graphic view Requirements for displaying the set and actual topology You have configured the PROFINET ports in the topology editor of the hardware and network editor of STEP 7 You have loaded the entire project with STEP 7 in the CPU The following shows an example of the graphic view Figure 4 9 Topology graphic view via the Web server ...

Page 1654: ...n disrupted e g cable removed Connection to a passive component Connection to PROFINET devices of another IO controller or PROFINET system Configured and accessible PROFINET devices Configured and accessible PROFINET devices are displayed dark gray Connections show the ports through which the PROFINET devices of a station are connected Configured but not accessible PROFINET devices The configured ...

Page 1655: ...displayed in yellow In the actual topology A PROFINET device of another PROFINET IO system is only displayed if the PROFINET device is in direct proximity to a configured PROFINET device The PROFINET device is displayed light gray and with dashed line For PROFINET devices of a different PROFINET IO system no status display is shown on the device head Representation of faulty neighbor relations The...

Page 1656: ... diagnostics of PROFINET ports Online diagnostics network view In the hardware and network editor launched from the Project tree by double clicking Devices networks you can get an overview of the current state of your system by clicking on the Go online button It also shows the configuration information for example non configured modules This option is also available in the topology view in simila...

Page 1657: ... can see the status of the accessible devices in the project tree Double click the device which displays an alarm message to access the faulty module directly The device view is opened in the work area In the device view of the device that reports the fault you can see directly in which module the fault occurs Open the Diagnostics tab and the subordinate Device information tab in the Inspector win...

Page 1658: ...e the ports of the PROFINET interface are listed in a table The table provides you with the following information about the ports of the PROFINET interface Name Status Settings Operating mode Figure 4 12 Diagnostics of PROFINET ports in STEP 7 Additional information You can find information on the system diagnostics for S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP and ET 200AL in the Diagnostics http support automat...

Page 1659: ...bol Severity of the error Good Green checkmark Maintenance required Green wrench Maintenance demanded Yellow wrench Bad Red wrench The aim of the diagnostics concept is the early detection and elimination of potential faults before they cause a production outage Other status information is defined in addition to the Good no fault and Bad fault status information for a PROFINET device The maintenan...

Page 1660: ...nd the switch send the maintenance demanded alarm to the IO controller Based on the interrupts the IO controller detects the maintenance demanded from the switch and from the IO device The module information data is updated in the IO controller and the corresponding error OBs are called Note To be able to start the error OBs in the IO controller the Call the user program if communication errors oc...

Page 1661: ...ill find the MIBs for ET 200 interface modules and couplers with PROFINET interface in this product note https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109770525 Detecting the network topology LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol is a protocol that is used to detect the closest neighbor LLDP enables a device to send information about itself and to receive information from its neighbor devices This...

Page 1662: ... in order to generate a defined programmed response to the fault and passes a diagnostics data record Diagnostics data records in PROFINET IO There are two different types of diagnostics data record 1 Channel diagnostics data records Channel diagnostics data records are generated if a channel is in an error state and or has triggered an interrupt A diagnostics data record of length 0 is returned i...

Page 1663: ...on device level always 0xF80c In HEX representation the individual groups of data records are distinguished by the first letter of the data record number Figure 4 14 Addressing levels of diagnostics data records The information for each IO device addressing level AR module addressing level slot or submodule addressing level subslot is always transferred in separate diagnostics or configuration dat...

Page 1664: ...on about the role of the device for MRP e g client manager Information about the port statistics e g number of received bytes Read the MRP status Modification of the parameters of analog input module of the ET 200SP in runtime e g in order to disable enable the channel diagnostics The finished functions are freely adaptable and can therefore be used universally The LPNDR block library with an exam...

Page 1665: ...manded or maintenance required within a PROFINET IO system The instruction RDREC read data record is then used to read various diagnostics data records directly from the module concerned and thus obtain detailed information about the error Num ber Description All individual errors are collected in a single data record on the interface module In your user program the instruction RDREC reads the ent...

Page 1666: ...ad additional interrupt information Num ber Description Every error is sent to the IO controller individually as channel diagnostics information in the form of an interrupt In the IO controller the module status data is updated automatically and the error OB OB 82 is started In your user program in the error OB OB 82 the instruction RALRM reads the error syn chronously from the IO controller witho...

Page 1667: ...ed in online mode by means of the I M data Further information To find out whether and to what extent a PROFINET device supports I M data refer to the documentation of the relevant device 4 9 2 Loading I M data to PROFINET IO devices and your modules Which I M data can be loaded to PROFINET IO devices and your modules You can load I M 1 data plant designation and location identifier and or I M 2 d...

Page 1668: ...ou transfer the selected I M data to the selected PROFINET IO devices during loading Note Language dependency of the I M data to be loaded The I M data are loaded to the real hardware in the form that you specified in the properties of the relevant PROFINET IO devices and your modules There is no language dependency 4 9 3 Asset management 4 9 3 1 Further information about asset management at PROFI...

Page 1669: ...nts that can be read additionally online through asset management data records include both hardware components such as backplane bus modules of a device as well as firmware components such as a drive control unit with own versioning Application examples Importing asset management records enables you to read the following information during installation or operation for example Are only approved d...

Page 1670: ... documentation of the respective device 4 9 3 2 Content and structure of an asset management record Basic structure of the asset management record You are first provided with an overview of the general structure of the record The following table describes the framework within which the asset management data blocks are embedded Each data block represents an asset a terminal block for example Elemen...

Page 1671: ...sets that the IO device supplies Table 4 4 Structure of AssetManagementBlock Element of the data structure Designation according to IEC 61158 6 10 Code Data type length in bytes Header AssetManage mentBlock BlockType 0x0036 AM_FullInformation 0x0037 AM_HardwareOnlyInformation 0x0038 AM_FirmwareOnlyInformation UINT 2 BlockLength Number of bytes without counting the bytes for BlockType and BlockLeng...

Page 1672: ...ecific hardware ver sion Example A4 64 bytes are always used Spaces are used for padding if the string is short er If the asset supports IM_Hardware_Revision the AM_HardwareRevision is padded with spaces Array of Char 64 IM_Serial_Number Manufacturer specific unique produc tion related number The characters come from the visible range 0x20 0x7E no control characters Example A78C 1C82 16 bytes are ...

Page 1673: ... for Siemens assets 0x002A AM_DeviceIdentification Organization Example for Siemens assets 0x0000 PROFINET Array of Byte 8 AM_TypeIdentification Manufacturer allocated type identifi cation 0x0000 Unspecified 0x0001 Controller PLC 0x0002 PC based 0x0003 IO module IO submodule 0x0004 Communications module submodule 0x0005 Interface module submod ule 0x0006 Active network component 0c0007 Media attac...

Page 1674: ...h the PROFINET device model Level 0 has the value 0 The subsequent levels Level 1 to Level 3 then have the meaning of slot address subslot address and channel number If further assets are connected to this asset the next Level 4 is used The limit is reached at Level 11 If the asset belongs to a PROFINET device but is not connected to a module that can be addressed through the PROFINET device model...

Page 1675: ... Bit 8 15 AM_Location Reserved1 0x00 padding byte Bit 16 31 AM_Location BeginSlotNumber 2 the Rack asset begins from Slot 2 on Bit 32 47 AM_Location BeginSubslotNumber 0xFFFF the asset encompasses all the subslots of Slot 2 Otherwise you specify the no of the subslot at which the asset begins Bit 48 63 AM_Location EndSlotNumber 4 the asset ends at Slot 4 Bit 64 79 AM_Location EndSubslotNumber 0xFF...

Page 1676: ...rarchical AM_Location coding Detailed coding for the example Bit 0 7 AM_Location Structure 0x01 LT format Bit 8 17 AM_Location Level0 0x000 assets that are assigned to modules always have the Level 0 value 0x000 Bit 18 27 AM_Location Level1 0x005 Slot 5 Bit 28 37 AM_Location Level2 0x001 Subslot 1 Bit 38 47 AM_Location Level3 0x001 Channel 1 Bit 48 57 AM_Location Level4 0x3FF coding for Level not ...

Page 1677: ... assigned only sees the PROFINET interface also configured as an IO device and the transfer areas of the I device configured by the machine manufacturer The local modules of the I device are not visible or cannot be accessed The assigned IO controller can read the central modules as assets of the I device by means of an asset management record that the user program of the I device compiles Figure ...

Page 1678: ...this call the instruction PRVREC Provide Record in accordance with the following templates in the corresponding modes Cyclic calling for example in the cycle OB of the PRVREC instruction with Mode 0 in order to recognize the AMR request When the AM record request is recognized the PRVREC program has to acknowledge within one second that the request has been recognized This means that PRVREC must b...

Page 1679: ...You create the asset management record yourself The following section describes how you can compile an asset management record for an I device yourself The concept assumes you yourself determine the I M data for each centrally plugged module and fill the asset management record with this information The I M0 data of a module contains basic information about the module such as the manufacturer s co...

Page 1680: ...eld see corresponding example code in the Internet or online support Generate an 8 byte hash value across the I M0 data of the CPU Use the algorithm Fowler Noll Vo in short FNV as described above IM_UniqueIdentifier Byte 0 to 7 Hash value of module I M0 data Bytes 8 to 15 Hash value for CPU I M0 data Required customizations to ISO 9834 8 Byte 8 Bit 7 has to be set to 1 and Byte 8 Bit 6 to 0 result...

Page 1681: ...ption AM_DeviceIdentification Byte 0 1 2 6 7 0x00 Byte 3 0x2A Vendor Siemens Byte 4 01 Byte 5 DeviceID e g CPU 15xx 0x0E AM_TypeIdentification Copy 2 bytes of the I M0 data of the module beginning with offset 48 of the I M0 data IM_Hardware_Revision Copy 2 bytes of the I M0 data of the module beginning with offset 38 of the I M0 data ...

Page 1682: ...f the PROFINET devices and the functions these support on the Internet https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 102325771 5 1 Connecting other bus systems Fieldbus integration PROFINET allows you to use a proxy capable PROFINET device to integrate existing fieldbus systems for example PROFIBUS AS interface The devices of these fieldbus systems are mapped on proxy PROFINET devices In this w...

Page 1683: ...ndustry siemens com cs ww en view 109476182 M bus You can find the procedure for configuring communication between a SIMATIC PLC and an M bus network with a gateway in this application example https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109478527 DALI You can find the procedure for configuring communication between a SIMATIC PLC and a DALI network with a gateway in this application example ht...

Page 1684: ...le PROFINET device which is equipped with a PROFINET interface in addition to a PROFIBUS interface for example IE PB Link PN IO you can integrate existing PROFIBUS configurations into the PROFINET configuration The following figures shows how a PROFIBUS system is connected via IE PB Link to a CPU S7 1500 as of firmware version 1 7 Figure 5 2 Gateway from PROFINET and PROFIBUS via IE PB link ...

Page 1685: ...PROFINET IO system refer to section Connect the DP slave via the IE PB Link to a PROFINET IO system Page 1 Diagnostic options with a CPU S7 1500 as IO controller The CPU S7 1500 as of firmware version 1 7 as IO controller detects disrupted DP slaves behind the IP PB link 5 1 2 Connect the DP slave via the IE PB Link to a PROFINET IO system Requirements STEP 7 as of V13 SP1 CPU supports IE PB link ...

Page 1686: ... device number area you can assign a PROFINET device number for the DP slave If you have selected the Device number PB address check box default STEP 7 automatically assigns the device number according to the PROFIBUS address of the slave In addition you no longer need to update the device number if the PROFIBUS address changes Figure 5 5 Assigning PN device numbers for IE PB link Result You have ...

Page 1687: ...IO device to a higher level IO controller The preprocessing is handled by the user program in the I device The process values acquired in the centralized or distributed PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP I O are preprocessed by the user program and made available to the IO controller Figure 5 6 I device I device naming conventions In the remainder of this description a CPU or a CP with I device functional...

Page 1688: ... the I device interface description instead of with a STEP 7 project The know how of the user program may no longer be published Properties Properties of the I device Unlinking STEP 7 projects Creators and users of an I device can have completely separated STEP 7 automation projects The GSD file forms the interface between the STEP 7 projects This allows a link to standard IO controllers via a sta...

Page 1689: ...vice is included in an IO system like a standard IO device I device without lower level PROFINET IO system The I device does not have its own distributed I O The configuration and parameter assignment of the I devices in the role of an IO device is the same as for a distributed I O system for example ET 200 Figure 5 7 I device without lower level PROFINET IO system ...

Page 1690: ...IO device This means that the I device can be part of a higher level IO system via its PROFINET interface and as an IO controller can support its own lower level IO system The lower level IO system can in turn contain I devices see figure below This makes hierarchically structured IO systems possible In addition to its role as IO controller an I device can also be used via a PROFIBUS interface as ...

Page 1691: ... brochures in a package of printed material Figure 5 9 Example the I device as IO device and IO controller Unit 1 and unit 2 each consist of an I device with centralized I O The I device along with the distributed I O system for example ET 200 forms unit 3 The user program on the I device is responsible for preprocessing the process data For this task the user program of the I device requires defa...

Page 1692: ... AL 127 I device as a shared device An I device can also be used simultaneously by multiple IO controllers as a shared device Figure 5 10 I device as a shared device Information about configuring an I device as a shared device is available in the section Configuring an I device as a shared device Page 1 ...

Page 1693: ...eas are an interface to the user program of the I device CPU Inputs are processed in the user program and outputs are the result of the processing in the user program The data for communication between IO controller and I device is made available in the transfer areas A transfer area contains an information unit that is exchanged consistently between IO controller and I device You can find more in...

Page 1694: ...xchange between the higher and lower level IO system The individual communication relations are explained below based on the numbers Figure 5 11 Data exchange between higher and lower level IO system Data exchange between higher level IO controller and normal IO device In this way the IO controller and IO devices exchange data through PROFINET ...

Page 1695: ...ata exchange between the I device and a lower level IO device In this way the I device and its IO devices exchange data The data transfer is via PROFINET 5 2 5 Configuring the I device Introduction There are basically two possibilities for configuration Configuration of an I device within a project Configuration of an I device that is used in another project or in another engineering system STEP 7...

Page 1696: ...een both devices are displayed in the network view Figure 5 12 Configuring the I device 6 With the Parameter assignment of PN interface by higher level IO controller check box you specify whether the interface parameters will be assigned by the I device itself or by a higher level IO controller If you operate the I device with a lower level IO system then the parameters of the I device PROFINET in...

Page 1697: ...igation for each transfer area If you select one of these entries you can adjust the details of the transfer area or correct them and comment on them Configuring an I device with a GSD file If you use an I device in another project or if the I device is used in another engineering system then configure the higher level IO controller and the I device as described above However click on the Export b...

Page 1698: ...he result of an AND logic operation of two inputs preprocessing in the I device is to be provided to the higher level IO controller This result is to be assigned to a local output in the IO master further processing Use a transfer area with the following addresses for this purpose Address in the I device Q568 Address in the IO controller I68 Required steps The following steps to solve the task 1 C...

Page 1699: ...am the sample program for the I device follow these steps 1 Using the SCL programming language create a new function with the name preprocessing in the project tree in Program blocks Add new block Open the function 2 In the interface of the function preprocessing create the following tags Name Data type Input output type input 1 bool Input input 2 bool Input result bool Output 3 In the instruction...

Page 1700: ...e further processing in the project tree in Program blocks Add new block Open the function 2 In the interface of the function further processing create the following tags Name Data type Input output type result bool Input output bool Output 3 In the instruction window of the function further processing write the following program code output result 4 Call the function further processing in a progr...

Page 1701: ...re of an IO controller I device of the SIMATIC family has on the respective other s Table 5 1 Operating state changes and station failure station return Initial status Event I device response Higher level IO controller I device CPU is in RUN higher level IO controller is in RUN The I device CPU changes to STOP During the updating of the process image with the instructions UPDAT_PI and UPDAT_PO an ...

Page 1702: ...86 rack failure During the updating of the process image with the instructions UPDAT_PI and UPDAT_PO an error report is returned at the parameter RET_VAL With direct IO access to all transfer areas to the higher level IO controller depending on the type of error han dling e g call of OB 122 IO access error Call of OB 86 rack failure During the updating of the process image with the instructions UP...

Page 1703: ... when the OB 83 has been called for the input transfer areas This step can be delayed or not occur at all in the following situations Higher level IO controller is in STOP OB 83 is first called at the STOP RUN transition of the higher level IO controller The IRT communication has been disrupted sync master failure topology error OB 83 is opened only after the IRT communication has taken place Refe...

Page 1704: ...2021 A5E03444486 AL 139 I device with one port Connect an I device with only one port to a PROFINET switch that is uncoupled from the higher level IO system Connect the lower level IO system to another port of the switch as shown in the following figure Figure 5 17 I device with one port ...

Page 1705: ...5 2021 A5E03444486 AL I device with two ports With an I device with two ports connect one port uncoupled from the higher level IO system to the port of the PROFINET switch Use the second port for the lower level IO system as shown in the following figure Figure 5 18 I device with two ports ...

Page 1706: ...ollowing figure Figure 5 19 I device with three or more ports 5 2 9 Boundary conditions when using I devices Note the following boundary conditions when using I devices Bandwidth The number of addresses of the configured transfer areas affects the usable bandwidth of the I device Bandwidth of the transfer areas bandwidth of the lower level IO system total bandwidth used on the I device If the addr...

Page 1707: ... device supports the PROFIenergy protocol this property is saved in its PROFINET GSD file and is available for configuration in an engineering system For S7 1500 CPUs as intelligent I O devices I devices you have the option with STEP 7 V13 service pack 1 or later to set PROFIenergy support for each transfer area If you have selected the Enable PROFIenergy communication option for a transfer area a...

Page 1708: ...energy with I devices Once the I device is fully configured generate the GSD file for the I device and import this file in the project for the I O controller The GSD file generated contains an entry that specifies that the I device supports the PROFIenergy profile To address the I device for example for the PE command PE_START_END use the hardware identifier of the PROFIenergy supporting transfer ...

Page 1709: ...gher level IO controller can be reached in this case the I device CPU signals an error using its ERROR LED As of firmware version 2 9 of an S7 1500 ET 200SP ET 200pro CPU you can locally disable or enable the I device function in the user program of the I device CPU You use the D_ACT_DP instruction for this After disabling the function the I device CPU no longer signals an error using its ERROR LE...

Page 1710: ...O controller used for line control for example is not necessary in every machine In this case the user program can disable the I device function in the I device CPU with the instruction D_ACT_DP for example during startup Two production lines are shown schematically in the figure below The same user program runs in both CPUs with I device configuration The I device in line 1 is controlled by a hig...

Page 1711: ...re available in the station When the vehicles exit the station As soon as passengers are seated in the vehicle and the vehicle is closed the higher level IO controller issues the start signal Along the entire track the vehicles are traveling independently and do not have a connection to the higher level IO controller Because this state does not represent an error no errors should be signaled via t...

Page 1712: ...at the higher level IO controller CPU 1518 4 PN DP PLC_2 Figure 5 22 Example Enable I device D_ACT_DP is an asynchronous instruction Processing extends over multiple calls You have started the job by calling D_ACT_DP with REQ 1 in the startup OB of the I device CPU You can find additional information on the D_ACT_DP instruction in the STEP 7 online help Disabling the I device function at a PROFINE...

Page 1713: ...h disabled I device function is no longer available for the data exchange with a higher level IO controller The higher level IO controller can be reached again when the I device function was enabled in the user program of the I device CPU When an I device that has been active on an IO controller disables itself all application relations ARs that were set up between the I device and the IO controll...

Page 1714: ...ccess errors I O data failure in hardware component for example because access to the I O data of the I device is already possible even though the data has not been declared as valid by the IO controller yet These messages are incoming and outgoing error events that can be neglected The behavior of IO controller and I device in case of a station failure and station return still applies as describe...

Page 1715: ...device is assigned to the same IO controller If sensors that are physically close to each other must provide data to different IO controllers several IO devices are required The Shared Device function allows the modules or submodules of an IO device to be divided up among different IO controllers Thus allowing flexible automation concepts You have for example the possibility of combining I O modul...

Page 1716: ...n the CPU manuals Configuring the access The IO device must be present in several projects so that the modules or submodules of an IO device can be assigned to different IO controllers A separate project is required for each IO controller You use the Shared device parameter of the interface module to determine the modules or submodules to which the IO controller has access If the local IO controll...

Page 1717: ...he option of setting the short send clock of 0 25 ms for the CPU The CPU operates the slow IO device with the send clock of 1 ms for example Rules for the configuration IO controllers that use the shared device are created in different projects In each project care must be taken that the shared device is configured identically in each station Only one IO controller may ever have full access to a s...

Page 1718: ...therefore other CPUs are missing in the loaded configuration These modules or submodules are therefore displayed neither in the CPU web server nor in the CPU display Response in the event of fault Information about how PROFINET IO controllers behave in the event of a fault when accessing the data of a shared device is available in this FAQ https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109572804...

Page 1719: ...d submodules from the hardware catalog in the device overview table 7 Assign the module parameters 8 Save the project Procedure Creating project 2 To create the second project with a shared device follow these steps 1 Start STEP 7 once again A new instance of STEP 7 opens 2 In the new instance create a new project with the name Shared Device 2 3 Insert for example a CPU 1513 1 PN in the network vi...

Page 1720: ...les and submodules 3 Keep the PLC1 setting for all modules and submodules that are to remain in the address range of the local CPU Select the setting for all modules and submodules that are to be located in the address range of the CPU from the Shared Device 2 project PLC2 This means that an IO controller outside the project is to have access to the module or submodule Figure 5 25 Configuring shar...

Page 1721: ...set for the shared device in all projects Check whether the same S7 subnet ID is set in all projects for the subnet to which the shared device is connected subnet properties General area in the Inspector window Note If you make changes to the shared device Make the same changes in each project on the shared device Make sure that only one IO controller has access to a module or submodule Procedure ...

Page 1722: ...a Enter the read send clock in the engineering tool Special consideration If you configure all IO controllers that have access to the shared device in STEP 7 TIA Portal or V5 5 you can set shorter send clocks on the IO controller than supported by the shared device send clock adaptation Compiling and loading You must compile the configurations for the different IO controllers and load them to the ...

Page 1723: ...o configure the I device The PROFINET GSD variant of PLC I Device is used in the PLC_1 and PLC_2 projects in order to assign the transfer areas in the respective higher level IO controller Shared I device concept For the introduction of the shared I device concept two roles are distinguished The role of manufacturer e g machine manufacturer The manufacturer configures and programs an I device that...

Page 1724: ...shared device Special consideration The I device is configured without a higher level IO controller As a result only the local I O addresses of the transfer area are available Address in the I device in order to create the user program for editing the addresses from the transfer area The I device that has been completely configured except for the connection to the higher level IO controller is loa...

Page 1725: ...in configuring a PROFINET IO system with this shared I device If all uses of this I device will be configured with STEP 7 V13 it is sufficient to install the GSD file in STEP 7 You configure the I device as a GSD variant on the PROFINET IO system in the projects involved In STEP 7 V13 this I device can be found under Other field devices PROFINET IO PLCs CPs following installation Figure 5 27 Confi...

Page 1726: ...transfer areas to not assigned As a result of this setting the local IO controller has no access to this transfer area and it can therefore be assigned to another IO controller in another project Figure 5 28 Setting the access to the shared I device You adapt the addresses from the view of the IO controller in the device overview To open the device overview double click the I device Figure 5 29 I ...

Page 1727: ...e PLC I device project To create the project with a shared I device follow these steps 1 Start STEP 7 2 Create a new project with the name PLC I device 3 Insert for example a CPU 1518 4 PN DP from the hardware catalog in the network view Assign the name PLC I device 4 Double click the IO device and configure all required modules and submodules ...

Page 1728: ...terface X1 Enable the IO device option in the Operating mode area Configure the transfer areas in the Operating mode I device configuration area The Address in IO controller column remains empty because no IO controller is assigned Note To change an input area to an output area and vice versa you must navigate to the area of the corresponding transfer area Figure 5 30 Changing the address type for...

Page 1729: ... PLC_1 5 Insert the I device from the hardware catalog Hardware catalog Other field devices PROFINET IO PLCs CPs 6 Assign the IO controller PLC_1 to the I device 7 Select the Shared Device area in the properties of the I device In the table all transfer areas and the PROFINET interface are assigned to the local IO controller PLC_1 8 Define the transfer areas to which the PLC_1 CPU should not have ...

Page 1730: ...rom the PLC_2 project This means that an IO controller outside the project is to have access to the transfer area 4 Follow the same procedure for the remaining projects 5 Finally check whether the settings for access are complementary for each module or submodule in both projects This means that if the local CPU has access in one project the option must be set in the other project and vice versa S...

Page 1731: ...k on the shared device Advanced options Real time settings area Enter the read send clock in the engineering tool Special consideration If you configure all IO controllers that have access to the shared I device in STEP 7 TIA Portal or V5 5 you can set shorter send clocks on the IO controller than supported by the shared device send clock adaptation Compiling and loading You must compile the confi...

Page 1732: ...shared input shared output functionality The module internal shared input MSI function allows an input module to make its input data available to up to four IO controllers Each controller has read access to the same channels The following figure shows the MSI functionality CPU 1516 3 PN DP as IO controller CPU 1511 1 PN as IO controller Input module with MSI Read access to the input channels of th...

Page 1733: ...IO controller CPU 1511 1 PN as IO controller Output module with MSO Write access to the output channels of the output module Read access to the output channels of the output module Figure 5 32 Example configuration with MSO Advantages of MSI MSO Module internal shared input shared output MSI MSO offers the following advantages Real time acquisition in multiple CPUs Lower costs due to saving on add...

Page 1734: ...catalog as of V13 The IM 155 5 PN ST interface module and the modules support MSI MSO as of firmware version V2 0 0 Boundary conditions for the use of MSI MSO Note the following boundary conditions The use of MSI MSO is not possible in the case of module grouping Modules with MSI MSO cannot be operated in isochronous mode The maximum number of IO controllers is dependent on the interface module To...

Page 1735: ...e following figure shows a digital input module with the basic submodule and three MSI submodules Each submodule is assigned to an IO controller Diagnostics and parameter assignment of the digital input module can be performed from the IO controller 1 via the basic submodule Read access Parameter assignment and system diagnostics Figure 5 33 DI module with MSI submodules Value status Quality Infor...

Page 1736: ...e is assigned has write access to the outputs of the module The basic submodule therefore occupies output addresses in the process image of the IO controller The IO controllers to which the MSO submodules are assigned have read access to the outputs of the module MSO submodules therefore occupy input addresses in the process image of the IO controller The following figure shows a digital output mo...

Page 1737: ...e following errors has occurred The basic submodule parameters have not yet been assigned not ready for operation The connection between the IO controller and the basic submodule has been interrupted The IO controller of the basic submodule is in STOP or POWER OFF state Configuring I O modules with MSI MSO submodules Requirements Configuration software STEP 7 as of V13 IO device supports MSI MSO f...

Page 1738: ...ubmodules under Module parameters DQ configuration or AW configuration in the area Copy of module for shared device MSO Figure 5 35 Configuring I O modules with MSI MSO Assigning MSI MSO submodules to an IO controller You can assign the submodules in a shared device to an IO controller For more information refer to Configuring shared device Page 1 Configuring access to a shared device and the modu...

Page 1739: ...cation modules To set up a ring topology with media redundancy you need to bring together the two free ends of a linear bus topology in one device Closing the linear bus topology to form a ring is achieved with two ports ring ports of a device in the ring One device of the resulting ring then takes over the role of the redundancy manager All other devices in the ring are redundancy clients Redunda...

Page 1740: ...ion of the ring the redundancy manager connects its two ring ports This substitute path once again restores a functioning connection between all remaining devices in the form of a linear bus topology The time between the ring interruption and restoration of a functional linear topology is known as the reconfiguration time As soon as the interruption has been eliminated one of the two ring ports is...

Page 1741: ... other via their ring ports All devices in the ring belong to the same redundancy domain A device in the ring takes on the task of a redundancy manager One device only has the role of Manager No other device may have the role of Manager Or One device or multiple devices in the ring have the role of Manager auto The devices with the role of Manager auto then negotiate between themselves which devic...

Page 1742: ... and ensure that the devices are in data exchange mode i e the application relations ARs are set up 3 Close the ring Boundary conditions MRP and RT RT operation is possible with the use of MRP Note The RT communication is disrupted station failure if the reconfiguration time of the ring is greater than the selected response monitoring time of the IO device This is why you should select a response ...

Page 1743: ...ication example https support industry siemens com cs ww de view 109753067 5 4 2 Configuring media redundancy Configuring MRP Proceed as follows to create a PROFINET IO configuration with MRP in STEP 7 1 Generate a ring via the port interconnections in the topology view First interconnect the devices to a line topology Connect the unassigned port of the last device in the line with the unassigned ...

Page 1744: ... devices in the MRP role column Figure 5 39 MRP domain Automatic MRP configuration You can also have the media redundancy roles assigned automatically for your PROFINET devices in the ring To have the media redundancy roles assigned automatically click the Configure MRP automatically button STEP 7 automatically assigns the media redundancy role for each device in the ring After the automatic MRP c...

Page 1745: ... as ring port 1 or ring port 2 The drop down list box shows the selection of possible ports for each device type If the ports are set at the factory then the fields are unavailable If you use single stage commissioning use the preset ring ports in STEP 7 Diagnostic interrupts If diagnostic interrupts to the MRP state are to be output in the local CPU select the Diagnostic interrupts check box The ...

Page 1746: ...To realize media redundancy with short update times the PROFINET devices participating in the ring send their data in both directions The devices receive this data at both ring ports so that there is no reconfiguration time Requirements for media redundancy with MRPD All the devices of the ring must support MRPD for example interface module IM 155 6 PN HS as of firmware version 4 0 You have config...

Page 1747: ...enced If the interruption takes place on a redundant part ring real time communication is not influenced No redundancy No redundant path between the IO device and its IO controller communication is always influenced The figure below shows the redundancy levels of the IO devices for an example configuration with MRPD The three devices in the ring and the switch have the redundancy level Full redund...

Page 1748: ...ing topologies PROFINET with STEP 7 Function Manual 05 2021 A5E03444486 AL 183 The figure below shows the display of the redundancy levels in STEP 7 for the example configuration Figure 5 41 Display of the redundancy levels in STEP 7 ...

Page 1749: ...he last IO device on each individual line The switch operates as a manager The manager must have two ring ports for each ring Multiple rings are possible The SCALANCE X414 as of firmware version 3 10 for example supports up to 4 rings The manager monitors all the rings individually It checks for each particular ring an MRP domain whether the transmission path is intact To do this it uses an MRP in...

Page 1750: ...ple rings To configure an MRP configuration with multiple rings follow these steps 1 In the topology view interconnect the ring ports of the devices that are intended to belong to an MRP domain to form a ring 2 Select the PROFINET IO system in the network view 3 In the Inspector window navigate to Properties General PROFINET MRP domains in the Ring interconnections field This field shows you all t...

Page 1751: ... two rings separately To do this it uses two MRP instances One MRP instance checks whether all devices in ring 1 are reachable another instance monitors whether all devices in ring 2 are reachable only one device in each case in the example You can configure each MRP instance separately The following figure shows the two MRP instances in the manager PROFINET interface of the switch Here in the exa...

Page 1752: ...n 1 are the PROFINET interface of the CPU as the Client and the MRP interface 1 of the PROFINET interface of the switch as the Manager Figure 5 45 Ring 1 The following figure shows Ring 2 mrpdomain 2 The participants of the mrpdomain 2 are the PROFINET interface of the IO device as the Client and the MRP instance 2 of the PROFINET interface of the switch as the Manager Figure 5 46 Ring 2 ...

Page 1753: ...ain with an MRP manager and MRP clients As MRP managers in the rings the PROFINET devices support MRP interconnection see technical specifications of the devices S7 1500 CPUs as of firmware version V2 9 support MRP interconnection If you use PROFINET devices with more than 2 ports as MRP clients in the ring then MRP interconnection is binding for these devices For a device without MRP interconnect...

Page 1754: ... the primary connection primary link between the two rings is interrupted the secondary connection secondary link takes over the data exchange between the rings after a short reconfiguration time Primary MIC Media Redundancy Interconnection Manager MIM Secondary link Secondary Coupled MIC Primary Coupled MIC Primary link Figure 5 47 Example Redundant connection of 2 rings with MRP interconnection ...

Page 1755: ... primary link and the MIM blocks its interconnection port Link Down of the primary connection In the figure below the primary connection was interrupted Link Down Link Down Status message Link Down primary connection Blocking of the interconnection port is released Data exchange via secondary connection Figure 5 48 Link Down of the primary connection With a Link Down of the primary connection Prim...

Page 1756: ... of the SCALANCE switches used as MIM and MIC e g SCALANCE XC200 XM 400 XR 500 For the configuration follow the step by step instruction in the configuration manual SCALANCE XM 400 XR 500 Web Based Management WBM https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109760840 Reconfiguration and watchdog timer The reconfiguration time of the rings is typically less than 200 milliseconds In order for th...

Page 1757: ... Real time communication performance Real time communication and IT communication Industrial communication especially in the factory automation and process automation requires a punctual and deterministic data transmission This is why for the cyclic exchange of time critical IO user data PROFINET IO does not use TCP IP it uses real time communication RT or isochronous real time communication IRT f...

Page 1758: ...ional value such as topology detection diagnostics device exchange without exchangeable medium PG you have to use switches that support the PROFINET standard according to the IEC 61158 standard In the integrated switches of PROFINET devices and PROFINET switches e g the SCALANCE product family PROFINET functions in accordance with the PROFINET standard are implemented and can be used without restr...

Page 1759: ...n be transferred at reserved synchronized intervals without being influenced also by higher other network loads such as TCP IP communication or additional real time communication Advantages PROFINET with IRT is synchronized communication in reserved time intervals With IRT you have the option to be able to control time critical applications such as motion control via PROFINET With IRT you use furt...

Page 1760: ...ical specifications of the CPU manual Note IWLAN and IRT PROFINET devices that are connected to PROFINET IO via access points do not support IRT Synchronization The prerequisite for the IRTcommunication is a synchronization cycle for all PROFINET devices in a sync domain for distributing a mutual time basis A synchronism of the transmission cycle of the PROFINET devices within a sync domain is ach...

Page 1761: ... during this time range RT data real time communication The cyclic RT data is transferred in this time range RT data is prioritized over normal TCP IP data TCP IP data or Ethernet frames can have a priority of between 1 and 7 RT data have the Priority 6 TCP IP data standard communication Standard communication e g TCP IP is transmitted in the remaining interval of the communication cycle In STEP 7...

Page 1762: ...eption times are guaranteed for all topologies Hardware support through special Ethernet controllers is required Not required Required Isochronous application Yes Starting time of the isochronous application The point in time for the reception of the data is planned exactly Application can be started synchronized to the cycle 5 5 5 Configuring PROFINET IO with IRT Introduction If you want to confi...

Page 1763: ...ng IO system for the use of IRT 1 Select the PROFINET interface of the IO controller 2 In the Inspector window navigate to Advanced options Real time settings Synchronization Figure 5 51 IRT configuring sync master 3 Assign the IO controller the role of sync master under Synchronization role 4 Select the PROFINET interfaces of an associated IO device ...

Page 1764: ... time settings Synchronization Figure 5 52 IRT configuring sync slave 6 Activate the RT class IRT The IO device will then automatically be assigned the synchronization role sync slave 7 You can check and correct your settings at any time using the Domain settings button Or 1 Highlight the PROFINET IO system in the network view 2 Click on the PROFINET IO system ...

Page 1765: ... synchronization role sync slave You can now load the configuration to the relevant devices with PROFINET IRT 5 5 6 Setting the bandwidth usage for the send clock Bandwidth level For PROFINET IO with IRT you can specify the maximum portion of the send cycle that you want to use for cyclic IO communication You have the following setting options for the bandwidth usage in STEP 7 Maximum 25 cyclic IO...

Page 1766: ...n the network view of STEP 7 2 In the Inspector window go to Properties General PROFINET Domain management Sync domains Name of the sync domain Details 3 Select the desired level of bandwidth usage from the Bandwidth use drop drop down list box Figure 5 54 Setting the bandwidth usage For information on how to set the bandwidth usage for IRT with maximum performance refer to the section Configurati...

Page 1767: ...ed among separate network branches so that a sufficient bandwidth reserve will be available for future expansions If you integrate standard Ethernet devices into the network topology or use standard Ethernet communication take into account the network load caused by standard Ethernet and adapt the network topology as appropriate max bandwidth 100 Mbps For communication with higher level networks w...

Page 1768: ...he port which is currently connected to the PROFINET device of another sync domain In a sync domain you can only configure one sync master at a time A PROFINET IO system may only be part of a single sync domain If you configure PROFINET devices in a sync domain and want to synchronize with IRT the PROFINET devices concerned must support IRT communication If possible use the same PROFINET device as...

Page 1769: ...with an I device relationship Figure 5 56 I device connection over 2nd PNIO interface Distribution by automation tasks For automation tasks with high performance and deterministic requirements use PROFINET with IRT over the X1 interface For other tasks that you can implement with RT use the X2 interface If you use interface X2 as the PROFINET IO interface for one of the following CPUs this can aff...

Page 1770: ...hat are shared by multiple IO systems The figure below shows a configuration with two PROFINET IO systems that use the same paths Shared path Figure 5 57 Multi controller application with shared path In the figure below the two PROFINET IO systems do not use shared paths Figure 5 58 Multi controller application with separate paths If separation is not possible Increase the update time for the affe...

Page 1771: ... you use the X1 interface of an S7 1500 CPU as the IO controller or I device the Limit data infeed into the network function is always enabled Example If you are not using the X1 interface of an S7 1500 CPU as IO controller or I device you can enable or disable the function Uses of the limitation of the data infeed to the network Division of the bandwidth for standard Ethernet communication betwee...

Page 1772: ... to the following improvements for PROFINET with IRT Reduction of runtime delays in the IO devices Increase in the bandwidth for cyclic IO data Reduction of the bandwidth used for PROFINET frames Reduction of the send clocks The improvements achieved with the performance upgrade mean that you can operate your PROFINET IO system with more devices with the same send clock or the same number of devic...

Page 1773: ...of the bandwidth in a line topology The following figure shows how Dynamic Frame Packing works based on the example of a frame containing the user data for 3 IO devices The PROFINET IO frame contains the user data for all 3 IO devices green blue and orange The PROFINET IO frame reaches the first IO device The IO device takes its user data green from the frame and forwards the remaining frame The P...

Page 1774: ...watchdog time As soon as a maximum frame size for the DFP group is exceeded or a maximum number of members for a DFP group is reached Dynamic Frame Packing automatically opens a new DFP group STEP 7 shows the DFP groups in Domain management Sync domains Name of the sync domain Device in the IO devices box Figure 5 61 Display of the DFP groups in STEP 7 Note Dynamic frame packing with high watchdog...

Page 1775: ...hey are reassembled to the original TCP IP frame Fragmentation is a requirement for cycle times lower than 250 µs In these short send clocks you can use more bandwidth for cyclic IO data since the fragments of the standard Ethernet frames use significantly less bandwidth than a complete standard Ethernet frame The following figure shows how fragmentation works A standard Ethernet frame with TCP IP...

Page 1776: ...T IO system This results in decisive performance advantages particularly in line ring and tree topologies The figure below compares the throughput of a PROFINET IO frame in an IO device with and without fast forwarding Start Both PROFINET frames reach the IO device The IO devices start to check the frames for the frame ID After 320 ns Without fast forwarding The IO device is still checking the PRO...

Page 1777: ...ffects You can set send clocks of 187 5 µs and 125 µs for example CPU 1518 4 PN DP or 187 5 µs for example CPU 1517 3 PN DP see Technical specifications in the CPU device manuals You can set more bandwidth use for cyclic IO data You can use the option Allows the use of fast forwarding Requirements S7 1500 CPU as of firmware version V2 0 Enable the Make high performance possible option Follow these...

Page 1778: ...n list select Maximum 90 cyclic IO data Focus on cyclic IO data Figure 5 65 Using more bandwidth for cyclic IO data Note Bandwidth usage in isochronous mode If you operate your PROFINET IO system in isochronous mode avoid using the setting for the bandwidth usage Maximum 90 cyclic IO data Focus on cyclic IO data Setting low send clocks example CPU 1518 4 PN DP Requirement The Make high performance...

Page 1779: ...O data Focus on cyclic IO data The PROFINET IO interface of the controller supports fragmentation if all the ports except one are deactivated Optimizing port settings for low send clocks You can further optimize the bandwidth use in your PROFINET IO system by using cables with a short cable length 20 m or a short signal delay max 0 12 µs between the devices To configure cables with a shorter lengt...

Page 1780: ...ding if all the ports except one are deactivated Follow these steps to allow fast forwarding 1 Select the PROFINET IO system in the network view of STEP 7 2 In the Inspector window go to Properties General PROFINET Domain management Sync domains Name of the sync domain 3 Enable the Allows the use of fast forwarding option Figure 5 68 Allowing fast forwarding Note Fast forwarding and IPv6 The opera...

Page 1781: ...iguration for IRT with high performance Use the following settings for the Sync domain Enable the Make high performance possible option Set the send clock to 125 µs Enable the Allows the use of fast forwarding option Standard Ethernet communication for IRT with high performance Standard Ethernet communication is still possible even in a PROFINET IO system with high performance Keep in mind that yo...

Page 1782: ...Assuming public transport were to operate at maximum speed while reducing stop times at the passenger terminals to absolute minimum the last thing many potential passengers would notice of the departing contraption are its red tail lights The overall travel time is however decided by the train bus or underground railway clock because well adjusted timing is essential to a good service This also ap...

Page 1783: ...l loops through constant calculable dead times Determinism reliable reproducibility of response times Consistent simultaneous reading in of input data Consistent simultaneous output of output data 5 7 2 Use of isochronous mode An isochronous system acquires measured values and process data within a fixed system cycle processes the signals and outputs them synchronously to the process Isochronous m...

Page 1784: ...ft Solution Figure 5 71 Measuring of camshafts With use of isochronous mode the measured values are simultaneously acquired at the various measuring points at fixed times This results in the following workflow Continuously rotate the camshaft During continuous rotation synchronously measure the positions and cam displacements Process the next cam shaft Thus during a single rotation of the camshaft...

Page 1785: ...t data to outputting output data The basic time sequence of all components involved in synchronization is explained below Measured value acquisition in the process Isochronous read in of input data Transport of input data to the IO controller CPU via the subnet Further processing in the isochronous application of the CPU Transport of output data to the outputting IO device via the subnet Isochrono...

Page 1786: ...ways configured by you TO is the time for the compensation arising from the backplane bus and the digital to analog conversion within the IO device DP slave TO is the flashbulb for the outputs The synchronized outputs are output at this time Time TO can be configured by STEP 7 or by you Let time TO be assigned automatically by STEP 7 STEP 7 automatically calculates a common minimum TO 5 7 4 Config...

Page 1787: ...e application cycle You set the delay time in the properties of the isochronous mode interrupt OB A shorter delay time enables you to increase the processing time for your user program in the isochronous mode interrupt OB Additional configurations for isochronous mode on PROFINET IO Setting IRT as the RT class for the interconnected PROFINET interfaces A precondition for isochronous operation on P...

Page 1788: ...pen A S7 1500 CPU has been placed e g CPU 1516 3 PN DP An IM 155 5 PN HF interface module ET 200MP has been placed and networked with the CPU via PROFINET IO All requirements for an IRT configuration are met The ports of the networked PROFINET interfaces of the CPU and interface module are interconnected topology configuration The RT class of the PROFINET interface of the interface module is set t...

Page 1789: ...ronous mode on PROFINET IO 4 Make the following settings in the I O addresses area Select the Isochronous mode option Select a process image partition e g process image partition 1 Click the Organization block drop down list Click the Add button or select an existing OB A dialog box for selecting organization blocks opens Select the Synchronous Cycle OB Confirm the selection with OK In the case of...

Page 1790: ...uration in STEP 7 You have created an isochronous mode interrupt OB Synchronous Cycle OB 6x The isochronous mode interrupt OB is open Setting the application cycle The application cycle is a multiple of data cycle T_DC send clock You use the application cycle setting to reduce the CPU utilization caused by execution of the isochronous mode interrupt OB In the following example the OB is called onl...

Page 1791: ...C_PO instructions in the execution window of the application cycle To set the delay time for your isochronous mode application follow these steps 1 Open the Properties dialog of the isochronous mode interrupt OB under consideration 2 In the area navigation click the Isochronous mode group 3 Clear the Automatic setting check box 4 Enter your desired delay time in Delay time ms Figure 5 75 Setting t...

Page 1792: ...n only within the permitted execution window The execution window stretches from the end of the cyclic data exchange to the point in time before the end of T_DC at which the outputs can still be copied in time The data exchange must be started within this time window If the execution window is violated by the processing of the SYNC_PI and SYNC_PO instructions the instructions indicate a correspond...

Page 1793: ...nstruction outputs the data changed by the user pro gram via the process image partition Signal sequence in the IPO model The following figure shows the signal sequence in the IPO model from the acquisition and the processing in the CPU to the output of the process values Execution of isochronous mode interrupt OB SYNC_PI instruction SYNC_PO instruction Isochronous read in of process values on I O...

Page 1794: ...e interrupt OB For programming according to the OIP model 1 Call the SYNC_PO instruction at the start of the isochronous mode interrupt OB 2 Then call the SYNC_PI instruction 3 Then call the actual user program Table 5 4 Programming according to the OIP model Step Action Explanation 1 Output O The SYNC_PO instruction outputs the data that was changed by the user program in the previous cycle via t...

Page 1795: ...on SYNC_PO instruction Isochronous read in of process values on I O module at time TI Isochronous output of process values on I O module at time TO Figure 5 77 Signal sequence in the OIP model At time TI the process values are read in isochronously on the I O The data is processed over 2 application cycles in the OIP model The output data is always available on the I O in the following application...

Page 1796: ...nd isochronous mode The data exchange takes place via transfer areas Direct data exchange between two S7 1500 CPUs 1 1 The figure below shows the direct data exchange between two S7 1500 CPUs The output transfer areas of the sending S7 1500 CPU correspond to the input transfer areas of the receiving S7 1500 CPU Transfer relation between the user program and the transfer area The user program and t...

Page 1797: ...ving S7 1500 CPU has its own input transfer areas Transfer relation between the user program and the transfer area The user program and the transfer areas ex change input and output data via this path Communication relation for direct data exchange You configure the communication relations in STEP 7 You create transfer areas for direct data exchange in the properties of the communication relations...

Page 1798: ...g synchronization of the process image With direct I O access to the input transfer areas of the direct data exchange OB 122 I O access error is called if present Incoming diagnostic message I O data failure in hardware component When the sender goes from STOP to RUN the receiver behaves as follows Call of OB 83 Pull plug interrupt for input transfer areas of the direct data exchange Up until the ...

Page 1799: ...onnected Setting up the communication relation for direct data exchange To set up the communication relation for direct data exchange between two S7 1500 CPUs follow these steps 1 Select the PROFINET interface X1 of the sending S7 1500 CPU 2 Change to the table view of the network view tab I O communication The PROFINET interface X1 of the CPU is shown in the Partner 1 column 3 In the Partner 2 co...

Page 1800: ...on relation for direct data exchange 2 Navigate to the properties of the communication relation to General Direct data exchange Transfer areas 3 Create a new transfer area by double clicking on Add new Assign a meaningful name for the transfer area A transfer area for direct data exchange is created Figure 5 82 Transfer area for direct data exchange The communication direction of the transfer area...

Page 1801: ...block Assign the transfer area to an isochronous mode interrupt OB or the MC Servo OB Assign the transfer area to an isochronous mode interrupt OB or the MC Servo OB Process image Select a process image partition e g PIP 1 If you have assigned MC Servo as the organi zation block STEP 7 automatically sets PIP OB Servo as the process image Select a process image partition e g PIP 1 If you have assig...

Page 1802: ... sync slaves Ports are interconnected Setting up the communication relations for direct data exchange To set up the connection for direct data exchange between multiple S7 1500 CPUs follow these steps 1 Select the PROFINET interface X1 of the sending CPU 2 Change to the table view of the network view I O communication tab The PROFINET interface X1 of the CPU is shown in the Partner 1 column 3 In t...

Page 1803: ...fer area at the PROFINET interface of the sender You then configure the transfer areas between the sender and the other receivers You configure these transfer areas at the PROFINET interfaces of the receivers Figure 5 85 Order of configuration of transfer areas in the case of multiple receivers To configure a transfer area for direct data exchange follow these steps 1 Select the PROFINET interface...

Page 1804: ...ET interface of a receiver for which a transfer area is not yet set up e g receiver 2 6 Change to the table view of the network view to I O communication The communication relation for direct data exchange with the sender is displayed Figure 5 87 Connection for direct data exchange in receiver 2 7 Select the communication relation 8 Navigate to the properties to General Direct data exchange Transf...

Page 1805: ...nder as the output transfer area Figure 5 88 Transfer area for direct data exchange of multiple IO controllers A transfer area for direct data exchange between receiver 2 and the sender is configured Editing the transfer area Set the properties of the transfer area under General Direct data exchange Name of transfer area Detail of the transfer area Figure 5 89 Properties of the transfer area ...

Page 1806: ...on block STEP 7 automatically sets PIP OB Servo as the process image Data length bytes Set the size of the transfer area Downloading the configuration to the device Rules Download the configuration to all CPUs involved If you make changes to the configuration of the direct data exchange download these changes to all CPUs involved 5 9 Device replacement without exchangeable medium Definition IO dev...

Page 1807: ...on with series machines that have the same configuration and set topology It is no longer necessary to assign device names via exchangeable medium PG Which devices support device replacement without exchangeable medium An overview of the devices that support the Device replacement without exchangeable medium function is provided in this FAQ https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 36752540...

Page 1808: ...5 91 Example configuration of device replacement without exchangeable medium For the device replacement the following information is available to the IO controller PROFINET device Device alias Controller port 001 Switch Switch port 002 Controller port 001 Press port 001 Pump Press port 002 Switch port 001 Mill Mill port 002 Press Pump port 004 Switch The IO device with the device name Mill fails i...

Page 1809: ...ther inserting an exchangeable medium or via the programming device The CPU identifies the IO device by using these device names Under certain circumstances replacing an IO device can be done without inserting an exchangeable medium or without the PG Requirements The topology of the PROFINET IO system with the respective IO devices must be configured By configuring the topology the neighbor relati...

Page 1810: ...s you can overwrite PROFINET device names of IO devices This option reduces the effort during automatic commissioning for example when replacing a device Requirements IO controller supports the Permit overwriting of device names of all assigned IO devices option for example CPU 1215C DC DC DC as of firmware version 4 0 How the Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO devices ...

Page 1811: ... the PROFINET device names are overwritten as defined in the data record CAUTION Error at partial commissioning If device names are assigned incorrectly during partial commissioning or incorrect wiring these have to be deleted manually after a correction of the wiring in order to attain correct assignment of the device names Behavior during operation As soon as you replace a device the new device ...

Page 1812: ...ws a scenario whereby the connections of two identical PROFINET cables are swapped at two switch ports Because the IO controller assigns the device names according to the preset topology the incorrect connection of the devices has serious effects on the naming Due to the control of different actuators the plant could become hazardous in this case Switch with connected PROFINET cables Device A devi...

Page 1813: ... be loaded from precisely one project with an engineered maximum configuration IO system options The standard machine project covers all variants options of the IO system An IO system option can be integrated in an existing network locally using simple tools Flexibility is provided in more ways than one With suitable configuration adaptation of the IP address parameters of the IO controller is pos...

Page 1814: ...uration control refer to the system manual S7 1500 ET 200MP http support automation siemens com WW view en 59191792 5 10 1 Multiple use IO systems 5 10 1 1 What you should know about multiple use IO systems Multiple use automation solutions For a flexible reusable automation solution as is the case with series machines the following use cases are typical The machine and therefore also the PROFINET...

Page 1815: ...iple Principle The automation components for a machine include a PROFINET IO system consisting of an IO controller PROFINET interface of a CPU and the IO devices assigned to it With the Multiple use IO system setting for the IO system you turn a STEP 7 project into a Standard machine project The Multiple use IO system setting triggers various settings and checks of the configuration by STEP 7 The ...

Page 1816: ...g a PROFINET GSD STEP 7 cannot check for compliance with this rule In this case you are responsible for ensuring compliance with the rule I device in multiple use IO system The PROFINET interface is operated as IO device No other IO system is connected here A lower level IO system on the I device is connected to another PROFINET interface Figure 5 93 Example configuration for Multiple use IO syste...

Page 1817: ... to set the IP address parameters in the project For multiple use IO systems however this strategy is not possible since the IP address parameters of the IO controller and the assigned IO devices are assigned locally At the time of the configuration the IP address parameters are therefore unknown If you nevertheless want to configure communication with devices on PROFINET for example with a centra...

Page 1818: ... CPU as an example is described below To create a standard machine project follow these steps 1 Create a project 2 Configure a CPU as the IO controller for example a CPU 1518 4 PN DP as of firmware version 1 5 3 Configure the required IO devices and assign the IO devices to the IO controller 4 Configure the port interconnection between the devices 5 Select the IO system so that you can edit the pr...

Page 1819: ...name and IP address to the IO devices based on the preset topology and other settings during startup The device name of the IO devices is set to Generate PROFINET device name automatically from the configured name of the IO device The IP protocol of the IO devices is set to IP address is set by the IO controller during runtime The IO devices have no IP address initially If an IO device is not a ty...

Page 1820: ...O system If you have set the Multiple use IO system option for the IO system STEP 7 automatically sets the IP address is set by the IO controller during runtime option for the IO devices In this case the IO controller assigns the IO device an IP address that results from the locally assigned IP address of the IO controller see next section This option is appropriate if the IO device is a field dev...

Page 1821: ...STEP 7 The ports of the IO controller and IO devices are interconnected according to the configuration Procedure Observe the boundary conditions and instructions for commissioning an S7 1500 For more information on commissioning an S7 1500 CPU refer to the system manual S7 1500 ET 200MP http support automation siemens com WW view en 59191792 To adapt a standard machine locally follow these steps 1...

Page 1822: ... controller of the first machine The device name m2 and the IP address 192 168 1 20 has been assigned for the second machine Refer to the figure for the resulting device names and IP addresses Set device name and IP address on the IO controller After startup the IO devices have an updated device name configured device name device name of IO control ler and an adapted IP address IP address of IO co...

Page 1823: ...ystem for a specific application as long as the real configuration can be derived from the set configuration The configured configuration therefore represents the superset of all real configurations that can be derived from it The following figure shows an example of how two IO systems with a different number of IO devices arise from one standard machine project Figure 5 97 Example of configuratio...

Page 1824: ...devices and configuration control for IO systems can be combined the functions are independent of each other It is possible to operate variants deviating from a maximum configuration of an IO system In a standard machine project you can prepare a kit of IO devices which can be flexibly customized for various configurations using configuration control The following variations are available Variatio...

Page 1825: ...he PROFINET interface containing the information that no optional IO device is to be included in the configuration Configuration with the optional IO device In this case you use the instruction ReconfigIOSystem to transfer a data record to the PROFINET interface adding the optional IO device to the configuration Determined through parameter assignment IO Device_2 is optional IO device Configuratio...

Page 1826: ...or HMI device 2 Commissioning phase Preparing specific machine or plant for operation Integrating machine or plant in the on site network see Adapt multiple use IO systems locally Page 1 Selecting the currently existing configuration of the IO system via configured option 5 10 2 2 Configuring IO devices as optional Requirements IO controller supports configuration control for IO systems for exampl...

Page 1827: ...the system behavior is as follows The CPU is prepared for the configuration control of the IO system All IO devices are disabled Irrespective of whether you customize the configuration with the user program adding optional IO devices or make no changes to the loaded configuration You must call the instruction ReconfigIOSystem in the user program and notify the current configuration to the system T...

Page 1828: ...te or deactivate IO devices follow these steps 1 Create a data record CTRLREC for the instruction ReconfigIOSystem You can find information on the structure of the data record in the STEP 7 online help 2 Call the instruction ReconfigIOSystem and select MODE 1 to deactivate all IO devices If you set the CPU to STOP or POWER OFF state in order to modify the plant in this status for example to add an...

Page 1829: ...tivates the following IO devices All IO devices that you have not set as optional IO devices All optional IO devices listed in the control data record CTRLREC The following IO devices remain disabled Docking units IO devices changing during operation Optional IO devices that are not listed in the control data record Note Call the instruction ReconfigIOSystem for all values of the parameter MODE wi...

Page 1830: ...ample With this procedure the content of the DB is not influenced by changes to the hardware identifiers as the result of changes to the configuration The data record is to be stored in a data block and to be transmitted to the PROFINET interface of the IO controller in the user program using the instruction ReconfigIOSystem IO device_2 is configured as optional IO device Once the data record is t...

Page 1831: ...itted as the data type Line 3 Version of the data record currently V1 0 Line 4 Number of optional IO devices to be activated here 1 Line 5 List of the hardware identifiers of the IO devices inserted here as system constants Line 6 Number of port interconnections that are set in the user program here 0 Line 7 Additional data records optional Figure 5 101 Data block with control records Parameter MO...

Page 1832: ...the actual configuration of the IO system the instruction transfers the data record to the PROFINET interface which is addressed with LADDR block parame ter HW identifier of the PROFINET interface 3 All non optional IO devices in the IO system and optional IO devices that are listed in the control data record CTRLREC are enabled The optional IO devices that are not listed in the CTRLREC data recor...

Page 1833: ...ou do not list an IO device to be configured as optional IO device in the control data record or data block resp this IO device does not form part of the configuration and does not take part in data exchange with the CPU If you do not activate any optional IO device at all and work with the loaded configuration without reconfiguration you still have to follow the proceeding described in the above ...

Page 1834: ...ce number should be You set the device numbers in the Ethernet addresses PROFINET area in the Inspector window with the PROFINET interface selected Example of the assignment of device numbers with a linear topology Figure 5 102 Example Device numbers in a line topology The CPU processes the instruction ReconfigIOSystem to transfer the control data record asynchronously For this reason you must cal...

Page 1835: ...ect to the different arrangement of the units e g in the case of transport systems Each plant unit consists of a functional unit of mechanics rails or conveyor belts and electrics power supply IO device with IO modules sensors actuators motors PROFINET port for data exchange with central control The following figure shows how simply by exchanging two rail segments a new transport system is created...

Page 1836: ...vary in the different configurations you select Setting partner by user program For the example in the figure above the following port settings result Device Local port Partner port setting Explanation PLC_1 p1 p1 IO device_1 Partner of PLC_1 at port 1 is IO device_1 always IO device_1 p1 p1 PLC_1 Partner of IO device_1 at port 1 is PLC_1 always IO device_1 p2 Partner is set by user pro gram Partn...

Page 1837: ...nsidered Procedure To set the partner port for a program controlled interconnection proceed as follows 1 Select the PROFINET interface of the device IO controller or IO device whose port you want to set 2 In the properties of the PROFINET interface select the area Port interconnection Extended options Port Port interconnection 3 From the drop down list select Setting partner by user program as par...

Page 1838: ...lecting derived configuration For the following selected configuration it is shown below what the data record must look like so that the IO devices are interconnected in the planned order by the user program Figure 5 105 Example configuration Customizing arrangement of IO devices in the user program This example is based on the flexible configuration from the previous section Page 1 with the setti...

Page 1839: ...umber of specified port interconnections 3 Line 6 Port interconnection 1 local port Line 7 Port interconnection 1 partner port Line 8 Port interconnection 2 local port Line 9 Port interconnection 2 partner port Line 10 Port interconnection 3 local port Line 11 Port interconnection 3 partner port Figure 5 106 Data block with data record for port interconnections Interconnection not listed in data b...

Page 1840: ...ogy view Offline view As configured No interconnection is shown for ports with partner ports configured as Setting partner by user program Online view Ports and interconnections with deactivated IO devices are shown in a different shade of green as error free ports and interconnections of activated IO devices Representation in the Web server The names of devices are shown as configured Properties ...

Page 1841: ...er the docking station nor the first IO device of a docking unit may be optional IO devices The ports of the docking units must not be interlinked via user program When configuring IRT The order of synchronized IO devices IRT devices must be defined by the configuration and must not be changed in the different variants of a standard machine For this reason the ports of the IRT devices must not be ...

Page 1842: ...n block in the PROFINET IO system and at least one PROFIenergy capable IO device PROFIenergy device has to exist The PROFIenergy commands for example to start or end a pause are sent by the PROFIenergy controller to the individual PROFIenergy devices Each PROFIenergy device decides individually how it responds to the PROFIenergy command response is device and manufacturer specific No additional ha...

Page 1843: ...or these replies each command offers you a helper instruction that supplies the reply data to the instruction The instructions can be found in the Instructions task card of the STEP 7 program editor Configuration and programming The functions can be comfortably integrated into existing systems No configuration is required for the use of PROFIenergy However amendments to the user program are requir...

Page 1844: ...PROFIenergy with I device The application example is available here https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 41986454 5 12 Docking systems Using alternating IO devices alternating partners during operation in a docking station The following figure shows an automation cell with a docking station and several docking units Figure 5 109 Alternating IO devices partner ports in a docking system ...

Page 1845: ... units of the system Applicative conditions The following points should be observed when implementing a docking system with alternating IO devices during operation The IO devices of all docking units must be deactivated by default in the configuration At any time only one docking unit can be active i e only the IO devices of one docking unit can be activated All IO devices of other docking units m...

Page 1846: ...ROFINET function Prioritized startup can start up in an optimized fashion The number of IO devices with configuration for this PROFINET function is restricted Only a limited number of IO devices can be activated at the same time This number depends on the available D_ACT_DP resources A docking unit should not contain more than the corresponding number of IO devices If more IO devices are operated ...

Page 1847: ...vigate to the Properties tab of the inspector window and select Port interconnection in the area navigation 5 Under Partner port select the Alternative partners option 6 Select the desired partner ports To do this click Add alternative partners and choose a partner port Repeat this process until all required partner ports are connected Figure 5 110 Configuring docking systems in STEP 7 Tip You can...

Page 1848: ...e 5 111 Docking system in the topology view of STEP 7 Restriction in the interconnection The interconnection with a partner port is not possible in the following cases The partner port does not have a suitable type of cable In this case a media convertor from the catalog must be inserted The partner port is blocked deactivated The two ports that are to be interconnected belong to the same interfac...

Page 1849: ...g measures in addition to the Prioritized startup Optimize the port settings Optimize the cabling of the ports Perform measures in the user program for docking systems only These measures will accelerate the startup of IO devices even without Prioritized startup However you can only achieve the fastest startup times of about 500 ms by combining all the measures with Prioritized startup Note Startu...

Page 1850: ...evice distributed I O IO controller Switch Port setting Cabling Configured RT class of the IO device Note Startup time and RT class of the IO device An IO device with IRT communication requires longer than an IO device with RT communication for the accelerated startup The longer startup for IRT is due to the necessity of synchronizing the IO device before the communication can be set up Note IWLAN...

Page 1851: ...a short time data exchange is possible until the IO controller reacts to the error In this time the IO controller can exchange IO data with the false device During commissioning ensure that no IP addresses device names are assigned multiple times in the PROFINET IO system Advantages The PROFINET functionality prioritized startup enables PROFINET IO applications in which machine parts or tools and ...

Page 1852: ...hanger Tools 1 3 configured with Prioritized startup 5 13 3 Configuring prioritized startup Requirements You can enable the Prioritized startup PROFINET function for the IO devices distributed I O only in the following cases The IO controller used can prioritize selected IO devices during startup The IO device used supports prioritization Procedure 1 Select the IO device in the network view or dev...

Page 1853: ...st startup is a standard startup for the respective configured IO devices Note Number of IO devices distributed I O with prioritized startup You can only start up a maximum number of IO devices with the Prioritized startup PROFINET functionality within one PROFINET IO system This maximum number depends on the IO controller used 5 13 4 Optimize the port settings Optimizing port settings on the IO d...

Page 1854: ...ull duplex under Transmission rate duplex 3 Clear the Enable autonegotiation check box Figure 5 114 Optimizing port settings for accelerated startup in STEP 7 These settings are automatically applied during topology configuration for the partner port 5 13 5 Optimize the cabling of the ports Requirements You have made the following settings for the port in question to reduce the startup time of the...

Page 1855: ...he respective PROFINET devices is inverted internally Validity of the cabling rules The cabling rules described in the following paragraph apply exclusively for the situation in which you have specified a fixed port setting in STEP 7 Rules for cabling You can connect several IO devices in series using patch cables To do this connect port 2 of the IO device distributed I O with port 1 of the next I...

Page 1856: ... cycle If the IO device is replaced the device that is no longer required must be deactivated and the new device must be activated 2 If you control the Power ON command of the IO devices via the application then start the activation of the IO devices via the corresponding call of the D_ACT_DP instruction as near to the same time as possible The IO device has to be physically connected for this 3 Y...

Page 1857: ...figuring PROFINET with the redundant S7 1500R H system you must observe a few specifics e g special configuration requirements Limitations Real time communication RT with a fixed send clock of 1 ms No IRT No MRPD redundancy procedure No PROFINET with performance upgrade No isochronous mode No direct data exchange No operation as I device No access to shared devices No support of docking systems No...

Page 1858: ...ain via an alternative path 6 2 H Sync Forwarding Introduction H Sync Forwarding enables a PROFINET device with MRP to forward synchronization data synchronization frames of a S7 1500R redundant system only within the PROFINET ring In addition H Sync Forwarding forwards the synchronization data even during reconfiguration of the PROFINET ring H Sync Forwarding avoids a cycle time increase if the P...

Page 1859: ... the following scenario will result in an additional cycle time increase 1 The redundant S7 1500R system is in the RUN Redundant system state 2 The PROFINET cable which directly connects the two CPUs fails 3 The PROFINET ring is interrupted 4 The PROFINET ring is being reconfigured 5 PROFINET devices without H Sync Forwarding do not forward any H Sync frames during the reconfiguration time of the ...

Page 1860: ...rimary AR at the outputs The data of the backup AR is only saved In STEP 7 you configure system redundancy S2 for an IO device by assigning the IO device to both CPUs of the S7 1500R H redundant system Behavior in system state RUN Redundant Both CPUs are IO controllers The PROFINET communication runs simultaneously on both system redundancy ARs in each case between one of the CPUs IO controllers a...

Page 1861: ...he S7 1500R H redundant system In contrast to an IO device with S2 system redundancy a standard IO device supports only one AR The AR always exists only to the primary CPU of the S7 1500R H redundant system In STEP 7 you configure an IO device connected via the Switched S1 device function by assigning a standard IO device to both CPUs of the redundant S7 1500R H system Note Standard IO devices in ...

Page 1862: ...y CPU builds an AR to the standard IO device As soon as the new primary CPU has set up the AR the S7 1500R H redundant system has access to the inputs again and control over the outputs of the standard IO device Figure 6 3 Behavior of standard IO devices in case of failure of the primary CPU Behavior in system state RUN Solo Only the primary CPU is an IO controller PROFINET communication runs on t...

Page 1863: ...t of the S1 device You set the parameters in STEP 7 in the properties of the interface of each S1 device Update time Advanced options Real time settings IO cycle Update time Watchdog timer Advanced options Real time settings IO cycle Watchdog timer Accepted update cycles without IO data Setting a shorter changeover time of an S1 device Reduce the values of the parameters of a parameter Setting a l...

Page 1864: ... do not support H Sync Forwarding To avoid a cycle time increase when the PROFINET ring is interrupted integrate the standard IO devices behind a switch and not in the PROFINET ring Number of PROFINET devices IO devices switches S7 1500R CPUs S7 1500 CPUs V2 5 or later and HMI devices in the PROFINET ring Max 50 recommended max 16 Note Recommendation The number of devices in the PROFINET ring infl...

Page 1865: ... abbreviations for AR SR AR System redundancy AR between an IO device S2 and one of the CPUs of the redundant S7 1500R H system AR normal AR between a standard IO device and the associated IO controller All configurations use the CPU 1515R as an example The PROFINET configurations shown also work with the CPU 1513R and CPU 1517H IO devices in the PROFINET ring The redundant S7 1500R system consist...

Page 1866: ...PROFINET devices that do not support H Sync Forwarding such as standard IO devices The following figure shows a redundant S7 1500R system with connected PROFINET devices downstream of a switch IO device 1 S2 IO device 1 is located in the PROFINET ring The IO device 1 supports system redundancy S2 MRP and H Sync Forwarding Switch The switch is located in the PROFINET ring The switch supports MRP an...

Page 1867: ...place additional IO controllers with their I O downstream of a switch When determining the maximum number of IO devices inside and outside the PROFINET ring the redundant system does not detect the S7 1500 CPUs and their IO devices If you use S7 1500 CPUs you must check the maximum number yourself The following figure shows a redundant S7 1515R system An additional PROFINET IO system with a CPU 15...

Page 1868: ...21 A5E03444486 AL 303 Additional IO controllers can also be connected as I device to the redundant S7 1500R H system An I device is connected like a standard IO device to the redundant S7 1500R H system The redundant S7 1500R H system supports the use of I devices only via GSD file and as standard IO device Figure 6 7 I device downstream of a switch ...

Page 1869: ...NET IO system via a PN PN coupler In the following figure the PN PN coupler connects a redundant S7 1515R system to another PROFINET IO system The left side of the PN PN coupler is assigned to the redundant S7 1515R system The assignment is system redundant and media redundant The right side of the PN PN coupler is assigned to the CPU 1516 IO controller The PROFINET IO system of the CPU 1516 has n...

Page 1870: ...ing figure the PN PN coupler connects two redundant S7 1515R systems to each other Each of the two PN PN coupler sides are assigned to a redundant S7 1515R system Each of the two sides of the PN PN coupler are connected to the respective redundant S7 1515R system in a system redundant and media redundant manner Figure 6 9 Configuration with the PN PN coupler with two sided system redundancy S2 S2 ...

Page 1871: ...ith system redundancy S2 e g IM 155 6 PN HF as of firmware version V4 2 Procedure To assign an IO device to the redundant S7 1500R H system follow these steps 1 In the network view of STEP 7 select the PROFINET interface of the IO device 2 Using drag and drop draw a line between the PROFINET interface of the IO device and the PROFINET interface X1 of the left CPU Figure 6 10 Assigning IO device to...

Page 1872: ...der Operating mode I device communication Export Generic System Description file GSD Install the GSD file in STEP 7 HMI device as I device Direct key function The GSD files for SIMATIC Comfort Panel and SIMATIC Mobile Panel can be found in this application example https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 73502293 Assign the device configured via GSD file to the S7 1500R H redundant system ...

Page 1873: ...ontains all assignments of IO devices to the PROFINET interfaces of the redundant S7 1500R H system The Operating mode column shows how the IO device is connected to the redundant S7 1500R H system IO device S2 IO device is connected system redundant IO device S1 IO device is connected over the Switched S1 device function Figure 6 13 Display of the IO device assignments in STEP 7 ...

Page 1874: ...H system Figure 6 14 Example configuration Configuring MRP for S7 1500R H MRP role of the CPUs of the redundant S7 1500R H system As soon as you create a redundant S7 1500R H system in STEP 7 STEP 7 automatically assigns the MRP role Manager auto to the PROFINET interfaces X1 of both CPUs Defining the MRP role for additional devices of the ring in STEP 7 To specify the media redundancy for additio...

Page 1875: ... the MRP role column of the Devices table assign the MRP role Client to all the other devices of the ring Figure 6 16 S7 1500R H Assigning MRP roles for ring devices Parameter assignment for devices outside the STEP 7 project Set the MRP role Client for the devices of the ring that are not located in STEP 7 Example For a switch in the PROFINET ring set the MRP role Client via the Web interface of ...

Page 1876: ...more MRP rings Requirements for S7 1500R H In addition to the requirements for S7 1500 the following requirements are in effect for S7 1500R H The two CPUs of the redundant S7 1500R H system are located in the same ring You have configured the media redundancy role of the two CPUs as Manager auto in the ring with the two R H CPUs You have configured the following in the other rings For one or more...

Page 1877: ...1 A5E03444486 AL Topology Topology with 2 rings The following figure shows the redundant coupling based on the example of S7 1500R in 2 rings Primary MIC Media Redundancy Interconnection Manager MIM Secondary Link Secondary Coupled MIC Primary Coupled MIC Primary Link Figure 6 17 Example Redundant connection of S7 1500R in 2 rings with MRP interconnection ...

Page 1878: ...on You can find all information that generally applies to MRP interconnection and thus also to redundant S7 1500R H systems with MRP interconnection in the section MRP interconnection Page 1 for example constraints principle of operation configuration and times Tool for setting the watchdog timer For the correct setting of the watchdog timer you can use the S7 1500R H AddIn https support industry ...

Page 1879: ...g IO data data records interrupts AR is also an addressing level for diagnostic data records Asset An asset is a component of a machine or plant This can be either hardware or software firmware Automation system Programmable logic controller for the open loop and closed loop control of process chains of the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology The automation system consists of...

Page 1880: ...ailable for time critical process data and IRT for high accuracy and also isochronous processes Communications processor Communication processors are modules used for point to point and bus connections Configuring Selecting and putting together individual components of an automation system or installing necessary software and adapting it for a specific application for example by configuring the mo...

Page 1881: ...term for Automation systems for example PLC PC Distributed I O systems Field devices for example PLC PC hydraulic devices pneumatic devices Active network components for example switches routers Gateways to PROFIBUS AS interface or other fieldbus systems Device name PROFINET device name In the PROFINET IO environment the device name is a unique identifier for the PROFINET IO interface of a device ...

Page 1882: ...nd in accordance with EN 50170 Part 3 is referred to as DP slave See also Slave DPV1 The designation DPV1 refers to the functional extension of acyclic services to include new interrupts for example provided by the DP protocol The DPV1 functionality is integrated in IEC 61158 EN 50170 Volume 2 PROFIBUS Duplex Half duplex One channel is available for alternating exchange of information Full duplex ...

Page 1883: ...intelligent preprocessing unit of sub processes In its role as an IO device the I device is accordingly integrated into a higher level IO controller Industrial Ethernet Industrial Ethernet is a guideline for installing an Ethernet in an industrial environment The biggest difference from standard Ethernet is the mechanical current carrying capacity and noise immunity of the individual components In...

Page 1884: ...yte device ID as a consecutive number Every PROFINET device is assigned a worldwide unique device identifier at the factory This 6 byte long device identifier is the MAC address Maintenance Required Maintenance Demanded A Maintenance required system message can be defined for different wear parameters and an inspection of a component can be recommended for example when a certain number of operatin...

Page 1885: ...ing redundancy according to IEC 61158 and IEC 62439 MRP interconnection The MRP interconnection procedure is an extension of MRP MRP interconnection enables the redundant coupling of two or more rings with MRP in PROFINET networks MRPD MRPD Media Redundancy with Planned Duplication of Frames based on IRT and MRP To realize media redundancy with short update times the PROFINET devices participating...

Page 1886: ...e order in which the user program is executed is defined in the organization blocks Parameter 1 Tag of a STEP 7 code block 2 Tag used to set one or several characteristics of a module In delivery state every module has practical basic settings which can be modified by configuration in STEP 7 There are static and dynamic parameters PG Programming device PLC Programmable logic controller Primary AR ...

Page 1887: ...U executes the user program PROFIBUS Process Field Bus European Fieldbus standard PROFIBUS device A PROFIBUS device has at least one PROFIBUS interface with an electrical RS485 or optical polymer optical fiber POF interface PROFIBUS DP A PROFIBUS with DP protocol that complies with EN 50170 DP stands for distributed I O fast real time capable cyclic data exchange From the perspective of the user p...

Page 1888: ...on which the automation program runs PROFINET IO Device A distributed field device that is assigned to one of the IO controllers e g remote IO valve terminals frequency converters switches PROFINET IO System PROFINET IO controller with assigned PROFINET IO devices PROFINET ring Structure of a network Common structures include Linear bus topology Ring topology Star topology Tree topology Programmab...

Page 1889: ...efined time Real time communication Group error for RT and IRT PROFINET uses its own real time channel RT rather than TCP IP for communication of time critical IO user data Redundant systems Redundant systems are characterized by the fact that important automation components are present multiple times redundantly Process control is maintained if a redundant component fails Router A router intercon...

Page 1890: ...PC with communication modules and software components within a SIMATIC automation solution SIMATIC Memory Card SMC Micro Memory Card MMC Slave A slave can only exchange data after being requested to do so by the master See also DP slave SNMP The network management protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol uses the wireless UDP transport protocol It consists of two network components similar...

Page 1891: ...LAN Switched S1 device The Switched S1 device function of the CPU enables operation of standard IO devices on the S7 1500R H redundant system PROFINET communication runs on an AR between the primary CPU and the standard IO device When replacing the primary CPU the standard IO device is briefly disconnected from the S7 1500R H redundant system until the new primary CPU has set up an AR to the stand...

Page 1892: ...rform the following tasks 1 The data is broken down into packets at the sender 2 The packets are transported over the Ethernet to the correct recipient 3 At the recipient the packets are reassembled in the correct order 4 Corrupt packets continue to be sent until they are received correctly Most higher level protocols use TCP IP to perform their duties Hyper Text Transfer Protocol HTTP for example...

Page 1893: ...n the CPU operating system and user programs The user program contains all instructions declarations and data by which a plant or process can be controlled The user program is assigned to a programmable module for example CPU CM and can be structured in smaller units WAN A network that extends beyond LAN boundaries and enables for example intercontinental network communication Legal rights do not ...

Page 1894: ...through 195 D D_ACT_DP 145 282 Data access 24 Data cycle 220 Data exchange between IO systems 128 Data security Basics 42 Example 42 SCALANCE 42 Security 42 Default router 51 Delay time 224 Setting 225 Device name 48 248 Automatically assign 47 Changing 54 Exchanging without removable storage medium 52 Permitting changes directly on the device 60 Structured 48 Device number 49 Device replacement A...

Page 1895: ...nk 119 Industrial Ethernet 19 32 Industrial Wireless LAN 37 Application examples 37 Range 38 Instruction T_CONFIG 61 Interconnecting ports In the Inspector window 74 In topology view 72 IO controller 45 IO device 224 Activating and deactivating during change 282 Assigning 45 Calling status 79 Configuring alternating partners 282 IO system 249 253 256 259 262 263 272 273 Checking the assignment 46 ...

Page 1896: ...ort Alternating partners 279 Diagnostics 93 Switchport 290 Terminal port 290 Prefabricating PCF cables 35 Prefabricating POF cables 35 Primary Setup Tool PST 61 Prioritized startup 282 Configuring 287 Definition 286 PROFIBUS 19 PROFIBUS PROFINET International 20 PROFIenergy 143 277 PROFINET 19 Assigning a device name 57 Communication 23 Device model 29 Devices 21 Equipment designations 21 Implemen...

Page 1897: ...net 32 Switchport 290 Sync domain 196 224 SYNC_PI 228 228 229 SYNC_PO 228 228 229 Synchronous Cycle 228 System diagnostics 78 T T_CONFIG 61 T_DC 220 224 228 230 TCP IP in the communication cycle 196 Terminal port 290 Ti 220 To 220 Tool changer 279 Topology Example 69 Line 69 Ring 69 174 176 Rules about the IO system with I device 138 Set actual 88 Star 69 Tree 69 Topology configuration 224 Topolog...

Page 1898: ..._ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ SIMATIC PROFIBUS PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 Function Manual 12 2014 A5E03775446 AC Preface Documentation guide 1 Description 2 Parameter assignment addressing 3 Diagnostics 4 Functions 5 Service Support A ...

Page 1899: ... by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens produc...

Page 1900: ...uired The following knowledge is required in order to understand the manual General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about the use of Windows based computers Proficiency with STEP 7 Scope This function manual is the basic documentation for all SIMATIC products from the PROFIBUS environment The product documentation is based on this ...

Page 1901: ...oku portal The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet http mall industry siemens com Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants solutions machines equipment and or networks They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept With this in mind Siemens pr...

Page 1902: ...esistor 24 2 2 2 Passive components for optical networks 25 2 2 2 1 Fiber optic cables 25 2 2 2 2 Plastic and PCF fiber optic cables 26 2 2 2 3 Glass fiber optic cables 27 2 2 3 Active network components 29 2 2 3 1 Network components in electrical networks 29 2 2 3 2 Network components in optical networks 33 2 2 4 Examples for topology 35 2 2 4 1 Topology with RS485 repeater 35 2 2 4 2 Topology wi...

Page 1903: ...ization 65 5 1 5 Requirements for configuration 66 5 1 6 Configuring isochronous mode 67 5 1 7 Diagnostics and interrupt functions 70 5 1 8 Parameter settings for isochronous mode 71 5 1 8 1 Viewing isochronous mode parameters 71 5 1 8 2 Change parameters 72 5 2 Acyclical data exchange 74 5 3 SYNC FREEZE groups 75 5 4 Interrupts 77 5 5 Intelligent DP slaves I slaves 78 5 5 1 I slave functionality ...

Page 1904: ...P ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties terminal diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General information The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics comm...

Page 1905: ...n Manager on the Internet http support automation siemens com WW view en 38715968 Applications Tools Applications Tools supports you with various tools and examples for solving your automation tasks Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system separated from the focus in individual products You can find Applications Tools on the Internet http support automation siemens c...

Page 1906: ...tegrated Automation TIA This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool With the TIA Selection Tool you can generate a complete order list from your product selection or product configuration You can find the TIA Selection Tool on the Internet http w3 siemens com mcms topics en simatic tia selection tool ...

Page 1907: ...OFIBUS DP distributed I O is a communication network for the field level according to IEC 61158 2 EN 61158 2 with the hybrid access protocols token bus and master slave The networking takes place by means of two wire lines or fiber optic cables Data transmission rates of 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps are possible PROFIBUS PA is the PROFIBUS for process automation PA It connects the PROFIBUS DP communication...

Page 1908: ...unication system in addition to plant visualization and operator control and monitoring The STEP 7 engineering tool supports you during the engineering and configuration of an automation solution Applications of PROFIBUS DP The PROFIBUS network offers wireless connection of several controllers components and subnets as electrical network optical network or by using links Sensors and actuators are ...

Page 1909: ...individual devices is possible Small manageable programs Parallel processing due to distributed automation systems Reduced response times Higher level structures can take on additional diagnostics and logging functions Increased plant availability because the rest of the overall system can continue to work when a subordinate station fails 2 1 2 PROFIBUS terminology Definition Devices in the PROFIB...

Page 1910: ...ter Device used to address the connected DP slaves The DP master exchanges input and output signals with field devices The DP master is often the controller on which the automation program runs PG PC PG PC HMI device for commissioning and diagnostics DP master of class 2 PROFIBUS Network infrastructure HMI Device for operating and monitoring functions DP slave Distributed field device assigned to ...

Page 1911: ...g or writing of inputs outputs of the distributed I O The figure below gives you an overview of I O communication using PROFIBUS DP Figure 2 3 I O communication using PROFIBUS DP I O communication is also available with the communication module CM or the interface module IM with integrated DP interface These DP interfaces behave like integrated DP interfaces of the CPU ...

Page 1912: ...igured address areas called transfer areas that can be inside or outside the process image of the I slave CPU If parts of the process image are used as transfer areas these may not be used for actual I O modules Data transmission takes place with load and transfer operations using the process image or by direct access DP master and DP master A fixed amount of data is transmitted cyclically between...

Page 1913: ...mer Optical Fiber POF interface Table 2 2 Properties of the PROFIBUS DP interface Standard PROFIBUS IEC 61158 61784 Physical bus media PROFIBUS cables twisted two wire lines RS 485 or fiber optic cables Transmission rate 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps Representation of the PROFIBUS DP interface in STEP 7 In the device view of STEP 7 the PROFIBUS DP interfaces for a DP master and a DP slave are highlighted by...

Page 1914: ...ts that forward a signal without the possibility of actively influencing it for example cables connectors Overview of the most important active network components These are network components that actively affect a signal for example repeaters diagnostic repeaters Overview of the most common network structures topologies Physical connections of industrial networks PROFIBUS devices can be networked...

Page 1915: ...een two devices up to 1 km 1 up to 15 km 2 up to 300 m 2 Topology Bus Linear Tree Ring Transmission protocols DP PA DP PA DP Connection of devices by means of OLM Integrated interfaces Bus terminal Bus connector Electrical network segments can be connected Suitable Not relevant for this application 1 Depending on data rate and type of service used 2 Depending on cable type used Installation guidel...

Page 1916: ... buildings FC Standard Cable IS GP bus cable for hazardous area FC FRNC Cable GP bus cable with halogen free protective jacket for use inside buildings FC Food Cable bus cable with PE jacket for use in the food and beverage industry FC Robust Cable bus cable with PUR jacket for environments subject to chemical and mechanical stress FC Ground Cable ground cable with PE jacket PROFIBUS FC Trailing C...

Page 1917: ...s 100 m 1000 m 2 2 1 2 PROFIBUS FastConnect system PROFIBUS FastConnect FC PROFIBUS FastConnect is a system for fast and easy fabrication of PROFIBUS copper cables The system consists of three components FastConnect bus cables for quick mounting FastConnect stripping tool FastConnect bus connector for PROFIBUS with insulation displacement method FastConnect bus cables and stripping tool The specia...

Page 1918: ...t electrical segments or individual devices to the Optical Link Module OLM and Optical Bus Terminal OBT Connect devices or programming devices to the repeater Versions The FastConnect bus connector in degree of protection IP20 is available in the following versions with integrated terminating resistor and isolating function with or without PG socket with a cable outlet of 35 90 or 180 with device ...

Page 1919: ...http mall industry siemens com 2 2 1 3 PROFIBUS bus connector Area of application You need PROFIBUS bus connectors for the following applications Connect devices with a 9 pin D Sub interface to IEC 61158 2 directly with the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables Connect electrical segments or individual devices to the Optical Link Module OLM and Optical Bus Terminal OBT Connect devices or programming devices...

Page 1920: ...owing versions with integrated terminating resistor and isolating function with or without PG socket with a cable outlet of 35 90 or 180 with device category 3G suitable for zone 2 hazardous area Figure 2 6 Example for PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket cable outlet 35 Additional information For additional information on the available components visit the Siemens Mall http mall industry siemens...

Page 1921: ...terminals in degree of protection IP20 are available in the following versions Bus terminal RS 485 with or without PG interface transmission rate 9 6 kbps to 1 5 Mbps integrated terminating resistor combination connectible with 1 5 m and 3 m connecting cable Bus terminal M12 transmission rate 9 6 kbps to 12 Mbps integrated terminating resistor combination with isolating function with 1 5 m connect...

Page 1922: ...on of components with each other Benefits Fiber optic cables offer the following benefits when compared with electrical cables Galvanic isolation of the devices and segments No potential equalization currents No impact on transmission path through external electromagnetic interference No lightning protection elements required No noise radiation along the transmission route Low weight Depending on ...

Page 1923: ...stic fibers with robust polyamide inner jacket surrounded by Kevlar tensile elements and a purple PVC protective jacket The cable can be easily assembled on site The robust round cable is suited for indoor applications The maximum distance that can be covered is 80 m for OLM P connections and 50 m with integrated optical interfaces and OBT PCF Standard Cable The pre assembled PCF Standard Cable co...

Page 1924: ...pplied with a pulling aid installed on one end to pull in the cable channels The robust round cable is suited for moving indoor and outdoor applications with cable lengths up to 400 m OLM or 300 m integrated optical interfaces OBT between two devices 2 2 2 3 Glass fiber optic cables Glass fiber optic cables Glass fiber optic cables are suitable for connection of optical interfaces that work in the...

Page 1925: ...s section of the cable The trailing cable can be used indoors and outdoors Maximum distances between two optical link modules The following distances may not be exceeded between two OLMs regardless of the optical power budget OLM P11 OLM P12 400 m OLM G11 OLM G12 OLM G12 EEC 3 km OLM G11 1300 OLM G12 1300 15 km Additional information All operating instructions http support automation siemens com W...

Page 1926: ...ps The RS485 repeater refreshes a signal regarding amplitude signal width and edge steepness between two segments It is used when more than 32 stations are connected to the bus or the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded Bus segments can be operated ungrounded galvanic isolation of segments with an RS485 repeater Diagnostics repeater The diagnostic repeater connects three PROFIBUS segment...

Page 1927: ... Link PN IO supports the use of IWLAN and WLAN antennas for wireless data transmission for example in suspended monorail systems or conveyor systems Because of the PROFINET support the numerous PROFIBUS system services for example diagnostics by bus can continue to be used A PROFINET IO controller is required for this configuration The IWLAN PB Link PN IO acts as master on the PROFIBUS end CANopen...

Page 1928: ...imits For applications with high configuration limits the DP AS i LINK Advanced is used as AS Interface double master In this case the duplicate configuration limits can be used on two independently running AS Interface strands DP AS Interface Link 20E The DP AS Interface Link 20E is PROFIBUS DP slave in accordance with EN 61158 and AS Interface master in accordance with AS Interface specification...

Page 1929: ...ir and Fiber Optic Networks http support automation siemens com WW view en 8763736 Basics on Setting up an Industrial Wireless LAN http support automation siemens com WW view en 9975764 SIMATIC bus links DP PA coupler active field distributors DP PA Link and Y Link http support automation siemens com WW view en 1142696 Information on the CANopen module is available on the Internet http www hms net...

Page 1930: ...mbined by means of an RS485 interface and individual devices or entire electrical segments can be integrated into the optical PROFIBUS network The following distances may not be exceeded between two OLMs regardless of the optical power budget OLM P11 OLM P12 400 m OLM G11 OLM G12 OLM G12 EEC 3 km OLM G11 1300 OLM G12 1300 15 km Optical Bus Terminal OBT optical bus terminal The Optical Bus Terminal...

Page 1931: ...he Siemens Mall http mall industry siemens com Additional information is available in these manuals PROFIBUS network manual http support automation siemens com WW view en 35222591 SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Optical Link Module http support automation siemens com WW view de 56606534 0 en SIMATC NET Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks http support automation siemens com WW view en 8763736 ...

Page 1932: ...n options with the RS485 repeater You can operate the RS485 repeater in the following configurations Figure 2 7 Segment 1 and segment 2 connected to RS485 repeater Figure 2 8 Segment 1 and segment 2 looped through to RS485 repeater Figure 2 9 Segment 1 connected to RS485 repeater and segment 2 looped through to RS485 repeater Connect terminating resistor Do not connect terminating resistor ...

Page 1933: ... A5E03775446 AC Configuration example Figure 2 10 Configuration example with five RS485 repeaters Connect terminating resistor Do not connect terminating resistor Maximum configuration If you install a PROFIBUS network with RS485 repeaters you may not connect more than nine RS485 repeaters in series ...

Page 1934: ...able length of 100 m per segment that can be monitored for the diagnostic repeater The segments connected to DP2 and DP3 are diagnostics capable The cable length that can be monitored is limited for some cable types Maximum cascade depth You can connect up to nine diagnostic repeaters in series between any two PROFIBUS stations Figure 2 11 Schematic layout of a PROFIBUS network with maximum possib...

Page 1935: ...Description 2 2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 38 Function Manual 12 2014 A5E03775446 AC Example Maximum cascade depth exceeded Figure 2 12 Maximum cascade depth exceeded ...

Page 1936: ...ber of used diagnostic repeaters by using several segments The example shows a layout in which the maximum cascade depth is exceeded at two segments Figure 2 13 Layout with several segments maximum cascade depth exceeded Additional information Additional information is available in the Diagnostic Repeater http support automation siemens com WW view en 7915183 manual ...

Page 1937: ...lnerable to damage caused by overvoltage effect of lightning the devices in the connected bus segment must be protected against overvoltage Figure 2 14 Combination of electrical and optical networks 2 2 4 4 WLAN topology IWLAN PB Link PN IO as gateway between Industrial Wireless LAN and PROFIBUS The IWLAN PB Link PN IO supports the use of IWLAN and WLAN antennas for wireless data transmission This...

Page 1938: ...ion to a PROFINET interface you can integrate existing PROFIBUS configurations into the PROFINET configuration Figure 2 16 Connection of PROFIBUS and PROFINET with IE PB link PROFINET device with proxy functionality The PROFINET device with proxy functionality is the substitute for a PROFIBUS device on Ethernet The proxy functionality allows a PROFIBUS device to communicate not only with its maste...

Page 1939: ...rstood to mean setting the properties of the components used The settings for the hardware components and for data exchange are assigned for example activating diagnostics input delay with DI The parameters are downloaded into the CPU and transferred to the corresponding modules when the CPU starts up Modules can be replaced with ease because with SIMATIC CPUs the set parameters are automatically ...

Page 1940: ...uration Page 49 Considering additional network devices Page 51 Bus parameters creating a user defined profile Page 52 Configuring constant bus cycle time Page 55 3 1 Assigning the DP slave to a DP master PROFIBUS DP system A PROFIBUS DP system consists of a PROFIBUS DP master and its assigned PROFIBUS DP slaves Once the devices have been placed in the network view or device view STEP 7 assigns def...

Page 1941: ...ed on the CPU The CPU is now the PROFIBUS DP master The DP slave is assigned to the DP master 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all other DP slaves that you want to assign to the DP master Figure 3 1 Assigning the DP slave to a DP master Network overview You can check the communication relationships of the activated interface in the network overview The network overview is context sensitive for selection...

Page 1942: ...S select the subnet to which the interface is linked or add a new subnet All devices of a subnet must have different PROFIBUS addresses Figure 3 2 PROFIBUS address Rules for address assignment STEP 7 automatically assigns device addresses You can change the addresses if you observe the following points Assign a unique PROFIBUS address to each device in the PROFIBUS network each DP master and each ...

Page 1943: ...types and the protocols used different profiles are available on the PROFIBUS The profiles differ with respect to their setting options and calculation of the bus parameters The PROFIBUS subnet will only work properly if the bus parameters of all devices have the same values Figure 3 3 Network settings Profiles and transmission rates Table 3 1 Profiles and transmission rates Profiles Supported tra...

Page 1944: ...ous mode DP is the recommended profile for the configuration of constant bus cycle time and isochronous mode Standard Compared with the DP profile the Standard profile gives you the option to take into consideration devices of another project or devices that have not been configured here for calculation of the bus parameters The bus parameters are then calculated with a simple algorithm that was n...

Page 1945: ...are also checked in the User defined profile Note User defined settings Use user defined settings only if you are familiar with the PROFIBUS parameters It is usually better to work with the DP profile Contact Customer Support Page 91 if you have any questions The bus parameters that were last valid on the PROFIBUS subnet are automatically set as user defined If the DP bus profile was valid for the...

Page 1946: ...into consideration for calculation of the bus parameters To do so select the check box Take into account the following cable configuration in the properties of the PROFIBUS subnet The other information depends on the type of cable used Figure 3 4 Cable configuration Cable configuration Fiber optic cables optical ring The calculation depends on the used OLM types Select the corresponding check box ...

Page 1947: ...st Station Address Increase of the retry value to at least 3 Network settings user defined profile Checking and adapting of the slot time Network settings user defined profile bus parameters Tslot parameter You need short slot time values for OLM P12 medium slot time values for OLM G12 and OLM G12 EEC and high slot time values for OLM G12 1300 This results in a high performance for small networks ...

Page 1948: ...ze of the communication jobs communication load depends on the user program This means the communication load cannot always be determined automatically If you select the check box Consider the following network stations you can consider network stations in the calculation of the bus times that were not configured in the project Figure 3 5 Additional network stations Calculating the bus times You c...

Page 1949: ...ed operation of DP and other communication services e g S7 communication if DP has high time requirements and with medium acyclical communication volume High For mixed operation of DP and other communication services e g S7 communication if DP has low time requirements and with high acyclical communication volume 3 6 Bus parameters Introduction Bus parameters control the transmission behavior on t...

Page 1950: ... subnet in the Inspector window the bus parameters are sent cyclically during operation by the modules that support this function This way you can for example connect a programming device to the PROFIBUS during operation Disable this function in the following cases In constant bus cycle time mode to minimize the bus cycle If third party devices are connected in the PROFIBUS subnet whose protocol u...

Page 1951: ...t Max Tsdr 1 34 2 Tset Tqui Tset Yes 1 t_bit Tset 494 t_bit Tqui Yes 0 t_bit Tqui MIN 31 t_bit Min Tsdr 1 GAP factor Yes 1 GAP factor 100 Retry limit Yes 1 Retry limit 15 Tslot slot time No Tid2 No Tid2 Max Tsdr Trdy No Trdy Min Tsdr Tid1 No Tid1 35 2 Tset Tqui Ttr Target Rotation Time Yes 256 t_Bit Ttr 16 777 960 t_bit Ttr typical No This time is for information only and is not transmitted to the...

Page 1952: ...ts assigned DP slaves cyclically S7 communication may cause the intervals to vary You can enable a bus cycle with constant bus cycle time to achieve identical intervals This ensures data transmission at the same constant bus cycle time intervals Figure 3 7 Enabling a bus cycle with constant bus cycle time Number of OPs PGs TDs at the PROFIBUS Here you enter the number of devices that are not confi...

Page 1953: ...me manually The following situation can occur especially with very short DP cycle times The runtime of the user program is greater than the shortest cycle see Technical specifications of the CPU section Isochronous mode You have to manually increase the automatically calculated DP cycle time in this case See also Configuring isochronous mode Page 67 ...

Page 1954: ...gured as PROFIBUS diagnostics slave Additional information Additional information on diagnostics is available in these manuals In the Diagnostics repeater for PROFIBUS DP http support automation siemens com WW view en 7915183 manual for diagnostics with STEP 7 diagnostics in the user program monitoring function isochronous PROFIBUS topology display in STEP 7 In the Diagnostics http support automat...

Page 1955: ...Control and status information is displayed in different menus on the display You use the operating buttons to navigate through the menus The following states can be evaluated on the display Module status for central and distributed modules Error and alarm texts system diagnostics user defined alarms Module status From the station overview you go to the module status for a distributed module via t...

Page 1956: ...775446 AC 59 Error and alarm texts Figure 4 2 Example Diagnostic buffer alarms Additional information Additional information on the topic Functions and operation of the display is available in the documentation for the S7 1500 automation system on the Internet http support automation siemens com WW view en 59191792 ...

Page 1957: ...r allows you to detect and localize cable faults early on This means plant faults are detected early and plant downtimes can be prevented Diagnostic functions The diagnostic function provides the location and the cause of cable faults such as wire break or missing terminating resistors The fault location is specified relative to the devices present for example Break on signal line A and or B Readi...

Page 1958: ... I data is module information some of which may be printed on the module housing such as the order and serial number I data is read only vendor specific module information Maintenance data M data is system specific information such as the installation location and date M data is generated in the course of configuration and is written to the module memory The modules can be uniquely identified in o...

Page 1959: ...ed tail lights The overall travel time is however decided by the train bus or underground clock because well adjusted timing is essential to a good service This also applies to distributed automation engineering Not only fast cycles but also the adaptation and synchronization of the individual cycles result in optimum throughput Just In Time Figure 5 1 System cycle The high speed and reliable reac...

Page 1960: ...nal processing takes place in the same system cycle all the way to switching to the output terminal This means isochronous mode improves the control quality and provides greater manufacturing precision Isochronous mode drastically reduces the possible fluctuations of process response times The time assured processing can be used for a higher machine cycle Isochronous mode is basically always the c...

Page 1961: ...erty isochronous mode and the associated simultaneous measured value acquisition measurement can be performed continuously and the time required for measurement is reduced Resultant workflow Continuous turning of the camshaft During the continuous turning measure the positions and cam excursion synchronously Process the next camshaft All camshaft positions and the corresponding measured values red...

Page 1962: ...f output data Figure 5 3 Time sequence of synchronization To ensure that all input data is ready for transportation via the PROFIBUS DP line when the next PROFIBUS DP cycle begins the I O read cycle has a lead time TI so that it starts earlier The TI is the flash gun for all inputs This TI is necessary to compensate for analog to digital conversion backplane bus times etc The lead time TI can be c...

Page 1963: ...e only possible with the bus profiles DP and User defined Isochronous mode is only possible with the DP interfaces integrated in the CPU Isochronous mode with CPs for PROFIBUS is not possible Only the constant bus cycle time master is permitted as active station on the isochronous PROFIBUS DP OPs and PGs for example PCs with PG functionality influence the time behavior of the isochronous DP cycle ...

Page 1964: ...ic procedure for configuration of isochronous mode 1 Setting the properties for isochronous mode on the DP slave Isochronous DP cycle Isochronous mode of the modules 2 Setting the properties for isochronous mode on the modules Synchronous cycle interrupt SynchronousCycle Process image partition Input delay 3 Create user program with access to isochronous I O Requirement The network view in STEP 7 ...

Page 1965: ...tion for synchronization to the DP cycle for the DP slave Default The DP slaves get the Ti To values from the subnet which means the values are automatically the same for all DP slaves of the DP master system 3 Enable the Isochronous mode option the the Detail view for all I O modules you want to operate in isochronous mode 4 Repeat steps 1 and 3 for all DP slaves that you want to operate in isoch...

Page 1966: ... addresses area in the Inspector window The option for isochronous mode is selected 2 Select the synchronous cycle interrupt in the drop down list Figure 5 5 I O addresses creating the synchronous cycle interrupt OB 3 Assign the process image partition configured in the CPU Figure 5 6 I O addresses assigning process image partitions 4 Repeat steps 1 and 3 for all I O modules that you want to opera...

Page 1967: ...wntimes and simplify localization and elimination of faults Events causes of errors and remedies Below you will find the events for diagnostic and interrupt functions and remedies for the problem Table 5 1 Events causes of errors and remedies Event Cause of the error Remedy Synchronous cycle interrupt OB is started with the input parameter EventCount 0 number of lost OB calls since last OB call If...

Page 1968: ...sochronous mode can be checked and configured using the Isochronous mode dialog box Parameters should only be changed by experienced users or service technicians 5 1 8 1 Viewing isochronous mode parameters Isochronous mode dialog box 1 Select Properties Isochronous mode in the Inspector window The isochronous mode dialog box opens with an overview of parameters which influence isochronous mode Inf...

Page 1969: ...he DP master system You can change the parameters for isochronous mode in the Constant bus cycle time dialog box 1 Select the DP master system in the network view 2 Select the section Constant bus cycle time in the Inspector window 3 Change the parameters according to the received instructions Figure 5 8 Changing parameters for the DP master system ...

Page 1970: ...vice view 2 Select the section Inputs in the Inspector window 3 Adapt the input delay Figure 5 9 Adapting the input delay Compile load and save the changed configuration 1 Put the plant out of operation 2 Select the CPU in the project navigator 3 Select Compile Hardware in the shortcut menu 4 Select Download to device in the shortcut menu 5 Save the project ...

Page 1971: ...errupt triggering event in the master CPU Acyclic data exchange Read write data record for example to change the parameters of a slave during operation The data records of a module and the structure of these data records is available in the documentation for the respective module The table below contains the instructions with their functions for access to DPV1 slaves Detailed information is availa...

Page 1972: ...es You must assign SYNC FREEZE groups to the DP slaves for this purpose Requirement A DP master system has been created in the project Procedure To assign a DP slave to a SYNC FREEZE group follow these steps 1 Select the DP interface of the DP slave you want to assign to a group in the device view or network view 2 Select the check boxes for the required SYNC FREEZE groups under the group SYNC FRE...

Page 1973: ...roups For a S7 CPU use the instruction DPSYC_FR SFC 11 to synchronize the DP slaves When you select the DP master you see a list of the eight SYNC FREEZE groups under Properties DP interface SYNC FREEZE in the Inspector window Figure 5 11 SYNC FREEZE groups on DP master SYNC control command The DP master uses the SYNC control command to cause a group of DP slaves to freeze the states of their outp...

Page 1974: ...evaluated in the CPU and the diagnostics buffer and the module state are updated even in the STOP operating mode The OB is not processed in STOP The following DPV1 interrupts are supported Status interrupt Update interrupt Vendor specific interrupt Detailed information is available in the descriptions on the OBs You can use the corresponding OBs that are provided by the operating system of the S7 ...

Page 1975: ...P slave functionality of a CPU supports the exchange of data with a DP master and thus allows the CPU to be used for example as intelligent preprocessing unit of subprocesses The I slave is connected in its role as DP slave to a higher level DP master The preprocessing is handled by the user program in the I slave The process values acquired by the I O modules are preprocessed by the user program ...

Page 1976: ...licated widely distributed and extensive processes can be subdivided into several subprocesses with manageable interfaces by using I slaves These subprocesses can be stored in individual STEP 7 projects if necessary which can later be merged to form one master project Separating STEP 7 projects Creators and users of an I device can have completely separated STEP 7 projects The GSD file together wi...

Page 1977: ...PU instead of accessing the connected inputs outputs of the I slave The user program running on the preprocessing CPU is responsible for ensuring data exchange between the operand area and inputs outputs Figure 5 13 Data access to an I slave Note DP master or DP slave Note The communication modules of the S7 1500 CPUs ET 200SP CPUs for example the CP 1542 5 support the operation as DP master or DP...

Page 1978: ...sult of the processing in the user program The data for communication between DP master and I slave is made available in the transfer areas A transfer area contains an information unit that is exchanged consistently in terms of bytes words or overall between DP master and I slave You can find more information on configuration and use of transfer areas in the section Configuring transfer areas Page...

Page 1979: ... the I slave represent submodules of a DP slave The output data of the DP master is the input data of the I slave Analogously the input data of the DP master is the output data of the I slave Transfer relationship between the user program and the transfer area In this way the user program and the transfer area exchange input and output data Data exchange between the user program and the I O of the...

Page 1980: ...ications module in the hardware catalog STEP 7 creates the CM DP in the device view 4 Select the PROFIBUS interface of the CM DP communications module 5 In the Inspector window in the area navigation select the Operating mode entry and enable the DP slave check box 6 Now you can select the DP master in the Assigned DP Master drop down list Once you have selected the DP master the networking and th...

Page 1981: ...e first cell of the Transfer area column STEP 7 assigns a default name that you can change Select the type of communication relation Currently you can only select MS for master slave communication relation STEP 7 assigns the addresses for the transfer area automatically Correct the addresses if necessary Set the length of the transfer area Specify the length of the transfer area in the cell in the...

Page 1982: ...ult of an AND logic operation of two inputs preprocessing in the I slave is to be provided to the higher level DP master This result is to be assigned to a local output in the DP master further processing Use a transfer area with the following addresses for this purpose Address in the I slave Q568 Address in the DP master I68 Required steps The following steps are necessary to solve the task 1 Con...

Page 1983: ...laves I slaves PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 86 Function Manual 12 2014 A5E03775446 AC Configuring the transfer area Configure a transfer area with the following properties in the I slave Figure 5 17 Transfer area I slave sample program ...

Page 1984: ...ct tree under Program blocks Add new block Open the function 2 In the interface of the function preprocessing create the following tags Name Data type Input output type input 1 bool Input input 2 bool Input result bool Output 3 In the instruction window of the function preprocessing write the following program code result input 1 input 2 4 Call the function preprocessing in a cycle OB for example ...

Page 1985: ... Program blocks Add new block Open the function 2 In the interface of the function further processing create the following tags Name Data type Input output type result bool Input output bool Output 3 In the instruction window of the function further processing write the following program code output result 4 Call the function further processing in a cycle OB for example in OB1 5 Wire the function ...

Page 1986: ...agnostic interrupt When the I slave changes mode the DP master calls OB 82 diagnostic interrupt When the DP master changes mode the I slave calls OB 82 diagnostic interrupt OB 86 rack failure If the bus connection to the I slave is interrupted the DP master calls OB 86 rack failure If the bus connection to the DP master is interrupted the I slave calls OB 86 rack failure OB 122 I O access error If...

Page 1987: ...heir current values no access error STOP RUN RUN The input transfer areas are updated by the cyclic user program via the process image The input transfer areas are updated via the process image RUN RUN STOP The I slave sets the input transfer areas on the DP master to 0 No updating of the process image RUN STOP RUN The I slave sets the input transfer areas on the DP master to 0 After the startup p...

Page 1988: ...d services that provide valuable support in every phase of the life cycle of your machine or plant from planning and implementation through commissioning as far as maintenance and modernization Our Service Support accompanies you worldwide in all matters concerning automation and drive technology from Siemens We provide direct on site support in more than 100 countries through all phases of the li...

Page 1989: ...w siemens com automation support request Training Extend your competitive edge through practical know how directly from the manufacturer You can find the training courses we offer on the Internet at the following address Internet http www siemens com sitrain Engineering Support Support during project engineering and development with services fine tuned to your requirements from configuration throu...

Page 1990: ...lexibly adapted at any time and used separately Examples of service programs Service contracts Plant IT Security Services Life Cycle Services for Drive Engineering SIMATIC PCS 7 Life Cycle Services SINUMERIK Manufacturing Excellence SIMATIC Remote Support Services Advantages at a glance Reduced downtimes for increased productivity Optimized maintenance costs due to a tailored scope of services Cos...

Page 1991: ...connected it has two defined ends In the case of PROFIBUS the bus is a two wire line or a fiber optic cable Bus connector Physical connection between the node and bus cable Bus system All stations physically connected to a bus cable form a bus system Device In the PROFIBUS environment device is the generic term for Automation systems for example PLC PC Distributed I O systems Field devices for exa...

Page 1992: ...ntimes DP master CPU or device that conducts the communication with the DP slaves according to a defined algorithm To do this the DP master uses the functions for communication with the DP slaves which are defined by PROFIBUS DP It acts according to standard EN 50170 Part 3 Master DP slave Slave in the distributed I O that is operated on the PROFIBUS with PROFIBUS DP protocol and acts according to...

Page 1993: ...ice that is in possession of the token can send data to other devices and request data from them active device PCF Polymer Cladded Fiber plastic covered glass fiber POF Polymer Optical Fiber plastic fiber optic cable made of light conducting plastics Process image Address area in the system memory of the DP master At the start of the cyclic program the signal states of the input modules are transm...

Page 1994: ...r program the distributed I Os are addressed in exactly the same way as the centralized I Os PROFINET Open component based industrial communication system based on Ethernet for distributed automation systems Communication technology promoted by the PROFIBUS Users Organization RS 485 Asynchronous data transmission process for PROFIBUS DP to ANSI TIA EIA RS485 A RS 485 repeater Equipment for amplify...

Page 1995: ...a device on PROFIBUS A device compares a token rotation time it has measured with the Target Rotation Time and controls the sending of frames with high priority or low priority based on this comparison Terminating resistor Component that terminates the ends of a data transmission line to prevent reflections in the transmission medium Terminator Terminating resistor of bus segments with transmissio...

Page 1996: ... Requirements 66 Updating the process image partition 69 Connecting PROFIBUS DP with PROFINET IO 41 Constant bus cycle time 55 D Data exchange between IO systems 81 Diagnostic repeater Cascade depth 37 Diagnostics 60 Topology 37 Diagnostics 57 Display alarms 58 I slave 89 Isochronous mode errors and remedies 70 Diagnostics repeater Description 29 Display diagnostic messages 58 DP master Operated a...

Page 1997: ...cted 29 Optical 33 optical electrical 18 Selection criteria 18 Topology 35 Network components Bus connections 20 CANopen module 30 Diagnostics repeater 29 DP AS i F Link 31 DP AS i LINK Advanced 31 DP AS Interface Link 20E 31 DP DP coupler 30 Fiber optic cables 25 IE PB Link PN 30 IWLAN PB Link PN IO 30 OBT Optical Bus Terminal 33 OLM Optical Link Module 33 PROFIBUS terminator 30 RS 485 cables 19 ...

Page 1998: ...RS 485 cables 20 RS485 repeater Description 29 Topology 35 S Slot time 50 54 SYNC FREEZE 75 Synchronization sequence 65 Synchronous cycle interrupt 69 Synchronous cycle interrupt OB SynchronousCycle 70 SynchronousCycle synchronous cycle interrupt OB 70 T Target Rotation Time 54 Topology Connecting PROFIBUS DP with PROFINET 41 OLM 40 RS485 repeater 35 WLAN 40 ...

Page 1999: ...____________ ___________________ ___________________ ___________________ SIMATIC IO Link system Function Manual 12 2017 A5E31637677 AB Preface Guide 1 System overview 2 Integration into the automation system 3 ...

Page 2000: ... only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens p...

Page 2001: ...r IO Link systems at Siemens The product documentation is based on this documentation Conventions In this documentation STEP 7 is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration and programming software STEP 7 TIA Portal Please also observe notes marked as follows Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation on the handling of the product or on t...

Page 2002: ...to make them more secure Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are available and that the latest product versions are used Use of product versions that are no longer supported and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers exposure to cyber threats To stay informed about product updates subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS Feed und...

Page 2003: ...ndustry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation TIA and Totally Integrated Power TIP You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet https mall industry siemens com ...

Page 2004: ...ion Tool S7 PCT 17 2 7 Differences between IO Link specifications V1 0 and V1 1 19 3 Integration into the automation system 20 3 1 Configuration of the IO Link system 20 3 1 1 Configuration with S7 PCT 22 3 1 2 Configuration without S7 PCT 25 3 1 3 Overview of configuration options 27 3 2 Data access of the automation system and the HMI device 29 3 3 Changing and saving device parameters during pl...

Page 2005: ...rs a wide range of products and support for IO Link Master Device I O modules Device industrial switchgear Device RFID systems RFID radio frequency identification Port Configuration Tool S7 PCT https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 32469496 IO Link library https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 82981502 with the blocks IO_LINK_MASTER and IO_LINK_DEVICE Overview of the topic IO...

Page 2006: ...be exchanged via the standard interfaces digital analog used at the sensor actuator level Sensors and actuators with integrated intelligence are now used for increasingly complex functions and require a communication interface tailored to these requirements Definition IO Link is an innovative point to point communication interface for the sensor actuator area that is specified in IEC 61131 9 IO Li...

Page 2007: ...Any combination of IO Link devices and sensors actuators without IO Link at IO Link master Continuous communication between sensors actuators and the CPU Access to all process data diagnostic data and device information Access to device specific data such as energy data Remote diagnostics can be performed Continuous diagnostic information down to sensor actuator level Reduction in troubleshooting ...

Page 2008: ...s of the following components IO Link master IO Link device for example Sensors actuators RFID readers I O modules Valves Unshielded 3 wire or 5 wire standard cables Engineering tool for configuring and assigning parameters of IO Link Example plant with IO Link The figure below shows an example of plant architecture with IO Link Figure 2 1 Plant architecture with IO Link ...

Page 2009: ...d either in the control cabinet or directly in the field as remote I O in degree of protection IP65 67 The IO Link master communicates by means of various fieldbuses or product specific backplane buses An IO Link master can have multiple IO Link ports channels An IO Link device can be connected point to point communication to each port Engineering The IO Link system is engineered parallel to the o...

Page 2010: ...are defined for the connection system in IP65 67 sensors have a 4 pin connector actuators a 5 pin connector IO Link masters are always equipped with a 5 pin M12 socket The pin assignment according to IEC 60974 5 2 is specified as follows Pin 1 24 V Pin 3 0 V Pin 4 Switching and communication cable C Q In addition to IO Link communication these three pins also implement the power supply of the devi...

Page 2011: ...pe B This type offers an additional supply voltage and is suitable for the connection of devices that have an increased power requirement In this case an additional galvanically isolated supply voltage is made available by pins 2 and 5 A 5 wire standard cable is required to use this additional supply voltage Figure 2 4 Pin assignment Port Class B Connecting cables The devices are connected to the ...

Page 2012: ...he IO Link system provides information about the frequency and speed of the data transmission between device and master The response time depends on various factors A value for the minimum cycle time of the device is stored in the device description file IODD of the device Page 17 This value indicates in which time intervals the master may address the device The value has a big influence on the re...

Page 2013: ...fier Information PQI This PQI provides information on the device status of the port and IO Link value status The PQI is transmitted cyclically with the process data The PQI is disabled by default Device data Device data can be parameters identification data or diagnostic information The data is exchanged cyclically and at the request of the IO Link master Device data can be written to the device a...

Page 2014: ...ey exchange communication parameters If necessary the parameters stored in the system are transferred to the device Then the cyclic data exchange of process data and value status starts 2 5 Device profiles Introduction Device profiles are defined for IO Link to standardize access of the CPU user program to the devices Data structure data contents and basic functionality are defined in the device p...

Page 2015: ...rdless of the manufacturer Two different IODD versions are available for devices that support both V1 0 and V1 1 functionality IODDfinder The IODDfinder is a cross vendor central IO Link database This database provides you with the latest IODDs of the device manufacturers and offers an information and download platform The IODDfinder is available on the Internet https ioddfinder io link com IO Lin...

Page 2016: ...em 18 Function Manual 12 2017 A5E31637677 AB S7 PCT with IODD of a device The following figure shows a section from S7 PCT with IODD of a device and the device information contained therein Figure 2 5 S7 PCT with IODD of a device and the device information contained therein ...

Page 2017: ...system led to version 1 1 The main enhancements of version 1 1 are Data backup for device replacement during operation Backup Restore Data transmission rate 230 4 kBaud is mandatory for the IO Link master Combination of IO Link devices Note the following when combining IO Link devices Only IO Link devices that comply with V1 0 can be operated on the IO Link master to V1 0 IO Link devices that comp...

Page 2018: ...tem is represented by the IO Link master in the configuration of the automation system or the fieldbus and integrated with STEP 7 or a GSD file The IO Link master itself can be a field bus node e g ET 200eco PN IO Link master or a part of the modular IO system that is connected to the field bus e g ET 200SP IO Link master In both cases the number of ports the address range and the module propertie...

Page 2019: ...s values Figure 3 2 Device view with setting of the IO Link address range In addition you can set in the module properties of the IO Link master how the IO Link system is to be configured and parameterized In doing so you can select whether or not you also want to work with the S7 PCT configuration tool Note IO data length To ensure smooth operation select an IO data length during configuration of...

Page 2020: ...S7 PCT online view you can display the diagnostics states and process values of the IO Link devices in detail Configuration with S7 PCT When you have selected the option Configuration with S7 PCT you are also making the settings of the IO Link master ports with S7 PCT These settings include Specification of the address range for each port Behavior when replacing an IO Link device Setting the ident...

Page 2021: ...uration of the IO Link ports of the selected IO Link master Detailed information on the selected IO Link device Device catalog with the IODDS of the IO Link devices from different manufacturers Figure 3 3 Configuration of an IO Link master in S7 PCT Address range of the ports In addition to the assignment of the IO Link devices to the IO Link master ports the default address ranges of the ports ca...

Page 2022: ... After selecting the corresponding device in the project tree left tree set the device parameters in the Parameters tab The figure below shows you an example of the parameter assignment of an IO Link device Figure 3 4 Setting the parameter values of the IO Link device Starting from the displayed defaults you can edit and save the values in the defined value range The configuration of the IO Link s...

Page 2023: ...Port Qualifier Information PQI provides information on the status such as process data of the IO Link port is transmitted with the input data of the IO Link device Operating mode IO Link Autostart The IO Link master accepts each connected IO Link device and starts it automatically IO Link Manual The IO Link master only accepts IO Link devices that match the Vendor ID and Device ID set below The co...

Page 2024: ...pport industry siemens com cs ww en view 109748852 Inspection level for data backup Identical type V1 0 without Backup Restore Type compatible V1 1 without Backup Restore Type compatible V1 1 with Backup Restore Type compatible V1 1 with Restore The figure below shows you an example of the settings of a port configuration in STEP 7 or with GSD file Figure 3 5 Settings of the port configuration in ...

Page 2025: ...ion with and without S7 PCT Requirement Configuration with S7 PCT Configuration without S7 PCT IO Link Autostart IO Link Manual Use of the IO Link device description IODD Yes No No Setting the length of input and output data per port Automatic Manual Manual Assignment of the Vendor ID and Device ID Automatic Manual see FAQ https support industry siem ens com cs ww en view 1097 48852 Behavior durin...

Page 2026: ...th S7 PCT without S7 PCT ET 200SP Communications module IO Link Master CM 4xIO Link 6ES7137 6BD00 0BA0 V1 0 0 x V2 2 0 x x ET 200AL Communications module CM 4xIO Link 4xM12 6ES7147 5JD00 0BA0 V1 0 0 x V1 1 0 x x ET 200ecoPN IO Link master 4 IO L 8 DI 4 DO DC 24V 1 3A 8 M12 6ES7148 6JA00 0AB0 V6 1 0 x IO Link master 4 IO L 4 M12 6ES7148 6JD00 0AB0 V1 0 0 x x Autostart only ET 200pro Electronic modu...

Page 2027: ...O_LINK_MASTER and IO_LINK_DEVICE The programming of the CPU user program is another task in addition to the configuration and parameterization of the IO Link system and its integration into the overall automation system For acyclic data exchange you can use the function blocks IO_LINK_MASTER and IO_LINK_DEVICE for controllers of the S7 300 S7 400 S7 1200 and S7 1500 product lines The function bloc...

Page 2028: ...rameters set in the device during commissioning or changed during operation of the plant in the IO Link master This data backup takes place depending on the set behavior of the IO Link master ports You can set the following data backup levels None No data backup in the IO Link master Backup Restore Every time the device parameters are changed the changed data is automatically saved in the IO Link ...

Page 2029: ...device the IO Link device immediately triggers a backup In the CPU user program IO Link device parameters can be changed successively by the user program A backup is only triggered by a system command The system command must be triggered by the user program after the parameter changes You can implement the parameter changes and the system command for triggering the backup with function blocks of t...

Page 2030: ...t backup these are not saved in the master and are not available to the new device The behavior of the new device can deviate from the behavior of the replaced device This may be useful if you want to make short term plant optimizations but do not want to save them in the plant backup Note Field calibration of sensors When you are using sensors that must be adapted to specific rated conditions on ...

Page 2031: ... 30 Device profiles 16 E Events 15 F Function block IO_LINK_DEVICE 29 IO_LINK_MASTER 29 I IODD Device description 17 IO Link Advantages 9 Combination 19 Components 7 Configuration tool 17 Definition 8 Interface 12 Protocol 14 Response time 14 Specification 19 O Operating modes 14 P Port Address range 23 Port types in IP65 67 13 Process data 15 R Restore 30 S S7 PCT Example configuration 23 Startup...

Page 2032: ...____ ___________________ SIMATIC S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP ET 200AL ET 200pro ET 200eco PN Analog value processing Function Manual 06 2014 A5E03461439 AC Preface Documentation guide 1 What you should know about analog technology 2 Representation of analog values 3 Connecting transducers 4 Thermocouples 5 Wiring loads actuators 6 Supported functions 7 High speed analog modules 8 ...

Page 2033: ... by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens produc...

Page 2034: ...knowledge required The following knowledge is required in order to understand the documentation General knowledge of automation technology Knowledge of analog value processing analog technology Knowledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Knowledge about how to use STEP 7 TIA Portal Scope of the documentation This manual is considered the basic documentation for all analog input and analo...

Page 2035: ... are available on the Internet http mall automation siemens com Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants solutions machines equipment and or networks They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept With this in mind Siemens products and solutions undergo continuous development...

Page 2036: ...e error 26 2 9 Interference frequency suppression 27 2 10 Common mode interference UCM 29 2 11 Series mode interference USM 31 2 12 Interference voltage suppression 32 2 13 Crosstalk between channels 34 2 14 Diagnostics 36 2 15 Value status 46 2 16 Conversion time of an analog module 49 2 17 Cycle time of an analog module 51 2 18 Settling and response times of analog output modules 52 2 19 Smoothi...

Page 2037: ...1 Overview 81 5 3 2 Compensation with internal reference junction 84 5 3 3 Compensation with reference channel of the module 86 5 3 4 Compensation reference channel of Group 0 88 5 3 5 Compensation with fixed reference temperature 91 5 3 6 Compensation by means of dynamic reference temperature 94 5 3 7 None or external compensation 98 5 3 8 Compensation type RTD 0 100 6 Wiring loads actuators 103 ...

Page 2038: ...References for analog value processing Topic Documentation Most important contents System description System manual S7 1500 Automation System http support automation siemens com WW vi ew en 59191792 Application planning Installation Connecting Commissioning System manual ET 200SP distributed I O system http support automation siemens com WW vi ew en 58649293 System Manual ET 200MP Distributed I O ...

Page 2039: ...ttp support automation siemens com WW vi ew en 59193566 Basics Electromagnetic compatibility Lightning protection Analog module Product manual of the respective analog module Connecting Parameters Technical specifications Parameter data record Tables of analog values SIMATIC manuals All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the Internet http www siemen...

Page 2040: ...serve as a reference to the manuals for the respective analog module and are intended to facilitate the handling of these manuals Analog and binary signals Binary signals can assume only 2 signal states signal state 1 voltage present and signal state 0 no voltage present In control engineering it is frequently necessary to read process and output analog signals in addition to binary signals In con...

Page 2041: ...analog input module converts the value into a 16 bit integer value Depending on the type of measurement you can use the following transducers Voltage transducers Current transducers 2 wire transducers 4 wire transducers Resistance transducers 4 wire connection 3 wire connection 2 wire connection Thermocouples Additional information on wiring various types of transducers to analog inputs can be fou...

Page 2042: ...es its value with a stepped curve Resolution and conversion speed are the most important ADC parameters Analog value Digital value Figure 2 2 Approximation of an analog graph with low and high resolution stepped curves Digital to analog conversion Once the CPU has processed the digital signal an integrated DAC digital to analog converter in the analog output module converts the output signal to an...

Page 2043: ...on resolution and conversion time are the main points to consider when selecting an analog module For some applications such as systems which cover a large area common mode or channel isolation are also important The parameters listed here are examined in more detail in the following pages Processing analog signals The following figure demonstrates analog signal processing in a PLC Figure 2 3 Anal...

Page 2044: ...curve left figure while the approximation is more precise at higher resolutions right figure Analog value Digital value Figure 2 4 Approximation of an analog curve with a stepped curve Visualization of the measuring range at a resolution of 13 bits and 16 bits The unipolar measured value from a module having a resolution of 13 bits 12 bits S is segmented into a total of 212 4096 increments The sma...

Page 2045: ...n of a measuring range of 10 V The minimum value which can be represented is therefore 0 3617 mV see table Table 2 1 Example of resolution for the 0 to 10 V measuring range of a SIMATIC S7 module Value increments Voltage measuring range Decimal 0 to 10 V Range 32767 11 852 V Overflow 32512 32511 11 759 V Overrange 27649 27648 10 0 V Rated range 20736 7 5 V 1 361 7 μV 0 0 V not relevant for this ex...

Page 2046: ...g and response times of analog output modules Page 52 The figure below shows the rated range the overrange and overflow of a unipolar measuring range The signal leaves the rated range briefly during the settling phase Analog output signal tE Settling time of the signal to the setpoint t1 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the signal t2 Signal has settle...

Page 2047: ...ntages derived in this way also represent the theoretical best case values for the operational limit With a resolution of 8 bits and a measuring range of 0 to 10 V it is therefore impossible to achieve a precision of more than 0 4 In practical life this value would be clearly worse depending on the implemented circuitry Calculating the maximum measuring error The maximum measuring error of a 0 to ...

Page 2048: ...ith a full tank The analog module converts the voltage range from 10 V to 10 V into the value range 27648 to 27648 and converts this range into the original quantity of 0 to 500 liters with the SCALE program block Figure 2 5 Scaling in the SCALE program block The analog value at input IN is read directly by the module or is transferred by a data interface in INT format The input LO_LIM is used to ...

Page 2049: ...age Because the tank volume is mapped to the range from 27648 to 27648 increments the measurement of the fill level takes place with twice the resolution Δ as in the unipolar measuring range Note Transducers The prerequisite for a measurement within a bipolar measuring range is that the used transducer supports bipolar measuring ranges Figure 2 6 Bipolar measuring range The measurement of the fill...

Page 2050: ...o an analog output module this module addresses an analog actuator e g modulating valve The actuator is to be addressed at a program value of 0 with the minimum value 10 V or 20 mA and at 100 with the maximum value 10 V or 20 mA Figure 2 8 Unscaling in the UNSCALE program block The value calculated by the program must be transferred in the REAL format IN You use the input LO_LIM to determine the l...

Page 2051: ...n actuator that is to be addressed at a program value of 0 with the minimum value 0 0 V or 0 mA and at 100 27648 with the maximum value 10 V or 20 mA Figure 2 9 Unipolar measuring range The figure below shows the scaling for an actuator that is to be addressed at a program value of 0 27648 with the minimum value 0 10 V or 20 mA and at 100 27648 with the maximum value 10 V or 20 mA Figure 2 10 Bipo...

Page 2052: ... straight line The error is given in the technical data as a percentage of the rated range of the analog module The figure below shows the linearity error of an ADC magnified for better visibility Figure 2 11 Linearity errors Example An error of 1 mV is returned at an input range of 10 V and a linearity error of 0 01 The error is calculated as follows 10 V 0 01 1 mV The linearity error information...

Page 2053: ...riance of individual measurements The smaller the variance the greater the repeat accuracy The repeat accuracy is therefore one of the most important properties of measuring devices In the technical data the repeat accuracy is given as a percentage of the input or output range at 25 C in the steady state Example The specified repeat accuracy for an analog input module as a percentage of the measur...

Page 2054: ...nical specification The worst case configuration ensures that the module will not exceed the specified value within the valid operational range The precision of analog input or output modules is only part of the precision of the entire measurement section A measurement section usually consists of transducer transmitter transmission line as well as input output module Operational limit The operatio...

Page 2055: ...etical value because a constant ambient temperature of 25 C is rarely maintained in plants For this reason the operational limit always takes priority in terms of the practical selection and assessment of a module Note The operational limit and basic error limit percentages listed in the technical specifications always relate to the maximum possible I O value the measuring range end value in the r...

Page 2056: ...e of 30 C which means that the operational limit applies Technical specifications of the module Operational limit for the voltage output 0 1 The result is an output error of approximately 10 mV 0 1 of 10 V across the rated range of the module For example the output value may range from 2 49 V to 2 51 V at an actual voltage of 2 50 V Note Bipolar measuring ranges The calculation also applies to bip...

Page 2057: ...temperature error of the reference junction temperature compensation function only occurs with thermocouple measurements The temperature error of compensation is added to the actual temperature error if Internal reference junction operating mode is selected The temperature error of compensation is defined in the technical specifications as a percentage of the physical rated range of the analog mod...

Page 2058: ...Interference frequency suppression The conversion time changes depending on the set interference frequency suppression The data sheets of the respective module define this dependency Please note the following when selecting interference frequency suppression The higher the frequency setting the shorter the conversion time Note Line frequency Always select the interference frequency based on the li...

Page 2059: ...h America have electricity networks with a line frequency of 60 Hz Frequencies of 400 Hz are most commonly used in on board networks for airplanes in the aerospace sector and for military applications One reason for this is that engines with a line frequency of 400 Hz can usually be made smaller and lighter As however it is not economic to transport such high frequencies over large distances 400 H...

Page 2060: ...put and output modules if their reference potential is different from the reference potential of the connected sensor or actuator Common mode interference is most likely to occur when analog modules are operated with grounded sensors The size of the overall system means that voltage differences may develop between machine components with grounded sensors and the analog module reference These volta...

Page 2061: ...e voltage coupled between these inputs UCM3 Common mode rejection indicates the extent to which these interference signals can be suppressed It is calculated using the following equation CMR dB 20 log UCM Ua Figure 2 15 Common mode voltage coupled between two inputs If there is common mode voltage UCM the equation is solved for Ua to calculate the measuring error Ua Note The common mode rejection ...

Page 2062: ...uctor Galvanic coupling is given where different circuits influence each other due to common conductor sections e g common ground connection The diagram below shows series mode interference as a voltage source USM connected in series to the actual measuring signal UM The index SM stands for Series Mode Series Mode rejection indicates the extent to which these interference signals are suppressed It...

Page 2063: ...uppression is specified in decibels Example The diagram below shows the measuring error for interference voltages in volts and interference voltage suppression of 0 to 120 dB Figure 2 17 Interference voltage suppression With an interference voltage suppression of 40 dB and an interference voltage of 1 V the measured value is only distorted by 0 01 V Note Interference free design Disturbance variab...

Page 2064: ...potential between two channels and between one channel and analog ground The interference voltage suppression defined in the technical specifications must not be exceeded If the maximum common mode voltage specified for example 10 V is exceeded the analog signal is processed incorrectly Depending on the module used this error may be diagnosed and an error message output The maximum common mode vol...

Page 2065: ... and capacitive or inductive coupling Crosstalk between the channels changes the signal by the value of the amplitude of the crosstalk signal Causes Technically it is not feasible to totally isolate the module channels from environmental conditions This means that it is always possible for leakage currents or disturbance coupling having an interactive effect Figure 2 18 Crosstalk between two chann...

Page 2066: ...to or subtracted from the pending measuring signal and its effect depends on the selected measuring range Channel 0 100 μV 10 V 0 001 Channel 2 100 μV 80 mV 0 125 A voltage of 10 V set at channel 1 distorts the measured value at channel 0 by 0 001 and the measured value at channel 2 by 0 125 The measuring error resulting from crosstalk in this example is therefore 0 001 or 0 125 The basic error li...

Page 2067: ...nalog output module Wire break No supply voltage L Overflow Underflow Common mode error Short circuit Overload Reference junction Diagnostics of the analog module are carried out while the system is in operation on the basis of the current output variables such as current or voltage If the output current or output voltage is no longer sufficient the module will not be able to run reliable diagnost...

Page 2068: ...gured depending on the measurement type Current 4 wire transducer No supply voltage L Wire break 4 to 20 mA Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short circuit S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP ET 200AL ET 200eco PN ET 200pro For ET 200pro the parameters Overflow and Underflow are combined to the parameter Overflow Underflow Diagnostics for encoder supply only Table 2 5 Diagnostics types...

Page 2069: ...s types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type Resistor 3 wire connection No supply voltage L Wire break Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short circuit S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP ET 200AL ET 200eco PN ET 200pro For ET 200pro the parameters Overflow and Underflow are combined to the parameter Overflow Underflow Table 2 8 Configurable diagnostics types of a...

Page 2070: ...pes of an analog input module depending on the measurement type Thermal resistor 3 wire connection No supply voltage L Wire break Overflow Underflow Common mode error Reference junction Short circuit S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP ET 200AL ET 200eco PN ET 200pro For ET 200pro the parameters Overflow and Underflow are combined to the parameter Overflow Underflow Table 2 11 Configurable diagnostics types...

Page 2071: ...gured depending on the measurement type Voltage No supply voltage L Wire break Overflow Underflow Short circuit Overload S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP ET 200eco PN ET 200pro Table 2 14 Diagnostics types of an analog output module to be configured depending on the measurement type Current No supply voltage L Wire break Overflow Underflow Short circuit Overload S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP ET 200eco PN ET ...

Page 2072: ...during system operation In STEP 7 you define the module properties by setting various parameters Depending on the module used you may for example be able to set a current limit parameter at which a wire break is to be reported Figure 2 19 Configuring the wire break current limit for an analog input module in STEP 7 Usually the live zero technique is deployed to detect wire breaks The start of the ...

Page 2073: ...e measuring ranges Table 2 15 Voltage measuring range 10 V of an analog input module Value increments Voltage measuring range Range Decimal 10 V 32767 11 759 V Overflow 32511 11 759 V Overrange 27649 27648 10 0 V Rated range 0 0 V 27648 10 V 27649 Underrange 32512 11 759 V 32768 11 759 V Underflow As of a decimal value of 32512 the value acquired is beyond the overrange and is no longer valid If t...

Page 2074: ... MANA Possible causes Wiring error Environments with EMC disturbance Incorrectly grounded transducers Long line lengths Sensor not connected 2 wire transducer connected to MANA Note With 4 wire transducers a current meter connected in series will result in too great a drop in voltage Potential differences UCM beyond the valid limits may lead to measurement errors and malfunctions If you want to en...

Page 2075: ...ircuit The short circuit current is limited internally in the module The level of short circuit current is specified in the technical data of your analog module Note Overload Please note that overload exposes the modules are exposed to a greater thermal load This can affect the output channels You should therefore avoid continuously running analog output modules in overload Reference junction This...

Page 2076: ...nostics is triggered when the maximum temperature is exceeded at the output and is detected channel by channel The maximum temperature may be exceeded for the following reasons Ambient temperature is too high Output is being operated outside the specification Note Overload Please note that overload exposes the modules to a high thermal load This can affect the output channels You should therefore ...

Page 2077: ...formation by means of the Process image input PII It is referred to as Value status and transferred synchronously with the user data The value status Quality Information QI provides a statement regarding the validity of the input signal A distinction is made between the quality level Good signal valid 1 and Bad signal invalid 0 Note For analog input modules the use of the value status is an altern...

Page 2078: ...C 47 Example Enabling the value status of an analog input module To enable the value status of an analog input module follow these steps Select the required analog module in STEP 7 Select AI configuration in the Properties tab of the analog module Click the Value status button Figure 2 20 Enabling the value status in STEP 7 ...

Page 2079: ... module for example the current signal state is entered in the process image and the value status of the signal is set to invalid To trigger an indicator light in case of an error for example evaluate the value status in the user program Diagnostics alarms and value status If you configure analog modules in a third party product with the help of a GSD file and the diagnostics alarms are not evalua...

Page 2080: ...ak monitoring The conversion time of the channel is derived from the total of the following measurement variables Measurement variable Time in ms Basic conversion time 27 Processing time for RTD resistance 6000 Ω 4 Processing time for wire break monitoring in the RTD resistance and thermocouple areas 9 Conversion time of the channel 40 Conversion time of the analog output channels The conversion t...

Page 2081: ... 2014 A5E03461439 AC Conversion time for high speed analog modules High Speed analog modules HS modules are designed for faster processing of signals HS modules offer fewer diagnostics and measurement types than standard modules ST modules You can find more information on HS modules in the section High Speed analog modules Page 113 ...

Page 2082: ...e analog module is derived from the total conversion time of all activated analog channels of the module STEP 7 provides the option of deactivating unused analog channels to reduce the cycle time The figure below gives an overview of the factors that determine the cycle time of an n channel analog module Figure 2 21 Cycle time of an analog module with multiplex conversion Parallel measured value a...

Page 2083: ... the value to be output at the analog output being reached with a residual error of 1 The response time tA is the sum of application time tX conversion time tW and settling time tE tA tX tW tE Settling and response times of analog output modules tA Response time tX Application time tZ Module cycle time tW Conversion time tE Settling time t1 New digital output value is available in the internal mem...

Page 2084: ...113 tX Application time t1 New digital output value is available in the internal memory of the module t2 Module activates the digital output value and starts conversion t3 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the analog signal Figure 2 23 Application of the output values Conversion time The conversion time of an output channel starts with the transfer of ...

Page 2085: ...signal 4 none weak medium strong or more levels of smoothing can be configured by the user depending on the module used The level determines the number of analog values from which the mean value is generated The greater the smoothing factor the better the filtering Figure 2 24 Selecting the smoothing level in STEP 7 Smoothing method A smoothing algorithm is applied to a configurable number of meas...

Page 2086: ...elow shows the number of module cycles k it takes for each smoothing level setting for the smoothed analog value to reach approximately 100 after a step response This specification is valid for all signal changes at the analog input No smoothing k 1 Weak smoothing k 4 Medium smoothing k 16 Strong smoothing k 32 Figure 2 25 Linear smoothing with four smoothing levels ...

Page 2087: ...l 06 2014 A5E03461439 AC Example 2 Exponential smoothing The diagram below shows the step response of the smoothing factor for different numbers of module cycles No smoothing k 1 Weak smoothing k 4 Medium smoothing k 16 Strong smoothing k 32 Figure 2 26 Exponential smoothing with four smoothing levels ...

Page 2088: ...ent of at least 4 mA Additional information on connecting 2 wire transducers to analog input modules can be found in the section Wiring current transducers Page 72 Burden The burden indicates how great the external resistance in a current loop may be If the external resistance is greater than the specified burden the 2 wire transducer supply voltage is too low The burden consists of the resistance...

Page 2089: ...8 5 V Using Ohm s Law you can calculate the resistance of the transducer used R2DMU for a current of 20 mA With a supply voltage of at least 8 5 V the transducer has a resistance of 425 Ω The resistance is less than 820 Ω You can therefore connect the transducer to the analog input module AI without exceeding the maximum burden 2 wire transducers UV Terminal for feed voltage at the channel I Termi...

Page 2090: ...e of additional devices connected 395 Ω The resistance of the measuring instrument may therefore not exceed 395 Ω 2 wire transducers Digital multimeter Zener diode UV Terminal for feed voltage at the channel I Terminal for current input Umin Voltage drop at 2 wire transducer RMess Resistance at measuring instrument UMess Voltage drop at the measuring instrument Figure 2 28 Connecting a transducer ...

Page 2091: ...xed point numbers in twos complement This leads to the following conditions Table 3 1 Representation of analog values Resolution Analog value Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Significance of the bits S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Sign The sign S of the analog value is always set in bit 15 0 1 Resolution less than 16 bits The analog value is left aligned in the...

Page 2092: ...e unit 20 1 The module with 13 bit resolution is capable of incrementing the values in steps of 8 units 23 8 Table 3 2 Example Bit pattern of a 16 bit and 13 bit analog value Resolution Analog value Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 16 bit S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 13 bit S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 0 0 0 S sign Note For information on the resolutio...

Page 2093: ...1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated range 1 0 003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 27648 100 000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27649 100 004 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Under range 32512 117 593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32768 117 593 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Underflow Table 3 4 Unipolar input r...

Page 2094: ... 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum output value 32511 117 589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over range 27649 100 004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100 000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated range 1 0 003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 003617 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 27648 100 000 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 27649 100 004 1...

Page 2095: ...imum output value 32511 117 589 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Over range 27649 100 004 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 27648 100 000 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rated range 1 0 003617 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Minimum output value When values 32511 are specified the output value is limited to 117 589 or 0 0...

Page 2096: ...You can wire the following transducers to the analog input modules depending on the type of measurement Voltage transducers Current transducers 2 wire transducers 4 wire transducers Resistance transducers 4 wire connection 3 wire connection 2 wire connection Thermocouples Isolated transducers and non isolated transducers Transducers are available in various models Isolated transducers are not conn...

Page 2097: ...input channel n COMP COMP Compensation input IComp IComp Current output for compensation UV Feed voltage at channel the connection can be used for 2 wire transducer 2DMU or with ET 200eco PN and ET 200pro for 2 4 wire transducer UCM Potential difference between the reference points of the measuring inputs the analog ground MANA UISO Potential difference between the reference points of the measurin...

Page 2098: ... is not exceeded install an equipotential bonding cable between the terminal MANA and the central grounding point Limited potential difference UCM common mode Always verify that the admissible potential difference UCM between the reference point of the measuring inputs and the analog groundMANA is not exceeded Potential differences UCM may be caused by Environments with EMC disturbance Use of grou...

Page 2099: ... inputs with MANA connection Analog value processing 68 Function Manual 06 2014 A5E03461439 AC Equipotential bonding cable Grounding bus cable Central ground Figure 4 1 Example Reference potential for analog input modules with MANA connection ...

Page 2100: ...equipotential bonding cable between the reference points of the measuring inputs and the central grounding point Limited potential difference UCM common mode Always ensure that the permitted potential difference UCM between the reference points of the measuring inputs is not exceeded Potential differences UCM may be caused by Environments with EMC disturbance Use of grounded transducers Use of lon...

Page 2101: ...nection Analog value processing 70 Function Manual 06 2014 A5E03461439 AC Equipotential bonding cable not for 2 wire and resistance transducers Grounding bus cable Central ground Figure 4 2 Example Reference potential for analog input modules without MANA connection ...

Page 2102: ...want to ensure that the permitted value UCM is not exceeded install equipotential bonding cables to connect the reference points of the measuring inputs to the analog ground MANA or with ET 200eco PN and ET 200pro the reference points of the measuring inputs to the ground Equipotential bonding cable only relevant to modules with MANA connection Figure 4 3 Example Wiring voltage transducers to an a...

Page 2103: ...ent The 2 wire transducer is wired to the short circuit proof supply voltage at the terminals of the analog input module The transducer is therefore frequently also called a passive transducer Its simple wiring means that the 2 wire transducer is frequently used in industrial environments If you use this type of connection you will need to set the Current 2 wire transducer measurement type in STEP...

Page 2104: ...d the analog circuit will be removed 2 wire transducers 2WT Equipotential bonding cable only relevant to modules with MANA connection Figure 4 5 Example Wiring 2 wire transducers to an analog input for 4 wire transducers Wiring and connecting 4 wire transducers 4 wire transducers provide terminals for connecting a separate supply voltage They are powered with an external supply and are frequently ...

Page 2105: ...ce and therefore achieve greater accuracy compared to measurements with 2 wire connection Measurements with two wire connection always acquire line resistance in addition to the actual resistance you must therefore allow for a significant loss of precision in the measuring results The figures below give some connection examples 4 wire connection of a thermal resistor The voltage at the thermal res...

Page 2106: ...xample 3 wire connection of thermal resistor to an analog input module 2 wire connection of a thermal resistor When installing a 2 wire device on modules with 4 terminals per channel you will need to insert bridges at the module between M0 and IC0 and between M0 and IC0 as shown in the figure below The line resistance is measured but not compensated As a result of physical limitations this measure...

Page 2107: ... in DIN EN 60584 Observe the maximum temperatures in the manufacturer s specifications Thermocouple connection options There are various different ways to wire thermocouples to an analog input module Directly Using compensating lines With a compensating line to the reference junction connected with a supply line e g copper Thermocouple without compensating line Thermocouple with compensating line ...

Page 2108: ...hey are therefore frequently used in industrial applications Below are some of the criteria to consider when selecting the right thermocouple Temperature range Atmospheric conditions Price Grounded thermocouples In grounded thermocouples a conductive thermocouple wire is attached to the inside of the sensor housing This results in good heat transfer from the sensor housing to the thermocouple meas...

Page 2109: ...ocouple in the temperature range specified by the manufacturer The following table lists the types and material compositions as well as the temperature measuring range of different thermocouples Type Material composition Temperature range B PtRh PtRh 250 to 1820 C C W Re 0 to 2315 C E NiCr CuNi 270 to 1000 C J Fe CuNi 210 to 1200 C K NiCr Ni 270 to 1372 C L Fe CuNi 200 to 900 C N NiCrSi NiSi 270 t...

Page 2110: ...o called measuring point while the free ends of the thermocouple form the reference junction The free ends are interconnected with the evaluation device e g analog input module via insulated wires or cables The different thermocouple types e g K J N are derived from different material composition the same measuring principle is applied to all thermocouples independent on their type Thermal voltage...

Page 2111: ...pair of thermal sensors Thermocouples always acquire a differential temperature which means that the temperature at their free ends reference junction must be known to determine the temperature at the measuring point The thermocouple can be extended with compensating lines from the connection point This allows the reference junction to be located at a specific point for example where the temperatu...

Page 2112: ...ctive module Options of compensating for the reference junction temperature Table 5 1 Compensation options Explanation and use case Compensation options Explanation Use case special feature Internal reference junction Function principle With this type of compensation the temperature of the reference junction is measured using an integrated sensor in the analog module Procedure Connect the thermoco...

Page 2113: ...smitter of group 0 is set up to for the RTD channel Procedure Connect the thermocouple to the supply lines directly at the reference junction or indirectly using compensating lines Wire the supply lines to the corresponding terminals of the module Wire the thermal resistor RTD to the configured reference channel for group 0 of the module The thermal resistor RTD must be positioned in the area of t...

Page 2114: ...s type of compensation the reference junction temperature is measured outside the analog input module You can for example connect a compensating box to the thermocouple for this purpose Procedure Connect the compensating box with the connection module of the analog input module with copper cables see section None or external compensation Page 98 The temperature of the reference junction for this t...

Page 2115: ...l temperature sensor acquires the module temperature and returns a compensating voltage Note that compensation via internal reference junction will not always reach the precision of external compensation Procedure Configuration steps 1 Open the project in STEP 7 2 In the device view select the required analog module and the corresponding channel 3 Select the General tab in the Inspector window of ...

Page 2116: ... thermocouples Wire the thermocouples directly or indirectly via compensating lines to the module inputs Thermocouple without compensating line Thermocouple with compensating line Compensating line same material as thermocouple Internal reference junction Figure 5 3 Example Wiring thermocouples for compensation via internal reference junction ...

Page 2117: ...external thermal resistor RTD Certain modules provide an internal reference channel Procedure Configuration steps 1 Open the project in STEP 7 2 In the device view select the required analog module and the corresponding channel 3 Select the General tab in the Inspector window of the selected module 4 Select the Inputs Measuring area 5 Select the Thermocouple value as Measurement type 6 As Referenc...

Page 2118: ...tion or indirectly using compensating lines Wire the supply lines to the corresponding terminals of the module You may use cables made of any material to wire the thermal resistor to the module terminals Thermocouple Compensating line same material as thermocouple Copper supply cable for example Thermal resistor RTD Reference junction Figure 5 5 Example Wiring thermocouples thermal resistors for c...

Page 2119: ...for this compensation type will be compensated automatically by the temperature value of the reference junction transmitter The reference junction temperature is determined by means of an external thermal resistor RTD Procedure Configuration steps 1 Open the project in STEP 7 2 In the device view select the required analog module and the corresponding channel 3 Select the General tab in the Inspec...

Page 2120: ...log value processing Function Manual 06 2014 A5E03461439 AC 89 6 For the channels you specify as receivers Select the Thermocouple value as Measurement type As Reference junction select the value Reference channel of group 0 Figure 5 7 Receivers Reference channel of group 0 ...

Page 2121: ... reference temperature receivers Connect the thermocouples to the supply lines at the reference junction either directly or with compensating lines Wire the supply lines to the corresponding terminals of the module You may use cables made of any material to wire the thermal resistor to the module terminals Thermocouple Compensating line same material as thermocouple Copper supply cable for example...

Page 2122: ...fixed value Procedure Configuration steps 1 Open the project in STEP 7 2 Select the required analog module in the Device view 3 Select the General tab in the Inspector window of the selected module 4 Select the Inputs Measuring area 5 Select the Thermocouple value as Measurement type 6 As Reference junction select the value Fixed reference temperature 7 Specify the temperature of the reference jun...

Page 2123: ...or thermocouples provided the temperature of the module is kept at a fixed reference temperature 20 C for example by installing it in an air conditioned switch cabinet The reference junction is in the module Thermocouple without compensating line Thermocouple via compensating line Compensating line same material as thermocouple Figure 5 10 Example 1 Connecting a thermocouple to an analog module fo...

Page 2124: ...ocouples provided the temperature of the reference junction outside the module is kept at a fixed reference temperature 20 C Thermocouple with compensating line and supply line Compensating line same material as thermocouple Reference junction Copper supply cable for example Figure 5 11 Example 2 Connecting a thermocouple to an analog module for compensation with fixed reference temperature ...

Page 2125: ...the temperature value from any other module of the station The reference junction temperature is transferred via data records using the instruction WRREC SFB 53 The structure of the data records is detailed in the device manual for each module Requirement STEP 7 project with the following contents User program with WRREC SFB 53 instruction for transferring the data records with reference temperatu...

Page 2126: ...le TC Configuration steps 1 Open the project in STEP 7 2 In the device view select the required analog module and the corresponding channel 3 Select the General tab in the Inspector window of the selected module 4 Select the Inputs Measuring area 5 Select the Thermocouple value as Measurement type 6 As Reference junction select the value Dynamic reference temperature Figure 5 12 Dynamic reference ...

Page 2127: ...rmal resistor RTD Configuration steps 1 Open the project in STEP 7 2 In the device view select the required analog module and the corresponding channel 3 Select the General tab in the Inspector window of the selected module 4 Select the Inputs Measuring area 5 Select the Thermal resistor 4 wire connection value as Measurement type Figure 5 13 Settings for thermal resistor RTD type of measurement ...

Page 2128: ...rature In this case the temperature is acquired at the reference junction by means of a thermal resistor RTD This reference junction temperature determined in this way is transferred to the analog module with thermocouple via data records with the WRREC instruction Thermocouple Compensating line same material as thermocouple Copper supply cable for example Thermal resistor RTD Reference junction F...

Page 2129: ...s for the ends of the compensating line of the thermocouple form the reference junction If the actual comparison temperature deviates from the compensation temperature the temperature dependent bridge resistor changes A positive or negative compensation voltage is generated and added to the thermal voltage Note Thermocouples of type B do not require a compensating box Procedure Configuration steps...

Page 2130: ...r e g by means of a grounded shielding winding Each channel can use its own thermocouple type supported by the analog module regardless of the other channels A separate compensating box is required for each channel Connection example None or external compensation Connect the compensating box with the connection module of the analog input module using copper cables Copper cables Compensating box pe...

Page 2131: ...tor The resistance measurement is only permitted at the X1 circular socket channel 0 All of the module s channels with this type of compensation receive the same reference junction temperature Procedure Configuration steps 1 Open the project in STEP 7 2 Select the required analog module in the Device view 3 Select the Inputs tab in the Inspector window of the selected module 4 Select the Thermocou...

Page 2132: ...the reference junction with copper cables Connecting additional thermocouples You can connect additional thermocouples to the circular sockets X2 to X4 on the CM IO 4 x M12 of the 4 AI TC High Feature The temperature of reference junction collected by measuring the resistance value at the X1 circular socket applies to all channels of the module that you have selected for this type of compensation ...

Page 2133: ...e junction with external thermal resistor Pt1000 M12 connector only at X1 circular socket External Pt1000 α 0 003851 in the area of the reference junction with copper cables at terminals 1 and 3 The comparison value of the external Pt1000 at circular socket X1 also applies to thermocouples at X2 X3 and X4 Thermocouple Figure 5 19 Connection example RTD 0 as reference junction with external Pt1000 ...

Page 2134: ...n etc please refer to the function manual Configuring interference free controllers http support automation siemens com WW view en 59193566 Abbreviations used in the figures Key to the abbreviations in the figures below AQ Analog output module M Ground connection L Supply voltage connection Sn Sn Sense line channel n QVn QVn Voltage output channel n QIn QIn Current output channel n MANA Reference ...

Page 2135: ...lways verify that the admissible potential difference UISO between the reference point of the analog ground MANA and the central ground is not exceeded Potential difference UISO may be caused by Maximum line lengths exceeded If you want to ensure the maximum value UISO is not exceeded wire terminal MANA and the central ground with an equipotential bonding cable Load on the voltage output Equipoten...

Page 2136: ...ximum potential difference UISO between the reference points of the analog output circuits and the central ground is not exceeded Potential difference UISO may be caused by Maximum line lengths exceeded If you want to ensure the maximum value UISO is not exceeded interconnect each analog output circuit with the central ground using an equipotential bonding cable Load on the voltage output Equipote...

Page 2137: ...y small voltages or currents The calibration compensates for influences on the measuring result by cables and or temperature The calibration collects the new values and saves them retentively on the module But the calibration values determined prior to delivery at the plant are not lost You can return to these original calibration values at any time Note The calibration saves the calibration value...

Page 2138: ...1 2 Calibrating analog modules Manual calibration The following requirements must be met to start manual calibration An online connection exists between STEP 7 the respective CPU and the analog module to be calibrated You have opened the Online Diagnostics view for the selected analog module from the shortcut menu of the project and you are now in the Functions Calibration area The configuration r...

Page 2139: ...user calibration values Measurement type Information about the selected measurement type Measuring range Currently configured measuring range of the selected channel Gain Currently effective gain correction of the analog digital converter Offset Currently effective offset correction of the analog digital converter Figure 7 1 Calibration table To start the calibration follow these steps 1 Select th...

Page 2140: ...value status is enabled the value status of the signal is set to invalid for the duration of the calibration You must provide a voltage and or temperature during a user calibration To do so use the corresponding external wiring and an external voltage temperature transducer The field Command includes numbers of pins to which you can connect the calibration stimulus The first pin number identifies ...

Page 2141: ... during processing of a calibration step the error is displayed here and calibration of the channel is aborted All calibration values recorded up to this point are deleted The calibration values that were in effect prior to the start of the user calibration are effective once again Note Calibrators If the Wire break diagnostics is activated for analog input modules a test current is applied to the...

Page 2142: ...r the selected analog module from the shortcut menu of the project and you are now in the Functions Calibration area The associated CPU is online A calibration is currently running on the analog module Procedure Click the Cancel button to cancel an ongoing calibration Result The active calibration is canceled The channel to be calibrated will then have the same settings as before the start of cali...

Page 2143: ...CPU is online Procedure Proceed as follows to reset the channel of an analog module to factory settings 1 In the overview table select the line of the channel to be calibrated 2 Click the Set to factory settings button Result The factory settings of the channel are restored Note When you reset the current channel to the factory settings the original calibration values that were saved in the delive...

Page 2144: ...interrupt organization blocks Additional information on the various organizational blocks can be found in the STEP 7 online help Isochronous mode Isochronous mode refers to synchronous coupling Of signal acquisition and output via the distributed I O Of signal transmission via PROFIBUS or PROFINET Of program processing with the constant bus cycle time of PROFIBUS or PROFINET The result is a system...

Page 2145: ...ion in analog input or analog output modules requires an isochronous configuration With analog input modules the set send clock is divided into time equidistant sub cycles The send clocks can be subdivided into 2 to 16 sub cycles Each sub cycle reads in a measured value The read in measured values of a data cycle are copied to the IM in the next send clock and are then available to the processing ...

Page 2146: ...channels without having to shorten the send clock for the entire S7 station at the same time The subdivision of the send clock into time equidistant sub cycles therefore enables an even faster signal processing speed Example In practice the use of oversampling makes sense when the isochronous system works with only one specific specific send clock for example 1 ms due to the modules used and when ...

Page 2147: ...time intervals tZ t1 t2 t3 t4 Synchronization time for all analog input modules in isochronous mode and simultaneously time of the converted input signal at the terminal in this cycle Digitalized input signal is transferred to the backplane bus tZ Cycle time t1 Time between cycle start and synchronization t2 Hardware related runtime up to the analog digital converter t3 Processing time of digitali...

Page 2148: ... practice a measurement with an oscilloscope is required for a precise measurement of the settling time The settling time may exceed the actual end of the cycle due to very short cycle times and very high capacitive loads The cycle time is made up of the following time intervals tZ t1 t2 t3 Output data is available in digital form in the module Synchronization time for all analog output modules in...

Page 2149: ...ous data transmission The following example shows the use of isochronous mode within the production process of camshafts Precise measurements must be made at several measuring points for quality assurance Measured values Camshaft Figure 8 5 Measuring of camshafts By using the system property isochronous mode and the associated simultaneous measured value acquisition measurement can be performed co...

Page 2150: ...y for position potentiometers Because the measured signal is converted within a short time there is a risk of incorrect measurements in case of faulty signals The analog inputs working with the instantaneous value conversion method cannot detect if the sampled signal value is the target signal or an overlaying disturbing pulse They always convert the instantaneously detected value This means the p...

Page 2151: ...lso be carefully designed with these analog inputs the requirements are much less than those for analog inputs with instantaneous value conversion due to their slower signal acquisition that is basically immune to interference Figure 8 6 While an interference directly influences the value that is supplied to the application with instantaneous value encryption its influence is negligible for the in...

Page 2152: ...wing rules apply to the wiring of HS modules with sensors and actuators Keep the cables as short as possible Use shielded and twisted pair cables Low impedance connection of the cable shield at the respective shield supports Short cable loop between shield support and terminal connection Note Interference free design Make sure that you pay close attention to the notes listed in the function manual...

Page 2153: ...put signal to overshoot Inductive loads result in a delayed current increase due to remagnetization and therefore also a shorter rise time The figure below shows the output signal with no small medium and high capacitive load Reference curve of a signal with no small load capacity Signal with a load capacity of 47 nF Signal with a load capacity of 100 nF tE Settling time t1 Module ends conversion ...

Page 2154: ...l medium and long cable length The overshoot of the input signal increases with the length of the cable and therefore the time until it reaches the setpoint tE Settling time t1 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the analog signal t2 The signal running through a cable with short length has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached re...

Page 2155: ...e figure below shows the effect of the height of the value jump between different output values on the settling time for analog output modules The dotted line indicates the time when the signal has reached the setpoint The higher the value jump the later the signal reaches the setpoint Figure 8 9 Settling time of five different analog signals with different value jumps ...

Page 2156: ...pensation none external 98 Compensation with Dynamic reference temperature 94 fixed reference temperature 91 internal reference junction 84 RDT 0 100 Reference channel of the module 86 conversion analog to digital 21 51 digital to analog 21 Conversion analog to digital 11 Digital to analog 11 Conversion time 27 49 53 coupling capacitive 34 galvanic 31 inductive 31 34 CPU 11 60 67 69 Crosstalk 34 C...

Page 2157: ...ange 42 Rated range 42 Underflow 42 Underrange 42 O Online catalog 4 Operating principle of thermocouples 80 Operational limit 15 23 P Pressure 9 PROFIBUS 113 PROFINET 113 Q Quality Information QI 46 R Reference channel of group 0 Overview 82 Reference channel of the module Overview 82 Reference junction 79 Reference junction temperature 81 Reference potential 69 104 Repeat accuracy 22 Representat...

Page 2158: ...2 wire 57 72 4 wire 73 Connecting 65 Current transducers 10 57 72 Resistance transducers 10 Thermal resistor 74 Thermocouples 10 27 76 79 Voltage transducers 10 71 Wiring 72 Types of diagnostics 36 Common mode error 43 No supply voltage 41 Overflow underflow 42 Overload 45 Reference channel error 43 Reference junction 44 Short circuit 44 Wire break 41 U Unscaling 19 V Value status 46 Variables Ana...

Page 2159: ...utput with Time based IO SIMATIC High precision input output with Time based IO Function Manual 11 2019 A5E33454822 AC Preface Documentation guide 1 Time based IO basics 2 Configuring and parameter assignment 3 Programming 4 ...

Page 2160: ...ly by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens prod...

Page 2161: ...wledge of the industrial automation system SIMATIC Proficiency with STEP 7 TIA Portal Knowledge about isochronous mode Scope of the documentation The following documentation is valid for all components of the S7 1500 ET 200MP and ET 200SP systems that support the Time based IO technology Conventions The following terms are used as synonyms in this documentation TIO module This term is used as syno...

Page 2162: ...on on isochronous mode is available in the Isochronous mode http support automation siemens com WW view en 49948856 and PROFINET with STEP 7 https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109755401 manuals Siemens Industry Online Support You can find current information on the following topics quickly and easily here Product support All the information and extensive know how on your product tech...

Page 2163: ...oducts and solutions only form one element of such a concept Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants systems machines and networks Such systems machines and components should only be connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and only when appropriate security measures e g firewalls and or network segm...

Page 2164: ...rements 18 2 5 Configuration software requirements 19 2 6 Technical implementation 20 3 Configuring and parameter assignment 24 3 1 Requirements 24 3 2 Settings for Time based IO 25 4 Programming 27 4 1 Overview of instructions 27 4 2 Programming of Time based IO 28 4 3 Time based IO 31 4 3 1 TIO_SYNC Synchronizing TIO modules 31 4 3 2 TIO_DI Reading in edges at digital input and associated time s...

Page 2165: ... you easier access to the specific information you require Basic information System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration installation wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems Use the corresponding operating instructions for the CPUs 1513 1516pro 2 PN The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and progra...

Page 2166: ...s ww en view 86140384 ET 200SP https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 84133942 ET 200AL https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 95242965 mySupport With mySupport your personal workspace you make the best out of your Industry Online Support In mySupport you can save filters favorites and tags request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area In addition...

Page 2167: ...he Internet https support industry siemens com sc ww en sc 2054 TIA Selection Tool With the TIA Selection Tool you can select configure and order devices for Totally Integrated Automation TIA This tool is the successor of the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines the known configurators for automation technology into one tool With the TIA Selection Tool you can generate a complete order list from yo...

Page 2168: ... en view 67460624 SINETPLAN SINETPLAN the Siemens Network Planner supports you in planning automation systems and networks based on PROFINET The tool facilitates professional and predictive dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage In addition SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network resources optimally and to plan reser...

Page 2169: ...ng of the SIMATIC S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro 2 PN The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming Device information Product manuals contain a compact description of the module specific information such as properties terminal diagrams characteristics and technical specifications General informatio...

Page 2170: ...In mySupport you can save filters favorites and tags request CAx data and compile your personal library in the Documentation area In addition your data is already filled out in support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time You must register once to use the full functionality of mySupport You can find mySupport on the Internet Application examples The application...

Page 2171: ...ogy Defined response times An output signal that responds with a precise delay time that is independent of the application cycle can be output by adding a specified time to the time stamp of an edge at the digital input Length measurement The length of a product passing by can be determined by the difference between two input time stamps and an associated travel speed Cam controller The ongoing mo...

Page 2172: ...r of the inputs outputs depends on the following factors for standard technology CPU program program structure Bus cycle times fieldbus backplane bus Cycle time of the I O modules Internal cycle time of sensors actuators A deterministic statement as to when an input event e g sensor signal has taken place when the output event has an effect on the input event e g output switches will become inaccu...

Page 2173: ...Time based IO Independence and focus of Time based IO The shared time basis TIO_Time of all components involved is the basis for Time based IO By using TIO_Time the accuracy of the output with Time based IO does not depend on CPU program program structure Bus cycle times fieldbus backplane bus Cycle time of the I O modules The focus of Time based IO is not on the I O response time but on the predi...

Page 2174: ...he TIO modules and indicates the deviation with which the required response is achieved For Time based IO the accuracy and reproducibility of the response is in the millisecond range Response time In addition to a very high accuracy a minimum response time to an input event can result depending on the configuration The response time is the time between the input event and the required output event...

Page 2175: ...t High precision input output with Time based IO Function Manual 11 2019 A5E33454822 AC 17 2 3 System environment Introduction Possible system configurations with PROFINET for the use of Time based IO are shown below Use with STEP 7 TIA Portal ...

Page 2176: ...sted below You will also find specific modules as an example Requirements Component Properties Examples CPU Isochronous mode PROFINET IO IRT provides defines response time and high precision plant behavior CPU 1511 1 PN ET 200 interface module Supports isochronous mode ET 200SP with IM 155 6 PN HF as of firmware V2 1 ET 200MP with IM 155 5 PN HF I O module TIO module ET 200SP TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V ...

Page 2177: ...above PROFINET IO IRT or isochronous mode on the backplane bus S7 1500 automation system ET 200SP and ET 200MP distributed I O systems TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V STEP 7 TIA Portal online help Additional information on isochronous mode is available in the Isochronous mode http support automation siemens com WW view en 49948856 and PROFINET with STEP 7 https support industry siemens c...

Page 2178: ...s support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109755401 manuals TIO_Time The TIO_Time is the central time basis to which all time stamps refer TIO_Time has the following properties Shared time basis for all TIO modules which are synchronized with the TIO instruction TIO_SYNC The time starts counting again with each CPU startup The TIO_Time has data type LTime e g LT 14s830ms652us315ns All valid tim...

Page 2179: ...ol technology objects or with TIO instructions If you call the TIO instructions in an MC PostServo type OB you need to use the IPO model and also cannot use any reduction ratio Calling TIO instructions in an OB of the type MC PostServo with reduction ratio MC Servo can result in incorrect calculation of time stamps Modes for updating the process image In isochronous mode you can influence the orde...

Page 2180: ...ss image partition of the inputs in the user program by calling the SYNC_PI system instruction Processing is started next for example calculation of the time stamps The corresponding process image partition of the outputs is updated at the end of the user program in the CPU by SYNC_PO Properties of the IPO model Supports shorter response times The application cycle must not be greater than the sen...

Page 2181: ... network cycle TO Next the corresponding process image partition of the inputs is updated in the CPU by SYNC_PI Processing starts after the data is transmitted for example calculation of the time stamps Properties of the OIP model The response time is longer than with the IPO model It is one application cycle longer than permitted by the send clock This gives the application more time than with th...

Page 2182: ...n more about the standard configuration for Time based IO Requirements In STEP 7 TIA Portal The project has been created The CPU has been created and the parameters are assigned Automation system and modules have been created and the parameters have been assigned When using an ET 200 station The connection has been created and the parameters are assigned via PROFINET A Synchronous Cycle or MC Post...

Page 2183: ...ens com cs ww en view 109755401 PROFINET function manual http support automation siemens com WW view en 49948856 Manual Technology Module TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V http support automation siemens com WW view en 95153313 Manual Technology Module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V http support automation siemens com WW view en 95153951 Online help in the STEP 7 TIA Portal information system ET 200 station TIO module P...

Page 2184: ...lowing setting is suitable as a starting point Send clock 2 ms Application cycle 4 ms Assignment to the process image partition PIP1 PIP_Mode 0 OIP model FAQ For more information see the following FAQs in the Siemens Industry Online Support Entry ID 109738186 https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109738186 Entry ID 109736374 https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109736374 See...

Page 2185: ...applications For special applications such as cam controllers there are also separate technology objects for example TO_CamOutput Note The TIO instructions use the time stamp functions of the TIO modules The other functions of the TIO modules can be used independently of the TIO instructions in applications TIO instructions Instruction Short description TIO_SYNC Synchronizes the TIO modules and pr...

Page 2186: ... assigned to an isochronous network The TIO modules are assigned to a shared process image partition The process image partition is assigned to an isochronous OB The TIO modules are configured for use with instructions from the Time based IO library Additional information on configuration of Time based IO is available in the section Settings for Time based IO Page 25 Procedure 1 Create a TIO instr...

Page 2187: ... instructions for read in output required for your application in the isochronous OB 6 At the TIO instructions for read in output interconnect in each case the input output TIO_SYNC_Data with the same name output at the TIO_SYNC 7 At the TIO instructions for read in output assign parameters for the input parameters HWID see Properties System constants in hardware configuration and Channel The Time...

Page 2188: ...ther OB 9 If TIO_SYNC does not automatically read out the send clock Define the send clock manually e g in OB100 10 Compile and download the entire project to the CPU Result You have completed programming the use of Time based IO FAQ For more information see the following FAQs in the Siemens Industry Online Support Entry ID 109738186 https support industry siemens com cs ww en view 109738186 Entry...

Page 2189: ...e You have several options for handling the optional parameters SendClock AppCycleFactor and ToTimes SendClock AppCycleFactor and ToTimes can be read in automatically each time the system is started This results in a time delay during startup but the values are always consistent Automatically read in SendClock AppCycleFactor and ToTimes at each startup and apply the read in values as set values du...

Page 2190: ...S7 1500 HWID_1 HWID_8 Input HW_IO 65535 Hardware identifier for TIO module from hardware configuration PIP_Mode Input PIP 0 Mode for the data update 0 OIP model with internal update of the process image by SYNC_PO and SYNC_PI 1 OIP model without internal update of the process image 2 IPO model without internal update of the process image PIP_PART Input USInt 1 Only relevant if PIP_Mode 0 Number of...

Page 2191: ...e read in automatically The application cycle TAPP is calculated as follows TAPP AppCycleFactor SendClock ToTimes Static LTime array 1 8 LT 0ns To for each TIO module Time for output of isochronous output data Checked once at startup of the CPU The IPO model PIP_Mode 2 provides the shortest response times but it also places the highest demands on system performance Processing of all TIO instructio...

Page 2192: ...d in a Synchronous Cycle or MC PostServo OB 10020000 The read cycle time of the isochronous OB is invalid LT 0ms or negative The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB Correct the value of the cycle time Make sure that TIO_SYNC is called in a Synchronous Cycle or MC PostServo OB 10030000 The TIO_SYNC instruction is not called in an isochronous OB The instruction can only ...

Page 2193: ...with this hardware identifier available 100E0000 HWID_6 is not a valid hardware identifier Possible cause No module with this hardware identifier available 100F0000 HWID_7 is not a valid hardware identifier Possible cause No module with this hardware identifier available 10100000 HWID_8 is not a valid hardware identifier Possible cause No module with this hardware identifier available 10110000 The...

Page 2194: ...configuration Checking TIO_SYNC_Data ERROR Is an error present at TIO_SYNC Checking TIO_SYNC_Data TO_TIMES for plausibility 0 ms to 4 ms Checking to see whether the OB is isochronous If startup takes place without errors the instruction changes to normal operation In the event of an error the instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error message Functional description In n...

Page 2195: ...g edge order depending on occurrence TAPP Application cycle Rn Specified times of a positive DI edge Fn Specified times of a falling DI edge The module can count a maximum of seven edges per application cycle LEC 7 means therefore that seven or more edges have been counted Reaction to error The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly In the event of an error the cause of ...

Page 2196: ... this parameter is inverted as well TimeStampRE Output LTime LT 0ns Time stamp Time at which a positive edge was detected Exception EdgeSel 2 Time at which a falling edge has been detected if multiple falling edges have occurred during the application cycle TimeStampFE Output LTime LT 0ns Time stamp Time at which a falling edge was detected Exception EdgeSel 1 Time at which a rising edge has been ...

Page 2197: ...lse Error True An error has occurred For detailed information see Status parameter Error is reset as soon as the error is corrected TIO_SYNC _Data Input InOut TIO_ SYNC_ Data System time provided for the TIO instructions of the TIO modules by the TIO_SYNC instruction See UDT TIO_SYNC_Data Page 58 Connect this input parameter with the TIO_SYNC_Data output parameter of the TIO_SYNC instruction Check...

Page 2198: ... the permitted range depending on addressed module and channel configuration Correct the value at the Channel input parameter 10020000 The TIO_DI instruction is not called in an isochronous OB The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB Make sure that TIO_DI is called in a Synchronous Cycle or MC PostServo OB 10030000 An error occurred when reading the HWID input parameter...

Page 2199: ...cycle time of the isochronous OB is outside the permitted range of 0 TAPP 16 ms and is therefore invalid The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB Correct the cycle time Make sure that TIO_DI is called in a Synchronous Cycle or MC PostServo OB 100A0000 The time TO of the TIO model stored in TIO_SYNC_Data is outside the permissible range of 0 To 4 ms Check the instruction...

Page 2200: ...the send clock x0130000 MC Servo OB91 is not isochronous to the bus cycle time Correct the value of the cycle time of the MC Servo to the value of the bus cycle time Note Calling TIO instructions in an OB of the type MC PostServo with reduction ratio MC Servo can result in incorrect calculation of time stamps 10140000 The configured value at the HWID input parameter is not present in the structure...

Page 2201: ...dule and channel configuration Checking TIO_SYNC_Data ERROR Is an error present at TIO_SYNC Checking TIO_SYNC_Data TO_TIMES for plausibility 0 ms to 4 ms Checking to see whether the OB is isochronous If startup takes place without errors the instruction changes to normal operation In the event of an error the instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error message Functional...

Page 2202: ...that is configured as an edge triggered enable for another channel Example For a TIO module TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V the following is configured in the hardware configuration for DQ0 DI0 Configuration DQ DI group timer DQ with enable HW enable by DI0 edge triggered DQ0 is not inverted In this case use the instruction TIO_DQ for DQ0 and the instruction TIO_DI_ONCE for DI0 You can control the enable by ...

Page 2203: ...id positive edge at DI0 grants the enable for DQ0 after the start of a read in job 1 Start of enable at positive edge of enable input 2 End of enable when falling edge at REQ If required you can use the time stamps detected by the instruction for your application Reaction to error The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly In the event of an error the cause of the error ...

Page 2204: ...ge 2 Enable at first falling DI edge 3 Enable at first DI edge 4 Enable at first positive DI edge 5 Enable at first falling DI edge EdgeSel can be changed during normal operation DONE Output Bool False DONE True The job was completed without errors BUSY Output Bool False BUSY True The job has not yet been completed Error Output Bool False Error True An error has occurred For detailed information s...

Page 2205: ...es have occurred EdgeSel 3 4 5 The last read in time at which a positive edge was detected LEC Output UInt 0 Counter Number of edges for which no time stamp could be saved The module can count a maximum of seven edges during REQ The counter is reset with the falling edge at REQ TIO_SYNC _Data InOut TIO_SYNC _Data System time provided for the TIO instructions of the TIO modules by the TIO_SYNC inst...

Page 2206: ...rmitted range depending on addressed module and channel configuration Correct the value at the Channel input parameter 10020000 The TIO_DI_ONCE instruction is not called in an isochronous OB The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB Make sure that TIO_DI_ONCE is called in a Synchronous Cycle or MC PostServo OB 10030000 An error occurred when reading the HWID input parame...

Page 2207: ...le time of the isochronous OB is outside the permitted range of 0 TAPP 16 ms and is therefore invalid The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB Correct the cycle time Make sure that TIO_DI_ONCE is called in a Synchronous Cycle or MC PostServo OB 100A0000 The time TO of the TIO model stored in TIO_SYNC_Data is outside the permissible range of 0 To 4 ms Check the instructi...

Page 2208: ...the send clock x0130000 MC Servo OB91 is not isochronous to the bus cycle time Correct the value of the cycle time of the MC Servo to the value of the bus cycle time Note Calling TIO instructions in an OB of the type MC PostServo with reduction ratio MC Servo can result in incorrect calculation of time stamps 10140000 The configured value at the HWID input parameter is not present in the structure...

Page 2209: ...truction changes to normal operation The input parameters REQ Out_Mode TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE can be changed during normal operation In the event of an error the instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error message Functional description The instruction outputs edges time controlled at a digital output during normal operation At the time defined at the TimeStampRE in...

Page 2210: ...tput job is not transferred to the module for the negative edge This means the digital output is not switched in both cases The job is done when the last application cycle is executed before the second output time is reached DONE Status and Error are constantly being updated during the job runtime You can cancel an active output job by changing TimeStampRE or TimeStampFE to an invalid time stamp e...

Page 2211: ...t valid time stamp is used because it was already transferred to the TIO module Note If you specify the same value for TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE the instruction ignores the job and does not output an edge If you specify the value 0 for TimeStampRE or TimeStampFE you can output the respective edge directly at the digital output with the input parameter Out_Mode 3 This gives you the option to impl...

Page 2212: ...e stamp Time when a positive edge is to be output TimeStampFE Input LTime LT 0ns Time stamp Time when a falling edge is to be output StatusDQ Output Bool False Actual status of the digital output If an inversion of the digital output is configured StatusDQ is inverted as well StatusDQ shows the internal state of the digital output independent of the effect of any configured HW enable DONE Output B...

Page 2213: ...ermitted range depending on addressed module and channel configuration Correct the value at the Channel input parameter 10020000 The TIO_DQ instruction is not called in an isochronous OB The instruction can only be used without errors in an isochronous OB Make sure that TIO_DQ is called in an OB of the type Synchronous Cycle or MC PostServo 10030000 An error occurred when reading the HWID input pa...

Page 2214: ...an only be used without errors in an isochronous OB Correct the cycle time Make sure that TIO_DQ is called in a Synchronous Cycle or MC PostServo OB 100A0000 The time TO of the TIO model stored in TIO_SYNC_Data is outside the permissible range of 0 To 4 ms Check the instruction TIO_SYNC 100Bxxxx An error has occurred during execution of the RD_ADDR system function The low word xxxx displays the er...

Page 2215: ...r is outside the valid range of 0 to 3 Correct the value at the Out_Mode input parameter x0130000 MC Servo OB91 is not isochronous to the bus cycle time Correct the value of the cycle time of the MC Servo to the value of the bus cycle time Note Calling TIO instructions in an OB of the type MC PostServo with reduction ratio MC Servo can result in incorrect calculation of time stamps 10140000 The co...

Page 2216: ...hared time basis relative time of the TIO modules PIP_MODE USInt Mode for data update is forwarded by the PIP_Mode input parameter of the TIO_SYNC instruction APP_CYC LTime Application cycle of the MC PostServo or Synchronous Cycle MC PreServo OB SEND_CLOCK LTime Send clock of sync domain is forwarded by the SendClock parameter of the TIO_SYNC instruction SYNC_MODULES HW_IO array 1 8 Hardware iden...

Page 2217: ...P_Mode Default setting 26 Delay time 22 Determinism Predictability Digital input TIO_DI 36 TIO_DI_ONCE 43 Digital output TIO_DQ 51 Dosing Application examples Time based IO E Error codes TIO_DI 40 48 TIO_DQ 55 TIO_SYNC 34 ET 200 18 25 TM Timer DIDQ 18 H Hardware requirements 18 I IPO model Understanding IPO 22 Isochronous communication 20 J Jitter 3 23 L Length measurement Application examples Tim...

Page 2218: ...TIO instructions 21 System environment 17 T TAPP Application cycle Time behavior Standard technology 14 Time based IO 15 Time based IO Setting Time based IO 25 Understanding SIMATIC functions 20 Using the default setting 26 TIO instructions 19 Listing TIO instructions 27 TM Timer DIDQ 19 TIO module 3 19 25 TIO_DI 36 TIO_DI_ONCE 43 TIO_DQ 51 TIO_SYNC 31 Synchronized TIO modules 21 TIO_Time 3 15 27 ...

Page 2219: ..._________ SIMATIC S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP ET 200AL Designing interference free controllers Function Manual 06 2014 A5E03461486 AB Preface Documentation guide 1 Basic information on electromagnetic compatibility 2 Interference free cable routing 3 Cable shielding 4 Equipotential bonding 5 Special measures for interference free operation 6 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection 7 ...

Page 2220: ... by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following WARNING Siemens produc...

Page 2221: ...edge of the rules for installing controllers and switchgear Conventions You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below Note A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation on the handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid Scope of the documentation This documentation ...

Page 2222: ...rnet http mall automation siemens com Security information Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants solutions machines equipment and or networks They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept With this in mind Siemens products and solutions undergo continuous development Siemens recommends strong...

Page 2223: ...Underground cable routing 13 3 6 Bending radii and tensile strength of cables 14 4 Cable shielding 15 4 1 Connecting the cable shielding for S7 1500 and ET 200MP 17 4 2 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200SP 19 4 3 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200AL 20 4 4 Connecting the cable shield for bus cables 21 4 5 Connecting the cable shield for other components 22 5 Equipotential bonding 23 ...

Page 2224: ...ion which supplements this description of designing interference free controllers Table 1 1 Documentation on the subject of designing interference free controllers Topic Documentation Most important contents System description System manual S7 1500 Automation System http support automation siemens com WW vi ew en 59191792 Application planning Installation Wiring Commissioning System manual ET 200S...

Page 2225: ... compatibility describes the ability of an electrical device to function properly in its particular electromagnetic environment Neither the environment itself nor the electrical device are influenced in an unacceptable manner Possible interference Electromagnetic interference can influence an automation system in various ways The most significant interferences and their causes are as follows Elect...

Page 2226: ...network due to converters and third party power supply units Starting motors Potential differences on component enclosures with shared power supply Capacitive coupling Potential difference between conductors Interference coupling due to parallel routing of signal cables Static discharge of the operator Inductive coupling Mutual influencing of current carrying conductor loops The magnetic fields ca...

Page 2227: ...and interference emission The further away from one another cables of different cable categories are installed the lower the mutual influence by capacitive and inductive coupling The following table shows the cable categories into which you can classify your cables accordingly Table 3 1 Cable categories Category A Signal lines to I O modules Bus and data lines for example PROFIBUS PROFINET Lines t...

Page 2228: ...hannels Outside cabinets but inside buildings on separate cable racks with at least 10 cm clearance Category B In separate bundles or cable channels no minimum clearance necessary In common bundles or cable channels Category C Inside cabinets in separate bundles or cable channels Outside cabinets but inside buildings on separate cable racks with at least 10 cm clearance In common bundles or cable ...

Page 2229: ...cables coming into the cabinet from outside parallel to the shield supports 3 3 Cable routing outside cabinets and inside buildings Rule Observe the following rules for proper cable routing outside control cabinets and inside buildings Read the information in section Assigning cables to cable categories Page 9 If you route the cables in metallic cable channels you can rearrange the cable channels ...

Page 2230: ...xes to connect cables coming from outside at the junction to cables inside the building Ground these boxes If a crossing of cables is unavoidable then cross the cables at an angle of 90 if possible in order to keep interference from electrical fields as low as possible Integrate bus cables installed outside of buildings into your lightning and overvoltage concept Lightning protection When you lay ...

Page 2231: ...trikes Protect the cable against mechanical damage by for example using a plastic pipe and or a cable warning tape in the ground approximately 40 cm above the cable Separate the various cable categories in the ground using cable channels for example The following figure shows the arrangement of cable warning tape equipotential bonding and a cable Figure 3 2 Arrangement underground Lightning protec...

Page 2232: ...rn to a heating of the conductor and premature wear of the conductor insulation Use the supplied cable ties to relieve the terminal points on the plugs for the I O modules of the product series SIMATIC S7 1500 and SIMATIC ET 200MP Bending radius If you select too small bending radii when laying cables this will cause the materials to stretch and compress and changes the mechanical structure of the...

Page 2233: ...ntact point Avoid tensile and compression strain on cables with a foil shield This type of strain can damage the foil shield very slightly at the fastening point The result is a reduced shielding effect Shield connection with grounding at both ends Always connect the cable shields to the ground at both ends Low and high frequency interference can be reduced only by connecting both ends of the shie...

Page 2234: ...y high frequency interference will be reduced The following figure shows the capacitive grounding of a cable shield The values indicated in the figure are indicative and will differ from system to system The capacity diverts the high frequency interference This capacity provides high impedance protection for the power frequency 50 or 60 Hz thus preventing equalizing currents via the shield A paral...

Page 2235: ...is located in the module the interference currents which occur are diverted by the connection element to the ground via the module and mounting rail The shield clamp is a pluggable mount for the analog and technology modules The shield clamp allows the low impedance application of cable shields with minimum installation times The following figure shows a front connector with mounted shield clamp a...

Page 2236: ...1486 AB Additional information For additional information on installing the shield clamp and shield terminal refer to the Connecting front connectors chapter in the S7 1500 automation system http support automation siemens com WW view en 59191792 or ET 200MP Distributed I O System http support automation siemens com WW view en 59193214 system manuals ...

Page 2237: ...t and mounting rail to the ground The shield terminal is plugged into a mount of the BaseUnit The shield terminal allows the low impedance application of cable shields with minimum installation times There is no need for the otherwise standard connection of the cable shield at the cabinet entry The following figure shows a BaseUnit with shield terminal and shield support BaseUnit of ET 200SP Shiel...

Page 2238: ... and functional ground If you attach an ET 200AL module to a conductive grounded base the lower mounting bolt establishes a conductive connection to the earth potential If you attach an ET 200AL module to a non conductive base connect the lower mounting bolt to the ground wire at the same time The following figure shows how to connect the functional ground via a ground wire using the IM 157 1 PN i...

Page 2239: ...via the module carrier to the ground There is no need for the otherwise standard connection of the shield at the cabinet entry The following figure shows examples of the shield connection for various bus connection elements BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 for ET 200SP PROFIBUSconnector 9 pin D Sub PROFINETconnector RJ45 Shield support of respective connector Figure 4 5 Shield connection for bus connection el...

Page 2240: ...ice Rule Note the following points when handling the shield Always use metal clamps to mount the protective braided shields of the cables The clamps must cover a large area of the shield and provide appropriate contact force Attach the shield to a shielding bus directly after the point where the cable enters the cabinet If you route the shield further to the module do not connect the shield again ...

Page 2241: ...ction against electric shock but also for EMC Main equipotential bonding Main equipotential bonding is required by DIN VDE 0100 Part 410 as a protective measure and is mandatory regardless of other measures for protection against direct and indirect contact Additional local equipotential bonding Additional local equipotential bonding is required if Unfavorable grounding conditions exist between pl...

Page 2242: ...ble near to the signal bus cable This allows the area between the two cables to be kept as small as possible The following figure shows a schematic view of the installation of an equipotential bonding cable Figure 5 1 Installation of equipotential bonding cables Rule Note the following issues regarding equipotential bonding The lower the impedance of an equipotential bonding cable the more effecti...

Page 2243: ...be wired to quenching elements Wire inductances to freewheeling diodes varistors or RC elements for example Table 6 1 Wiring inductances Wiring DC operated inductances Wiring AC operated inductances Programming devices Provide a socket in each cabinet for the supply of the programming devices The sockets are supplied from the distribution board to which the protective conductor for the cabinet is ...

Page 2244: ...ction External lightning protection is part of the lightning protection system and comprises an interception device an arrester and a grounding system In the event of a lightning strike the external lightning protection serves to divert the lightning current safely to the ground This measure most frequently prevents fire damage Internal lightning protection Internal lightning protection is part of...

Page 2245: ... areas that have the same risk potential and can be wired to arresters of the same type Use overvoltage protection devices at the transitions of the lightning protection zones based on the requirements Install the overvoltage protection devices at an appropriate location such as the main or sub distribution board Principle of the lightning protection zone concept The principle behind the lightning...

Page 2246: ...netic field of the lightning LPZ 2 Protected against direct lightning strike Reduced leakage currents and electromagnetic fields compared to LPZ 1 Protected terminal devices LPZ 3 Protected against direct lightning strike Protected area inside the terminal device Local equipotential bonding Effects of the lightning strike Direct lightning strikes occur in the lightning protection zone LPZ 0A Effec...

Page 2247: ...nclude channels structural parts and pipes for water gas and heat for example Electrical systems include power and IT cables and wires for example power cables and bus cables Transitions between lightning protection zones Overvoltage protection must be provided at the transitions between lightning protection zones LPZ Lightning Protection Zone in accordance with DIN EN 62305 The protection levels ...

Page 2248: ...n from lightning protection zone 0A to 1 Seq no Cables for Connection at the 0A interface to 1 with S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP ET 200AL Article number 1 Three phase TN C system DEHNventil DV M TNC 255 951 300 DEHNventil DV M TNC 255 FM 951 305 2 Three phase TN S system DEHNventil DV M TNS 255 951 400 DEHNventil DV M TNS 255 FM 951 405 3 Three phase TT system DEHNventil DV M TT 255 951 310 DEHNventi...

Page 2249: ...e 0B to 1 1 to 2 or 2 to 3 prevents strong electromagnetic coupling and serves as overvoltage protection The following applies to the transition at the interface from lightning protection zone 0B to 1 1 to 2 or 2 to 3 Use of power cables with surge current carrying cable shields or twisted pair IT cables Laying cables and lines In continuous surge current carrying metal pipes that are grounded at ...

Page 2250: ...T system DEHNguard DG M TT 275 952 310 DEHNguard DG M TT 275 FM 952 315 4 AC TN S system DEHNguard DG M TN 275 952 200 DEHNguard DG M TN 275 FM 952 205 5 AC TT system DEHNguard DG M TT 2P 275 952 110 DEHNguard DG M TT 2P 275 FM 952 115 6 Supply UN 24 V DC BLITZDUCTOR VT BVT AVD 24 918422 7 Bus cable MPI DP RS 485 BLITZDUCTOR XT base section BXT BAS 920 300 BLITZDUCTOR XT module BXT ML2 BD HFS 5 92...

Page 2251: ...ace to 1 with S7 1500 ET 200MP ET 200SP ET 200AL Article number 14 Inputs outputs of the fail safe modules 24 V DC DEHNconnect RK DCO RK D 5 24 919 986 Version with remote indication contact Components of the series BLITZDUCTOR XT can be remotely monitored with the appropriate accessories Additional information is available on the Internet http www dehn de Components can be ordered directly from D...

Page 2252: ...255 953 400 DEHNguard DG M TNS 275 952 400 DEHNguard DG MOD 275 952 010 DEHNrail DR M 4P 255 FM IL 25 0 A 953 405 DEHNguard DG M TT 275 952 310 DEHNguard DG MOD 275 952 010 DEHNguard DG MOD NPE 952 050 2 AC TN S TT system DEHNrail DR M 2P 255 953 200 DEHNguard DG M TN 275 952 200 DEHNguard DG MOD 275 952 010 DEHNrail DR M 2P 255 FM IL 25 0 A 953 205 DEHNguard DG M TT 2P 275 952 110 DEHNguard DG MO...

Page 2253: ...s UN 230 V AC DEHNguard DG S 275 952 070 DEHNguard DG S 275 952 070 DEHNguard DG MOD 275 952 010 DEHNguard DG S 275 FM 952 090 N PE arrester in the TT system DEHNgap C S DGP C S 952 030 DEHNgap C S DGP C S FM 952 035 10 Inputs outputs of analog modules e g 4 20 mA 1 10 V DEHNconnect RK DCO RK E 60 IL 0 5 A 919 990 BLITZDUCTOR XT BXT ML4 BD 24 IL 1 A 920 344 BLITZDUCTOR XT base section BXT BAS IL 1...

Page 2254: ... to 3 that you can use for ET 200AL Table 7 5 Components for transition from lightning protection zone 2 to 3 for ET 200AL Seq no Cables for Connection at the interface 2 to 3 with ET 200AL Article number 1 Supply UN 24 V DC BLITZDUCTOR VT BVT AVD 24 VT 918 422 Components of the series BLITZDUCTOR XT can be remotely monitored with the appropriate accessories Additional information is available on ...

Page 2255: ... compatibility 7 Electromagnetic interference 7 EMC 7 I Interference free operation 25 L Lightning protection Equipotential bonding 30 External 26 Internal 26 Overvoltage protection 30 31 Lightning protection zone concept 27 Lightning protection zones 29 Definition 28 O Overvoltage 28 Overvoltage protection Components 30 32 34 T Tensile strain 14 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for SIMATIC ET 200AL

Garmin GMA 340 Supplemental Operation Manual preview
GMA 340
Brand: Garmin Pages: 10
Garage Smart Hard Top Lifter User Manual preview
Hard Top Lifter
Brand: Garage Smart Pages: 20
VENCO VC520 Owner'S Manual preview
VC520
Brand: VENCO Pages: 44
Wabtec R-150 Installation Manual preview
R-150
Brand: Wabtec Pages: 106
WAREMA LONMSE 2M230I Operating And Installation Instructions preview
LONMSE 2M230I
Brand: WAREMA Pages: 4
Measurement Computing CIO-DAS1401/12 User Manual preview
CIO-DAS1401/12
Brand: Measurement Computing Pages: 32
PURE SIROCCO 150 Owner'S Manual preview
SIROCCO 150
Brand: PURE Pages: 88
YASKAWA JAPMC-AN2300-E User Manual preview
JAPMC-AN2300-E
Brand: YASKAWA Pages: 45
RainPoint Smart + User Manual preview
Smart +
Brand: RainPoint Pages: 12
Blue Giant LPJ-44 Operator'S Manual preview
LPJ-44
Brand: Blue Giant Pages: 24
WAGO 750-872/020-000 Manual preview
750-872/020-000
Brand: WAGO Pages: 290
Bticino Terraneo 363211 Installation Manual preview
Terraneo 363211
Brand: Bticino Pages: 24
Dahua DHI-VTO2000-A-2-S User Manual preview
DHI-VTO2000-A-2-S
Brand: Dahua Pages: 42
Gewiss Chorus Digital Vision Technical Manual preview
Chorus Digital Vision
Brand: Gewiss Pages: 104
Multitek RL-B43M User Manual preview
RL-B43M
Brand: Multitek Pages: 4
McIntosh MXA70 Owner'S Manual preview
MXA70
Brand: McIntosh Pages: 32
morse 81-SS Operator'S Manual preview
81-SS
Brand: morse Pages: 5
Supco ATTIC PRO ATP1 Instruction Manual preview
ATTIC PRO ATP1
Brand: Supco Pages: 8

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands